2009 buick enclave owner manual m - owner center … and restraint system head restraints head...

Seats and RestraintSystem ............................... 1-1

Head Restraints .............. 1-2Front Seats .................... 1-3Rear Seats .................... 1-8Safety Belts .................. 1-12Child Restraints ............. 1-25Airbag System .............. 1-45Restraint System

Check ...................... 1-59

Features and Controls ...... 2-1Keys ............................. 2-2Doors and Locks ............ 2-8Windows ...................... 2-14Theft-Deterrent

Systems ................... 2-16Starting and Operating

Your Vehicle ............. 2-20Mirrors ......................... 2-31Object Detection

Systems ................... 2-34OnStar® System ............ 2-41Universal Home Remote

System ..................... 2-44

Storage Areas ............... 2-49Sunroof ........................ 2-54

Instrument Panel ............... 3-1Instrument Panel

Overview .................... 3-4Climate Controls ............ 3-20Warning Lights, Gages,

and Indicators ............ 3-28Driver Information

Center (DIC) ............. 3-42Audio System(s) ............ 3-68

Driving Your Vehicle ......... 4-1Your Driving, the Road,

and the Vehicle ........... 4-1Towing ........................ 4-20

Service and AppearanceCare ................................... 5-1

Service .......................... 5-3Fuel .............................. 5-5Checking Things Under

the Hood .................... 5-9All-Wheel Drive ............. 5-33Headlamp Aiming .......... 5-33

Bulb Replacement ......... 5-33Windshield

Replacement ............. 5-36Windshield Wiper Blade

Replacement ............. 5-36Tires ........................... 5-37Appearance Care .......... 5-80Vehicle Identification ...... 5-87Electrical System ........... 5-87Capacities and

Specifications ............ 5-94

Maintenance Schedule ...... 6-1Maintenance Schedule ..... 6-1

Customer AssistanceInformation ........................ 7-1

Customer Assistanceand Information ........... 7-1

Reporting SafetyDefects ..................... 7-12

Vehicle Data Recordingand Privacy ............... 7-14

Index ................................... i-1

2009 Buick Enclave Owner Manual M

GENERAL MOTORS, GM, the GMEmblem, BUICK, the BUICKEmblem are registered trademarks;and the name ENCLAVE is atrademark of General MotorsCorporation.

This manual includes the latestinformation at the time it wasprinted. GM reserves the right tomake changes after that timewithout further notice. For vehiclesfirst sold in Canada, substitutethe name “General Motors ofCanada Limited” for Buick MotorDivision wherever it appears in thismanual.

This manual describes features thatmay or may not be on yourspecific vehicle.

Read this manual from beginning toend to learn about the vehicle’sfeatures and controls. Pictures,symbols, and words work togetherto explain vehicle operation.

Keep this manual in the vehicle forquick reference.

Canadian OwnersA French language copy of thismanual can be obtained from yourdealer/retailer or from:

Helm, IncorporatedP.O. Box 07130Detroit, MI 48207

1-800-551-4123www.helminc.com

Propriétaires CanadiensOn peut obtenir un exemplaire dece guide en français auprès deconcessionnaire ou à l’adressesuivante:


1-800-551-4123www.helminc.com

IndexTo quickly locate information aboutthe vehicle, use the index in the backof the manual. It is an alphabeticallist of what is in the manual and thepage number where it can be found.

ii Preface

Litho in U.S.A.Part No. 15919283 B Second Printing ©2008 General Motors Corporation. All Rights Reserved.

Safety Warnings andSymbols

A circle with a slash through it is asafety symbol which means “DoNot,” “Do not do this” or “Do not letthis happen.”

A box with the word CAUTION isused to tell about things thatcould hurt you or others if you wereto ignore the warning.

{ CAUTION

These mean there is somethingthat could hurt you or otherpeople.

Cautions tell what the hazard is andwhat to do to avoid or reduce thehazard. Read these cautions.

A notice tells about something thatcan damage the vehicle.

Notice: These mean there issomething that could damageyour vehicle.

Many times, this damage would notbe covered by the vehicle’swarranty, and it could be costly. Thenotice tells what to do to helpavoid the damage.

There are also warning labels onthe vehicle which use the samewords, CAUTION or Notice.

Vehicle SymbolsThe vehicle has components andlabels that use symbols insteadof text. Symbols are shown alongwith the text describing the operationor information relating to a specificcomponent, control, message,gage, or indicator.

M : This symbol is shown whenyou need to see your owner manualfor additional instructions orinformation.

* : This symbol is shown whenyou need to see a service manualfor additional instructions orinformation.

Preface iii

Vehicle Symbol Chart

Here are some additional symbolsthat may be found on the vehicleand what they mean. For moreinformation on the symbol, refer tothe index.

9 : Airbag Readiness Light

# : Air Conditioning

! : Antilock Brake System (ABS)

g : Audio Steering WheelControls or OnStar®

$ : Brake System Warning Light

" : Charging System

I : Cruise Control

B : Engine Coolant Temperature

O : Exterior Lamps

# : Fog Lamps

. : Fuel Gage

+ : Fuses

i : Headlamp High/Low-BeamChanger

j : LATCH System Child Restraints

* : Malfunction Indicator Lamp

: : Oil Pressure

g : Outside Power FoldawayMirrors

} : Power

/ : Remote Vehicle Start

> : Safety Belt Reminders

7 : Tire Pressure Monitor

_ : Tow/Haul Mode

F : Traction Control

M : Windshield Washer Fluid

iv Preface

Seats andRestraint System

Head RestraintsHead Restraints ....................1-2

Front SeatsPower Seats .........................1-3Manual Lumbar .....................1-3Power Lumbar ......................1-4Heated Seats .......................1-4Heated and Cooled Seats ......1-4Memory Seat and Mirrors .......1-5Reclining Seatbacks ..............1-6

Rear SeatsRear Seat Operation ..............1-8Third Row Seats .................1-10

Safety BeltsSafety Belts: They Arefor Everyone .....................1-12

How to Wear SafetyBelts Properly ....................1-16

Lap-Shoulder Belt ................1-20Safety Belt Use DuringPregnancy ........................1-25

Safety Belt Extender ............1-25

Child RestraintsOlder Children .....................1-25Infants and Young Children ....1-28Child Restraint Systems ........1-31Where to Put the Restraint .....1-32Lower Anchors and Tethersfor Children (LATCH) ..........1-34

Securing a Child Restraintin a Rear Seat Position ......1-40

Securing a Child Restraintin the Right Front SeatPosition ............................1-42

Airbag SystemAirbag System ....................1-45Where Are the Airbags? .......1-47When Should an AirbagInflate? .............................1-49

What Makes an AirbagInflate? .............................1-50

How Does an AirbagRestrain? ..........................1-51

What Will You See Afteran Airbag Inflates? .............1-51

Passenger Sensing System ....1-53Servicing YourAirbag-Equipped Vehicle .....1-57

Adding Equipment to YourAirbag-Equipped Vehicle .....1-58

Restraint System CheckChecking the RestraintSystems ...........................1-59

Replacing Restraint SystemParts After a Crash .............1-60

Seats and Restraint System 1-1

Head RestraintsThe vehicle’s front seats haveadjustable head restraints in alloutboard seating positions.

{ CAUTION

With head restraints that are notinstalled and adjusted properly,there is a greater chance thatoccupants will suffer a neck/spinalinjury in a crash. Do not driveuntil the head restraints for alloccupants are installed andadjusted properly.

Adjust the head restraint so that thetop of the restraint is at the sameheight as the top of the occupant’shead. This position reduces thechance of a neck injury in a crash.

Pull the head restraint up to raise it.To lower the head restraint, press therelease button, located on the headrestraint post on the top of theseatback, while you push the headrestraint down.

Push down on the head restraintafter the button is released to makesure that it is locked in place.

1-2 Seats and Restraint System

Front Seats

Power Seats

A. Power Seat Adjustment ControlB. Reclining Seatbacks on

page 1-6.C. Power Lumbar on page 1-4.

If the vehicle has power seats,the controls are located onthe outboard side of the seats.

Move the seat forward or rearwardby sliding the power seat adjustmentcontrol (A) forward or rearward.

The vehicle may have additionalfeatures to adjust the power seat:

• Raise or lower the entire seatby moving the power seatadjustment control (A) upor down.

• Raise or lower the front part of theseat cushion by moving the frontof the control up or down.

• Raise or lower the rear part of theseat cushion by moving the rearof the control up or down.

The vehicle may have a memoryfunction which allows seat settingsto be saved and recalled. SeeMemory Seat and Mirrors onpage 1-5 for more information.

Manual Lumbar

If the vehicle has this feature, thehandle is located on the inboard sideof the seatback.

Turn the handle rearward todecrease lumbar support. Turnthe handle forward to increaselumbar support.

The lumbar support may need tobe adjusted when changingthe seating position.

Driver Seat with Power SeatControl, Power Recline, and

Power Lumbar shown


Power LumbarIf the seats have power lumbar,the controls used to operate thisfeature are located on the outboardside of the seats. See “PowerLumbar” under Power Seats onpage 1-3 for more information.

To increase or decrease lumbarsupport, press and hold the front orrear of the control (C).

Release the control when theseatback reaches the desired levelof lumbar support.

The lumbar support may need tobe adjusted when changingthe seating position.

Heated SeatsOn vehicles with heated front seats,the controls are located on the centerconsole. To operate the heated seatsthe engine must be running.

I (Heated Seatback): Press toturn on the heated seatback.

J (Heated Seat and Seatback):Press to turn on or off the heatedseat and seatback.

The light on the button will come onto indicate that the feature is on.Each time the button is pressed,the temperature settings changefrom high, to medium, to low, to off.Indicator lights above the buttonwill show the level of heat selected:three for high, two for medium, andone for low.

The passenger seat may takelonger to heat up.

If the vehicle has remote vehiclestart and is started using the remotekeyless entry transmitter, the frontheated seats will be turned on tothe high setting if it is cold outside.See “Remote Vehicle Start”under Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System Operation on page 2-4.When the ignition is turned on, theheated seat feature will turn off.To turn the heated seat feature backon, press the desired button.

Heated and Cooled SeatsIf the front seats have the heated andcooled seat feature, the buttons usedto control this feature are located onthe front doors near the door handle.

H (Cooled Seat): To cool the entireseat, press the button with thecooled seat symbol.

This symbol will appear on theclimate control display to indicatethat the feature is on. Press thebutton to cycle through thetemperature settings of high,


medium, and low and to turn thecooled seat off. Indicator bars next tothe symbol designate the level ofcooling selected: three for high,two for medium, and one for low.

z (Heated Seat and Seatback):To heat the entire seat, press thebutton with the heated seat andseatback symbol.

This symbol will appear on theclimate control display to indicatethat the feature is on. Press thebutton to cycle through thetemperature settings of high,medium, and low and to turn theheated seat off. Indicator bars nextto the symbol designate the levelof heat selected: three for high,two for medium, and one for low.

The heated and cooled seats willbe canceled after the ignition isturned off. To use the heated andcooled seat feature after the vehicleis started, you will need to press theappropriate seat button again.

Memory Seat and MirrorsOn vehicles with the memorypackage, the controls are locatedon the driver door.

1: Saves the seating position fordriver 1.

2: Saves the seating position fordriver 2.

S : Recalls the easy exit position.

To save a position in memory:

1. Adjust the driver seat, includingthe seatback recliner, bothoutside mirrors, and the powersteering column to a comfortableposition.See Outside Power Mirrors onpage 2-32 for more information.Not all vehicles will have theability to save and recallthe mirror positions.

2. Press and hold button 1 untiltwo beeps sound to let youknow that the position hasbeen stored.

A second seating and mirrorposition can be programmed byrepeating the above steps andpressing button 2.

To recall the memory positions,the vehicle must be in P (Park).Press and release either button 1or 2. The seat, outside mirrors, andpower steering column will moveto the position previously stored.You will hear a single beep.

If the RKE transmitter is used toenter the vehicle and the remoterecall memory feature has beenturned on, automatic seat and mirrormovement will occur. See “MEMORYSEAT RECALL” under DIC VehicleCustomization on page 3-59 for moreinformation.

To stop recall movement of thememory feature at any time, pressone of the power seat controls,memory buttons, or power mirrorbuttons.


If something has blocked thedriver seat while recalling a memoryposition, the driver seat recall maystop working. If this happens,remove the obstruction and pressthe appropriate control for the areathat is not recalling for two seconds.Try pressing the memory buttonagain. If the memory position is stillnot being recalled, see your dealer/retailer for service.

Easy Exit Seat

S : With the vehicle in P (Park),press the exit button. You will heara single beep. The driver seatwill move back into the exit position.

If the easy exit seat feature hasbeen turned on in the DriverInformation Center (DIC), automaticseat movement will occur whenthe key is removed from the ignition.

For programming information, seeDIC Vehicle Customization onpage 3-59 for more information.

Reclining SeatbacksManual Reclining Seatbacks

{ CAUTION

You can lose control of thevehicle if you try to adjust amanual driver’s seat while thevehicle is moving. The suddenmovement could startle andconfuse you, or make you push apedal when you do not want to.Adjust the driver’s seat only whenthe vehicle is not moving.

{ CAUTION

If either seatback is not locked, itcould move forward in a suddenstop or crash. That could causeinjury to the person sitting there.Always push and pull on theseatbacks to be sure they arelocked.

On vehicles with seats that havemanual reclining seatbacks, the leverused to operate them is located onthe outboard side of the seat.

To recline the seatback:

1. Lift the recline lever.

2. Move the seatback to the desiredposition, then release the lever tolock the seatback in place.

3. Push and pull on the seatback tomake sure it is locked.


To return the seatback to an uprightposition:

1. Lift the lever without applyingpressure to the seatback andthe seatback will return tothe upright position.


Power Reclining SeatbacksOn vehicles with seats thathave power reclining seatbacks,the control used to recline them islocated on the outboard side of theseat behind the power seat control.See “Reclining Seatbacks” underPower Seats on page 1-3 for moreinformation.

• To recline the seatback, tilt the topof the control (B) rearward.

• To bring the seatback forward, tiltthe top of the control forward.

{ CAUTION

Sitting in a reclined position whenthe vehicle is in motion can bedangerous. Even when buckledup, the safety belts cannot dotheir job when reclined like this.

The shoulder belt cannot do itsjob because it will not be againstyour body. Instead, it will be infront of you. In a crash, you couldgo into it, receiving neck or otherinjuries.

The lap belt cannot do its jobeither. In a crash, the belt couldgo up over your abdomen. Thebelt forces would be there, not atyour pelvic bones. This couldcause serious internal injuries.

For proper protection when thevehicle is in motion, have theseatback upright. Then sit wellback in the seat and wear thesafety belt properly.

Do not have a seatback reclined ifthe vehicle is moving.


Rear Seats

Rear Seat Operation

A. Seat Adjustment HandleB. Reclining Seatback StrapC. Sliding Seat Lever

Entering and Exiting theThird Row

{ CAUTION

Using the third row seating positionwhile the second row is folded, orfolded and tumbled, could causeinjury in a sudden stop or crash.Be sure to return the seat to thepassenger seating position. Pushand pull on the seat to make sure itis locked into place.

Notice: Folding a rear seat withthe safety belts still fastened maycause damage to the seat or thesafety belts. Always unbuckle thesafety belts and return them totheir normal stowed positionbefore folding a rear seat.

To access the third row:

1. Remove objects on the floor infront of or on the second row seat,or in the seat tracks on the floor.

2. Move the front center consolearmrest completely forward.See Center Console Storage onpage 2-49.

3. Place folding armrests in theupright position.


4. Ensure that the safety belt isunfastened and in the stowedposition.

5. Pull the sliding seat lever (C)forward and move the seatbackforward. The seat cushionwill fold, and the entire seat willslide forward.

Returning the Seat to theSeating PositionTo return the second row seat to itsnormal seating position:

1. Remove objects on the floorbehind the second row seator in the seat tracks on the floor.

2. Pull the seatback rearward until itis locked in place.

3. Slide the seat rearward bypushing on the seatback until it islocked into place.

4. Push down on the rear of theseat cushion until it is lockedin place.

5. Push and pull on the seatbackand seat cushion to make surethey are locked in place.

6. Check that the safety belt is notunder the seat cushion.

Reclining the SeatbacksTo recline the seatback:

1. Leaning forward in the seat, pullthe reclining seatback strap (B).

2. Move the seatback to the desiredposition, then release the strapto lock the seatback in place.


Folding the Rear SeatTo fold the second row seats:

1. Remove anything on or underthe seat.

2. Place the armrest in the uprightposition, and unfasten thesafety belt.

3. Pull forward on the recliningseatback strap (B) and pushdown on the seatback.If the headrest touches the frontseat, slide the second rowseat rearward.

To return the seatback to theseating position, lift the uppercorner of the seatback and push itrearward until it locks into place.Push and pull on the seatbackto make sure it is locked.

Adjusting the SeatsTo adjust the second row seats,pull outward on the seat adjustmenthandle (A). Slide the seat forwardor rearward to the desired position.Release the handle and pushand pull on the seat to make sure itis locked.


Third Row Seats

{ CAUTION

Using the third row seatingposition while the second rowis folded, or pushed forward inthe entry position, could causeinjury in a sudden stop or crash.Be sure to return the seat to thepassenger seating position. Pushand pull on the seat to make sureit is locked into place.

The third row seats can be foldedforward or removed.


To fold the seatback:


2. Disconnect the rear safety beltmini-latch, using a key in theslot on the mini-buckle, letthe belt retract into the headliner.Stow the mini-latch in theholder located in the headliner.

3. Pull up on the release leverlocated on the back of theseat. The headrest movesforward automatically.

4. Push the seatback forward tolay flat.


To return the seatback to theseating position:

1. Raise the seatback into place byusing the pullstrap from the rearof the vehicle, or by pushing it intoplace from inside the vehicle.

2. The headrest must be locked intoplace before sitting in the seat.

{ CAUTION

If either seatback is not locked, itcould move forward in a suddenstop or crash. That could causeinjury to the person sitting there.Always push and pull on theseatbacks to be sure they arelocked.

3. Push and pull on the seatback tomake sure it is locked in place.

{ CAUTION

A safety belt that is improperlyrouted, not properly attached,or twisted will not provide theprotection needed in a crash.The person wearing the belt couldbe seriously injured. After raisingthe rear seatback, always checkto be sure that the safety beltsare properly routed and attached,and are not twisted.

4. Reconnect the center safety beltmini-latch to the mini-buckle.Do not let it twist.

5. Pull on the safety belt to be surethe mini-latch is secure.

Removing the Third RowSeats1. Remove the cargo management

system, if it is in the vehicle.See Cargo Management Systemon page 2-52.



3. Fold the seatback down.See “Folding the Seatback”earlier in this section.

4. Remove the rear bolts located onthe floor on each side of the seat.


5. Remove the seat by tilting itslightly upward, and thenpulling it out of the rear of thevehicle in one motion.

6. Replace the bolts in the floorholes for storage.

Installing the Third Row Seats1. Before installing the seat the

seatback must be foldedforward. See “Folding theSeatback” earlier in this section.The seats must be placed inthe proper locations to attachcorrectly. The wider seat mustbe installed on the driver sideand the narrower seat on thepassenger side. Remove thebolts from the holes in the floorbefore installing the seats.

2. Place the seat on the vehiclefloor so that the front seathooks are on the vehicle bars.

3. Reinstall the bolts, and torque to55 Y (41 lb ft). Pull up on theseat to make sure it is lockedin place.

4. Raise the seatback to its uprightposition. Push and pull on theseatback to make sure it islocked into place.

5. Push the headrest up intoposition. Push and pull onthe headrest to make sure it islocked into place.

6. Reconnect the center safety beltmini-latch to the mini-buckle.Do not let it twist.

Safety Belts

Safety Belts: They Arefor EveryoneThis section of the manual describeshow to use safety belts properly.It also describes some things not todo with safety belts.

{ CAUTION

Do not let anyone ride where asafety belt cannot be wornproperly. In a crash, if you or yourpassenger(s) are not wearingsafety belts, the injuries can bemuch worse. You can hit thingsinside the vehicle harder or beejected from the vehicle. You andyour passenger(s) can beseriously injured or killed. In thesame crash, you might not be, ifyou are buckled up. Always fastenyour safety belt, and check thatyour passenger(s) are restrainedproperly too.


{ CAUTION

It is extremely dangerous to ridein a cargo area, inside or outsideof a vehicle. In a collision, peopleriding in these areas are morelikely to be seriously injured orkilled. Do not allow people to ridein any area of your vehicle thatis not equipped with seats andsafety belts. Be sure everyone inyour vehicle is in a seat and usinga safety belt properly.

This vehicle has indicators as areminder to buckle the safety belts.See Safety Belt Reminders onpage 3-30 for additional information.

In most states and in all Canadianprovinces, the law requireswearing safety belts. Here is why:

You never know if you will bein a crash. If you do have a crash,you do not know if it will be aserious one.

A few crashes are mild, and somecrashes can be so serious that evenbuckled up, a person would notsurvive. But most crashes arein between. In many of them, peoplewho buckle up can survive andsometimes walk away. Withoutsafety belts they could have beenbadly hurt or killed.

After more than 40 years of safetybelts in vehicles, the facts are clear.In most crashes buckling up doesmatter... a lot!

Why Safety Belts WorkWhen you ride in or on anything,you go as fast as it goes.

Take the simplest vehicle. Supposeit is just a seat on wheels.


Put someone on it. Get it up to speed. Then stop thevehicle. The rider does not stop.

The person keeps going untilstopped by something. In a realvehicle, it could be the windshield...


or the instrument panel... or the safety belts!

With safety belts, you slow down asthe vehicle does. You get more timeto stop. You stop over more distance,and your strongest bones take theforces. That is why safety belts makesuch good sense.

Questions and Answers AboutSafety Belts

Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicleafter a crash if I am wearing asafety belt?

A: You could be — whether you arewearing a safety belt or not. Butyour chance of being consciousduring and after an accident, soyou can unbuckle and get out, ismuch greater if you are belted.And you can unbuckle a safetybelt, even if you are upside down.

Q: If my vehicle has airbags,why should I have to wearsafety belts?

A: Airbags are supplementalsystems only; so they work withsafety belts — not instead ofthem. Whether or not an airbag isprovided, all occupants still haveto buckle up to get the mostprotection. That is true not only infrontal collisions, but especially inside and other collisions.


Q: If I am a good driver, and Inever drive far from home, whyshould I wear safety belts?

A: You may be an excellent driver,but if you are in a crash — evenone that is not your fault — youand your passenger(s) can behurt. Being a good driver does notprotect you from things beyondyour control, such as bad drivers.

Most accidents occur within25 miles (40 km) of home.And the greatest number ofserious injuries and deathsoccur at speeds of less than40 mph (65 km/h).

Safety belts are for everyone.

How to Wear Safety BeltsProperlyThis section is only for people ofadult size.

Be aware that there are specialthings to know about safety beltsand children. And there are differentrules for smaller children and infants.If a child will be riding in the vehicle,see Older Children on page 1-25 orInfants and Young Children onpage 1-28. Follow those rules foreveryone’s protection.

It is very important for all occupantsto buckle up. Statistics show thatunbelted people are hurt more oftenin crashes than those who arewearing safety belts.

Occupants who are not buckled upcan be thrown out of the vehiclein a crash. And they can strikeothers in the vehicle who arewearing safety belts.

First, before you or yourpassenger(s) wear a safety belt,there is important informationyou should know.

Sit up straight and always keepyour feet on the floor in front of you.The lap part of the belt should beworn low and snug on the hips,just touching the thighs.


In a crash, this applies force to thestrong pelvic bones and you wouldbe less likely to slide under the lapbelt. If you slid under it, the beltwould apply force on your abdomen.This could cause serious or evenfatal injuries. The shoulder beltshould go over the shoulder andacross the chest. These parts ofthe body are best able to take beltrestraining forces.

The shoulder belt locks if there is asudden stop or crash.

Q: What is wrong with this?

A: The shoulder belt is too loose.It will not give as muchprotection this way.

{ CAUTION

You can be seriously hurt if yourshoulder belt is too loose. In acrash, you would move forwardtoo much, which could increaseinjury. The shoulder belt shouldfit snugly against your body.


A: The lap belt is too loose. It willnot give nearly as muchprotection this way.

{ CAUTION

You can be seriously hurt if yourlap belt is too loose. In a crash,you could slide under the lap beltand apply force on your abdomen.This could cause serious or evenfatal injuries. The lap belt shouldbe worn low and snug on thehips, just touching the thighs.



A: The belt is buckled in the wrongbuckle.

{ CAUTION

You can be seriously injured ifyour belt is buckled in the wrongplace like this. In a crash, the beltwould go up over your abdomen.The belt forces would be there,not on the pelvic bones. Thiscould cause serious internalinjuries. Always buckle your beltinto the buckle nearest you.


A: The belt is over an armrest.

{ CAUTION

You can be seriously injured if yourbelt goes over an armrest like this.The belt would be much too high.In a crash, you can slide under thebelt. The belt force would then beapplied on the abdomen, not onthe pelvic bones, and that couldcause serious or fatal injuries.Be sure the belt goes under thearmrests.


A: The shoulder belt is worn underthe arm. It should be worn overthe shoulder at all times.

{ CAUTION

You can be seriously injured if youwear the shoulder belt under yourarm. In a crash, your body wouldmove too far forward, which wouldincrease the chance of head andneck injury. Also, the belt would

(Continued)


CAUTION (Continued)

apply too much force to the ribs,which are not as strong asshoulder bones. You could alsoseverely injure internal organs likeyour liver or spleen. The shoulderbelt should go over the shoulderand across the chest.


A: The belt is behind the body.

{ CAUTION

You can be seriously injured by notwearing the lap-shoulder beltproperly. In a crash, you would notbe restrained by the shoulder belt.Your body could move too farforward increasing the chance ofhead and neck injury. You mightalso slide under the lap belt.The belt force would then beapplied right on the abdomen.That could cause serious or fatalinjuries. The shoulder belt shouldgo over the shoulder and acrossthe chest.


A: The belt is twisted acrossthe body.

{ CAUTION

You can be seriously injured by atwisted belt. In a crash, you wouldnot have the full width of the beltto spread impact forces. If a beltis twisted, make it straight so itcan work properly, or ask yourdealer/retailer to fix it.


Lap-Shoulder BeltAll seating positions in the vehiclehave a lap-shoulder belt.

If you are using a rear seatingposition with a detachable safety beltand the safety belt is not attached,see Third Row Seats on page 1-10for instruction on reconnecting thesafety belt to the mini-buckle.

The following instructions explainhow to wear a lap-shoulder beltproperly.

1. Adjust the seat, if the seat isadjustable, so you can sit upstraight. To see how, see “Seats”in the Index.

2. Pick up the latch plate and pullthe belt across you. Do not letit get twisted.The lap-shoulder belt may lockif you pull the belt acrossyou very quickly. If this happens,let the belt go back slightly tounlock it. Then pull the beltacross you more slowly.

If the shoulder portion of apassenger belt is pulled out allthe way, the child restraintlocking feature may be engaged.If this happens, let the belt goback all the way and start again.

3. Push the latch plate into thebuckle until it clicks.


4. Pull up on the latch plate tomake sure it is secure. If the beltis not long enough, see SafetyBelt Extender on page 1-25.Position the release button on thebuckle so that the safety beltcould be quickly unbuckled ifnecessary.

5. If equipped with a shoulder beltheight adjuster, move it to theheight that is right for you.See “Shoulder Belt HeightAdjustment” later in this sectionfor instructions on use andimportant safety information.

6. To make the lap part tight, pullup on the shoulder belt.It may be necessary to pull thestitching on the safety beltthrough the latch plate to fullytighten the lap belt on smalleroccupants.

To unlatch the belt, push the buttonon the buckle. The belt should returnto its stowed position. Slide the latchplate up the safety belt webbingwhen the safety belt is not in use.The latch plate should rest on thestitching on the safety belt, near theguide loop on the side wall.

Before a door is closed, be sure thesafety belt is out of the way. If adoor is slammed against a safetybelt, damage can occur to both thesafety belt and the vehicle.


Shoulder Belt Height AdjusterThe vehicle has a shoulder beltheight adjuster for the driver andright front passenger seatingpositions.Adjust the height so that the shoulderportion of the belt is centered on theshoulder. The belt should be awayfrom the face and neck, but notfalling off of the shoulder. Impropershoulder belt height adjustmentcould reduce the effectiveness ofthe safety belt in a crash.

To move it down, push down on thebutton (A) and move the heightadjuster to the desired position.

You can move the height adjusterup by pushing up on the shoulderbelt guide.

After the adjuster is set to the desiredposition, try to move it down withoutpushing the button to make sure ithas locked into position.

Safety Belt PretensionersThis vehicle has safety beltpretensioners for the front outboardoccupants. Although the safetybelt pretensioners cannot be seen,they are part of the safety beltassembly. They can help tightenthe safety belts during the earlystages of a moderate to severefrontal, near frontal, or rear crashif the threshold conditions forpretensioner activation are met.And, for vehicles with side impactairbags, safety belt pretensionerscan help tighten the safety belts ina side crash or a rollover event.

Pretensioners work only once. If thepretensioners activate in a crash,they will need to be replaced,and probably other new parts forthe vehicle’s safety belt system.See Replacing Restraint SystemParts After a Crash on page 1-60.

Rear Safety Belt ComfortGuidesRear shoulder belt comfort guidesmay provide added safety beltcomfort for older children who haveoutgrown booster seats and forsome adults. When installed on ashoulder belt, the comfort guidepositions the shoulder belt awayfrom the neck and head.

There is a guide for each outboardpassenger position in the second rowseat and all passenger positions inthe third row.


Here is how to install a comfort guideto the safety belt:

1. For the outboard positions,remove the guide from its storageclip on the interior body.For the third row center position,locate the comfort guide whichis located in a storage pocket,at the top of the seat, underthe headrest on the driver’s sideof the vehicle. To access thecomfort guide, you will first needto move the headrest forward

by pulling on the handle behindthe seatback. The comfortguide will now be accessible.

Pull the comfort guide out of itsstorage location and then returnthe headrest to its uprightposition.The elastic cord on the comfortguide is adjustable. You canmake it longer or shorter bysqueezing both ends of theplastic adjuster.

2. Place the guide over the belt andinsert the two edges of the beltinto the slots of the guide.

Outboard Positions

Third Row Center Position


3. Be sure that the belt is nottwisted and it lies flat. The elasticcord must be under the beltand the guide on top.

{ CAUTION

A safety belt that is not properlyworn may not provide theprotection needed in a crash.The person wearing the belt couldbe seriously injured. The shoulderbelt should go over the shoulderand across the chest. These partsof the body are best able to takebelt restraining forces.

4. Buckle, position, and releasethe safety belt as describedpreviously in this section. Makesure that the shoulder beltcrosses the shoulder.

To remove and store the comfortguide, squeeze the belt edgestogether so that the safety beltcan be removed from the guide.Slide the guide into its storagelocation or on its storage clip.


Safety Belt Use DuringPregnancySafety belts work for everyone,including pregnant women. Likeall occupants, they are more likelyto be seriously injured if they donot wear safety belts.

A pregnant woman should wear alap-shoulder belt, and the lap portionshould be worn as low as possible,below the rounding, throughoutthe pregnancy.

The best way to protect the fetusis to protect the mother. Whena safety belt is worn properly, it ismore likely that the fetus will notbe hurt in a crash. For pregnantwomen, as for anyone, the key tomaking safety belts effective iswearing them properly.

Safety Belt ExtenderIf the vehicle’s safety belt will fastenaround you, you should use it.

But if a safety belt is not longenough, your dealer/retailer will orderyou an extender. When you go in toorder it, take the heaviest coat youwill wear, so the extender will belong enough for you. To help avoidpersonal injury, do not let someoneelse use it, and use it only for theseat it is made to fit. The extenderhas been designed for adults. Neveruse it for securing child seats.To wear it, attach it to the regularsafety belt. For more information,see the instruction sheet that comeswith the extender.

Child Restraints

Older Children

Older children who have outgrownbooster seats should wear thevehicle’s safety belts.


The manufacturer’s instructions thatcome with the booster seat, statethe weight and height limitations forthat booster. Use a booster seatwith a lap-shoulder belt untilthe child passes the below fit test:

• Sit all the way back on theseat. Do the knees bend at theseat edge? If yes, continue.If no, return to the booster seat.

• Buckle the lap-shoulder belt.Does the shoulder belt rest on theshoulder? If yes, continue. If no,try using the rear safety beltcomfort guide. See “Rear SafetyBelt Comfort Guides” underLap-Shoulder Belt on page 1-20for more information. If theshoulder belt still does not reston the shoulder, then return tothe booster seat.

• Does the lap belt fit low and snugon the hips, touching the thighs?If yes, continue. If no, return to thebooster seat.

• Can proper safety belt fit bemaintained for the length of thetrip? If yes, continue. If no, returnto the booster seat.

Q: What is the proper way towear safety belts?

A: An older child should wear alap-shoulder belt and get theadditional restraint a shoulderbelt can provide. The shoulderbelt should not cross the faceor neck. The lap belt shouldfit snugly below the hips,just touching the top of thethighs. This applies belt forceto the child’s pelvic bonesin a crash. It should neverbe worn over the abdomen,which could cause severeor even fatal internal injuriesin a crash.

Also see “Rear Safety Belt ComfortGuides” under Lap-Shoulder Belton page 1-20.

According to accident statistics,children and infants are safer whenproperly restrained in a childrestraint system or infant restraintsystem secured in a rear seatingposition.

In a crash, children who are notbuckled up can strike other peoplewho are buckled up, or can bethrown out of the vehicle. Olderchildren need to use safetybelts properly.


{ CAUTION

Never do this.Never allow two children to wearthe same safety belt. The safetybelt can not properly spread theimpact forces. In a crash, thetwo children can be crushedtogether and seriously injured.A safety belt must be used byonly one person at a time.

{ CAUTION

Never do this.

Never allow a child to wear thesafety belt with the shoulder beltbehind their back. A child can beseriously injured by not wearingthe lap-shoulder belt properly.In a crash, the child would not berestrained by the shoulder belt.The child could move too farforward increasing the chance ofhead and neck injury. The childmight also slide under the lap belt.The belt force would then beapplied right on the abdomen.That could cause serious or fatalinjuries. The shoulder belt shouldgo over the shoulder and acrossthe chest.


Infants and YoungChildrenEveryone in a vehicle needsprotection! This includes infantsand all other children. Neither thedistance traveled nor the ageand size of the traveler changes theneed, for everyone, to use safetyrestraints. In fact, the law inevery state in the United States andin every Canadian province sayschildren up to some age mustbe restrained while in a vehicle.

{ CAUTION

Children can be seriously injuredor strangled if a shoulder belt iswrapped around their neck and thesafety belt continues to tighten.Never leave children unattended ina vehicle and never allow childrento play with the safety belts.

Airbags plus lap-shoulder belts offerprotection for adults and olderchildren, but not for young childrenand infants. Neither the vehicle’ssafety belt system nor its airbagsystem is designed for them. Everytime infants and young childrenride in vehicles, they should havethe protection provided byappropriate child restraints.

Children who are not restrainedproperly can strike other people, orcan be thrown out of the vehicle.

{ CAUTION

Never do this.Never hold an infant or a childwhile riding in a vehicle. Due tocrash forces, an infant or a childwill become so heavy it is notpossible to hold it during a crash.For example, in a crash at only25 mph (40 km/h), a 12 lb (5.5 kg)infant will suddenly become a240 lb (110 kg) force on a person’sarms. An infant should be securedin an appropriate restraint.


{ CAUTION

Never do this.

Children who are up against, orvery close to, any airbag when itinflates can be seriously injured orkilled. Never put a rear-facingchild restraint in the right frontseat. Secure a rear-facing childrestraint in a rear seat. It is alsobetter to secure a forward-facingchild restraint in a rear seat. If youmust secure a forward-facing childrestraint in the right front seat,always move the front passengerseat as far back as it will go.


Q: What are the different types ofadd-on child restraints?

A: Add-on child restraints, whichare purchased by the vehicle’sowner, are available in four basictypes. Selection of a particularrestraint should take intoconsideration not only the child’sweight, height, and age but alsowhether or not the restraint will becompatible with the motor vehiclein which it will be used.

For most basic types of childrestraints, there are manydifferent models available.When purchasing a childrestraint, be sure it is designedto be used in a motor vehicle. If itis, the restraint will have a labelsaying that it meets federal motorvehicle safety standards.

The restraint manufacturer’sinstructions that come withthe restraint state the weightand height limitations for aparticular child restraint.

In addition, there are many kindsof restraints available forchildren with special needs.

{ CAUTION

To reduce the risk of neck andhead injury during a crash, infantsneed complete support. This isbecause an infant’s neck is notfully developed and its headweighs so much compared withthe rest of its body. In a crash,an infant in a rear-facing childrestraint settles into the restraint,so the crash forces can bedistributed across the strongestpart of an infant’s body, the backand shoulders. Infants shouldalways be secured in rear-facingchild restraints.

{ CAUTION

A young child’s hip bones are stillso small that the vehicle’s regularsafety belt may not remain lowon the hip bones, as it should.Instead, it may settle up aroundthe child’s abdomen. In a crash,the belt would apply force on abody area that is unprotected byany bony structure. This alonecould cause serious or fatalinjuries. To reduce the risk ofserious or fatal injuries during acrash, young children shouldalways be secured in appropriatechild restraints.


Child Restraint Systems

A rear-facing infant seat (A) providesrestraint with the seating surfaceagainst the back of the infant.

The harness system holds the infantin place and, in a crash, acts to keepthe infant positioned in the restraint.

A forward-facing child seat (B)provides restraint for the child’s bodywith the harness.

A booster seat (C) is a childrestraint designed to improve the fitof the vehicle’s safety belt system.A booster seat can also help a childto see out the window.

(A) Rear-Facing Infant Seat

(B) Forward-Facing Child Seat (C) Booster Seats


Securing an Add-On ChildRestraint in the Vehicle

{ CAUTION

A child can be seriously injured orkilled in a crash if the child restraintis not properly secured in thevehicle. Secure the child restraintproperly in the vehicle using thevehicle’s safety belt or LATCHsystem, following the instructionsthat came with that child restraintand the instructions in this manual.

To help reduce the chance of injury,the child restraint must be secured inthe vehicle. Child restraint systemsmust be secured in vehicle seats bylap belts or the lap belt portion of alap-shoulder belt, or by the LATCHsystem. See Lower Anchors andTethers for Children (LATCH) onpage 1-34 for more information.

A child can be endangered in a crashif the child restraint is not properlysecured in the vehicle.

When securing an add-on childrestraint, refer to the instructions thatcome with the restraint which maybe on the restraint itself or in abooklet, or both, and to this manual.The child restraint instructions areimportant, so if they are notavailable, obtain a replacementcopy from the manufacturer.

Keep in mind that an unsecuredchild restraint can move aroundin a collision or sudden stopand injure people in the vehicle.Be sure to properly secure any childrestraint in the vehicle — evenwhen no child is in it.

Securing the Child Within theChild Restraint

{ CAUTION

A child can be seriously injuredor killed in a crash if the child isnot properly secured in the childrestraint. Secure the child properlyfollowing the instructions thatcame with that child restraint.

Where to Put theRestraintAccording to accident statistics,children and infants are safer whenproperly restrained in a child restraintsystem or infant restraint systemsecured in a rear seating position.


We recommend that children andchild restraints be secured in a rearseat, including: an infant or a childriding in a rear-facing child restraint;a child riding in a forward-facing childseat; an older child riding in a boosterseat; and children, who are largeenough, using safety belts.

A label on the sun visor says, “Neverput a rear-facing child restraint in thefront.” This is because the risk to therear-facing child is so great, if theairbag deploys.

{ CAUTION

A child in a rear-facing childrestraint can be seriously injured orkilled if the right front passengerairbag inflates. This is becausethe back of the rear-facing childrestraint would be very close tothe inflating airbag. A child in aforward-facing child restraint can

(Continued)

CAUTION (Continued)

be seriously injured or killed ifthe right front passenger airbaginflates and the passenger seat isin a forward position.

Even if the passenger sensingsystem has turned off the rightfront passenger frontal airbag, nosystem is fail-safe. No one canguarantee that an airbag will notdeploy under some unusualcircumstance, even though it isturned off.

Secure rear-facing child restraintsin a rear seat, even if the airbag isoff. If you secure a forward-facingchild restraint in the right front seat,always move the front passengerseat as far back as it will go. It isbetter to secure the child restraintin a rear seat.

See Passenger Sensing Systemon page 1-53 for additionalinformation.

When securing a child restraint in arear seating position, study theinstructions that came with thechild restraint to make sureit is compatible with this vehicle.

Wherever a child restraint isinstalled, be sure to secure thechild restraint properly.

Keep in mind that an unsecuredchild restraint can move aroundin a collision or sudden stopand injure people in the vehicle.Be sure to properly secure any childrestraint in the vehicle — evenwhen no child is in it.


Lower Anchors andTethers for Children(LATCH)The LATCH system holds a childrestraint during driving or in a crash.This system is designed to makeinstallation of a child restraint easier.The LATCH system uses anchorsin the vehicle and attachmentson the child restraint that are madefor use with the LATCH system.

Make sure that a LATCH-compatiblechild restraint is properly installedusing the anchors, or use thevehicle’s safety belts to secure therestraint, following the instructionsthat came with that restraint, andalso the instructions in this manual.When installing a child restraint witha top tether, you must also use eitherthe lower anchors or the safety beltsto properly secure the child restraint.A child restraint must never beattached using only the top tetherand anchor.

In order to use the LATCH systemin your vehicle, you need a childrestraint that has LATCHattachments. The child restraintmanufacturer will provide you withinstructions on how to use thechild restraint and its attachments.The following explains how toattach a child restraint with theseattachments in your vehicle.Not all vehicle seating positions orchild restraints have lower anchorsand attachments or top tetheranchors and attachments.

Lower Anchors

Lower anchors (A) are metal barsbuilt into the vehicle. There aretwo lower anchors for eachLATCH seating position that willaccommodate a child restraint withlower attachments (B).

Top Tether Anchor

A top tether (A, C) anchors thetop of the child restraint to thevehicle. A top tether anchor is builtinto the vehicle. The top tetherattachment (B) on the child restraintconnects to the top tether anchorin the vehicle in order to reducethe forward movement and rotationof the child restraint during drivingor in a crash.

Your child restraint may have asingle tether (A) or a dual tether (C).Either will have a singleattachment (B) to secure thetop tether to the anchor.


Some child restraints with toptethers are designed for use withor without the top tether beingattached. Others require thetop tether always to be attached.In Canada, the law requiresthat forward-facing child restraintshave a top tether, and that the tetherbe attached. Be sure to read andfollow the instructions for your childrestraint.

If the child restraint does not have atop tether, one can be obtained,in kit form, for many child restraints.Ask the child restraint manufacturerwhether or not a kit is available.

Lower Anchor and Top TetherAnchor Locations

i (Top Tether Anchor): Seatingpositions with top tether anchors.

j (Lower Anchor): Seating positionswith two lower anchors.


j (Lower Anchor): Seating positionswith two lower anchors.

Second Row — Bucket

Second Row — 60/40 Bench



To assist you in locating the loweranchors, each second row anchorposition has a label, near the creasebetween the seatback and the seatcushion.

To assist you in locating the toptether anchors, the top tether anchorsymbol is located on the cover ornear the anchor.

The top tether anchors are locatedat the bottom rear of the seatback foreach seating position in the secondrow. Open the cover to access theanchors. Be sure to use an anchorlocated on the same side of thevehicle as the seating position wherethe child restraint will be placed.

Third Row Second Row — Bucket Shown,Bench Similar


The third row has one top tetheranchor located at the bottom rear ofthe center seatback. This anchorshould be used for the centerseating position only. Never installtwo top tethers using the sametop tether anchor.

Do not secure a child restraintin a position without a top tetheranchor if a national or locallaw requires that the top tetherbe attached, or if the instructions

that come with the child restraintsay that the top tether mustbe attached.

Accident statistics show that childrenare safer if they are restrained inthe rear rather than the front seat.See Where to Put the Restraint onpage 1-32 for additional information.

Securing a Child RestraintDesigned for the LATCH System

{ CAUTION

If a LATCH-type child restraint isnot attached to anchors, the childrestraint will not be able to protectthe child correctly. In a crash, thechild could be seriously injured orkilled. Install a LATCH-type childrestraint properly using theanchors, or use the vehicle’ssafety belts to secure the restraint,following the instructions that camewith the child restraint and theinstructions in this manual.

{ CAUTION

Do not attach more than onechild restraint to a single anchor.Attaching more than one childrestraint to a single anchor couldcause the anchor or attachment tocome loose or even break duringa crash. A child or others couldbe injured. To reduce the risk ofserious or fatal injuries during acrash, attach only one childrestraint per anchor.

Third Row Seat


{ CAUTION

Children can be seriously injuredor strangled if a shoulder belt iswrapped around their neck and thesafety belt continues to tighten.Buckle any unused safety beltsbehind the child restraint sochildren cannot reach them. Pullthe shoulder belt all the way out ofthe retractor to set the lock, if yourvehicle has one, after the childrestraint has been installed.

Notice: Do not let the LATCHattachments rub against thevehicle’s safety belts. This maydamage these parts. If necessary,move buckled safety belts toavoid rubbing the LATCHattachments.

Do not fold the empty rear seatwith a safety belt buckled. Thiscould damage the safety belt orthe seat. Unbuckle and return thesafety belt to its stowed position,before folding the seat.

1. Attach and tighten the lowerattachments to the loweranchors. If the child restraintdoes not have lower attachmentsor the desired seating positiondoes not have lower anchors,secure the child restraint with thetop tether and the safety belts.Refer to your child restraintmanufacturer instructions and theinstructions in this manual.1.1. Find the lower anchors for

the desired seating position.1.2. Recline the seatback to the

full reclined position.Make sure the second rowbench seatbacks arealigned at the same anglebefore placing the childrestraint on the seat.

Make sure the third rowbench seatbacks are bothupright before placingthe child restraint onthe seat.

1.3. Put the child restraint onthe seat.

1.4. Attach and tighten the lowerattachments on the childrestraint to the loweranchors.

2. If the child restraint manufacturerrecommends that the top tetherbe attached, attach andtighten the top tether to the toptether anchor, if the vehiclehas one. Refer to the childrestraint instructions and thefollowing steps:2.1. Find the top tether anchor.2.2. If the anchor is covered,

flip open the cover toexpose the anchor.


2.3. Route, attach and tightenthe top tether accordingto your child restraintinstructions and thefollowing instructions:

If the position you are usingdoes not have a headrestor head restraint andyou are using a singletether, route the tetherover the seatback.

If the position you are usingdoes not have a headrestor head restraint andyou are using a dual tether,route the tether over theseatback.

If the position you are usinghas a fixed headrest or headrestraint and you are using adual tether, route the tetheraround the headrest or headrestraint.


If the position you are usinghas a fixed headrest orhead restraint and you areusing a single tether,route the tether over theheadrest or head restraint.

3. Push and pull the child restraintin different directions to be sureit is secure.

Securing a ChildRestraint in a Rear SeatPositionWhen securing a child restraint in arear seating position, study theinstructions that came with thechild restraint to make sureit is compatible with this vehicle.

If the child restraint has the LATCHsystem, see Lower Anchors andTethers for Children (LATCH) onpage 1-34 for how and where toinstall the child restraint usingLATCH. If a child restraint is securedin the vehicle using a safety beltand it uses a top tether, see LowerAnchors and Tethers for Children(LATCH) on page 1-34 for top tetheranchor locations.

Do not secure a child seat in aposition without a top tether anchorif a national or local law requiresthat the top tether be anchored,or if the instructions that come withthe child restraint say that thetop strap must be anchored.

In Canada, the law requires thatforward-facing child restraints havea top tether, and that the tetherbe attached.

If the child restraint does not havethe LATCH system, you will be usingthe safety belt to secure the childrestraint in this position. Be sure tofollow the instructions that camewith the child restraint. Secure thechild in the child restraint whenand as the instructions say.

If more than one child restraintneeds to be installed in therear seat, be sure to read Where toPut the Restraint on page 1-32.

1. Put the child restraint on the seat.

2. Pick up the latch plate, andrun the lap and shoulder portionsof the vehicle’s safety beltthrough or around the restraint.The child restraint instructionswill show you how.


3. Push the latch plate into thebuckle until it clicks.Position the release button onthe buckle so that the safety beltcould be quickly unbuckled ifnecessary.

4. Pull the rest of the shoulder beltall the way out of the retractor toset the lock.

5. To tighten the belt, push downon the child restraint, pull theshoulder portion of the belt totighten the lap portion of the beltand feed the shoulder belt backinto the retractor. When installinga forward-facing child restraint,it may be helpful to use yourknee to push down on the childrestraint as you tighten the belt.


6. If the child restraint has a toptether, follow the child restraintmanufacturer’s instructionsregarding the use of the toptether. See Lower Anchors andTethers for Children (LATCH)on page 1-34 for moreinformation.


To remove the child restraint,unbuckle the vehicle safety belt andlet it return to the stowed position.If the top tether is attached to a toptether anchor, disconnect it.

Securing a ChildRestraint in the RightFront Seat PositionThe vehicle has airbags. A rearseat is a safer place to securea forward-facing child restraint.See Where to Put the Restraint onpage 1-32.

In addition, the vehicle has apassenger sensing system which isdesigned to turn off the rightfront passenger frontal airbag andseat-mounted side impact airbagunder certain conditions. SeePassenger Sensing System onpage 1-53 and Passenger AirbagStatus Indicator on page 3-32for more information, includingimportant safety information.

A label on the sun visor says,“Never put a rear-facing child seatin the front.” This is because the riskto the rear-facing child is so great,if the airbag deploys.

{ CAUTION

A child in a rear-facing childrestraint can be seriously injured orkilled if the right front passengerairbag inflates. This is becausethe back of the rear-facing childrestraint would be very close tothe inflating airbag. A child in aforward-facing child restraint canbe seriously injured or killed if theright front passenger airbaginflates and the passenger seat isin a forward position.

(Continued)


CAUTION (Continued)

Even if the passenger sensingsystem has turned off the rightfront passenger frontal airbag, nosystem is fail-safe. No one canguarantee that an airbag will notdeploy under some unusualcircumstance, even though it isturned off.


See Passenger Sensing Systemon page 1-53 for additionalinformation.

If the child restraint has the LATCHsystem, see Lower Anchors andTethers for Children (LATCH) onpage 1-34 for how and where toinstall the child restraint usingLATCH. If a child restraint is securedusing a safety belt and it uses a toptether, see Lower Anchors andTethers for Children (LATCH) onpage 1-34 for top tether anchorlocations.

Do not secure a child seat in aposition without a top tether anchorif a national or local law requiresthat the top tether be anchored,or if the instructions that come withthe child restraint say that thetop strap must be anchored.

In Canada, the law requires thatforward-facing child restraints havea top tether, and that the tetherbe attached.

You will be using the lap-shoulderbelt to secure the child restraint inthis position. Follow the instructionsthat came with the child restraint.

1. Move the seat as far back as itwill go before securing theforward-facing child restraint.When the passenger sensingsystem has turned off theright front passenger frontalairbag and seat-mounted sideimpact airbag, the off indicatoron the passenger airbagstatus indicator should light andstay lit when the vehicle isstarted. See Passenger AirbagStatus Indicator on page 3-32.

2. Put the child restraint on the seat.

3. Pick up the latch plate, and runthe lap and shoulder portionsof the vehicle’s safety beltthrough or around the restraint.The child restraint instructionswill show you how.


4. Push the latch plate into thebuckle until it clicks.Position the release button onthe buckle so that the safety beltcould be quickly unbuckled ifnecessary.

5. Pull the rest of the shoulder beltall the way out of the retractor toset the lock.

6. To tighten the belt, push downon the child restraint, pull theshoulder portion of the belt totighten the lap portion of the beltand feed the shoulder belt backinto the retractor. When installinga forward-facing child restraint, itmay be helpful to use your kneeto push down on the childrestraint as you tighten the belt.



If the airbags are off, the offindicator in the passenger airbagstatus indicator will come onand stay on when the vehicle isstarted.

If a child restraint has been installedand the on indicator is lit, see“If the On Indicator is Lit for aChild Restraint” under PassengerSensing System on page 1-53for more information.

To remove the child restraint,unbuckle the vehicle safety belt andlet it return to the stowed position.

Airbag SystemThe vehicle has the followingairbags:

• A frontal airbag for the driver.

• A frontal airbag for the right frontpassenger.

• A seat-mounted side impactairbag for the driver.

• A seat-mounted side impactairbag for the right frontpassenger.

• A roof-rail airbag for the driver,passenger seated directlybehind the driver, and the thirdrow outboard passenger position.

• A roof-rail airbag for the rightfront passenger, passengerseated directly behind the rightfront passenger, and the third rowoutboard passenger position.

All of the airbags in the vehicle willhave the word AIRBAG embossedin the trim or on an attachedlabel near the deployment opening.

For frontal airbags, the wordAIRBAG will appear on the middlepart of the steering wheel forthe driver and on the instrumentpanel for the right front passenger.

With seat-mounted side impactairbags, the word AIRBAGwill appear on the side of theseatback closest to the door.

With roof-rail airbags, the wordAIRBAG will appear along theheadliner or trim.

Airbags are designed to supplementthe protection provided by safetybelts. Even though today’s airbagsare also designed to help reducethe risk of injury from the force ofan inflating bag, all airbags mustinflate very quickly to do their job.


Here are the most important thingsto know about the airbag system:

{ CAUTION

You can be severely injured orkilled in a crash if you are notwearing your safety belt — even ifyou have airbags. Airbags aredesigned to work with safetybelts, but do not replace them.Also, airbags are not designed todeploy in every crash. In somecrashes safety belts are your onlyrestraint. See When Should anAirbag Inflate? on page 1-49.

Wearing your safety belt during acrash helps reduce your chanceof hitting things inside the vehicleor being ejected from it. Airbagsare “supplemental restraints” tothe safety belts. Everyone in yourvehicle should wear a safety beltproperly — whether or not there isan airbag for that person.

{ CAUTION

Airbags inflate with great force,faster than the blink of an eye.Anyone who is up against, or veryclose to, any airbag when itinflates can be seriously injured orkilled. Do not sit unnecessarilyclose to the airbag, as you wouldbe if you were sitting on the edgeof your seat or leaning forward.Safety belts help keep you inposition before and during acrash. Always wear your safetybelt, even with airbags. The drivershould sit as far back as possiblewhile still maintaining control ofthe vehicle.

Occupants should not lean on orsleep against the door or sidewindows in seating positions withseat-mounted side impact airbagsand/or roof-rail airbags.

{ CAUTION

Children who are up against, orvery close to, any airbag when itinflates can be seriously injured orkilled. Airbags plus lap-shoulderbelts offer protection for adultsand older children, but not foryoung children and infants.Neither the vehicle’s safety beltsystem nor its airbag system isdesigned for them. Young childrenand infants need the protectionthat a child restraint system canprovide. Always secure childrenproperly in your vehicle. To readhow, see Older Children onpage 1-25 or Infants and YoungChildren on page 1-28.


There is an airbag readiness lighton the instrument panel cluster,which shows the airbag symbol.

The system checks the airbagelectrical system for malfunctions.The light tells you if there is anelectrical problem. See AirbagReadiness Light on page 3-31 formore information.

Where Are the Airbags?

The driver frontal airbag is in themiddle of the steering wheel.

The right front passenger frontalairbag is in the instrument panel onthe passenger side.


The seat-mounted side impactairbags for the driver and right frontpassenger are in the side of theseatbacks closest to the door.

The roof-rail airbags for the driver,right front passenger, passengersbehind the driver and right frontpassenger, and the third rowoutboard passengers are in theceiling above the side windows.

{ CAUTION

If something is between anoccupant and an airbag, theairbag might not inflate properly orit might force the object into thatperson causing severe injury oreven death. The path of aninflating airbag must be keptclear. Do not put anythingbetween an occupant and anairbag, and do not attach or putanything on the steering wheelhub or on or near any otherairbag covering.

Do not use seat accessories thatblock the inflation path of aseat-mounted side impact airbag.

Never secure anything to the roofof a vehicle with roof-rail airbagsby routing a rope or tie downthrough any door or windowopening. If you do, the path of aninflating roof-rail airbag will beblocked.

Driver Side shown, PassengerSide similar

Driver Side shown, PassengerSide similar


When Should an AirbagInflate?Frontal airbags are designed toinflate in moderate to severe frontalor near-frontal crashes to helpreduce the potential for severeinjuries mainly to the driver’s or rightfront passenger’s head and chest.However, they are only designedto inflate if the impact exceedsa predetermined deploymentthreshold. Deployment thresholdsare used to predict how severea crash is likely to be in time for theairbags to inflate and help restrainthe occupants.

Whether the frontal airbags will orshould deploy is not based onhow fast your vehicle is traveling.It depends largely on what youhit, the direction of the impact,and how quickly your vehicleslows down.

Frontal airbags may inflate atdifferent crash speeds. For example:

• If the vehicle hits a stationaryobject, the airbags couldinflate at a different crash speedthan if the vehicle hits amoving object.

• If the vehicle hits an object thatdeforms, the airbags couldinflate at a different crash speedthan if the vehicle hits anobject that does not deform.

• If the vehicle hits a narrow object(like a pole), the airbags couldinflate at a different crash speedthan if the vehicle hits a wideobject (like a wall).

• If the vehicle goes into an objectat an angle, the airbags couldinflate at a different crash speedthan if the vehicle goes straightinto the object.

Thresholds can also vary withspecific vehicle design.

Frontal airbags are not intended toinflate during vehicle rollovers,rear impacts, or in many sideimpacts.

In addition, the vehicle hasdual-stage frontal airbags.Dual-stage airbags adjust therestraint according to crash severity.The vehicle has electronic frontalsensors, which help the sensingsystem distinguish between amoderate frontal impact and a moresevere frontal impact. For moderatefrontal impacts, dual-stage airbagsinflate at a level less than fulldeployment. For more severe frontalimpacts, full deployment occurs.


The vehicle has seat-mountedside impact and roof-rail airbags.See Airbag System on page 1-45.Seat-mounted side impact androof-rail airbags are intended toinflate in moderate to severe sidecrashes. In addition, these roof-railairbags are intended to inflate duringa rollover or in a severe frontalimpact. Seat-mounted side impactand roof-rail airbags will inflate if thecrash severity is above the system’sdesigned threshold level. Thethreshold level can vary with specificvehicle design.

Seat-mounted side impact airbagsare not intended to inflate in frontalimpacts, near-frontal impacts,rollovers, or rear impacts. Roof-railairbags are not intended to inflate inrear impacts. A seat-mounted sideimpact airbag is intended to deployon the side of the vehicle that isstruck. Both roof-rail airbags willdeploy when either side of thevehicle is struck, or if the sensing

system predicts that the vehicle isabout to roll over, or in a severefrontal impact.

In any particular crash, no one cansay whether an airbag shouldhave inflated simply because of thedamage to a vehicle or becauseof what the repair costs were.For frontal airbags, inflation isdetermined by what the vehicle hits,the angle of the impact, and howquickly the vehicle slows down.For seat-mounted side impact androof-rail airbags, deployment isdetermined by the locationand severity of the side impact.In a rollover event, roof-rail airbagdeployment is determined bythe direction of the roll.

What Makes an AirbagInflate?In a deployment event, the sensingsystem sends an electrical signaltriggering a release of gas from theinflator. Gas from the inflator fills theairbag causing the bag to break outof the cover and deploy. The inflator,the airbag, and related hardware areall part of the airbag module.

Frontal airbag modules are locatedinside the steering wheel andinstrument panel. For vehicles withseat-mounted side impact airbags,there are airbag modules in the sideof the front seatbacks closest tothe door. For vehicles with roof-railairbags, there are airbag modulesin the ceiling of the vehicle, near theside windows that have occupantseating positions.


How Does an AirbagRestrain?In moderate to severe frontal ornear frontal collisions, even beltedoccupants can contact the steeringwheel or the instrument panel. Inmoderate to severe side collisions,even belted occupants can contactthe inside of the vehicle.

Airbags supplement the protectionprovided by safety belts.

Frontal airbags distribute the forceof the impact more evenly over theoccupant’s upper body, stoppingthe occupant more gradually.Seat-mounted side impact androof-rail airbags distribute the forceof the impact more evenly over theoccupant’s upper body.

Rollover capable roof-rail airbagsare designed to help containthe head and chest of occupants inthe outboard seating positions inthe first, second, and third rows.The rollover capable roof-rail airbagsare designed to help reduce therisk of full or partial ejection inrollover events, although no systemcan prevent all such ejections.

But airbags would not help in manytypes of collisions, primarily becausethe occupant’s motion is not towardthose airbags. See When Should anAirbag Inflate? on page 1-49 formore information.

Airbags should never be regardedas anything more than a supplementto safety belts.

What Will You See Afteran Airbag Inflates?After the frontal airbags andseat-mounted side impact airbagsinflate, they quickly deflate, soquickly that some people may noteven realize an airbag inflated.Roof-rail airbags may still be at leastpartially inflated for some time afterthey deploy. Some components ofthe airbag module may be hot forseveral minutes. For location of theairbag modules, see What Makes anAirbag Inflate? on page 1-50.

The parts of the airbag that comeinto contact with you may bewarm, but not too hot to touch.There may be some smokeand dust coming from thevents in the deflated airbags.


Airbag inflation does not preventthe driver from seeing out of thewindshield or being able to steer thevehicle, nor does it prevent peoplefrom leaving the vehicle.

{ CAUTION

When an airbag inflates, there maybe dust in the air. This dust couldcause breathing problems forpeople with a history of asthma orother breathing trouble. To avoidthis, everyone in the vehicle shouldget out as soon as it is safe to doso. If you have breathing problemsbut cannot get out of the vehicleafter an airbag inflates, then getfresh air by opening a window or adoor. If you experience breathingproblems following an airbagdeployment, you should seekmedical attention.

The vehicle has a feature that mayautomatically unlock the doors,turn the interior lamps on, and turnthe hazard warning flashers onwhen the airbags inflate. You canlock the doors, turn the interiorlamps off, and turn the hazardwarning flashers off by using thecontrols for those features.

In many crashes severe enoughto inflate the airbag, windshieldsare broken by vehicle deformation.Additional windshield breakagemay also occur from the right frontpassenger airbag.

• Airbags are designed to inflateonly once. After an airbag inflates,you will need some new parts forthe airbag system. If you do notget them, the airbag system will

not be there to help protect you inanother crash. A new system willinclude airbag modules andpossibly other parts. The servicemanual for your vehicle coversthe need to replace other parts.

• The vehicle has a crash sensingand diagnostic module whichrecords information after a crash.See Vehicle Data Recording andPrivacy on page 7-14 and EventData Recorders on page 7-15.

• Let only qualified technicians workon the airbag systems. Improperservice can mean that an airbagsystem will not work properly.See your dealer/retailer forservice.


Passenger SensingSystemThe vehicle has a passengersensing system for the right frontpassenger position. The passengerairbag status indicator will bevisible on the instrument panelwhen the vehicle is started.

The words ON and OFF, or thesymbol for on and off, are visibleduring the system check.

If you are using remote start, ifequipped, to start the vehicle from adistance, you may not see thesystem check. When the systemcheck is complete, either the wordON or OFF, or the symbol for on oroff, will be visible. See PassengerAirbag Status Indicator onpage 3-32.

The passenger sensing system turnsoff the right front passenger frontalairbag under certain conditions.The driver airbag, seat-mountedside impact airbags and the roof-railairbags are not affected by thepassenger sensing system.

The passenger sensing systemworks with sensors that are partof the right front passenger seat.

The sensors are designed to detectthe presence of a properly-seatedoccupant and determine if the rightfront passenger frontal airbag shouldbe enabled (may inflate) or not.

According to accident statistics,children are safer when properlysecured in a rear seat in thecorrect child restraint for theirweight and size.

We recommend that children besecured in a rear seat, including: aninfant or a child riding in arear-facing child restraint; a childriding in a forward-facing child seat;an older child riding in a boosterseat; and children, who arelarge enough, using safety belts.

United States

Canada


A label on the sun visor says,“Never put a rear-facing child seatin the front.” This is because the riskto the rear-facing child is so great,if the airbag deploys.

{ CAUTION

A child in a rear-facing childrestraint can be seriously injuredor killed if the right front passengerairbag inflates. This is becausethe back of the rear-facing childrestraint would be very close tothe inflating airbag. A child in aforward-facing child restraint canbe seriously injured or killed ifthe right front passenger airbaginflates and the passenger seatis in a forward position.

Even if the passenger sensingsystem has turned off the rightfront passenger frontal airbag, no

(Continued)

CAUTION (Continued)

system is fail-safe. No one canguarantee that an airbag will notdeploy under some unusualcircumstance, even though theairbag is turned off.


The passenger sensing system isdesigned to turn off the rightfront passenger frontal airbag if:

• The right front passenger seat isunoccupied.

• The system determines that aninfant is present in a childrestraint.

• A right front passenger takeshis/her weight off of the seat for aperiod of time.

• Or, if there is a critical problemwith the airbag system or thepassenger sensing system.

When the passenger sensingsystem has turned off the rightfront passenger frontal airbag,the off indicator will light and stay litto remind you that the airbag isoff. See Passenger Airbag StatusIndicator on page 3-32.

The passenger sensing system isdesigned to turn on (may inflate) theright front passenger frontal airbaganytime the system senses that aperson of adult size is sitting properlyin the right front passenger seat.

When the passenger sensingsystem has allowed the airbag to beenabled, the on indicator will lightand stay lit to remind you thatthe airbag is active.


For some children, including childrenin child restraints, and for very smalladults, the passenger sensingsystem may or may not turn off theright front passenger frontal airbag,depending upon the person’s seatingposture and body build. Everyone inthe vehicle who has outgrown childrestraints should wear a safety beltproperly — whether or not there is anairbag for that person.

{ CAUTION

If the airbag readiness light evercomes on and stays on, it meansthat something may be wrong withthe airbag system. To help avoidinjury to yourself or others, havethe vehicle serviced right away.See Airbag Readiness Light onpage 3-31 for more information,including important safetyinformation.

If the On Indicator is Lit for aChild RestraintIf a child restraint has been installedand the on indicator is lit:

1. Turn the vehicle off.

2. Remove the child restraint fromthe vehicle.

3. Remove any additional itemsfrom the seat such as blankets,cushions, seat covers, seatheaters, or seat massagers.

4. Reinstall the child restraintfollowing the directions providedby the child restraint manufacturerand refer to Securing a ChildRestraint in the Right Front SeatPosition on page 1-42.

5. If, after reinstalling the childrestraint and restarting thevehicle, the on indicator is still lit,turn the vehicle off. Then slightlyrecline the vehicle seatback andadjust the seat cushion, ifadjustable, to make sure that thevehicle seatback is not pushingthe child restraint into the seatcushion.Also make sure the child restraintis not trapped under the vehiclehead restraint. If this happens,adjust the head restraint. SeeHead Restraints on page 1-2.

6. Restart the vehicle.The passenger sensing systemmay or may not turn off theairbag for a child in a childrestraint depending upon thechild’s seating posture and bodybuild. It is better to secure thechild restraint in a rear seat.


If the Off Indicator is Lit for anAdult-Size Occupant

If a person of adult-size is sittingin the right front passenger seat,but the off indicator is lit, it could bebecause that person is not sittingproperly in the seat. If this happens,use the following steps to allowthe system to detect that person andenable the right front passengerfrontal airbag:1. Turn the vehicle off.2. Remove any additional material

from the seat, such as blankets,cushions, seat covers, seatheaters, or seat massagers.

3. Place the seatback in the fullyupright position.

4. Have the person sit upright inthe seat, centered on the seatcushion, with legs comfortablyextended.

5. Restart the vehicle and have theperson remain in this position fortwo to three minutes after theon indicator is lit.

Additional Factors AffectingSystem OperationSafety belts help keep the passengerin position on the seat during vehiclemaneuvers and braking, which helpsthe passenger sensing systemmaintain the passenger airbagstatus. See “Safety Belts” and “ChildRestraints” in the Index for additionalinformation about the importance ofproper restraint use.A thick layer of additional material,such as a blanket or cushion, oraftermarket equipment such as seatcovers, seat heaters, and seatmassagers can affect how well thepassenger sensing system operates.

We recommend that you not useseat covers or other aftermarketequipment except when approvedby GM for your specific vehicle.See Adding Equipment to YourAirbag-Equipped Vehicle onpage 1-58 for more informationabout modifications that can affecthow the system operates.A wet seat can affect theperformance of the passengersensing system. Here is how:• The passenger sensing system

may turn off the passenger airbagwhen liquid is soaked into theseat. If this happens, the offindicator will be lit, and the airbagreadiness light on the instrumentpanel will also be lit.

• Liquid pooled on the seat that hasnot soaked in may make it morelikely that the passenger sensingsystem will enable (turn on) thepassenger airbag while a childrestraint or child occupant is onthe seat. If the passenger airbagis turned on, the on indicator willbe lit.


If the passenger seat gets wet, drythe seat immediately. If the airbagreadiness light is lit, do not install achild restraint or allow anyone tooccupy the seat. See AirbagReadiness Light on page 3-31 forimportant safety information.

The on indicator may be lit if anobject, such as a briefcase,handbag, grocery bag, laptop orother electronic device, is put on anunoccupied seat. If this is not desiredremove the object from the seat.

{ CAUTION

Stowing of articles under thepassenger seat or between thepassenger seat cushion andseatback may interfere with theproper operation of the passengersensing system.

Servicing YourAirbag-Equipped VehicleAirbags affect how the vehicleshould be serviced. There are partsof the airbag system in severalplaces around the vehicle. Yourdealer/retailer and the servicemanual have information aboutservicing the vehicle and the airbagsystem. To purchase a servicemanual, see Service PublicationsOrdering Information on page 7-13.

{ CAUTION

For up to 10 seconds after theignition is turned off and thebattery is disconnected, an airbagcan still inflate during improperservice. You can be injured if youare close to an airbag when itinflates. Avoid yellow connectors.They are probably part of theairbag system. Be sure to followproper service procedures, andmake sure the person performingwork for you is qualified to do so.


Adding Equipment toYour Airbag-EquippedVehicleQ: Is there anything I might add to

or change about the vehiclethat could keep the airbagsfrom working properly?

A: Yes. If you add things thatchange the vehicle’s frame,bumper system, height, front endor side sheet metal, they maykeep the airbag system fromworking properly. Changing ormoving any parts of the frontseats, safety belts, the airbagsensing and diagnostic module,steering wheel, instrument panel,roof-rail airbag modules, ceilingheadliner or pillar garnish trim,front sensors, side impactsensors, rollover sensor module,or airbag wiring can affect theoperation of the airbag system.

In addition, the vehicle has apassenger sensing system for theright front passenger position,which includes sensors thatare part of the passenger seat.The passenger sensing systemmay not operate properly if theoriginal seat trim is replacedwith non-GM covers, upholsteryor trim, or with GM covers,upholstery or trim designed fora different vehicle. Any object,such as an aftermarket seatheater or a comfort enhancingpad or device, installed under oron top of the seat fabric, couldalso interfere with the operation ofthe passenger sensing system.This could either prevent properdeployment of the passengerairbag(s) or prevent the

passenger sensing system fromproperly turning off the passengerairbag(s). See PassengerSensing System on page 1-53.

If you have questions, callCustomer Assistance. The phonenumbers and addresses forCustomer Assistance are inStep Two of the CustomerSatisfaction Procedure inthis manual. See CustomerSatisfaction Procedure onpage 7-1.

If the vehicle has rollover roof-railairbags, see Different Size Tiresand Wheels on page 5-53 foradditional important information.


Q: Because I have a disability,I have to get my vehiclemodified. How can I find outwhether this will affect myairbag system?

A: If you have questions, callCustomer Assistance. The phonenumbers and addresses forCustomer Assistance are inStep Two of the CustomerSatisfaction Procedure inthis manual. See CustomerSatisfaction Procedure onpage 7-1.

In addition, your dealer/retailer andthe service manual have informationabout the location of the airbagsensors, sensing and diagnosticmodule and airbag wiring.

Restraint SystemCheck

Checking the RestraintSystemsSafety BeltsNow and then, check that the safetybelt reminder light, safety belts,buckles, latch plates, retractors, andanchorages are all working properly.

Look for any other loose or damagedsafety belt system parts that mightkeep a safety belt system from doingits job. See your dealer/retailer tohave it repaired. Torn or frayedsafety belts may not protect you in acrash. They can rip apart underimpact forces. If a belt is torn orfrayed, get a new one right away.

Make sure the safety belt reminderlight is working. See Safety BeltReminders on page 3-30 for moreinformation.

Keep safety belts clean and dry.See Care of Safety Belts onpage 5-82.

AirbagsThe airbag system does not needregularly scheduled maintenanceor replacement. Make sure theairbag readiness light is working.See Airbag Readiness Lighton page 3-31 for more information.

Notice: If an airbag coveringis damaged, opened, or broken,the airbag may not work properly.Do not open or break the airbagcoverings. If there are any openedor broken airbag covers, havethe airbag covering and/or airbagmodule replaced. For thelocation of the airbag modules,see What Makes an AirbagInflate? on page 1-50. See yourdealer/retailer for service.


Replacing RestraintSystem Parts After aCrash

{ CAUTION

A crash can damage therestraint systems in your vehicle.A damaged restraint system maynot properly protect the personusing it, resulting in serious injuryor even death in a crash. To helpmake sure your restraint systemsare working properly after a crash,have them inspected and anynecessary replacements made assoon as possible.

If the vehicle has been in a crash,do you need new safety beltsor LATCH system (if equipped)parts?

After a very minor crash, nothingmay be necessary. But thesafety belt assemblies that wereused during any crash mayhave been stressed or damaged.See your dealer/retailer to have thesafety belt assemblies inspectedor replaced.

If the vehicle has the LATCHsystem and it was being usedduring a crash, you may neednew LATCH system parts.

New parts and repairs may benecessary even if the safety beltor LATCH system (if equipped), wasnot being used at the time of thecrash.

If an airbag inflates, you will needto replace airbag system parts.See the part on the airbag systemearlier in this section.

Have the safety belt pretensionerschecked if the vehicle has been in acrash, if the airbag readiness lightstays on after the vehicle is started,or while you are driving. See AirbagReadiness Light on page 3-31.


Features andControls

KeysKeys ...................................2-2Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System ..............................2-3

Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System Operation ................2-4

Remote Vehicle Start .............2-5

Doors and LocksDoor Locks ..........................2-8Power Door Locks .................2-8Delayed Locking ...................2-8Programmable AutomaticDoor Locks .........................2-9

Rear Door Security Locks .......2-9Lockout Protection .................2-9Liftgate ...............................2-10Power Liftgate .....................2-11

WindowsWindows ............................2-14Power Windows ..................2-14Sun Visors .........................2-16

Theft-Deterrent SystemsTheft-Deterrent Systems .......2-16Content Theft-Deterrent ........2-16PASS-Key® III+ ElectronicImmobilizer .......................2-18

PASS-Key® III+ ElectronicImmobilizer Operation .........2-18

Starting and OperatingYour VehicleNew Vehicle Break-In ...........2-20Ignition Positions .................2-21Retained AccessoryPower (RAP) .....................2-22

Starting the Engine ..............2-22Engine Coolant Heater .........2-23Automatic TransmissionOperation ..........................2-24

Tow/Haul Mode ...................2-26Parking Brake .....................2-27Shifting Into Park .................2-28Shifting Out of Park .............2-29Parking Over ThingsThat Burn .........................2-29

Engine Exhaust ...................2-30Running the VehicleWhile Parked ....................2-30

MirrorsAutomatic DimmingRearview Mirror .................2-31

Outside Power Mirrors ..........2-32Outside Power FoldawayMirrors .............................2-32

Park Tilt Mirrors ..................2-33Outside Convex Mirror ..........2-34Outside Heated Mirrors .........2-34

Object Detection SystemsUltrasonic Rear ParkingAssist (URPA) ...................2-34

Rear VisionCamera (RVC) ...................2-37

OnStar® SystemOnStar® System ..................2-41

Universal Home RemoteSystemUniversal Home RemoteSystem .............................2-44

Universal Home RemoteSystem Operation ..............2-45

Features and Controls 2-1

Storage AreasGlove Box ..........................2-49Cupholders .........................2-49Instrument Panel Storage ......2-49Center Console Storage .......2-49Second Row CenterConsole ............................2-50

Floor Mats ..........................2-51Luggage Carrier ..................2-51Rear Seat Armrest ...............2-52Cargo Tie Downs ................2-52Cargo ManagementSystem .............................2-52

SunroofSunroof ..............................2-54

Keys

{ CAUTION

Leaving children in a vehicle withthe ignition key is dangerous formany reasons, children or otherscould be badly injured or evenkilled. They could operate thepower windows or other controlsor even make the vehicle move.The windows will function with thekeys in the ignition and childrencould be seriously injured or killedif caught in the path of a closingwindow. Do not leave the keys ina vehicle with children.

The key is used for the ignition andall door locks.

The key has a bar-coded key tagthat the dealer/retailer or qualifiedlocksmith can use to make newkeys. Store this information in a safeplace, not in the vehicle.

See your dealer/retailer if areplacement key or additional key isneeded.

Notice: If you ever lock yourkeys in the vehicle, you may haveto damage the vehicle to get in.Be sure you have spare keys.

2-2 Features and Controls

If you are locked out of the vehicle,call the Roadside AssistanceCenter. See Roadside AssistanceProgram on page 7-6.

Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) SystemThe Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)system operates on a radiofrequency subject to FederalCommunications Commission (FCC)Rules and with Industry Canada.

This device complies with Part 15 ofthe FCC Rules. Operation issubject to the following twoconditions:

1. This device may not causeinterference.

2. This device must accept anyinterference received, includinginterference that may causeundesired operation of thedevice.

This device complies with RSS-210of Industry Canada. Operation issubject to the following twoconditions:


2. This device must accept anyinterference received, includinginterference that may causeundesired operation of the device.

Changes or modifications to thissystem by other than an authorizedservice facility could voidauthorization to use this equipment.

If there is a decrease in the RKEoperating range, try this:

• Check the distance. Thetransmitter may be too far fromthe vehicle. Stand closerduring rainy or snowy weather.

• Check the location. Othervehicles or objects may beblocking the signal. Take a fewsteps to the left or right, holdthe transmitter higher, andtry again.

• Check the transmitter’s battery.See “Battery Replacement”later in this section.

• If the transmitter is still notworking correctly, see yourdealer/retailer or a qualifiedtechnician for service.


Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) System OperationThe Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter functions work upto 195 feet (60 m) away from thevehicle.

There are other conditions whichcan affect the performance ofthe transmitter. See Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) System on page 2-3.

/ (Remote Vehicle Start): Forvehicles with this feature, seeRemote Vehicle Start on page 2-5for additional information.

Q (Lock): Press to lock all thedoors.

If enabled through the DriverInformation Center (DIC), the parkinglamps flash once to indicate lockinghas occurred. If enabled through theDIC, the horn sounds when Q ispressed again within five seconds.See DIC Vehicle Customization onpage 3-59 for additional information.

Pressing Q may arm the contenttheft-deterrent system. See ContentTheft-Deterrent on page 2-16.

K (Unlock): Press once to unlockonly the driver door. If K is pressedagain within five seconds, allremaining doors unlock. The interiorlamps come on and stay on for20 seconds or until the ignition isturned on.

If enabled through the DIC, theparking lamps flash twice to indicateunlocking has occurred. See DICVehicle Customization on page 3-59.

Pressing K on the RKE transmitterdisarms the content theft-deterrentsystem. See Content Theft-Deterrenton page 2-16.

& (Power Liftgate): Press andhold for about one second toopen and close the liftgate. Thetaillamps flash and a chime soundsto indicate when the liftgate isopening and closing.

L (Vehicle Locator/Panic Alarm):Press and release to locate thevehicle. The parking lamps flash andthe horn sounds three times.

Press and hold L for more thantwo seconds to activate thepanic alarm. The parking lampsflash and the horn soundsrepeatedly for 30 seconds. Thealarm turns off when the ignition ismoved to ON/RUN or L is

With Remote Start and Liftgate(Without Remote Start or Liftgate

Similar)


pressed again. The ignition must bein LOCK/OFF for the panic alarmto work.

Programming Transmitters tothe VehicleOnly RKE transmitters programmedto this vehicle will work. If atransmitter is lost or stolen, areplacement can be purchased andprogrammed through your dealer/retailer. When the replacementtransmitter is programmed to thisvehicle using the DIC, all remainingtransmitters must also bereprogrammed. Any lost or stolentransmitters will no longer work oncethe new transmitter is programmed.Each vehicle can have up to eighttransmitters programmed to it. See“Relearn Remote Key” under DICOperation and Displays onpage 3-43 for instructions on how toprogram transmitters to this vehicle.

Battery ReplacementReplace the battery if the REPLACEBATTERY IN REMOTE KEYmessage displays in the DIC.

Notice: When replacing thebattery, do not touch any of thecircuitry on the transmitter. Staticfrom your body could damagethe transmitter.

1. Separate the transmitter with aflat, thin object inserted into thenotch on the side.

2. Remove the old battery. Do notuse a metal object.

3. Insert the new battery, positiveside facing down. Replace witha CR2032 or equivalent battery.

4. Snap the transmitter backtogether.

Remote Vehicle StartThis vehicle may have a remotestarting feature that starts the enginefrom outside of the vehicle.

If the vehicle has an automaticclimate control system, the climatecontrol system defaults to a heatingor cooling mode depending on theoutside temperatures. If the vehicledoes not have an automatic climatecontrol system, the system turns onat the setting the vehicle was set towhen the vehicle was last turned off.


If the vehicle has an automaticclimate control system and heatedseats, the heated seats turn onduring colder outside temperaturesand shut off when the key isturned to ON/RUN. See HeatedSeats on page 1-4 or Heated andCooled Seats on page 1-4 formore information.

The rear window defogger andheated mirrors, if the vehicle hasthem, turn on during colder outsidetemperatures and turn off whenthe key is turned to ON/RUN.

Laws in some communities mayrestrict the use of remote starters.For example, some laws mayrequire a person using the remotestart to have the vehicle in viewwhen doing so. Check localregulations for any requirements onremote starting of vehicles.

Do not use the remote start featureif the vehicle is low on fuel. Thevehicle could run out of fuel.

If the vehicle has the remote startfeature, the RKE transmitterfunctions have an increased rangeof operation. However, the rangemay be less while the vehicleis running.

There are other conditions whichcan affect the performance ofthe transmitter, see Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) System on page 2-3for additional information.

/ (Remote Start): This button islocated on the RKE transmitter if thevehicle has remote start.

To start the vehicle:

1. Aim the transmitter at thevehicle.

2. Press and release Q, thenimmediately press and hold/ until the parking lamps flash.If the vehicle’s lights can notbe seen, press and hold / for atleast four seconds. Thevehicle’s doors lock. When thevehicle starts, the parkinglamps turn on and remain onwhile the vehicle is running.

Pressing / again, after thevehicle has started, shuts thevehicle off.

3. If it is the first remote start sincethe vehicle has been driven,repeat these steps while theengine is still running, to extendthe time by 10 minutes for theengine to continue to run. Remotestart can be extended one time.


After entering the vehicle during aremote start, insert and turn the keyto the ON/RUN position to drivethe vehicle.

If the vehicle is left running itautomatically shuts off after10 minutes unless a time extensionhas been done.

To manually shut off a remote start:

• Aim the RKE transmitter at thevehicle and press / until theparking lamps turn off.

• Turn on the hazard warningflashers.

• Turn the ignition switch on andthen off.

The vehicle can be started using theremote start feature two separatetimes between driving sequences.The engine runs for 10 minutes aftereach remote start. Or, the enginerun time can be extended another10 minutes within the first 10 minuteremote start time frame, andbefore the engine stops.

For example, if Q and then / arepressed again after the vehiclehas been running for five minutes,10 minutes are added, allowingthe engine to run for 15 minutes.

The additional 10 minutes areconsidered a second remote start.

The vehicle must be started with thekey once two remote starts, or asingle remote start with onetime extension has been done.

The vehicle can be started using theremote start feature again afterthe key is removed from the ignition.

The vehicle cannot be startedusing the remote start feature if thekey is in the ignition, the hood isopen, or if there is an emissioncontrol system malfunction.

The engine turns off during aremote start if the coolanttemperature gets too high or ifthe oil pressure gets low.

Vehicles that have the remotevehicle start feature are shippedfrom the factory with the remotevehicle start system enabled. Thesystem may be enabled or disabledthrough the DIC if the vehicle hasDIC buttons. See “REMOTESTART” under DIC VehicleCustomization on page 3-59 foradditional information. If the vehicledoes not have DIC buttons, seeyour dealer/retailer to enableor disable the remote start system.


Doors and Locks

Door Locks

{ CAUTION

Unlocked doors can bedangerous.

• Passengers, especiallychildren, can easily open thedoors and fall out of a movingvehicle. When a door islocked, the handle will notopen it. The chance of beingthrown out of the vehicle in acrash is increased if thedoors are not locked. So, allpassengers should wearsafety belts properly and thedoors should be lockedwhenever the vehicle isdriven.

(Continued)

CAUTION (Continued)

• Young children who get intounlocked vehicles may beunable to get out. A child canbe overcome by extreme heatand can suffer permanentinjuries or even death fromheat stroke. Always lock thevehicle whenever leaving it.

• Outsiders can easily enterthrough an unlocked doorwhen you slow down or stopyour vehicle. Locking yourdoors can help prevent thisfrom happening.

To lock or unlock a door, use thekey from the outside or the door lockfrom the inside.

Power Door LocksThe power door lock switches arelocated on the front doors.

" (Unlock): Press to unlock thedoors.

Q (Lock): Remove the key fromthe ignition and press to lockthe doors.

Delayed LockingWhen locking the doors with thepower lock switch and a door or theliftgate is open, the doors will lockfive seconds after the last door isclosed. You will hear three chimes tosignal that the delayed lockingfeature is in use.

Pressing the power lock switchtwice or the lock button on the RKEtransmitter twice will override thedelayed locking feature andimmediately lock all the doors.


This feature will not operate if thekey is in the ignition.

This feature can be programmed byusing the Driver InformationCenter (DIC). See “DELAY DOORLOCK” under DIC VehicleCustomization on page 3-59.

Programmable AutomaticDoor LocksVehicles with an automaticlock/unlock feature enable you toprogram the vehicle’s powerdoor locks. This feature can beprogrammed through the DriverInformation Center (DIC). See DICVehicle Customization onpage 3-59 for more information.

Rear Door SecurityLocksThe vehicle has rear door securitylocks to prevent passengersfrom opening the rear doors fromthe inside.

Open the rear doors to access thesecurity locks on the inside edgeof each door.

To set the locks, insert a key intothe slot and turn it to the horizontalposition. The door can only beopened from the outside with the

door unlocked. To return the door tonormal operation, turn the slot tothe vertical position.

Lockout ProtectionThis feature protects you fromlocking the key in the vehicle whenthe key is in the ignition and afront door is open.

If the driver side power door lockswitch is pressed when the driver’sdoor is open and the key is inthe ignition, all of the doors will lockand then the driver door willunlock.

If the passenger side power doorlock switch is pressed when the frontpassenger door is open and thekey is in the ignition, all of the doorswill lock and then the frontpassenger door will unlock.


Liftgate

{ CAUTION

Exhaust gases can enter thevehicle if it is driven with theliftgate, trunk/hatch open, or withany objects that pass through theseal between the body and thetrunk/hatch or liftgate. Engineexhaust contains CarbonMonoxide (CO) which cannot beseen or smelled. It can causeunconsciousness and even death.

If the vehicle must be driven withthe liftgate, or trunk/hatch open:

• Close all of the windows.• Fully open the air outlets on

or under the instrumentpanel.

(Continued)

CAUTION (Continued)

• Adjust the Climate Controlsystem to a setting thatbrings in only outside air andset the fan speed to thehighest setting. See ClimateControl System in the Index.

• If the vehicle is equipped witha power liftgate, disable thepower liftgate function.

For more information aboutcarbon monoxide, see EngineExhaust on page 2-30.

If the vehicle has a power liftgate,see Power Liftgate on page 2-11.

To unlock the liftgate, use the powerdoor lock switch or press the doorunlock button on the RKE transmittertwice. See Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) System Operation onpage 2-4.

To open the liftgate, press thetouchpad under the liftgate handle.The vehicle must be in P (Park)to open the liftgate. To closethe liftgate, use the pull cup or pullstrap as an aid.

The liftgate will not open if thebattery is disconnected or has lowvoltage. The liftgate will resumeoperation when the battery isreconnected and charged.

If the battery is properly connectedand has adequate voltage, andthe liftgate still will not function, thevehicle should be taken to adealers/retailer for service.


Power LiftgatePower Liftgate Operation

{ CAUTION

Exhaust gases can enter thevehicle if it is driven with theliftgate, trunk/hatch open, or withany objects that pass through theseal between the body and thetrunk/hatch or liftgate. Engineexhaust contains CarbonMonoxide (CO) which cannot beseen or smelled. It can causeunconsciousness and even death.

If the vehicle must be driven withthe liftgate, or trunk/hatch open:

• Close all of the windows.• Fully open the air outlets on

or under the instrumentpanel.

(Continued)

CAUTION (Continued)

• Adjust the Climate Controlsystem to a setting thatbrings in only outside air andset the fan speed to thehighest setting. See ClimateControl System in the Index.

• If the vehicle is equipped witha power liftgate, disable thepower liftgate function.


The vehicle may have a powerliftgate. The vehicle must bein P (Park) to use this feature.

The taillamps will flash and a chimewill sound when the power liftgateis used.

{ CAUTION

You or others could be injured ifcaught in the path of the powerliftgate. Make sure there is no onein the way of the liftgate as it isopening and closing.

Notice: If you open the liftgatewithout checking for overheadobstructions such as a garagedoor, you could damage theliftgate or the liftgate glass.Always check to make sure thearea above and behind the liftgateis clear before opening it.

The power liftgate can be poweropened and closed in thefollowing ways:

• Press and hold the power liftgatebutton on the RKE transmitter.See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System Operation on page 2-4for more information.


• Press the liftgate button on thecenter console.

• Press the touchpad on theoutside liftgate handle.

Pressing the buttons or touchpad asecond time while the liftgate ismoving reverses the direction.

The liftgate can also be closed bypressing the power liftgatebutton next to the liftgate latch.Press the button a secondtime during liftgate operation toreverse that operation.

The power liftgate may betemporarily disabled under extremetemperatures or under low batteryconditions. If this occurs, the liftgatecan still be operated manually.

If the transmission is shifted out ofP (Park) while the power function isin progress, the liftgate powerfunction will continue to completion.If the transmission is shifted out ofP (Park) and the vehicle acceleratesbefore the power liftgate latchesclosed, the liftgate may reverse tothe open position. Cargo could fallout of the vehicle. Always make surethe power liftgate is closed andlatched before you drive away.

If you power open the liftgate andthe liftgate support struts havelost pressure, the lights will flashand a chime will sound. The liftgatewill stay open temporarily, thenslowly close. See your dealer/retailerfor service before using the liftgateif this occurs.

Obstacle Detection Features

A warning chime will sound and theliftgate will automatically reversedirection to the full closed oropen position if the liftgateencounters an obstacle during apower open or close cycle.

Power Liftgate Button nearLiftgate Latch


After removing the obstruction, thepower liftgate operation can beused again.

If the liftgate comes across moreobstacles on the same power cycle,the power function deactivates,and you must manually openor close the liftgate. A messagedisplays, LIFTGATE OPEN,to indicate that the liftgate is open.See Driver Information Center(DIC) on page 3-42 for moreinformation. After removing theobstructions, manually openthe liftgate to the full open positionor close the liftgate to the fullyclosed and latched position. Theliftgate resumes normal poweroperation.

The vehicle has pinch sensorslocated on the side edges of theliftgate. If an object is caughtbetween the liftgate and the bodyand presses against this sensor, theliftgate will reverse direction andopen fully. The liftgate will remainopen until it is activated again

or closed manually. Do not force theliftgate open or closed during apower cycle.

Manual Operation of PowerLiftgate

To change the liftgate to manualoperation, press the switch onthe center console to the OFFposition.

With the power liftgate disabled andall of the doors unlocked, the liftgatecan be manually opened and closed.

To open the liftgate, press thetouchpad on the handle on theoutside of the liftgate and lift the gateopen. To close the liftgate, use thepull cup to lower the liftgate andclose. The liftgate latch will powerclose. Always close the liftgatebefore driving.

If the RKE button or the power closebutton on the liftgate is pressed whilepower operation is disabled, thelights will flash three times, but theliftgate will not move.

It is not recommended that youdrive with the liftgate open.However, if you must drive with theliftgate open, the liftgate shouldbe set to manual operation bypressing the OFF switch on thecenter console.


Windows

{ CAUTION

Leaving children, helpless adults,or pets in a vehicle with thewindows closed is dangerous.They can be overcome bythe extreme heat and sufferpermanent injuries or even deathfrom heat stroke. Never leave achild, a helpless adult, or a petalone in a vehicle, especially withthe windows closed in warm or hotweather.

Power Windows

{ CAUTION

Leaving children in a vehicle withthe keys is dangerous for manyreasons, children or others couldbe badly injured or even killed.They could operate the powerwindows or other controls or evenmake the vehicle move. Thewindows will function and theycould be seriously injured or killedif caught in the path of a closingwindow. Do not leave keys in avehicle with children.

When there are children in therear seat use the window lockoutbutton to prevent unintentionaloperation of the windows.


The power window controls arelocated on each of the side doors.

The driver door also has switchesthat control the passenger and rearwindows. The power windowswork with the ignition inACC/ACCESSORY, ON/RUN orwhen Retained Accessory Power(RAP) is active. See RetainedAccessory Power (RAP) onpage 2-22.

Press the switch to lower thewindow. Pull up on the front edge ofthe switch to raise the window.

Express-Down WindowsThe express-down feature allowsthe windows to be lowered withoutholding the switch. Press thewindow switch fully and release it toactivate the express-down feature.The express mode can be canceledby pressing or pulling the switch.

Express-Up WindowThe express-up feature allows thewindows to be raised all the waywithout holding the switch up. Pullthe switch up fully and release it toactivate the express-up feature. Theexpress-up mode can be canceledby pressing or pulling the switch.

Programming the PowerWindowsIf the battery on the vehicle hasbeen recharged, disconnected, orreplaced, windows with theexpress-up feature need to bereprogrammed for this feature towork. To program the window:

1. Close all doors with the ignition inthe ACC/ACCESSORY, ON/RUNposition, or when RetainedAccessory Power (RAP) is active.See Retained Accessory Power(RAP) on page 2-22.

2. Press and continue to hold thewindow switch until the windowis fully open.

3. Pull up and hold the windowswitch to close the window.Continue to hold it briefly afterthe window is fully closed.

4. Repeat for each window that hasthe express-up feature.

Uplevel shown, base similar


Anti-Pinch FeatureThe anti-pinch feature is on windowswith the express-up feature. If anobject is in the way of the window asit is express-closing, or in certainweather conditions like severe icing,the window will stop and open toa factory preset position. Thewindow functions normally once theobstruction is removed.

Window Lockout

o (Window Lockout): Thewindow lockout switch is locatedwith the power window switches onthe driver door armrest. Thisfeature prevents the rear passengerwindows from operating thewindows, except from the driverposition. Press the switch to turn thelockout feature on or off. Anindicator light will come on to showthe lockout feature is on.

Sun VisorsPull the sun visor down to blockglare. Detach the sun visor from thecenter mount and slide it alongthe rod from side-to-side to coverthe driver or passenger side ofthe front window. Swing thesun visor to the side to cover theside window. It can be moved alongthe rod from side-to-side in thisposition also.

Lighted Visor Vanity MirrorThe vehicle has lighted visor vanitymirrors on both the driver andpassenger sun visors. Pull the sunvisor down and lift the mirrorcover to turn the lamps on.

Theft-DeterrentSystemsVehicle theft is big business,especially in some cities. Thisvehicle has theft-deterrent features,however, they do not make itimpossible to steal.

Content Theft-DeterrentThis vehicle has a contenttheft-deterrent alarm system.

To activate the theft-deterrentsystem:

• Press Q on the Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) transmitter or thepower door lock switch when anydoor is open.

The security light flashes.


When the door is closed, thesecurity light stops flashing andstays on solid for approximately30 seconds. The contenttheft deterrent alarm is not armeduntil the security light goes off.If the delayed locking feature isactive, the alarm is not activateduntil all doors are closed and thesecurity light goes off.

• Press Q when the driver door isclosed. The security light comeson solid for approximately30 seconds and then goes off.The content theft deterrent alarmis not armed until the security lightgoes off.

The theft-deterrent system will notactivate if the doors are lockedwith the vehicle’s key or the manualdoor lock.

If a locked door is opened withoutusing the RKE transmitter, aten second pre-alarm occurs. Thehorn chirps and the lights flash.If the key is not placed in the ignitionand turned to START or the door

is not unlocked by pressing Qduring the ten second pre-alarm, thealarm goes off. The headlampsflash and the horn sounds for abouttwo minutes, then turns off tosave the battery power.

The vehicle can be started with thecorrect ignition key if the alarmhas been set off.

To avoid setting off the alarm byaccident:

• Lock the vehicle with the doorkey after the doors are closed.

• Unlock the door with the RKEtransmitter. Unlocking a doorany other way sets off the alarmif the system has been armed.

Press K or place the key inthe ignition and turn it to START toturn off the alarm.

Testing the AlarmTo test the alarm:

1. From inside the vehicle, lowerthe driver side window andopen the driver door.

2. Press Q.

3. Get out of the vehicle, close thedoor and wait for the securitylight to go out.

4. Then reach in through thewindow, unlock the door with themanual door lock and open thedoor. This should set off thealarm.

If the alarm does not sound when itshould, but the vehicle’s headlampsflash, check to see if the hornworks. The horn fuse may be blown.To replace the fuse, see Fusesand Circuit Breakers on page 5-88.

If the alarm does not sound orthe vehicle’s headlamps donot flash, see your dealer/retailerfor service.


PASS-Key® III+ ElectronicImmobilizerThe PASS-Key III+ system operateson a radio frequency subject toFederal CommunicationsCommission (FCC) Rules and withIndustry Canada.


1. This device may not causeharmful interference.

2. This device must accept anyinterference received, includinginterference that may causeundesired operation.




Changes or modifications tothis system by other than anauthorized service facility could voidauthorization to use this equipment.

PASS-Key III+ uses a radiofrequency transponder in the keythat matches a decoder in thevehicle.

PASS-Key® III+ ElectronicImmobilizer OperationThis vehicle has PASS-Key® III+(Personalized Automotive SecuritySystem) theft-deterrent system.PASS-Key® III+ is a passivetheft-deterrent system.

The system is automatically armedwhen the key is removed fromthe ignition.

The system is automaticallydisarmed when the key is turned toON/RUN, ACC/ACCESSORY orSTART from the LOCK/OFFposition.

You do not have to manually arm ordisarm the system.

The security light comes on if thereis a problem with arming ordisarming the theft-deterrent system.

When the PASS-Key® III+ systemsenses an incorrect key, the vehicledoes not start. Anyone using atrial-and-error method to start the


vehicle will be discouraged becauseof the high number of electricalkey codes.

If the engine does not start and thesecurity light on the instrument panelcomes on when trying to start thevehicle, there may be a problem withyour theft-deterrent system. Turn theignition off and try again.

If the engine still does not start, andthe key appears to be undamaged,try another ignition key and check thefuses. See Fuses and CircuitBreakers on page 5-88 for additionalinformation. If the engine still doesnot start with the other key, thevehicle needs service. If the vehicledoes start, the first key may be faulty.See your dealer/retailer who canservice the PASS-Key® III+ to have anew key made. In an emergency,contact Roadside Assistance. SeeRoadside Assistance Program onpage 7-6.

It is possible for the PASS-Key® III+decoder to learn the transpondervalue of a new or replacement key.Up to 10 keys may be programmedto the vehicle. The followingprocedure is for programmingadditional keys only. If all thecurrently programmed keys are lostor do not operate, you must seeyour dealer/retailer or a locksmithwho can service PASS-Key® III+ tohave keys made and programmedto the system.

See your dealer/retailer or alocksmith who can servicePASS-Key® III+ to get a new keyblank that is cut exactly as theignition key that operates thesystem.

To program the new additional key:

1. Verify that the new key has a1 stamped on it.

2. Insert the already programmedkey in the ignition and start theengine. If the engine does notstart, see your dealer/retailer forservice.

3. After the engine has started, turnthe key to LOCK/OFF, andremove the key.

4. Insert the key to be programmedand turn it to the ON/RUNposition within five seconds ofthe original key being turnedto the LOCK/OFF position.The security light turns off oncethe key has been programmed.

5. Repeat Steps 1 through 4if additional keys are to beprogrammed.


If the PASS-Key® III+ key is lost ordamaged, see your dealer/retaileror a locksmith to have a newkey made.

The SERVICE THEFT DETERRENTSYSTEM message displays onthe Driver Information Center (DIC)when there is a problem with thetheft-deterrent system. SeeDIC Warnings and Messages onpage 3-50 for additional information.

Do not leave the key or devicethat disarms or deactivates the theftdeterrent system in the vehicle.

Starting andOperating YourVehicle

New Vehicle Break-InNotice: The vehicle doesnot need an elaborate break-in.But it will perform better inthe long run if you follow theseguidelines:

• If you have all-wheel drive,keep your speed at 55 mph(88 km/h) or less for thefirst 500 miles (805 km).

• Do not drive at any oneconstant speed, fast or slow,for the first 500 miles (805 km).Do not make full-throttlestarts. Avoid downshifting tobrake or slow the vehicle.

• Avoid making hard stops forthe first 200 miles (322 km)or so. During this time the newbrake linings are not yetbroken in. Hard stops with newlinings can mean prematurewear and earlier replacement.Follow this breaking-inguideline every time you getnew brake linings.

• Do not tow a trailer duringbreak-in. See Towing aTrailer on page 4-24 for thetrailer towing capabilitiesof your vehicle and moreinformation.

Following break-in, engine speedand load can be graduallyincreased.


Ignition Positions

The ignition switch has four differentpositions.

In order to shift out of P (Park), theignition must be in ON/RUN orACC/ACCESSORY and the brakepedal must be applied.

Notice: Using a tool to force thekey to turn in the ignition couldcause damage to the switch orbreak the key. Use the correct key,make sure it is all the way in, and

turn it only with your hand. If thekey cannot be turned by hand, seeyour dealer/retailer.

( (LOCK/OFF): This position locksthe ignition and transmission. Thekey can be removed in LOCK/OFF.

The shift lever must be in P (Park)to turn the ignition switch toLOCK/OFF.

The steering can bind with thewheels turned off center. If thishappens, move the steering wheelfrom right to left while turning the keyto ACC/ACCESSORY. If this doesn’twork, then the vehicle needs service.

ACC (ACC/ACCESSORY): This isthe position in which you canoperate the electrical accessories oritems plugged into the accessorypower outlets. This position unlocksthe ignition and steering wheel.Use this position if the vehicle mustbe pushed or towed.

R (ON/RUN): This position can beused to operate the electricalaccessories and to display someinstrument panel warning andindicator lights. The switch stays inthis position when the engine isrunning. The transmission is alsounlocked in this position. If you leavethe key in the ACC/ACCESSORY orON/RUN position with the engine off,the battery could be drained. Youmay not be able to start the vehicle ifthe battery is allowed to drain for anextended period of time.

/ (START): This is the positionthat starts the engine. Whenthe engine starts, release the key.The ignition switch will return toON/RUN for driving.


Retained AccessoryPower (RAP)These vehicle accessories can beused for up to 10 minutes afterthe ignition key is turned off:

• Audio System

• Power Windows

• Sunroof (if equipped)

Power to the windows and sunroofwill work up to 10 minutes oruntil a door is opened.

The radio continues to work for10 minutes or until the driver’s dooris opened.

For an additional 10 minutes ofoperation, close all the doors andturn the key to ON/RUN andthen back to LOCK/OFF.

All these features will work whenthe key is in the ON/RUN orACC/ACCESSORY positions.

Starting the EngineMove the shift lever to P (Park) orN (Neutral). The engine will not startin any other position. To restart theengine when the vehicle is alreadymoving, use N (Neutral) only.

Notice: Do not try to shift toP (Park) if the vehicle is moving.If you do, you could damagethe transmission. Shift to P (Park)only when the vehicle is stopped.

Starting Procedure1. With your foot off the accelerator

pedal, turn the ignition to START.When the engine starts, let go ofthe key. The idle speed will slowdown as the engine warms. Donot race the engine immediatelyafter starting it. Operate theengine and transmission gently toallow the oil to warm up andlubricate all moving parts.The vehicle has aComputer-Controlled CrankingSystem. This feature assists instarting the engine and protects

components. If the ignition key isturned to the START position,and then released when theengine begins cranking, theengine will continue cranking for afew seconds or until the vehiclestarts. If the engine does not startand the key is held in START,cranking will be stopped after15 seconds to prevent crankingmotor damage. To prevent geardamage, this system alsoprevents cranking if the engine isalready running. Engine crankingcan be stopped by turning theignition switch to the ACC/ACCESSORY or LOCK/OFFposition.

Notice: Cranking the engine forlong periods of time, by returningthe key to the START positionimmediately after cranking hasended, can overheat and damagethe cranking motor, and drain thebattery. Wait at least 15 secondsbetween each try, to let thecranking motor cool down.


2. If the engine does not start after5-10 seconds, especially invery cold weather (below 0°For −18°C), it could be flooded withtoo much gasoline. Try pushingthe accelerator pedal all the wayto the floor and holding it there asyou hold the key in START for upto a maximum of 15 seconds.Wait at least 15 seconds betweeneach try, to allow the crankingmotor to cool down. When theengine starts, let go of the keyand accelerator. If the vehiclestarts briefly but then stops again,repeat these steps. This clearsthe extra gasoline from theengine. Do not race the engineimmediately after starting it.Operate the engine andtransmission gently until the oilwarms up and lubricates allmoving parts.

Notice: The engine is designedto work with the electronicsin the vehicle. If you add electricalparts or accessories, you couldchange the way the engineoperates. Before adding electricalequipment, check with yourdealer/retailer. If you do not, theengine might not performproperly. Any resulting damagewould not be covered by thevehicle warranty.

Engine Coolant HeaterThe engine coolant heater canprovide easier starting and betterfuel economy during enginewarm-up in cold weather conditionsat or below 0°F (−18°C). Vehicleswith an engine coolant heater shouldbe plugged in at least four hoursbefore starting. Some modelsmay have an internal thermostat inthe cord which will preventengine coolant heater operation attemperatures above 0°F (−18°C).

To Use the Engine CoolantHeater1. Turn off the engine.

2. Open the hood and unwrap theelectrical cord. The cord islocated on the driver side of theengine compartment. It isrouted around the windshieldwasher fluid reservoir.


3. Plug the cord into a normal,grounded 110-volt AC outlet.

{ CAUTION

Plugging the cord into anungrounded outlet could cause anelectrical shock. Also, the wrongkind of extension cord couldoverheat and cause a fire. Youcould be seriously injured. Plugthe cord into a properly groundedthree-prong 110-volt AC outlet. Ifthe cord will not reach, use aheavy-duty three-prong extensioncord rated for at least 15 amps.

4. Before starting the engine, besure to unplug and store thecord as it was before to keep itaway from moving engineparts. If you do not, it could bedamaged.

The length of time the heater shouldremain plugged in depends onseveral factors. Ask a dealer/retailer

in the area where you will beparking the vehicle for the bestadvice on this.

Automatic TransmissionOperationThe automatic transmission has ashift lever located on the consolebetween the seats.

P (Park): This position locks thefront wheels. It is the best position touse when starting the enginebecause the vehicle cannot moveeasily.

{ CAUTION

It is dangerous to get out of thevehicle if the shift lever is not fullyin P (Park) with the parking brakefirmly set. The vehicle can roll.

Do not leave the vehicle when theengine is running unless you haveto. If you have left the enginerunning, the vehicle can movesuddenly. You or others could beinjured. To be sure the vehicle willnot move, even when you are onfairly level ground, always set theparking brake and move the shiftlever to P (Park). See Shifting IntoPark on page 2-28. If you arepulling a trailer, see Towing aTrailer on page 4-24.

Make sure the shift lever is fully inP (Park) before starting theengine. The vehicle has anautomatic transmission shift lockcontrol system. You must fully applythe regular brake first and then


press the shift lever button beforeshifting from P (Park) when theignition key is in ON/RUN. Ifyou cannot shift out of P (Park),ease pressure on the shift lever,then push the shift lever all the wayinto P (Park) as you maintainbrake application. Then press theshift lever button and move the shiftlever into another gear. SeeShifting Out of Park on page 2-29.

R (Reverse): Use this gear toback up.

Notice: Shifting to R (Reverse)while the vehicle is movingforward could damage thetransmission. The repairs wouldnot be covered by the vehiclewarranty. Shift to R (Reverse)only after the vehicle is stopped.

To rock the vehicle back andforth to get out of snow, ice or sandwithout damaging the transmission,see If Your Vehicle is Stuck inSand, Mud, Ice, or Snow onpage 4-15.

N (Neutral): In this position, theengine does not connect withthe wheels. To restart the enginewhen the vehicle is already moving,use N (Neutral) only. Also, useN (Neutral) when the vehicleis being towed.

{ CAUTION

Shifting into a drive gear while theengine is running at high speed isdangerous. Unless your foot isfirmly on the brake pedal, thevehicle could move very rapidly.You could lose control and hitpeople or objects. Do not shift intoa drive gear while the engine isrunning at high speed.

Notice: Shifting out of P (Park)or N (Neutral) with the enginerunning at high speed maydamage the transmission. Therepairs would not be covered bythe vehicle warranty. Be surethe engine is not running at highspeed when shifting the vehicle.

D (Drive): This position is fornormal driving. It provides the bestfuel economy. If you need morepower for passing, and you are:

• Going less than 35 mph(56 km/h), push the acceleratorpedal about halfway down.

• Going about 35 mph (56 km/h) ormore, push the accelerator allthe way down.

Notice: If the vehicle seems toaccelerate slowly or not shiftgears when you go faster, and youcontinue to drive the vehicle thatway, you could damage thetransmission. Have the vehicleserviced right away. You can drivein L (Low) when you are drivingless than 35 mph (56 km/h) andD (Drive) for higher speedsuntil then.

L (Low): This position gives youaccess to gear ranges. Thisprovides more engine braking butlower fuel economy than D (Drive).You can use it on very steephills, or in deep snow or mud.


Electronic RangeSelect (ERS) ModeERS mode allows you to choose thetop-gear limit of the transmissionand the vehicle’s speed while drivingdown hill or towing a trailer. Thevehicle has an electronic shiftposition indicator within theinstrument panel cluster. Whenusing the ERS Mode a number willdisplay next to the L, indicatingthe current gear that has beenselected.

To use this feature:

1. Move the shift lever to L (Low).

2. Press the plus/minus buttonlocated on the shift lever, toincrease or decrease the gearrange available.

When you shift from D (Drive) toL (Low), the transmission will shift toa pre-determined lower gear range.The highest gear available for thispre-determined range is displayednext to the L in the DIC. See DriverInformation Center (DIC) on

page 3-42 and DIC Operation andDisplays on page 3-43 for moreinformation. The number displayed inthe DIC is the highest gear that thetransmission will be allowed tooperate in. This means that all gearsbelow that number are available. Forexample, when 4 (Fourth) is shownnext to the L, 1 (First) through4 (Fourth) gears are automaticallyshifted by the vehicle. Thetransmission will not shift into5 (Fifth) until the + (Plus) button isused or you shift back into D (Drive).

While in L (Low), the transmissionwill prevent shifting to a lowergear range if the engine speed istoo high. You have a brief period oftime to slow the vehicle. If vehiclespeed is not reduced within the timeallowed, the lower gear rangeshift will not be completed. You mustfurther slow the vehicle, thenpress the − (Minus) button to thedesired lower gear range.

Automatic Engine Grade braking isnot available when the ERS isactive. It is available in D (Drive) for

both normal and Tow/Haul mode.While using the ERS, cruise controland the tow/haul mode can beused. See Tow/Haul Mode following.

Tow/Haul Mode

_ (Tow/Haul): The vehicle mayhave a Tow/Haul mode.

The button is located on theinstrument panel under the climatecontrols.

Push the button to activate thesystem. Push it again to deactivatethe system. You can use this featureto assist when towing or hauling aheavy load.

When Tow/Haul is activated theTow/Haul symbol will come on theinstrument panel cluster. See“Tow/Haul Mode” under Towing aTrailer on page 4-24 for moreinformation.


Automatic Engine GradeBrakingAutomatic Engine Grade Brakingassists when driving on a downhillgrade. It maintains vehicle speed byautomatically implementing a shiftschedule that uses the engine andthe transmission to slow the vehicle.The system will automaticallycommand downshifts to reducevehicle speed, until the brake pedalis no longer being pressed.

While in the Electronic RangeSelect (ERS) mode, grade brakingis deactivated, allowing thedriver to select a range and limitingthe highest gear available. Gradebraking is available for normaldriving and in Tow/Haul mode.

See Automatic TransmissionOperation on page 2-24.

Parking Brake

To set the parking brake, hold theregular brake pedal down, then pushthe parking brake pedal down.

If the ignition is on, the brake systemwarning light will come on. SeeBrake System Warning Lighton page 3-34.

Notice: Driving with the parkingbrake on can overheat the brakesystem and cause premature wearor damage to brake system parts.

Make sure that the parking brakeis fully released and the brakewarning light is off before driving.

To release the parking brake, holdthe regular brake pedal down,then push down momentarily on theparking brake pedal until you feelthe pedal release. Slowly pullyour foot up off the park brakepedal. If the parking brake isnot released when you begin todrive, the brake system warning lightwill be on and a chime will soundwarning you that the parkingbrake is still on.

If you are towing a trailer and areparking on a hill, see Towing aTrailer on page 4-24.


Shifting Into Park

{ CAUTION

It can be dangerous to get out ofthe vehicle if the shift lever is notfully in P (Park) with the parkingbrake firmly set. The vehicle canroll. If you have left the enginerunning, the vehicle can movesuddenly. You or others could beinjured. To be sure the vehicle willnot move, even when you are onfairly level ground, use the stepsthat follow. If you are pulling atrailer, see Towing a Trailer onpage 4-24.

1. Hold the brake pedal down andset the parking brake. SeeParking Brake on page 2-27 formore information.

2. Move the shift lever into P (Park)by holding in the button on theshift lever and pushing theshift lever all the way toward thefront of the vehicle.

3. Turn the ignition key toLOCK/OFF.

4. Remove the key and take it withyou. If you can leave the vehiclewith the ignition key in yourhand, the vehicle is in P (Park).

Leaving the Vehicle with theEngine Running

{ CAUTION

It can be dangerous to leave thevehicle with the engine running.The vehicle could move suddenlyif the shift lever is not fully inP (Park) with the parking brakefirmly set. And, if you leave thevehicle with the engine running, itcould overheat and even catchfire. You or others could beinjured. Do not leave the vehiclewith the engine running.

If you have to leave the vehicle withthe engine running, be sure thevehicle is in P (Park) and the parkingbrake is firmly set before you leave it.After you have moved the shift leverinto P (Park), hold the regular brakepedal down. Then, see if you canmove the shift lever away fromP (Park) without first pushing thebutton.

If you can, it means that the shiftlever was not fully locked in P (Park).

Torque LockTorque lock is when the weight of thevehicle puts too much force on theparking pawl in the transmission.This happens when parking on a hilland shifting the transmission intoP (Park) is not done properly andthen it is difficult to shift out ofP (Park). To prevent torque lock, setthe parking brake and then shift intoP (Park). To find out how, see“Shifting Into Park” listed previously.


If torque lock does occur, yourvehicle may need to be pusheduphill by another vehicle to relievethe parking pawl pressure, soyou can shift out of P (Park).

Shifting Out of ParkThe vehicle is equipped withan electronic shift lock releasesystem. The shift lock release isdesigned to:

• Prevent ignition key removalunless the shift lever is inP (Park) with the shift leverbutton fully released, and

• Prevent movement of the shiftlever out of P (Park), unlessthe ignition is in ON/RUNor ACC/ACCESSORY and theregular brake pedal is applied.

The shift lock release is alwaysfunctional except in the case of anuncharged or low voltage (lessthan 9 volt) battery.

If the vehicle has an unchargedbattery or a battery with low voltage,try charging or jump starting thebattery. See Jump Starting onpage 5-29 for more information.

To shift out of P (Park):

1. Apply the brake pedal.

2. Press the shift lever button.

3. Move the shift lever to thedesired position.

If you still are unable to shift out ofP (Park):

1. Fully release the shift leverbutton.

2. While holding down the brakepedal, press the shift leverbutton again.

3. Move the shift lever to thedesired position.

If you still cannot move the shiftlever from P (Park), see yourdealer/retailer.

Parking Over ThingsThat Burn

{ CAUTION

Things that can burn could touchhot exhaust parts under thevehicle and ignite. Do not parkover papers, leaves, dry grass, orother things that can burn.


Engine Exhaust

{ CAUTION

Engine exhaust contains CarbonMonoxide (CO) which cannot beseen or smelled. Exposure to COcan cause unconsciousness andeven death.

Exhaust may enter the vehicle if:• The vehicle idles in areas

with poor ventilation (parkinggarages, tunnels, deep snowthat may block underbodyairflow or tail pipes).

• The exhaust smells orsounds strange or different.

• The exhaust system leaksdue to corrosion or damage.

• The vehicle’s exhaust systemhas been modified, damagedor improperly repaired.

(Continued)

CAUTION (Continued)

• There are holes or openingsin the vehicle body fromdamage or after-marketmodifications that are notcompletely sealed.

If unusual fumes are detected or ifit is suspected that exhaust iscoming into the vehicle:

• Drive it only with the windowscompletely down.

• Have the vehicle repairedimmediately.

Never park the vehicle with theengine running in an enclosedarea such as a garage or abuilding that has no fresh airventilation.

Running the VehicleWhile ParkedIt is better not to park with theengine running. But if you ever haveto, here are some things to know.

{ CAUTION

Idling a vehicle in an enclosedarea with poor ventilation isdangerous. Engine exhaust mayenter the vehicle. Engine exhaustcontains Carbon Monoxide (CO)which cannot be seen or smelled.It can cause unconsciousnessand even death. Never run theengine in an enclosed area thathas no fresh air ventilation. Formore information, see EngineExhaust on page 2-30.


{ CAUTION

It can be dangerous to get out ofthe vehicle if the automatictransmission shift lever is not fullyin P (Park) with the parking brakefirmly set. The vehicle can roll. Donot leave the vehicle when theengine is running unless you haveto. If you have left the enginerunning, the vehicle can movesuddenly. You or others could beinjured. To be sure the vehicle willnot move, even when you are onfairly level ground, always set theparking brake and move the shiftlever to P (Park).

Follow the proper steps to be surethe vehicle will not move. SeeShifting Into Park on page 2-28.

If parking on a hill and pullinga trailer, see Towing a Trailer onpage 4-24.

Mirrors

Automatic DimmingRearview MirrorThe vehicle has an automaticdimming inside rearview mirror.

Vehicles with OnStar® have threeadditional control buttons located atthe bottom of the mirror. See yourdealer/retailer for more informationabout OnStar® and how to subscribeto it. See OnStar® System onpage 2-41 for more information aboutthe services OnStar® provides.

O (On/Off): Press to turn thedimming feature on or off.

The vehicle may also have a RearVision Camera (RVC). See RearVision Camera (RVC) on page 2-37for more information.

If the vehicle has RVC, theO (On/Off) button for turning theautomatic dimming feature on or offwill not be available.

Automatic Dimming MirrorOperationAutomatic dimming reduces theglare from the headlamps ofthe vehicle behind you. The dimmingfeature comes on and the indicatorlight illuminates each time theignition is turned to start.

Cleaning the MirrorDo not spray glass cleaner directlyon the mirror. Use a soft toweldampened with water.


Outside Power Mirrors

Controls for the outside powermirrors are located on the driverdoor armrest.

To adjust each mirror:

1. Press (A) or (B) to select thedriver or passenger sidemirror.

2. Press one of the four arrowslocated on the control pad toadjust the mirror.

3. Adjust each outside mirror sothat a little of the vehicle andthe area behind it can be seen.

4. Press either (A) or (B) again todeselect the mirror.

Manually fold the mirrors inward toprevent damage when going throughan automatic car wash. To fold, pushthe mirror toward the vehicle. Pushthe mirror outward, to return it to theoriginal position.

Using hood-mounted air deflectorsand add-on convex mirrorattachments could decrease mirrorperformance.

Turn Signal IndicatorThe vehicle may have a turn signalindicator lamp that is built intothe mirror housing. The turn signallamp flashes with the use of thevehicle’s turn signal and hazardflashers.

Outside Power FoldawayMirrors

Vehicles with outside powerfoldaway mirrors have the controlslocated on the driver doorarmrest.

Mirror Adjustment1. Press (C) to fold the mirrors out

to the driving position.

2. Press (D) to fold the mirrors in tothe folded position.


Resetting the Power FoldawayMirrorsReset the power foldaway mirrors if:

• The mirrors are accidentallyobstructed while folding.

• They are accidentally manuallyfolded/unfolded.

• The mirrors vibrate at normaldriving speeds.

Fold and unfold the mirrors one timeusing the mirror controls to resetthem to their normal position.A popping noise may be heardduring the resetting of the powerfoldaway mirrors. This soundis normal after a manual foldingoperation.

Automatic Dimming FeatureThe driver outside mirror adjusts forthe glare of the headlamps behindyou. See Automatic DimmingRearview Mirror on page 2-31 forinformation on how to turn thisfeature on.

Turn Signal IndicatorThe vehicle may have a turn signalindicator lamp that is built intothe mirror housing. The turn signallamp flashes with the use of thevehicle’s turn signal and hazardflashers.

Park Tilt MirrorsIf the vehicle has the memorypackage, the outside mirrors have apark tilt feature. This feature tilts theoutside mirrors to a preselectedposition when the vehicle is inR (Reverse). This allows the driver toview the curb for parallel parking.

The passenger and/or driver mirrorreturns to its original positionwhen the vehicle is shifted out ofR (Reverse), or the ignition is turnedoff or to OFF/LOCK.

This feature can be turned on or offthrough the Driver InformationCenter (DIC). See DIC VehicleCustomization on page 3-59and Memory Seat and Mirrors onpage 1-5 for more information.


Outside Convex Mirror

{ CAUTION

A convex mirror can make things(like other vehicles) look fartheraway than they really are. If youcut too sharply into the right lane,you could hit a vehicle on theright. Check the inside mirror orglance over your shoulder beforechanging lanes.

The passenger side mirror is convexshaped. A convex mirror’s surfaceis curved so more can be seen fromthe driver seat.

Outside Heated Mirrors

< (Rear Window Defogger):Press to heat the mirrors.

See “Rear Window Defogger” underDual Automatic Climate ControlSystem on page 3-20 for moreinformation.

Object DetectionSystems

Ultrasonic Rear ParkingAssist (URPA)For vehicles with the Ultrasonic RearParking Assist (URPA) system, itoperates at speeds less than 5 mph(8 km/h), and assists the driver withparking and avoiding objects while inR (Reverse). The sensors on the rearbumper are used to detect thedistance to an object up to 8 feet(2.5 m) behind the vehicle, and atleast 10 inches (25.4 cm) off theground.

{ CAUTION

The Ultrasonic Rear ParkingAssist (URPA) system does notreplace driver vision. It cannotdetect:

• objects that are below thebumper, underneath thevehicle, or if they are tooclose or far from the vehicle

• children, pedestrians,bicyclists, or pets.

If you do not use proper carebefore and while backing; vehicledamage, injury, or death couldoccur. Even with URPA, alwayscheck behind the vehicle beforebacking up. While backing, besure to look for objects and checkthe vehicle’s mirrors.


The display is located in theheadliner and can be seen bylooking over your right shoulder.

URPA uses three color-coded lightsto provide distance and systeminformation.

How the System WorksURPA comes on automaticallywhen the shift lever is moved intoR (Reverse). The rear display brieflyilluminates to indicate the systemis working.

URPA operates only at speeds lessthan 5 mph (8 km/h). If the vehicleis above this speed, the red light onthe rear display flashes.

To be detected, objects must be atleast 10 inches (25.4 cm) off theground and below liftgate level.Objects must also be within 8 feet(2.5 m) from the rear bumper.This distance may be less duringwarmer or humid weather.

A single beep sounds the first timean object is detected. Beepingmay occur beginning at 23 inches(0.6 m). Beeping occurs for ashort time when the vehicle is closerthan 23 inches (0.6 m) and againat 1 foot (0.3 m) from the object.


The following describes how the URPA display lights appear as the vehiclegets closer to a detected object:

Description English Metricamber light 8 ft 2.5 m

amber/amber lights 40 in 1.0 mamber/amber/red lights 23 in 0.6 m

amber/amber/red lights flashing 1 ft 0.3 m

The system can be disabled throughthe Driver Information Center(DIC). See “Park Assist” under DICOperation and Displays onpage 3-43 for more information.

When the System DoesNot Seem to Work ProperlyIf the URPA system does notactivate due to a temporarycondition, the message PARKASSIST OFF displays on the DICand a red light will be shown on therear URPA display when the shiftlever is moved into R (Reverse).

This may occur under the followingconditions:

• The driver disables the system.

• The ultrasonic sensors arenot clean. Keep the vehicle’s rearbumper free of mud, dirt, snow,ice and slush. For cleaninginstructions, see Washing YourVehicle on page 5-83.

• A trailer was attached to thevehicle, or a bicycle or an objectwas hanging out of the liftgateduring the last drive cycle, the redlight may illuminate in the reardisplay. Once theattached objectis removed, URPA will return tonormal operation.

• A tow bar is attached to thevehicle.

• The vehicle’s bumper isdamaged. Take the vehicle toyour dealer/retailer to repair thesystem.

• Other conditions may affectsystem performance, such asvibrations from a jackhammer orthe compression of air brakes ona very large truck.

If the system is still disabled, afterdriving forward at least 15 mph(25 km/h), take the vehicle to yourdealer/retailer.


Rear VisionCamera (RVC)The vehicle may have a Rear VisionCamera system. Read this entiresection before using it.

{ CAUTION

The Rear Vision Camera (RVC)system does not replace drivervision. RVC does not:

• Detect objects that areoutside the camera’s field ofview, below the bumper, orunderneath the vehicle.

• Detect children, pedestrians,bicyclists, or pets.

Do not back the vehicle by onlylooking at the rear vision camerascreen, or use the screen duringlonger, higher speed backing

(Continued)

CAUTION (Continued)

maneuvers or where there couldbe cross-traffic. Your judgeddistances using the screen willdiffer from actual distances.

So if you do not use proper carebefore backing up, you could hit avehicle, child, pedestrian, bicyclist,or pet, resulting in vehicledamage, injury, or death. Eventhough the vehicle has the RVCsystem, always check carefullybefore backing up by checkingbehind and around the vehicle.

Vehicles Without NavigationSystemThe rear vision camera system isdesigned to help the driverwhen backing up by displaying aview of the area behind the vehicle.When the key is in the ON/RUNposition and the driver shiftsthe vehicle into R (Reverse), thevideo image automatically appears

on the inside rear view mirror. Oncethe driver shifts out of R (Reverse),the video image automaticallydisappears from the inside rear viewmirror.

Turning the Rear Vision CameraSystem Off or On

To turn off the rear vision camerasystem, press and hold z, locatedon the inside rearview mirror,until the left indicator light turns off.The rear camera vision displayis now disabled.

To turn the rear vision camerasystem on again, press and hold zuntil the left indicator lightilluminates. The rear vision camerasystem display is now enabledand the display will appear in themirror normally.


Vehicles With NavigationSystemThe rear vision camera system isdesigned to help the driver whenbacking up by displaying a view ofthe area behind the vehicle. Whenthe driver shifts the vehicle intoR (Reverse), the video imageautomatically appears on thenavigation screen. Once the drivershifts out of R (Reverse), thenavigation screen will go back to thelast screen that had been displayed,after a delay.

Turning the Rear Vision CameraSystem On or Off

To turn the rear vision camerasystem on or off:

1. Shift into P (Park).

2. Press the MENU button to enterthe configure menu options, thenpress the MENU hard key toselect Display or touch theDisplay screen button.

3. Select the Rear Camera Optionsscreen button. The Rear CameraOptions screen displays.

4. Select the Video screen button.When the Video screen buttonis highlighted the RVC systemis on.

The delay that is received aftershifting out of R (Reverse) isapproximately 10 seconds. Thedelay can be cancelled byperforming one of the following:

• Pressing a hard key on thenavigation system.

• Shifting in to P (Park).

• Reach a vehicle speed of5 mph (8 km/h).

There is a message on the rearvision camera screen that states“Check Surroundings for Safety”.

Adjusting the Brightness andContrast of the Screen

To adjust the brightness andcontrast of the screen, press theMENU button while the rear visioncamera image is on the display.Any adjustments made willonly affect the rear vision camerascreen.


](Brightness): Touch the + (plus)or – (minus) screen buttons toincrease or decrease the brightnessof the screen.

_ (Contrast): Touch the + (plus)or – (minus) screen buttons toincrease or decrease the contrast ofthe screen.

Symbols

The navigation system may have afeature that lets the driver viewsymbols on the navigation screenwhile using the rear vision camera.The Ultrasonic Rear Park Assist(URPA) system must not be disabledto use the caution symbols. If URPAhas been disabled and the symbolshave been turned on, the RearParking Assist Symbols Unavailableerror message may display. SeeUltrasonic Rear Parking Assist(URPA) on page 2-34.

The symbols appear when an objecthas been detected by the URPAsystem. The symbol may cover theobject when viewing the navigationscreen.

To turn the symbols on or off:

1. Make sure that URPA has notbeen disabled.

2. Shift into P (Park).

3. Press the MENU hard key toenter the configure menuoptions, then press the MENUhard key repeatedly until Displayis selected or touch the Displayscreen button.

4. Select the Rear Camera Optionsscreen button. The Rear CameraOptions screen will display.

5. Touch the Symbols screenbutton. The screen button will behighlighted when on.

Rear Vision Camera ErrorMessages

Service Rear Vision CameraSystem: This message can displaywhen the system is not receivinginformation it requires fromother vehicle systems.

If any other problem occurs or if aproblem persists, see yourdealer/retailer.


Rear Vision Camera Location

The camera is located above thelicense plate.

The area displayed by the camerais limited and does not displayobjects that are close to eithercorner or under the bumper. Thearea displayed can vary dependingon vehicle orientation or roadconditions. The distance of theimage that appears on the screendiffers from the actual distance.

The following illustration shows thefield of view that the cameraprovides.

When the System Does NotSeem To Work ProperlyThe rear vision camera systemmight not work properly or display aclear image if:

• The RVC is turned off. See“Turning the Rear CameraSystem On or Off” earlier in thissection.

• It is dark.

• The sun or the beam of headlightsis shining directly into thecamera lens.

• Ice, snow, mud, or anything elsebuilds up on the camera lens.Clean the lens, rinse it with water,and wipe it with a soft cloth.


• The back of the vehicle is in anaccident, the position andmounting angle of the camera canchange or the camera can beaffected. Be sure to have thecamera and its position andmounting angle checked at yourdealer/retailer.

• There are extreme temperaturechanges.

The rear vision camera systemdisplay in the rearview mirror mayturn off or not appear as expecteddue to one of the followingconditions. If this occurs the leftindicator light on the mirror will flash.

• A slow flash may indicate a loss ofvideo signal, or no video signalpresent during the reverse cycle.

• A fast flash may indicate that thedisplay has been on for themaximum allowable time during areverse cycle, or the display hasreached an Over Temperaturelimit.

The fast flash conditions are usedto protect the video device fromhigh temperature conditions.Once conditions return to normalthe device will reset and thegreen indicator will stop flashing.

During any of these fault conditions,the display will be blank and theindicator will continue to flash as longas the vehicle is in R (Reverse) oruntil the conditions return to normal.

Pressing and holding z when theleft indicator light is flashing will turnoff the video display along withthe left indicator light.

OnStar® System

OnStar uses several innovativetechnologies and live advisors toprovide a wide range of safety,security, information, andconvenience services. If the airbagsdeploy, the system is designed tomake an automatic call to OnStarEmergency advisors who canrequest emergency services be sentto your location. If the keys arelocked in the vehicle, call OnStar at1-888-4-ONSTAR to have asignal sent to unlock the doors.OnStar Hands-Free Calling,including 30 trial minutes good for60 days, is available on mostvehicles. OnStar Turn-by-TurnNavigation service, with one trialroute, is available on most vehicles.


Press the OnStar button to have anOnStar advisor contact RoadsideService.

OnStar service is provided subjectto the OnStar Terms and Conditionsincluded in the OnStar Subscriberglove box literature.

Some services such as RemoteDoor Unlock or Stolen VehicleLocation Assistance may not beavailable until the owner of thevehicle registers with OnStar. Afterthe first prepaid year, contactOnStar to select a monthly or annualsubscription payment plan. If apayment plan is not selected, theOnStar system and all services,including airbag notificationand emergency services, may bedeactivated and no longer available.For more information visitonstar.com (U.S.) or onstar.ca(Canada), or press the OnStarbutton to speak with an advisor.

Not all OnStar services are availableon all vehicles. To check if thisvehicle is able to provide the servicesdescribed below, or for a fulldescription of OnStar services andsystem limitations, see the OnStarOwner’s Guide in the glove box orvisit onstar.com (U.S.) or onstar.ca(Canada), contact OnStar at1-888-4-ONSTAR (1-888-466-7827)or TTY 1-877-248-2080, or press theOnStar button to speak with anOnStar advisor 24 hours a day,7 days a week.

OnStar Services Availablewith the Safe & Sound Plan• Automatic Notification of

Airbag Deployment

• Advanced Automatic CrashNotification (AACN) (If equipped)

• Link to Emergency Services

• Roadside Assistance

• Stolen Vehicle LocationAssistance

• Remote Door Unlock/VehicleAlert

• OnStar Vehicle Diagnostic Email

• GM Goodwrench On DemandDiagnostics

• OnStar Hands-Free Calling with30 trial minutes

• OnStar Virtual Advisor (U.S. Only)

OnStar Services Included withDirections & Connections Plan• All Safe and Sound Plan Services

• OnStar Turn-by-Turn Navigation(If equipped) or DrivingDirections - Advisor delivered

• RideAssist

• Information and ConvenienceServices


OnStar Hands-Free CallingOnStar Hands-Free Calling allowseligible OnStar subscribers tomake and receive calls using voicecommands. Hands-Free Callingis fully integrated into the vehicle,and can be used with OnStarPre-Paid Minute Packages. Mostvehicles include 30 trial minutesgood for 60 days. Hands-FreeCalling can also be linked to aVerizon Wireless service plan in theU.S. or a Bell Mobility serviceplan in Canada, depending oneligibility. To find out more, refer tothe OnStar Owner’s Guide inthe vehicle’s glove box, visitonstar.com or onstar.ca, or speakwith an OnStar advisor by pressingthe OnStar button or calling1-888-4-ONSTAR (1-888-466-7827).

OnStar Turn-by-TurnNavigationVehicles with the OnStarTurn-by-Turn Navigation systemcan provide voice-guided drivingdirections. Press the OnStar buttonto have an OnStar advisor locate abusiness or address and downloaddriving directions to the vehicle.Voice-guided directions to thedesired destination will play throughthe audio system speakers. See theOnStar Owner’s Guide for moreinformation.

OnStar Virtual AdvisorOnStar Virtual Advisor is a feature ofOnStar Hands-Free Calling that usesminutes to access location-basedweather, local traffic reports, andstock quotes. Press the phone buttonand give a few simple voicecommands to browse through thevarious topics. See the OnStarOwner’s Guide for more information.This feature is only available in thecontinental U.S.

OnStar Steering WheelControlsThis vehicle may have a Talk/Mutebutton that can be used tointeract with OnStar Hands-FreeCalling. See Audio Steering WheelControls on page 3-119 for moreinformation.

On some vehicles, the mute buttoncan be used to dial numbersinto voice mail systems, or to dialphone extensions. See the OnStarOwner’s Guide for moreinformation.

How OnStar Service WorksThe OnStar system can record andtransmit vehicle information. Thisinformation is automatically sent toan OnStar Call Center when theOnStar button is pressed, theemergency button is pressed, or ifthe airbags or AACN system deploy.This information usually includesthe vehicle’s GPS location and, inthe event of a crash, additionalinformation regarding the crash that


the vehicle was involved in (e.g. thedirection from which the vehiclewas hit). When the Virtual Advisorfeature of OnStar Hands-FreeCalling is used, the vehicle alsosends OnStar the vehicle’sGPS location so they can provideservices where it is located.

OnStar service cannot work unlessthe vehicle is in a place whereOnStar has an agreement with awireless service provider for servicein that area. OnStar service alsocannot work unless the vehicle is ina place where the wireless serviceprovider OnStar has hired forthat area has coverage, networkcapacity and reception whenthe service is needed, andtechnology that is compatible withthe OnStar service. Not all servicesare available everywhere,particularly in remote or enclosedareas, or at all times.

Location information about thevehicle is only available if the GPSsatellite signals are unobstructedand available.

The vehicle must have a workingelectrical system, including adequatebattery power, for the OnStarequipment to operate. There areother problems OnStar cannotcontrol that may prevent OnStarfrom providing OnStar service at anyparticular time or place. Someexamples are damage to importantparts of the vehicle in a crash,hills, tall buildings, tunnels, weatheror wireless phone networkcongestion.

Your Responsibility

Increase the volume of the radio ifthe OnStar advisor cannot be heard.If the light next to the OnStar buttonsis red, the system may not befunctioning properly. Press theOnStar button and request a vehiclediagnostic. If the light appears clear(no light is appearing), your OnStarsubscription has expired and allservices have been deactivated.Press the OnStar button to confirmthat the OnStar equipment is active.

Universal HomeRemote SystemThe Universal Home RemoteSystem provides a way to replaceup to three hand-heldRadio-Frequency (RF) transmittersused to activate devices suchas garage door openers, securitysystems, and home lighting.








Changes or modifications tothis system by other than anauthorized service facility could voidauthorization to use this equipment.

Universal Home RemoteSystem Operation

If there is one triangular LightEmitting Diode (LED) indicator lightabove the Universal HomeRemote buttons, follow theinstructions below.

This system provides a way toreplace up to three remote controltransmitters used to activate devicessuch as garage door openers,security systems, and homeautomation devices.

Do not use the Universal HomeRemote with any garage dooropener that does not have the stopand reverse feature. This includesany garage door opener modelmanufactured before April 1, 1982.

Read the instructions completelybefore attempting to programthe Universal Home Remote.Because of the steps involved, itmay be helpful to have anotherperson available to assist you in theprogramming the Universal HomeRemote.

Keep the original hand-heldtransmitter for use in other vehiclesas well as for future UniversalHome Remote programming. It isalso recommended that uponthe sale of the vehicle, theprogrammed Universal HomeRemote buttons should be erasedfor security purposes. See “ErasingUniversal Home Remote Buttons”later in this section.

When programming a garage door,park outside of the garage. Parkdirectly in line with and facingthe garage door opener motor-heador gate motor-head. Be sure thatpeople and objects are clear of thegarage door or gate that is beingprogrammed.


It is recommended that a newbattery be installed in yourhand-held transmitter for quickerand more accurate transmission ofthe radio-frequency signal.

Programming the UniversalHome Remote SystemFor questions or help programmingthe Universal Home RemoteSystem, call 1-800-355-3515 or goto www.homelink.com.

Programming a garage door openerinvolves time-sensitive actions,so read the entire procedure beforestarting. Otherwise, the devicewill time out and the procedure willhave to be repeated.

To program up to three devices:

1. From inside the vehicle, pressand hold down the two outsidebuttons at the same time,releasing only when the UniversalHome Remote indicator lightbegins to flash, after 20 seconds.This step will erase the factorysettings or all previouslyprogrammed buttons.Do not hold down the buttons forlonger than 30 seconds and donot repeat this step to programthe remaining two UniversalHome Remote buttons.

2. Hold the end of your hand-heldtransmitter about 1 to 3 inches(3 to 8 cm) away from theUniversal Home Remote buttonswhile keeping the indicator light inview. The hand-held transmitterwas supplied by the manufacturerof your garage door openerreceiver (motor head unit).

3. At the same time, press and holdboth the Universal Home Remotebutton to be used to control thegarage door and the hand-heldtransmitter button. Do not releasethe Universal Home Remotebutton or the hand-heldtransmitter button until Step 4has been completed.Some entry gates and garagedoor openers may requiresubstitution of Step 3 with theprocedure noted in “GateOperator and CanadianProgramming” later in thissection.


4. The indicator light on theUniversal Home Remote will flashslowly at first and then rapidlyafter Universal Home Remotesuccessfully receives thefrequency signal from thehand-held transmitter. Releaseboth buttons.

5. Press and hold the newly-trainedUniversal Home Remote buttonand observe the indicator light.If the indicator light stays oncontinuously, the programming iscomplete and the garage doorshould move when the UniversalHome Remote button is pressedand released. There is no need tocontinue programming Steps 6through 8.If the Universal Home Remoteindicator light blinks rapidlyfor two seconds and then turnsto a constant light, continuewith the programming Steps 6through 8.

It may be helpful to have anotherperson assist with the remainingsteps.

6. After Steps 1 through 5 havebeen completed, locate insidethe garage the garage dooropener receiver (motor-headunit). Locate the “Learn” or“Smart” button. The name andcolor of the button may varyby manufacturer.

7. Firmly press and release the“Learn” or “Smart” button.After you press this button, youwill have 30 seconds tocomplete Step 8.

8. Immediately return to the vehicle.Firmly press and hold theUniversal Home Remote button,chosen in Step 3 to control thegarage door, for two seconds,and then release it. If the garagedoor does not move, press andhold the same button a secondtime for two seconds, and thenrelease it. Again, if the door doesnot move, press and hold thesame button a third time fortwo seconds, and then release.The Universal Home Remoteshould now activate thegarage door.

To program the remaining twoUniversal Home Remote buttons,begin with Step 2 of “Programmingthe Universal Home RemoteSystem.” Do not repeat Step 1, as


this will erase all previousprogramming from the UniversalHome Remote buttons.

Gate Operator and CanadianProgrammingIf you have questions or need helpprogramming the UniversalHome Remote System, call1-800-355-3515 or go towww.homelink.com.

Canadian radio-frequency lawsrequire transmitter signals to timeout or quit after several seconds oftransmission. This may not belong enough for Universal HomeRemote to pick up the signal duringprogramming. Similarly, someU.S. gate operators aremanufactured to time out in thesame manner.

If you live in Canada, or you arehaving difficulty programming a gateoperator or garage door openerby using the “ProgrammingUniversal Home Remote”procedures, regardless of where

you live, replace Step 3 under“Programming Universal HomeRemote” with the following:

Continue to press and hold theUniversal Home Remote buttonwhile you press and release everytwo seconds (cycle) the hand-heldtransmitter button until the frequencysignal has been successfullyaccepted by the Universal HomeRemote. The Universal HomeRemote indicator light will flashslowly at first and then rapidly.Proceed with Step 4 under“Programming Universal HomeRemote” to complete.

Using Universal Home RemotePress and hold the appropriateUniversal Home Remote button forat least half of a second. Theindicator light will come on while thesignal is being transmitted.

Erasing Universal HomeRemote ButtonsThe programmed buttons should beerased when the vehicle is soldor the lease ends.

To erase all programmed buttons onthe Universal Home Remote device:

1. Press and hold down thetwo outside buttons untilthe indicator light begins toflash, after 20 seconds.

2. Release both buttons.


Reprogramming a SingleUniversal Home RemoteButtonTo reprogram any of the threeUniversal Home Remote buttons,repeat the programming instructionsearlier in this section, beginningwith Step 2.

For help or information on theUniversal Home Remote System,call the customer assistance phonenumber under Customer AssistanceOffices on page 7-4.

Storage Areas

Glove BoxLift the glove box handle up to openit. Use the key to lock and unlockthe glove box.

CupholdersThere are two cupholders, withremovable liners, located in front ofthe center console. There may becupholders located in the second rowseat armrest. To access, pull thearmrest down. There are additionalcupholders located on each side ofthe third row seat and in each door.There may be cupholders located atthe rear of the center console. Toaccess, pull the handle down.

Instrument Panel StorageThis vehicle has an instrumentpanel storage area located abovethe radio. To open the cover,press the button.

Center Console Storage

Pull up on the lever, located on thefront of the center console armrest,to slide it forward and backward. Toopen the armrest storage area, pressthe button located on the front of thearmrest. There is additional storageunder the armrest. Move the armrestall the way to the rear position, slidethe cover back and remove the tray.


Second Row CenterConsole

For vehicles with a second rowcenter console, open each area toaccess the storage compartmentinside.

To access the upper storage area,press the upper button (B) andlift up. To access the lower storagearea, press the lower button (C)and lift up. The top of the consolecan be folded forward for increasedstorage area. Lift up on handleon the rear of the console (A) andpull forward.

{ CAUTION

Never open more than one of thethree latches at a time to helpavoid personal injury and damageto the console.

Notice: Slide the front consoleas far forward as it will go beforefolding the second row consoleforward to help prevent damageto the consoles.


Floor MatsIf the floor mat has a snap retainer,a grommet in the driver sidefloor mat attaches to a hook on thefloor of the vehicle to secure thefloor mat. To remove the floor mat,pull the mat towards the rear ofthe vehicle until the grommet can beremoved from the hook.

If the floor mat has a knob retainer,a grommet in the floor matattaches to a knob on the floor ofthe vehicle to secure the floormat. To remove the floor mat, turnthe knob till it is aligned with theslot in the floor mat grommetand pull the floor mat up. Toreinstall, center the slot in the floormat grommet with the knob onthe floor and set the mat in place.Then turn the knob until it isperpendicular to the slot in thegrommet to lock the mat in place.

Luggage Carrier

{ CAUTION

If something is carried on top ofthe vehicle that is longer or widerthan the luggage carrier — likepaneling, plywood, or amattress— the wind can catch itwhile the vehicle is being driven.This can cause a driver to losecontrol. The item being carriedcould be violently torn off, and thiscould cause a collision, anddamage the vehicle. Items maybe carried inside. Never carrysomething longer or wider thanthe luggage carrier on top of thevehicle.

The luggage carrier allows theloading of things on top ofthe vehicle. Crossrails are availableat your dealer/retailer.

Notice: Loading cargo on theluggage carrier that weighs morethan 200 lbs (91 kg) or hangsover the rear or sides of thevehicle can damage the vehicle.Load cargo so that it rests asfar forward as possible andagainst the side rails, makingsure to fasten it securely.

Do not exceed the maximum vehiclecapacity when loading the vehicle.For more information on vehiclecapacity and loading, see Loadingthe Vehicle on page 4-16.

To prevent damage or loss of cargowhile driving, check to make surethe cargo is still securely fastened.


Rear Seat ArmrestVehicles with a rear seat armrest,have two cupholders. Pull thearmrest down from the rearseatback to access the cupholders.

Cargo Tie DownsFour cargo tie-downs are located inthe rear compartment of thevehicle. The tie-downs can be usedto secure small loads.

Cargo ManagementSystemThis vehicle has one of these cargomanagement systems located inthe rear of the vehicle.

To open, pull the handle toward therear of the vehicle and lift thecover up.

There is an additional storagecompartment on each side of thesystem. To open, unlatch and lift thepanel up.

To remove the cargo managementsystem:

1. Open the cover. It remains openwhen lifted.

2. Remove the side panels andplace inside.

3. Loosen the retaining nuts oneach side of the system byturning them counterclockwise.

4. Close the cover.

5. Pull up on the system by usingthe built in handles and removeit from the vehicle.

Cargo Management System witha Removable Storage Area


To remove the cargo managementcover:

{ CAUTION

An improperly latched and closedcargo cover, or cargo cover left inthe open position, could bethrown about the vehicle during acollision or sudden maneuver.Someone could be injured. Besure to return the cover to theclosed position and latch beforedriving. If the cover is removed,always store it outside of thevehicle. When it is replaced,always be sure that it is securelyreattached.

1. Open the cover. It remains openwhen lifted.

2. Pull the cover up making sure tounhook the hinges at the rear ofthe cover.

3. Remove the cover from thevehicle and store outside ofthe vehicle.

Cargo Management System witha Removable Cover


SunroofThe vehicle may have a sunroofover the front seats and a rearsunroof over the second row seats.The rear sunroof does not open.The switches to operate thefront sunroof and rear sunshade arelocated on the headliner abovethe rearview mirror. The ignitionmust be in ON/RUN orACC/ACCESSORY to operate thesunroof. See Ignition Positionson page 2-21.

Vent: From the closed position,press and hold the front of the driverside switch to vent the sunroof.

Press and hold the rear of the driverside switch to close the sunroof.

Express-open/Express-close: Fromthe closed position, press andrelease the rear of the driver sideswitch to express-open the sunroof.Press and release the front ofthe driver side switch toexpress-close the sunroof.

The front sunshade must be openedand closed manually. Push up onthe sunshade handle to openthe sunshade.

Notice: The rear sunshade couldbe damaged if you attempt toopen or close it manually. Do notmanually open or close therear sunshade.

To open the rear sunshade, locatedover the second row seats, pressand release the rear of thepassenger side switch. Press andrelease the front of the switchto close the sunshade.


Instrument Panel

Instrument Panel OverviewInstrument Panel Overview .....3-4Hazard Warning Flashers .......3-5Horn ....................................3-5Tilt and TelescopicSteering Wheel ...................3-6

Power Tilt Wheel andTelescopic SteeringColumn ..............................3-6

Turn Signal/MultifunctionLever .................................3-6

Turn and Lane-ChangeSignals ...............................3-7

Headlamp High/Low-BeamChanger .............................3-7

Flash-to-Pass ........................3-8Windshield Wipers .................3-8Windshield Washer ................3-8Rear Window Wiper/Washer ....3-9Cruise Control .....................3-10Exterior Lamps ....................3-12Delayed Headlamps .............3-13Daytime RunningLamps (DRL)/AutomaticHeadlamp System ..............3-13

Adaptive ForwardLighting System .................3-14

Fog Lamps .........................3-14Instrument PanelBrightness .........................3-14

Dome Lamps ......................3-14Dome Lamp Override ...........3-15Entry Lighting ......................3-15Delayed Entry Lighting .........3-15Delayed Exit Lighting ...........3-16Parade Dimming ..................3-16Reading Lamps ...................3-16Electric PowerManagement .....................3-16

Battery Run-DownProtection .........................3-17

Accessory Power Outlet(s) .....3-18Power Outlet 115 VoltAlternating Current .............3-19

Analog Clock ......................3-20

Climate ControlsDual Automatic ClimateControl System ..................3-20

Outlet Adjustment ................3-25Rear Air Conditioning andHeating System .................3-26

Rear Air Conditioningand Heating Systemand Electronic ClimateControls ............................3-27

Warning Lights, Gages,and IndicatorsWarning Lights, Gages,and Indicators ...................3-28

Instrument Panel Cluster .......3-29Speedometer andOdometer .........................3-30

Tachometer ........................3-30Safety Belt Reminders ..........3-30Airbag Readiness Light .........3-31Passenger AirbagStatus Indicator .................3-32

Charging System Light .........3-33Voltmeter Gage ...................3-33Brake System WarningLight ................................3-34

Antilock Brake System(ABS) Warning Light ...........3-35

StabiliTrak® IndicatorLight ................................3-35

Engine Coolant TemperatureWarning Light ....................3-36

Engine CoolantTemperature Gage .............3-36

Tire Pressure Light ..............3-37MalfunctionIndicator Lamp ..................3-37

Oil Pressure Light ................3-40Security Light ......................3-41Fog Lamp Light ...................3-41

Instrument Panel 3-1

Cruise Control Light .............3-41Highbeam On Light ..............3-41Tow/Haul Mode Light ...........3-41Fuel Gage ..........................3-42

Driver InformationCenter (DIC)Driver InformationCenter (DIC) .....................3-42

DIC Operation andDisplays ...........................3-43

DIC Compass .....................3-48DIC Warnings andMessages .........................3-50

DIC Vehicle Customization .....3-59

Audio System(s)Audio System(s) ..................3-68Setting the Clock .................3-69Radio(s) .............................3-70Using an MP3(Radio with CD) .................3-87

Using an MP3 (Radio withCD and DVD Player) ..........3-91

XM Radio Messages ............3-96

Navigation/Radio System ......3-98Bluetooth® ..........................3-98Rear Seat Entertainment(RSE) System ..................3-108

Rear Seat Audio (RSA) ......3-117Theft-Deterrent Feature .......3-119Audio Steering WheelControls ..........................3-119

Radio Reception ................3-120Multi-Band Antenna ............3-121

3-2 Instrument Panel

✍ NOTES


Instrument Panel Overview


The main components of yourinstrument panel are listed here:A. Outlet Adjustment on page 3-25.B. Turn Signal/Multifunction

Lever on page 3-6. WindshieldWipers on page 3-8.

C. Instrument Panel Cluster onpage 3-29.

D. Driver Information Center (DIC)on page 3-42.

E. Analog Clock on page 3-20.F. Audio System(s) on page 3-68.

Navigation/Radio System onpage 3-98 (If Equipped).

G. Exterior Lamps on page 3-12.Fog Lamps on page 3-14.

H. Hood Release on page 5-9.I. Dome Lamp Override on

page 3-15. Instrument PanelBrightness on page 3-14.Heated Windshield WasherButton (If Equipped). SeeWindshield Washer on page 3-8.

J. Cruise Control on page 3-10.K. Tilt and Telescopic Steering

Wheel on page 3-6.L. Horn on page 3-5.M. Audio Steering Wheel Controls

on page 3-119.N. Hazard Warning Flashers on

page 3-5.O. Dual Automatic Climate Control

System on page 3-20.P. Center Console Shift Lever.

See “Console Shift Lever”under Shifting Into Park onpage 2-28.

Q. Rear Window Wiper/Washeron page 3-9. Traction ControlSystem (TCS) Disable Button(If Equipped). See StabiliTrak®

System on page 4-5.Tow/Haul Mode on page 2-26(If Equipped). Power Liftgateon page 2-11 (If Equipped).

R. Accessory Power Outlet(s) onpage 3-18.

S. Heated Seats on page 1-4.T. Passenger Air Bag Status

Indicator. See PassengerSensing System on page 1-53.

U. Glove Box on page 2-49.

Hazard Warning Flashers

| Hazard Warning Flasher: Pressthis button located on the instrumentpanel below the audio system, tomake the front and rear turn signallamps flash on and off. This warnsothers that you are having trouble.Press again to turn the flashers off.

The turn signals do not work whilethe hazard warning flashers are on.

HornPress near or on the horn symbolson the steering wheel pad tosound the horn.


Tilt and TelescopicSteering WheelThe steering wheel can be adjusted.

The adjustment lever is located onthe left side of the steering column.

Pull the lever down to move thesteering wheel up or down and inor out. Pull the lever up to lockthe steering wheel in place.

Do not adjust the steering wheelwhile driving.

Power Tilt Wheel andTelescopic SteeringColumn

The power tilt and telescope wheelcontrol is located on the outboardside of the steering column.

Push the control up or down to tiltthe steering wheel up or down.

Push the control forward or rearwardto move the steering wheel towardthe front or rear of the vehicle.To set the memory position, see DICVehicle Customization on page 3-59and Memory Seat and Mirrors onpage 1-5.

Turn Signal/MultifunctionLever

The lever on the left side of thesteering column includes thefollowing:

G : Turn and Lane-ChangeSignals

3 : Headlamp High/Low-BeamChanger

N : Windshield Wipers

L : Windshield Washer

Flash-to-Pass Feature.Information for these features is onthe pages following.

For information on the headlamps,see Exterior Lamps on page 3-12.


Turn and Lane-ChangeSignals

An arrow on the instrument panelcluster flashes in the direction ofthe turn or lane change.

Move the lever all the way up ordown to signal a turn.

Raise or lower the lever until thearrow starts to flash to signal a lanechange. Hold it there until the lanechange is completed. If the lever isbriefly pressed and released, the turnsignal flashes three times.

The lever returns to its startingposition whenever it is released.

If after signaling a turn or lanechange the arrow flashes rapidlyor does not come on, a signal bulbmight be burned out.

Have the bulbs replaced. If the bulbis not burned out, check the fuse.See Fuses and Circuit Breakerson page 5-88.

Turn Signal On ChimeIf either one of the turn signals areleft on and the vehicle has beendriven more than 3/4 mile (1.2 km),a chime will sound.

Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer

23 Headlamp High/Low BeamChanger: Push the turn signal/multifunction lever away from youto turn the high beams on.

Pull the lever towards you to return tolow beams.

This indicator light turns on in theinstrument panel cluster whenthe high beam headlamps are on.


Flash-to-PassWith the turn signal lever in thelow-beam position, pull the levertoward you momentarily to switchto high-beam, to signal that youare going to pass.If the headlamps are on, they willreturn to low-beam when the leveris released.For vehicles with High IntensityDischarge (HID) headlamps, theflash-to-pass feature does not workwhile the Daytime Running Lamps(DRL) are on.

Windshield WipersThe windshield wiper/washer leveris located on the right side of thesteering column.Turn the band with the wiper symbolto control the windshield wipers.

8 (Mist): Turn the band to mistfor a single wiping cycle and thenrelease. The wipers stop after onewipe. Hold the band on 8 longer,for more wipe cycles.

9 (Off): Turns the wipers off.

6 (Delay): Adjusts the delay time.The delay between wiping cyclesbecomes shorter as the band ismoved to the top of the lever.

1 (Low Speed): For steady wipingat low speed.

2 (High Speed): For steady wipingat high speed.

Clear ice and snow from the wiperblades before using them. If theblades are frozen to the windshield,gently loosen or thaw them. If theybecome damaged, install new bladesor blade inserts. See WindshieldWiper Blade Replacement onpage 5-36.

Heavy snow or ice can overloadthe wipers. A circuit breaker stopsthem until the motor cools.

Windshield Washer

J (Washer Fluid): Press thebutton located at the end of the turnsignal/multifunction lever, to spraywasher fluid on the windshield.The wipers clear the windshieldand either stop or return to thepreset speed. The ignition keymust be in ACC/ACCESSORYor ON/RUN for this to work.See Windshield Washer Fluid onpage 5-25 Windshield Washer Fluid.

{ CAUTION

In freezing weather, do not useyour washer until the windshield iswarmed. Otherwise the washerfluid can form ice on thewindshield, blocking your vision.

WASHER FLUID LOW ADD FLUIDis displayed on the Driver InformationCenter (DIC) when the washer fluidis low. See DIC Warnings andMessages on page 3-50.


Heated Windshield Washer

For vehicles with the heatedwindshield washer fluid system,it helps to clear ice, snow, tree sap,or bugs from the windshield. Thisfeature only works with the frontwiper system.

The button is located to the leftof the steering column below theinstrument panel brightnesscontrol knob.

Press the heated washer fluid buttonto activate the heated windshieldwasher fluid system. This activationbegins four heated wash/wipecycles. The first heated wash/wipe

cycle can take up to 40 secondsto occur, depending on outsidetemperature. After the first wash/wipe cycle, it can take up to20 seconds for each of the remainingcycles. The system turns offautomatically after four wipe cyclesor the button can be pressed againto turn it off.

Under certain outside temperatureconditions, steam might flow outof the washer nozzles for a shortperiod of time before washer fluidis sprayed. This is normal.

HEATING WASH FLUID WASHWIPES PENDING is displayed onthe DIC when the washer system isheating the fluid. WASHER FLUIDLOW ADD FLUID is displayed whenthe washer fluid is low. See DICWarnings and Messages onpage 3-50.

Rear WindowWiper/WasherThe rear wiper and rear washbutton is located on the instrumentpanel below the climate controlsystem.

Z (Rear Wiper): Press to turn therear wiper on and off. The wiperspeed cannot be changed.

Y (Wash): Press to spray washerfluid on the rear window. The windowwiper will also come on. Release thebutton when enough fluid has beensprayed on the window. The rearwiper will run a few more cyclesafter it is released. If the rear wiperfunction was already on, prior topressing the wash button, it stayson until the wiper button is pressedagain.

The rear window washer uses thesame fluid that is in the windshieldwasher reservoir. See WindshieldWasher Fluid on page 5-25.


Cruise ControlWith cruise control, a speed ofabout 25 mph (40 km/h) or morecan be maintained without keepingyour foot on the accelerator. Cruisecontrol does not work at speedsbelow about 25 mph (40 km/h).

When the brakes are applied, thecruise control is disengaged.

{ CAUTION

Cruise control can be dangerouswhere you cannot drive safely ata steady speed. So, do not usethe cruise control on windingroads or in heavy traffic.

Cruise control can be dangerouson slippery roads. On such roads,fast changes in tire traction cancause excessive wheel slip, andyou could lose control. Do not usecruise control on slippery roads.

The cruise control buttons arelocated on left side of the steeringwheel.

T (On/Off): Press to turn cruisecontrol on and off. The indicatorcomes on when cruise control is on.

+ RES (Resume/Accelerate): Pressto make the vehicle accelerate orresume to a previously set speed.

SET– : Press to set the speed ormake the vehicle decelerate.

[ (Cancel): Press to cancel cruisecontrol.

Setting Cruise Control

Cruise control will not work if theparking brake is set, or if the mastercylinder brake fluid level is low.The cruise control light on theinstrument panel cluster comes onafter the cruise control has beenset to the desired speed.

{ CAUTION

If you leave your cruise control onwhen you are not using cruise,you might hit a button and go intocruise when you do not want to.You could be startled and evenlose control. Keep the cruisecontrol switch off until you wantto use cruise control.

1. Press the I button.2. Get up to the speed desired.3. Press and release the SET–

button located on the steeringwheel.

4. Take your foot off theaccelerator.


Resuming a Set Speed

If the cruise control is set at adesired speed and then the brakesare applied, the cruise control isdisengaged. But it does not needto be reset.

Once the vehicle speed is 25 mph(40 km/h) or greater, press the +RESbutton on the steering wheel.The vehicle returns to the previouslyset speed and stays there.

Increasing Speed While UsingCruise Control

There are two ways to increase thevehicle speed while using cruisecontrol:

• Press and hold the +RES buttonon the steering wheel until thedesired speed is reached,then release it.

• To increase vehicle speed insmall increments, press the+RES button briefly. Each timethis is done, the vehicle goesabout 1 mph (1.6 km/h) faster.

Reducing Speed While UsingCruise Control

There are two ways to reduce thevehicle speed while using cruisecontrol:

• Press and hold the SET– buttonon the steering wheel until thelower speed desired is reached,then release it.

• To slow down in very smallamounts, press the SET– buttonbriefly. Each time this is done,the vehicle goes about 1 mph(1.6 km/h) slower.

Passing Another Vehicle WhileUsing Cruise Control

Use the accelerator pedal toincrease vehicle speed. When youtake your foot off the pedal, thevehicle will slow down to thepreviously set cruise speed.

Using Cruise Control on Hills

How well the cruise control will workon hills depends upon the vehiclespeed, load, and the steepnessof the hills. When going up steephills, you might have to step on theaccelerator pedal to maintain thevehicle speed. When going downhill,you might have to brake or shiftto a lower gear to keep the vehiclespeed down. When the brakesare applied the cruise controlis disengaged.

Ending Cruise Control

There are three ways to end cruisecontrol:

• Step lightly on the brake pedal.

• Press the [ button.

• Press the T button.

Erasing Speed Memory

The cruise control set speedmemory is erased when the cruisecontrol or the ignition is turned off.


Exterior Lamps

The exterior lamps control is locatedon the instrument panel to the leftof the steering wheel.

It controls the following systems:

• Headlamps

• Taillamps

• Parking Lamps

• License Plate Lamps

• Instrument Panel Lights

• Fog Lamps

The exterior lamps control hasfour positions:

9 (Off): Briefly turn to this positionto turn the automatic light controloff or on again.

AUTO (Automatic): Turns theheadlamps on automatically atnormal brightness, together withthe following:

• Parking Lamps

• Taillamps



; (Parking Lamps): Turns theparking lamps on together with thefollowing:

• Taillamps



2 (Headlamps): Turns theheadlamps on together with thefollowing lamps listed below.A warning chime sounds if thedriver’s door is opened whenthe ignition switch is off andthe headlamps are on.

• Parking Lamps

• Taillamps



# (Fog Lamps): Push the foglamps control in to turn on the foglamps.

See Fog Lamps on page 3-14.


Delayed HeadlampsDelayed headlamps provide aperiod of exterior lighting as youleave the area around your vehicle.This feature is activated when theheadlamps are on due to theautomatic headlamps control feature,and when the ignition is turned off.The headlamps remain on until theexterior lamps control is moved tothe parking lamps position or untilthe pre-selected delayed headlamplighting period has ended.

If the ignition is turned off with theheadlamps switch in the parkinglamps or headlamps position, thedelayed headlamps cycle will notoccur.

To disable the delayed headlampsfeature or change the time of delay,see DIC Vehicle Customization onpage 3-59.

Daytime RunningLamps (DRL)/AutomaticHeadlamp SystemDaytime Running Lamps (DRL) canmake it easier for others to see thefront of your vehicle during the day.Fully functional daytime runninglamps are required on all vehiclesfirst sold in Canada.

A light sensor on top of theinstrument panel makes the DRLwork, so do not cover the sensor.

The DRL system’s automatic controlmakes the DRL lights come on whenthe following conditions are met:

• The ignition is in the ON/RUNposition.

• The exterior lamps control isin AUTO.

• The engine is running.

When the DRL are on, only the DRLlights will be on. The headlamps,taillamps, sidemarker, and otherlamps will not be on. The instrumentpanel and cluster will also not be lit.

When it is dark enough outside,the DRL lights will turn off and theheadlamps and parking lampswill turn on. The other lamps thatcome on with the headlampswill also come on.

When it is bright enough outside,the headlamps will go off andthe DRL will come on.

The regular headlamp systemshould be turned on when it isneeded.


Adaptive ForwardLighting SystemVehicles with the Adaptive ForwardLighting System (AFS) haveheadlamps that swivel to the left orright when making a turn to providebetter lighting. To enable AFS, setthe exterior lamp switch to the AUTOposition. Move the switch out of theAUTO position to turn off the system.See Exterior Lamps on page 3-12.

AFS operates when the vehiclespeed is greater than 2 mph(3 km/h). AFS does not operatewhen the transmission is inR (Reverse). AFS is not immediatelyoperable after starting the vehicle;driving a short distance is requiredto calibrate the AFS.

Fog LampsUse the fog lamps for better visionin foggy or misty conditions.

The fog lamps button is located onthe exterior lamps control to theleft of the steering column.

# (Fog Lamps): Press the exteriorlamps button to turn the fog lampson or off. A light comes on in theinstrument panel cluster when thefog lamps are in use. The ignitionmust be on for the fog lamps to work.

When the headlamps are changedto high-beam, the fog lamps willturn off. The fog lamps come backon again when the high-beamheadlamps are turned off.

Some localities have laws thatrequire the headlamps to beon along with the fog lamps.

Instrument PanelBrightness

D (Instrument Panel Brightness):The knob with this symbol on it islocated next to the exterior lampscontrol to the left of the steeringwheel. Push the knob in all the wayuntil it extends out and then turn theknob clockwise or counterclockwiseto brighten or dim the lights. Push theknob back in when finished.

Dome LampsThe dome lamps automaticallycome on when a door is opened,unless the dome lamp overridebutton is pressed in.

The lamps can also be turned onand off by turning the instrumentpanel brightness control clockwise tothe farthest position.


Dome Lamp OverrideThe dome lamp override button islocated next to the exterior lampscontrol.

The dome lamp override sets thedome lamps to remain off or come onautomatically when a door is opened.

E (Dome Lamp Override): Pressthe button in and the dome lampsremain off when a door is opened.Press the button again to return it tothe extended position so that thedome lamps come on when a dooris opened.

Entry LightingFor vehicles with courtesy lamps,they come on and stay on for a settime whenever the unlock symbolis pressed on the Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) transmitter, if thevehicle has one.

If a door is opened, the lamps stayon while it is open and then turnoff automatically about 20 secondsafter the door is closed. If theunlock symbol is pressed and nodoor is opened, the lamps turnoff after about 20 seconds.

Entry lighting includes a featurecalled theater dimming. With theaterdimming, the lamps do not turn off atthe end of the delay time. Instead,they slowly dim and then go out.The delay time is canceled if theignition key is turned to ON/RUNor the power door lock switch ispressed. The lamps will dimright away.

When the ignition is on, illuminatedentry is inactive, which meansthe courtesy lamps will not comeon unless a door is opened.

Delayed Entry LightingDelayed entry lighting illuminates theinterior for a period of time afterall the doors have been closed.

The ignition must be off for delayedentry lighting to work. Immediatelyafter all the doors have been closed,the delayed entry lighting featurecontinues to work until one ofthe following occurs:

• The ignition is in ON/RUN.

• The doors are locked.

• An illumination period of about25 seconds has elapsed.

If during the illumination perioda door is opened, the timedillumination period is canceledand the interior lamps remain on.


Delayed Exit LightingThis feature illuminates the interiorfor a period of time after the keyis removed from the ignition.

The ignition must be off for delayedexit lighting to work. When thekey is removed, interior illuminationactivates and remains on untilone of the following occurs:

• The ignition is in ON/RUN.

• The power door locks areactivated.

• An illumination period of20 seconds has elapsed.

If during the illumination perioda door is opened, the timedillumination period will be canceledand the interior lamps will remainon because a door is open.

Parade DimmingParade mode automatically prohibitsthe dimming of the instrument paneldisplays during the daylight whilethe headlamps are on so that thedisplays are still able to be seen.

Reading LampsThe vehicle has reading lamps thatalso act as the dome lamp. Pressthe button to turn them on and off.

Electric PowerManagementThe vehicle has Electric PowerManagement (EPM) that estimatesthe battery’s temperature andstate of charge. It then adjuststhe voltage for best performanceand extended life of the battery.

When the battery’s state of charge islow, the voltage is raised slightly toquickly bring the charge back up.When the state of charge is high, thevoltage is lowered slightly to preventovercharging. If the vehicle has avoltmeter gage or a voltage displayon the Driver Information Center(DIC), you may see the voltage moveup or down. This is normal. If there isa problem, an alert will be displayed.

The battery can be discharged atidle if the electrical loads are veryhigh. This is true for all vehicles. Thisis because the generator (alternator)may not be spinning fast enough atidle to produce all the power that isneeded for very high electrical loads.


A high electrical load occurs whenseveral of the following are on, suchas: headlamps, high beams, foglamps, rear window defogger,climate control fan at high speed,heated seats, engine cooling fans,trailer loads, and loads plugged intoaccessory power outlets.

EPM works to prevent excessivedischarge of the battery. It doesthis by balancing the generator’soutput and the vehicle’s electricalneeds. It can increase engineidle speed to generate more power,whenever needed. It can temporarilyreduce the power demands ofsome accessories.

Normally, these actions occurin steps or levels, without beingnoticeable. In rare cases at thehighest levels of corrective action,this action may be noticeable to thedriver. If so, a Driver InformationCenter (DIC) message might bedisplayed, such as BATTERYSAVER ACTIVE, BATTERYVOLTAGE LOW, or LOW BATTERY.If this message is displayed, it isrecommended that the driver reducethe electrical loads as much aspossible. See DIC Warnings andMessages on page 3-50.

Battery Run-DownProtectionThis feature helps prevent thebattery from being drained, if theinterior courtesy lamps, reading/map lamps, visor vanity lamps ortrunk lamp are accidentally left on.If any of these lamps are left on,they automatically turn off after10 minutes, if the ignition is off.The lamps will not come back onagain until one of the followingoccurs:

• The ignition is turned on.

• The exterior lamps control isturned off, then on again.

The headlamps will time-out after10 minutes, if they are manuallyturned on with the ignition on or off.


Accessory PowerOutlet(s)The vehicle has three 12-volt outletswhich can be used to plug inelectrical equipment, such as acellular telephone, a compact discplayer, etc.

The power outlets are located on theinstrument panel below the climatecontrols, at the rear of the centerconsole, and in the rear cargo area.Lift the cover to access the outlet.Close the cover when not using theoutlet.

Notice: Leaving electricalequipment plugged in for anextended period of time whilethe vehicle is off will drain

the battery. Power is alwayssupplied to the outlets. Alwaysunplug electrical equipment whennot in use and do not plug inequipment that exceeds themaximum 20 ampere rating.

Certain accessory plugs may not becompatible to the accessory poweroutlet and could result in blownvehicle and adapter fuses. If aproblem is experienced, see yourdealer/retailer for additionalinformation on the power accessoryoutlets.

Notice: Adding any electricalequipment to the vehicle candamage it or keep othercomponents from working asthey should. The repairs would

not be covered by the vehiclewarranty. Do not use equipmentexceeding maximum amperagerating of 20 amperes. Check withyour dealer/retailer beforeadding electrical equipment.

When adding electrical equipment,be sure to follow the properinstallation instructions includedwith the equipment.

Notice: Improper use of thepower outlet can cause damagenot covered by the warranty.Do not hang any type ofaccessory or accessory bracketfrom the plug because thepower outlets are designed foraccessory power plugs only.


Power Outlet 115 VoltAlternating CurrentFor vehicles with this power outlet,it can be used to plug in electricalequipment that uses a maximumlimit of 150 watts.

The power outlet is located on therear of the center console.

An indicator light on the outlet turnson to show it is in use. The lightcomes on when the ignition is inON/RUN and equipment requiringless than 150 watts is plugged intothe outlet, and no system fault isdetected.

The indicator light does not comeon when the ignition is in LOCK/OFFor if no equipment is plugged intothe outlet.

If equipment is connected usingmore than 150 watts or a systemfault is detected, a protection circuitshuts off the power supply and theindicator light turns off. To reset thecircuit, unplug the item and plugit back in or turn the RemoteAccessory Power (RAP) off and thenback on. See Retained AccessoryPower (RAP) on page 2-22. Thepower restarts when equipmentusing 150 watts or less is pluggedinto the outlet and a system fault isnot detected.

The power outlet is not designed forthe following electrical equipmentand may not work properly if theseitems are plugged into the poweroutlet:

• Equipment with high initialpeak wattage such as:compressor-driven refrigeratorsand electric power tools.

• Other equipment requiringan extremely stablepower supply such as:microcomputer-controlledelectric blankets, touch sensorlamps, etc.

See High Voltage Devices andWiring on page 5-87.


Analog ClockThe analog clock is located on theinstrument panel above the radio.The clock is not connected with anyother vehicle system and runs byitself. To change the clock, do thefollowing:

1. Push and hold the buttonlocated directly above the clock toadvance the clock hands. Holdingthe button down will cause theclock to advance faster. Releasethe button before you get to thedesired time.

2. Push and release the button toincrease the time by one minuteincrements until the desiredtime is reached.

Climate Controls

Dual Automatic Climate Control SystemThe heating, cooling, and ventilation in the vehicle can be controlled withthis system.

A. Fan ControlB. AUTOC. DefrostD. RecirculationE. REAR (Rear Climate Control)F. Air Delivery Mode ControlG. Driver Side Temperature Control

H. DisplayI. Power (On/Off)J. Rear Window DefoggerK. Air ConditioningL. PASS (Passenger)M. Passenger Side Temperature

Control


Display Function

Each time the temperature, mode,or fan control buttons are pressed,the climate control display showsthat function along with the insidetemperature setting. The outsidetemperature is displayed on theinstrument panel cluster.

O (On/Off): Press to turn theclimate control system on or off.While the system is off, outside airstill enters through the floor outlets,but the air delivery mode can beadjusted.

The climate control system willalso turn on if either the fan control,defrost, AUTO, or air conditioningbuttons are pressed.

Automatic Operation

AUTO (Automatic): The systemautomatically controls the insidetemperature, the air delivery,and the fan speed.

To use automatic mode:

1. Press the AUTO button.When AUTO is selected,the current temperature(s)selected and AUTO is shownon the display. The currentair delivery mode and fan speedalso appear for approximatelyfive seconds.When AUTO is selected, theair conditioning and air inletare automatically controlled.The air conditioning runs whenthe outside temperature is over40°F (4°C). The system isautomatically set to outsideair, unless it is hot outside andthen the air inlet changes torecirculation mode to help quicklycool the vehicle. The recirculationindicator light will come on.

2. Set the temperature for the driverand passenger.To find a comfortable setting,start with a 73°F (22°C)temperature setting and allowabout 20 minutes for the systemto regulate. Use the driver’s sideor passenger side temperaturebuttons to adjust the temperaturesetting as necessary. The systemwill remain at the selected setting.Choosing the warmest or coolesttemperatures does not causethe vehicle to heat or cool morequickly.To avoid blowing cold air incold weather, the system delaysturning on the fan until warm air isavailable. Press the fan control tooverride this delay and select thefan speed.


Temperature Control

The driver and passenger sidetemperature buttons are usedto adjust the temperature of theair coming through the system.The temperature can be adjustedeven if the system is turned off sinceoutside air still enters the vehicle,unless the recirculation mode isselected. See “Recirculation” laterin this section.

Driver Side Temperature Control:Press the + or − buttons to increaseor decrease the driver sidetemperature. The driver sidetemperature display will showthe temperature setting.

Passenger Side TemperatureControl: Press the + or − buttons toincrease or decrease the passengerside temperature. The passengerside display will show thetemperature setting.

PASS (Passenger): Press toset the passenger temperature tomatch the driver temperature setting.The PASS indicator will turn off.When the passenger temperaturesetting is different than the driversetting, the PASS indicatorcomes on.

Manual OperationThe air delivery mode or fan speedcan be manually adjusted.

D / C (Fan Control): Press toincrease or decrease the fan speed.

Pressing D or C while in automaticcontrol places the fan speedunder manual control.

The air delivery mode remains inautomatic control. The fan settingstill displays, but the word AUTOno longer displays, and the AUTObutton indicator light turns off.

H / G (Air Delivery Mode Control):Press to change the direction ofthe airflow in the vehicle. Repeatedlypress H or G until the desiredmode appears on the display.Pressing a mode button whilethe system is off changes the airdelivery mode without turningthe system on. Press a mode buttonwhile in automatic control to placethe system into manual control.

The air delivery mode setting stilldisplays, but the word AUTO nolonger displays, and the AUTObutton indicator light turns off.

H (Vent): Air is directed to theinstrument panel outlets.

) (Bi-Level): Air is dividedbetween the instrument panel andfloor outlets. Some air is directedtowards the windshield and sidewindow outlets. Cooler air is directedto the upper outlets and warmer airto the floor outlets.


6 (Floor): Air is directed to thefloor outlets, with some of the airdirected to the windshield, sidewindow, and second row flooroutlets. In this mode, the systemuses outside air.

- (Defog): This mode clears thewindows of fog or moisture. Air isdirected to the windshield, flooroutlets, and side window vents.When this mode is selected, thesystem turns off recirculation andruns the air conditioning compressorunless the outside temperature isless than 40°F (4°C). Do not drivethe vehicle until all the windowsare clear.

0 (Defrost): Press to turn thedefrost on or off. This mode quicklyclears the windshield of fog or frost.Air is directed to the windshield,side window, and floor vents. In thismode, outside air is pulled inside thevehicle. The air conditioning systemruns automatically in this setting,unless the outside temperature isless than 40°F (4°C).

Do not drive the vehicle until all thewindows are clear.

While in defrost mode, if the PASSbutton is pressed, the PASS buttonindicator flashes three times to showthat the passenger climate controlsystem cannot be activated. If thepassenger temperature buttonsare adjusted while in defrost mode,the driver temperature indicator willchange. The passenger temperaturewill not be displayed.

Air Conditioning

# (Air Conditioning): Press toturn the air conditioning (A/C) on andoff. An indicator light comes on whenA/C is on.

The A/C does not work whenthe outside temperature is below40°F (4°C). If # is pressed theindicator flashes three times andturns off to show that the A/C modeis not available. If the A/C is on andthe outside temperature drops belowa temperature which is too cool forair conditioning to be effective, theA/C indicator turns off to show thatthe A/C mode has been canceled.

On hot days, open the windowsbriefly to let hot inside air escape.This helps reduce the time ittakes for the interior of the vehicleto cool down.


The air conditioning systemremoves moisture from the air, so asmall amount of water might dripunder the vehicle while idling or afterturning off the engine. This is normal.

@ (Recirculation): Press to turnthe recirculation mode on or off.An indicator light comes on whenrecirculation is on. When the engineis turned off, the recirculation modeautomatically turns off and must bere-selected when the engine isturned on again.

This mode recirculates and helps toquickly cool the air inside the vehicle.It can be used to prevent outside airand odors from entering the vehicle.

The recirculation mode cannot beused with floor, defog, or defrostingmodes. If recirculation is selected inthese modes, the indicator flashesthree times and turns off. The airconditioning compressor also comeson when this mode is activated.While in recirculation mode thewindows can fog when the weatheris cold and damp. To clear the fog,select either the defog or defrostmode and increase the fan speed.

REAR: Press to turn the rearheating and air conditioning onor off. See Rear Air Conditioningand Heating System on page 3-26or Rear Air Conditioning andHeating System and ElectronicClimate Controls on page 3-27.

Rear Window DefoggerThe rear window defogger uses awarming grid to remove fog from therear window.

< (Rear Window Defogger):Press to turn the rear windowdefogger on or off. The rearwindow defogger stays on forabout 10 minutes, before turning off.The defogger also turns off whenthe engine is turned off. Do not drivethe vehicle until all the windowsare clear.

For vehicles with heated outsiderearview mirrors, fog or frost iscleared from the surface of the mirrorwhen the rear window defog buttonis pressed.

Notice: Do not use a razor bladeor sharp object to clear the insiderear window. Do not adhereanything to the defogger grid linesin the rear glass. These actionsmay damage the rear defogger.Repairs would not be coveredby your warranty.


Sensors

The solar sensor, located in thedefrost grille in the middle of theinstrument panel, monitors the solarheat. Do not cover the solar sensoror the system will not work properly.

The interior temperature sensorlocated on the instrument panel tothe right of the steering column,measures the temperature of the airinside the vehicle.

There is also an exteriortemperature sensor located behindthe front grille. This sensor readsthe outside air temperatureand helps maintain the temperatureinside the vehicle. Any cover onthe front of the vehicle could causea false reading in the displayedtemperature.

The climate control system usesthe information from these sensorsto maintain comfort settings byadjusting the temperature, fanspeed, and the air delivery mode.The system may also supply coolerair to the side of the vehicle facingthe sun. The recirculation mode willalso be used as needed to maintaincool outlet temperatures.

Outlet AdjustmentUse the slider switch in the center ofthe outlet, to change the direction ofthe air flow. Use the thumbwheelnear the outlet to control the amountof air flow or to shut off the airflow.

Keep all outlets open wheneverpossible for best systemperformance.


Operation Tips• Clear away any ice, snow,

or leaves from the air inlets atthe base of the windshield thatcan block the flow of air into thevehicle.

• Use of non-GM approved hooddeflectors can adversely affect theperformance of the system.

• Keep the path under all seatsclear of objects to help circulatethe air inside the vehicle moreeffectively.

• If fogging reoccurs while invent or bi-level modes withmild temperature throughout thevehicle, turn on the air conditionerto reduce windshield fogging.

Rear Air Conditioning and Heating System

A. Fan ControlB. Temperature ControlC. Air Delivery Mode Control

For vehicles with the rear climatecontrol system, the controlsare located on the rear of the centerconsole. The system can also becontrolled with the front controls.

Press the REAR button on the frontclimate control system to turn therear climate control system on or off.

An indicator comes on when therear system is on. The system alsoturns on if any of the rear controlsare adjusted.

Mimic Mode: This mode matchesthe rear climate control to the frontclimate control settings. It comes onwhen REAR is pressed.

Independent Mode: This modedirects rear seating airflow accordingto the settings of the rear controls.It comes on when any rear control isadjusted.


Fan Control: Turn clockwise orcounterclockwise to increase ordecrease the fan speed. Turn theknob to 9 to turn the fan off.

Temperature Control: Turnclockwise or counterclockwise toincrease or decrease the airflowtemperature.

Air Delivery Mode Control: Turnto the desired mode to changethe airflow direction.

H (Vent): Air is directed throughthe overhead outlets.

) (Bi-Level): Air is directedthrough the rear floor outlets, aswell as the overhead outlets.

6 (Floor): Air is directed throughthe floor outlets. The rear systemfloor outlets are located underthe third row seats.

Rear Air Conditioning and Heating System andElectronic Climate Controls

A. Fan ControlB. Air Delivery Mode ControlC. Temperature Control

For vehicles with the rear climatecontrol system, the controls arelocated on the rear of the centerconsole.

Press the REAR button on the frontclimate control system to turn therear climate control system on or off.The system also turns on if any of therear controls, except for the C arepressed. An indicator comes onwhen the rear system is on.

The system can also be turned off,by pressing and holding the C button.

Rear Climate Control with Rear Seat Audio Controls


Mimic Mode: This mode matchesthe rear climate control to the frontclimate control settings. It comes onwhen REAR is pressed.

Independent Mode: This modedirects rear seating airflow accordingto the settings of the rear controls.It comes on when any rear control isadjusted.

D C (Fan Control): Press the fanup or down buttons to increaseor decrease the fan speed.

Temperature Control: Press +or − to increase or decrease theair temperature. The temperaturesettings will display in 0-12increments, going from thecoolest (0) to the warmest (12)setting.

N (Air Delivery Mode Control):Press to manually change thedirection of the airflow. Repeatedlypress the button until the desiredmode appears on the display.

H (Vent): Air is directed throughthe overhead outlets.

) (Bi-Level): Air is directedthrough the rear floor outlets, aswell as the overhead outlets.

6 (Floor): Air is directed throughthe floor outlets. The rear systemfloor outlets are located underthe third row seats.

Warning Lights,Gages, and IndicatorsWarning lights and gages can signalthat something is wrong before itbecomes serious enough to causean expensive repair or replacement.Paying attention to the warning lightsand gages could prevent injury.Warning lights come on when theremay be or is a problem with oneof the vehicle’s functions. Somewarning lights come on briefly whenthe engine is started to indicate theyare working.Gages can indicate when there maybe or is a problem with one of thevehicle’s functions. Often gages andwarning lights work together toindicate a problem with the vehicle.When one of the warning lightscomes on and stays on while driving,or when one of the gages showsthere may be a problem, check thesection that explains what to do.Follow this manual’s advice. Waitingto do repairs can be costly and evendangerous.


Instrument Panel ClusterThe instrument cluster is designed to show at a glance how the vehicle is running. It shows how fast the vehicle isgoing, about how much fuel has been used, and many other things needed to drive safely and economically.

United States version shown, Canada similar


Speedometer andOdometerThe speedometer shows thevehicle’s speed in both milesper hour (mph) and kilometersper hour (km/h).

The odometer shows how far thevehicle has been driven, in eithermiles or kilometers.

This vehicle has a tamper-resistantodometer. If the vehicle needs a newodometer installed, the new one isset to the mileage total of the oldodometer. If this is not possible, it isset at zero and a label is put on thedriver’s door to show the old mileagereading when the new odometer wasinstalled. If the mileage is unknown,the label should then indicate“previous mileage unknown”.

TachometerThe tachometer displays theengine speed in revolutionsper minute (rpm).

Safety Belt RemindersDriver Safety Belt ReminderLightThe driver safety belt reminder lighton the instrument panel cluster.

When the engine is started this lightand the chime come on and stay onfor several seconds to remind thedriver to fasten the safety belt.The light also begins to flash.

This cycle repeats if the driverremains unbuckled and the vehicleis moving.

If the driver safety belt is alreadybuckled, neither the light nor chimecomes on.

Passenger Safety BeltReminder Light

When the engine is started this lightand the chime come on and stayon for several seconds to remindthe passenger to fasten their safetybelt. The light also begins to flash.

This cycle repeats if the passengerremains unbuckled and the vehicle ismoving.

If the passenger safety belt isbuckled, neither the chime northe light comes on.


The front passenger safety beltwarning light and chime may turnon if an object is put on the seatsuch as a briefcase, handbag,grocery bag, laptop or otherelectronic device. To turn off thewarning light and or chime, removethe object from the seat or bucklethe safety belt

Airbag Readiness LightThis light shows if there is anelectrical problem. The systemcheck includes the airbag sensor,the pretensioners, the airbagmodules, the wiring and the crashsensing and diagnostic module.For more information on the airbagsystem, see Airbag System onpage 1-45.

This light will come on and stayon for several seconds whenthe vehicle is started. Then thelight should go out.

If the airbag readiness light stayson after the vehicle has been startedor comes on when while driving,the airbag system may not workproperly. Have the vehicle servicedright away.

{ CAUTION

If the airbag readiness light stayson after the vehicle is started orcomes on while driving, it meansthe airbag system might not beworking properly. The airbags inthe vehicle might not inflate in acrash, or they could even inflatewithout a crash. To help avoidinjury, have the vehicle servicedright away.


Passenger Airbag StatusIndicatorThe vehicle has a passengersensing system. See PassengerSensing System on page 1-53for important safety information.The instrument panel has apassenger airbag status indicator.

When the vehicle is started, thepassenger airbag status indicatorwill light ON and OFF, or the symbolfor on and off, for several secondsas a system check. If you are usingremote start to start the vehicle froma distance, if equipped, you may notsee the system check. Then, afterseveral more seconds, the statusindicator will light either ON or OFF,or either the on or off symbol to letyou know the status of the right frontpassenger frontal airbag.

If the word ON or the on symbol islit on the passenger airbag statusindicator, it means that the right frontpassenger frontal airbag is enabled(may inflate).

If the word OFF or the off symbolis lit on the passenger airbag statusindicator, it means that thepassenger sensing system hasturned off the right front passengerfrontal airbag.

If, after several seconds, bothstatus indicator lights remain on,or if there are no lights at all, theremay be a problem with the lightsor the passenger sensing system.See your dealer/retailer for service.

{ CAUTION

If the airbag readiness light evercomes on and stays on, it meansthat something may be wrong withthe airbag system. To help avoidinjury to yourself or others, havethe vehicle serviced right away.See Airbag Readiness Light onpage 3-31 for more information,including important safetyinformation.

United States

Canada


Charging System Light

The charging system light comes onbriefly when the ignition is turnedon, but the engine is not running,as a check to show the light isworking. It should go out whenthe engine is started.

If the light stays on, or comeson while driving, there may be aproblem with the electrical chargingsystem. Have it checked by yourdealer/retailer. Driving while this lightis on could drain the battery.

When this light comes on, theDriver Information Center (DIC) alsodisplays the SERVICE BATTERYCHARGING SYSTEM message.

See DIC Warnings and Messageson page 3-50 for more information.

If a short distance must be drivenwith the light on, be sure to turnoff all accessories, such as theradio and air conditioner.

Voltmeter Gage

When the engine is not running, butthe ignition is on, this gage showsthe battery’s state of charge inDC volts.

When the engine is running, thisgage shows the condition of thecharging system. The vehicle’scharging system regulates voltagebased on the state of charge of thebattery. The voltmeter may fluctuate.

This is normal. Readings betweenthe low and high warning zonesindicate the normal operating range.

Readings in the low warning zonemay occur when a large number ofelectrical accessories are operatingin the vehicle and the engine is leftidling for an extended period.

If there is a problem with thebattery charging system, a SERVICEBATTERY CHARGING SYSTEMmessage appears in the DriverInformation Center (DIC) and/orthe charging system light comes on.See DIC Warnings and Messageson page 3-50 and Charging SystemLight on page 3-33 for moreinformation.

However, readings in either warningzone can indicate a possible problemin the electrical system. Have thevehicle serviced as soon as possible.


Brake System WarningLightThis vehicle’s hydraulic brakesystem is divided into two parts.If one part is not working, the otherpart can still work and stop thevehicle. For good braking bothparts need to be working.

If the warning light comes on,there is a brake problem. Have thebrake system inspected right away.

This light should come on brieflywhen the ignition key is turned toON/RUN. If it does not come on then,have it fixed so it will be ready towarn if there is a problem.

This light may also come on due tolow brake fluid. See Brakes onpage 5-26 for more information.

When the ignition is on, the brakesystem warning light will also comeon when the parking brake is set.The light will stay on if the parkingbrake does not release fully. If itstays on after the parking brake isfully released, it means there is abrake problem.

If the light comes on while driving,pull off the road and stop carefully.Make sure the parking brake is fullyreleased. The pedal may be harderto push or, the pedal may go closerto the floor. It may take longer tostop. If the light is still on, have thevehicle towed for service. SeeTowing Your Vehicle on page 4-20.

{ CAUTION

The brake system might not beworking properly if the brakesystem warning light is on. Drivingwith the brake system warninglight on can lead to a crash. If thelight is still on after the vehiclehas been pulled off the road andcarefully stopped, have thevehicle towed for service.

United States Canada


Antilock Brake System(ABS) Warning Light

For vehicles with the Antilock BrakeSystem (ABS), this light comeson briefly when the engine is started.

If the light does not come on,have it fixed so it will be ready towarn if there is a problem.

If the ABS light stays on, turn theignition off. If the light comes on whiledriving, stop as soon as it is safelypossible and turn the ignition off.

A chime may also sound when thelight comes on steady. Then startthe engine again to reset the system.If the ABS light stays on, or comeson again while driving, the vehicleneeds service. If the regular brakesystem warning light is not on, thevehicle still has brakes, but notantilock brakes. If the regular brakesystem warning light is also on,the vehicle does not have antilockbrakes and there is a problem withthe regular brakes. See BrakeSystem Warning Light on page 3-34.

For vehicles with a DriverInformation Center (DIC), seeDIC Warnings and Messages onpage 3-50 for all brake related DICmessages.

StabiliTrak® IndicatorLight

This light comes on briefly whilestarting the engine. If it doesnot, have the vehicle serviced byyour dealer/retailer. If the systemis working normally the indicatorlight goes off.

If it stays on, or comes on whiledriving, there could be a problemwith the StabiliTrak system and thevehicle might need service. Whenthis warning light is on, the systemis off and will not limit wheel spin.


This light flashes when theStabiliTrak system is active.

If the StabiliTrak system warninglight comes on and stays on foran extended period of time whenthe system is turned on, the vehicleneeds service. See StabiliTrak®

System on page 4-5 for moreinformation.

Engine CoolantTemperature WarningLight

The engine coolant temperaturewarning light comes on whenthe engine has overheated.

If this happens pull over and turn offthe engine as soon as possible.See Engine Overheating onpage 5-22 for more information.

Notice: Driving with the enginecoolant temperature warning lighton could cause the vehicle tooverheat. See Engine Overheatingon page 5-22. The vehicle’s enginecould be damaged, and it mightnot be covered by the vehiclewarranty. Never drive with theengine coolant temperaturewarning light on.

This light also comes on brieflywhen starting the vehicle. If it doesnot, see your dealer/retailer.

Engine CoolantTemperature Gage

This gage shows the engine coolanttemperature. Under normal drivingconditions the gage will read210°F (100 °C) or less. If the gagepointer is near 260°F (125 °C),the engine is too hot.

It means that the engine coolanthas overheated. If the vehiclehas been operating under normaldriving conditions, pull off theroad, stop the vehicle and turn offthe engine as soon as possible.

See Engine Overheating onpage 5-22 for more information.



Tire Pressure Light

If the vehicle has a tire pressuremonitoring system, the tire pressurelight provides information about tirepressures and the Tire PressureMonitoring System. The light shouldcome on briefly as the engine isstarted. If it does not, have thevehicle serviced by your dealer/retailer.

When the Light is On Steady

This indicates that one or moreof the tires are significantlyunderinflated.

A tire pressure message in theDriver Information Center (DIC),can accompany the light. See DICWarnings and Messages onpage 3-50 for more information.Stop and check the tires as soonas it is safe to do so. If underinflated,inflate to the proper pressure.See Tires on page 5-37 for moreinformation.

When the Light Flashes First andThen is On Steady

This indicates that there could bea problem with the Tire PressureMonitor System. The light flashes forabout a minute and stays on steadyfor the remainder of the ignitioncycle. This sequence repeats withevery ignition cycle. See TirePressure Monitor System onpage 5-44 for more information.

MalfunctionIndicator LampCheck Engine LightA computer system called OBD II(On-Board Diagnostics-SecondGeneration) monitors operation ofthe fuel, ignition, and emissioncontrol systems. It ensuresthat emissions are at acceptablelevels for the life of the vehicle,helping to produce a cleanerenvironment.

This light comes on when theignition is on, but the engine is notrunning, as a check to show it isworking. If it does not, have thevehicle serviced by your dealer/retailer.


If the check engine light comes onand stays on, while the engineis running, this indicates that thereis an OBD II problem and serviceis required.

Malfunctions often are indicated bythe system before any problem isapparent. Being aware of the lightcan prevent more serious damageto the vehicle. This system assiststhe service technician in correctlydiagnosing any malfunction.

Notice: If the vehicle iscontinually driven with thislight on, after a while, theemission controls might notwork as well, the vehicle’s fueleconomy might not be as good,and the engine might not run assmoothly. This could lead tocostly repairs that might not becovered by the vehicle warranty.

Notice: Modifications made tothe engine, transmission, exhaust,intake, or fuel system of thevehicle or the replacement of theoriginal tires with other than thoseof the same Tire PerformanceCriteria (TPC) can affect thevehicle’s emission controls andcan cause this light to come on.Modifications to these systemscould lead to costly repairs notcovered by the vehicle warranty.This could also result in a failureto pass a required EmissionInspection/Maintenance test.See Accessories andModifications on page 5-3.

This light comes on during amalfunction in one of two ways:

Light Flashing: A misfire conditionhas been detected. A misfireincreases vehicle emissions andcould damage the emission controlsystem on the vehicle. Diagnosisand service might be required.

The following can prevent moreserious damage to the vehicle:

• Reduce vehicle speed.

• Avoid hard accelerations.

• Avoid steep uphill grades.

• If towing a trailer, reduce theamount of cargo being hauledas soon as it is possible.

If the light continues to flash,when it is safe to do so, stop thevehicle. Find a safe place to park thevehicle. Turn the key off, wait at least10 seconds, and restart the engine.If the light is still flashing, follow theprevious steps and see your dealer/retailer for service as soon aspossible.


Light On Steady: An emissioncontrol system malfunction has beendetected on the vehicle. Diagnosisand service might be required.

An emission system malfunctionmight be corrected by checking thefollowing items:

• Make sure the fuel cap is fullyinstalled. See Filling the Tankon page 5-7. The diagnosticsystem can determine if the fuelcap has been left off or improperlyinstalled. A loose or missing fuelcap allows fuel to evaporate intothe atmosphere. A few drivingtrips with the cap properlyinstalled should turn the light off.

• If the vehicle has been driventhrough a deep puddle of water,the vehicle’s electrical systemmight be wet. The condition isusually corrected when theelectrical system dries out.A few driving trips should turnthe light off.

• Make sure to fuel the vehiclewith quality fuel. Poor fuel qualitycauses the engine not to run asefficiently as designed and maycause: stalling after start-up,stalling when the vehicle ischanged into gear, misfiring,hesitation on acceleration, orstumbling on acceleration.These conditions might go awayonce the engine is warmed up.

If one or more of these conditionsoccurs, change the fuel brandused. It will require at least onefull tank of the proper fuel to turnthe light off.See Gasoline Octane onpage 5-5.

If none of the above have made thelight turn off, your dealer/retailer cancheck the vehicle. The dealer/retailerhas the proper test equipment anddiagnostic tools to fix any mechanicalor electrical problems that mighthave developed.


Emissions Inspection andMaintenance ProgramsSome state/provincial and localgovernments have or might beginprograms to inspect the emissioncontrol equipment on the vehicle.Failure to pass this inspectioncould prevent getting a vehicleregistration.

Here are some things to know tohelp the vehicle pass an inspection:

• The vehicle will not pass thisinspection if the check enginelight is on with the enginerunning, or if the key is inON/RUN and the light is not on.

• The vehicle will not passthis inspection if the OBD II(on-board diagnostic) systemdetermines that critical emissioncontrol systems have not beencompletely diagnosed by thesystem. The vehicle would beconsidered not ready for

inspection. This can happenif the battery has recently beenreplaced or if the battery has rundown. The diagnostic systemis designed to evaluate criticalemission control systems duringnormal driving. This can takeseveral days of routine driving.If this has been done and thevehicle still does not pass theinspection for lack of OBD IIsystem readiness, your dealer/retailer can prepare the vehiclefor inspection.

Oil Pressure Light

{ CAUTION

Do not keep driving if the oilpressure is low. The engine canbecome so hot that it catches fire.Someone could be burned. Checkthe oil as soon as possible andhave the vehicle serviced.

Notice: Lack of proper engineoil maintenance can damagethe engine. The repairs wouldnot be covered by the vehiclewarranty. Always follow themaintenance schedule in thismanual for changing engine oil.

The oil pressure light should comeon briefly as the engine is started. If itdoes not come on have the vehicleserviced by your dealer/retailer.

If the light comes on and stays on, itmeans that oil is not flowing throughthe engine properly. The vehiclecould be low on oil and might havesome other system problem.


Security Light

This light flashes when the securitysystem is activated.

For more information, seeTheft-Deterrent Systems onpage 2-16.

Fog Lamp Light

The fog lamp light comes on whenthe fog lamps are in use.

The light goes out when the foglamps are turned off. See FogLamps on page 3-14 for moreinformation.

Cruise Control Light

This light comes on whenever thecruise control is set.

The light goes out when the cruisecontrol is turned off. See CruiseControl on page 3-10 for moreinformation.

Highbeam On Light

The highbeam on light comes onwhen the high-beam headlampsare in use.

See Headlamp High/Low-BeamChanger on page 3-7 for moreinformation.

Tow/Haul Mode Light

This light comes on when theTow/Haul mode has been activated.

For more information, seeTow/Haul Mode on page 2-26.


Fuel Gage

When the ignition is on, the fuelgage shows about how much fuelthe vehicle has left in the fuel tank.

An arrow on the fuel gage indicatesthe side of the vehicle the fuel dooris on.

The gage will first indicate emptybefore the vehicle is out of fuel, butthe vehicle’s fuel tank should befilled soon.

When the fuel tank is low on fuel,the FUEL LEVEL LOW messageappears on the Driver InformationCenter (DIC). For more informationsee DIC Warnings and Messageson page 3-50.

Here are some situations that canoccur with the fuel gage. None ofthese indicate a problem with thefuel gage.

• At the gas station, the fuelpump shuts off before the gagereads full.

• It takes a little more or less fuel tofill up than the fuel gage indicated.For example, the gage may haveindicated the tank was half full,but it actually took a little more orless than half the tank’s capacityto fill the tank.

• The gage goes back to emptywhen the ignition is turned off.

Driver InformationCenter (DIC)Your vehicle has a DriverInformation Center (DIC).

The DIC displays informationabout your vehicle. It also displayswarning messages if a systemproblem is detected.

All messages will appear in the DICdisplay located at the top of theinstrument panel cluster.

The DIC comes on when theignition is on. After a short delay,the DIC will display the informationthat was last displayed beforethe engine was turned off.

The DIC also displays a shift leverposition indicator on the bottomline of the display. See AutomaticTransmission Operation onpage 2-24 for more information.



The outside air temperature andcompass, if equipped, also displayon the DIC when viewing the tripand fuel information. The outside airtemperature automatically appearsin the top right corner of the DICdisplay. If there is a problem with thesystem that controls the temperaturedisplay, the numbers will be replacedwith dashes. If this occurs, have thevehicle serviced. The compass willbe shown in the bottom right cornerof the DIC display. See DICCompass on page 3-48 for moreinformation.

See DIC Operation and Displayson page 3-43 and DIC VehicleCustomization on page 3-59 forthe displays available.

DIC Operation andDisplaysThe DIC has different displayswhich can be accessed by pressingthe DIC buttons located on theinstrument panel. See InstrumentPanel Overview on page 3-4for more information.

The DIC displays trip, fuel, andvehicle system information, andwarning messages if a systemproblem is detected.

The DIC also allows some featuresto be customized. See DIC VehicleCustomization on page 3-59 for moreinformation.

DIC Buttons

The buttons are the set/reset,customization, vehicle information,and trip/fuel buttons. The buttonfunctions are detailed in thefollowing pages.

V (Set/Reset): Press this buttonto set or reset certain functionsand to turn off or acknowledgemessages on the DIC.


U (Customization): Press thisbutton to customize the featuresettings on your vehicle. See DICVehicle Customization on page 3-59for more information.

T (Vehicle Information): Pressthis button to display the oil life, parkassist on vehicles with this feature,units, tire pressure readings onvehicles with this feature, RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) transmitterprogramming, and compasscalibration and zone setting onvehicles with this feature.

3 (Trip/Fuel): Press thisbutton to display the odometer,trip odometers, fuel range, averageeconomy, timer, fuel used, andaverage speed.

Vehicle Information MenuItems

T (Vehicle Information): Pressthis button to scroll through thefollowing menu items:

OIL LIFE

Press the vehicle information buttonuntil OIL LIFE REMAINING displays.This display shows an estimate ofthe oil’s remaining useful life. If yousee 99% OIL LIFE REMAINING onthe display, that means 99% of thecurrent oil life remains. The engineoil life system will alert you to changethe oil on a schedule consistent withyour driving conditions.

When the remaining oil life is low,the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOONmessage will appear on the display.See “CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON”under DIC Warnings and Messages

on page 3-50. You should changethe oil as soon as you can.See Engine Oil on page 5-12.In addition to the engine oil lifesystem monitoring the oil life,additional maintenance isrecommended in the MaintenanceSchedule in this manual. SeeScheduled Maintenance on page 6-3for more information.

Remember, you must reset theOIL LIFE display yourself after eachoil change. It will not reset itself.Also, be careful not to reset theOIL LIFE display accidentally at anytime other than when the oil has justbeen changed. It cannot be resetaccurately until the next oil change.To reset the engine oil life system,see Engine Oil Life System onpage 5-14.


PARK ASSIST

If your vehicle has the UltrasonicRear Parking Assist (URPA) system,press the vehicle information buttonuntil PARK ASSIST displays.This display allows the system tobe turned on or off. Once in thisdisplay, press the set/reset buttonto select between ON or OFF. If youchoose ON, the system will be turnedon. If you choose OFF, the systemwill be turned off. The URPA systemautomatically turns back on aftereach vehicle start. When the URPAsystem is turned off and the vehicleis shifted out of P (Park), the DICwill display the PARK ASSIST OFFmessage as a reminder that thesystem has been turned off.See DIC Warnings and Messageson page 3-50 and Ultrasonic RearParking Assist (URPA) on page 2-34for more information.

UNITS

Press the vehicle informationbutton until UNITS displays.This display allows you to selectbetween English or Metric units ofmeasurement. Once in this display,press the set/reset button to selectbetween ENGLISH or METRIC units.All of the vehicle information willthen be displayed in the unit ofmeasurement selected.

FRONT TIRES or REAR TIRES

On vehicles with the Tire PressureMonitor System (TPMS), thepressure for each tire can be viewedin the DIC. The tire pressure will beshown in either pounds per squareinch (psi) or kilopascals (kPa).Press the vehicle information buttonuntil the DIC displays FRONT TIRESPSI (kPa) LEFT ## RIGHT ##.

Press the vehicle informationbutton again until the DIC displaysREAR TIRES PSI (kPa) LEFT ##RIGHT ##.

If a low or high tire pressurecondition is detected by the systemwhile driving, a message advisingyou to check the pressure in aspecific tire will appear in the display.See Inflation - Tire Pressure onpage 5-43 and DIC Warnings andMessages on page 3-50 for moreinformation.

If the tire pressure display showsdashes instead of a value, theremay be a problem with your vehicle.If this consistently occurs, seeyour dealer/retailer for service.


RELEARN REMOTE KEYThis display allows you to matchRemote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitters to your vehicle.This procedure will erase allpreviously learned transmitters.Therefore, they must be relearnedas additional transmitters.To match an RKE transmitter toyour vehicle:1. Press the vehicle information

button until PRESS V TORELEARN REMOTE KEYdisplays.

2. Press the set/reset button untilREMOTE KEY LEARNINGACTIVE is displayed.

3. Press and hold the lock andunlock buttons on the firsttransmitter at the same timefor about 15 seconds.On vehicles with memory recallseats, the first transmitter learnedwill match driver 1 and thesecond will match driver 2.A chime will sound indicatingthat the transmitter is matched.

4. To match additional transmittersat this time, repeat Step 3.Each vehicle can have amaximum of eight transmittersmatched to it.

5. To exit the programming mode,you must cycle the key toLOCK/OFF.

COMPASS ZONE SETTING

This display will be availableif the vehicle has a compass.See DIC Compass on page 3-48for more information.

COMPASS RECALIBRATION

This display will be availableif the vehicle has a compass.See DIC Compass on page 3-48for more information.

Blank Display

This display shows no information.

Trip/Fuel Menu Items

3 (Trip/Fuel): Press this buttonto scroll through the followingmenu items:

ODOMETER

Press the trip/fuel button untilODOMETER displays. This displayshows the distance the vehiclehas been driven in either miles (mi)or kilometers (km).

To switch between English andmetric measurements, see “UNITS”earlier in this section.

TRIP A and TRIP B

Press the trip/fuel button untilTRIP A or TRIP B displays.This display shows the currentdistance traveled in either miles (mi)or kilometers (km) since the lastreset for each trip odometer. Bothtrip odometers can be used at thesame time.


Each trip odometer can be reset tozero separately by pressing theset/reset button while the desiredtrip odometer is displayed.

The trip odometer has a featurecalled the retro-active reset. This canbe used to set the trip odometer tothe number of miles (kilometers)driven since the ignition was lastturned on. This can be used if thetrip odometer is not reset at thebeginning of the trip.

To use the retro-active reset feature,press and hold the set/reset buttonfor at least four seconds. The tripodometer will display the number ofmiles (mi) or kilometers (km) drivensince the ignition was last turnedon and the vehicle was moving.Once the vehicle begins moving,the trip odometer will accumulatemileage. For example, if the vehiclewas driven 5 miles (8 km) beforeit is started again, and then theretro-active reset feature is activated,the display will show 5 miles (8 km).

As the vehicle begins moving, thedisplay will then increase to 5.1 miles(8.2 km), 5.2 miles (8.4 km), etc.

If the retro-active reset feature isactivated after the vehicle is started,but before it begins moving, thedisplay will show the number ofmiles (mi) or kilometers (km) thatwere driven during the last ignitioncycle.

RANGE

Press the trip/fuel button untilRANGE displays. This displayshows the approximate numberof remaining miles (mi) orkilometers (km) the vehiclecan be driven without refueling.The display will show LOW ifthe fuel level is low.

The fuel range estimate is basedon an average of the vehicle’s fueleconomy over recent driving historyand the amount of fuel remaining inthe fuel tank. This estimate willchange if driving conditions change.

For example, if driving in traffic andmaking frequent stops, this displaymay read one number, but if thevehicle is driven on a freeway, thenumber may change even thoughthe same amount of fuel is in the fueltank. This is because different drivingconditions produce different fueleconomies. Generally, freewaydriving produces better fuel economythan city driving. Fuel range cannotbe reset.

AVG (Average) ECONOMY

Press the trip/fuel button untilAVG ECONOMY displays. Thisdisplay shows the approximateaverage miles per gallon (mpg) orliters per 100 kilometers (L/100 km).This number is calculated basedon the number of mpg (L/100 km)recorded since the last timethis menu item was reset.To reset AVG ECONOMY, pressand hold the set/reset button.


TIMER

Press the trip/fuel button untilTIMER displays. This displaycan be used as a timer.

To start the timer, press theset/reset button while TIMER isdisplayed. The display will showthe amount of time that has passedsince the timer was last reset,not including time the ignition is off.Time will continue to be countedas long as the ignition is on, evenif another display is being shownon the DIC. The timer will recordup to 99 hours, 59 minutes and59 seconds (99:59:59) after whichthe display will return to zero.

To stop the timer, press the set/reset button briefly while TIMER isdisplayed.

To reset the timer to zero, pressand hold the set/reset button whileTIMER is displayed.

FUEL USED

Press the trip/fuel button untilFUEL USED displays. This displayshows the number of gallons (gal)or liters (L) of fuel used sincethe last reset of this menu item.To reset the fuel used information,press and hold the set/resetbutton while FUEL USED isdisplayed.

AVG (Average) SPEED

Press the trip/fuel button untilAVG SPEED displays. This displayshows the average speed of thevehicle in miles per hour (mph)or kilometers per hour (km/h).This average is calculated basedon the various vehicle speedsrecorded since the last reset of thisvalue. To reset the value to zero,press and hold the set/reset button.

Blank Display

This display shows no information.

DIC CompassYour vehicle may have acompass in the Driver InformationCenter (DIC).

Compass Zone

The zone is set to zone eightupon leaving the factory. Yourdealer/retailer will set the correctzone for your location.

Under certain circumstances,such as during a long distancecross-country trip or moving to a newstate or province, it will be necessaryto compensate for compass varianceby resetting the zone through theDIC if the zone is not set correctly.

Compass variance is the differencebetween the earth’s magnetic northand true geographic north. If thecompass is not set to the zone whereyou live, the compass may give falsereadings. The compass must be setto the variance zone in which thevehicle is traveling.


To adjust for compass variance,use the following procedure:

Compass Variance (Zone)Procedure

1. Do not set the compass zonewhen the vehicle is moving.Only set it when the vehicleis in P (Park).Press the vehicle informationbutton until PRESS V TOCHANGE COMPASS ZONEdisplays. 2. Find the vehicle’s current

location and variance zonenumber on the map.Zones 1 through 15 are available.

3. Press the set/reset buttonto scroll through and select theappropriate variance zone.

4. Press the trip/fuel button until thevehicle heading, for example, Nfor North, is displayed in the DIC.

5. If calibration is necessary,calibrate the compass.See “Compass CalibrationProcedure” following.

Compass Calibration

The compass can be manuallycalibrated. Only calibrate thecompass in a magnetically cleanand safe location, such as anopen parking lot, where driving thevehicle in circles is not a danger.It is suggested to calibrate away fromtall buildings, utility wires, manholecovers, or other industrial structures,if possible.

If CAL should ever appear in theDIC display, the compass should becalibrated.

If the DIC display does not show aheading, for example, N for North, orthe heading does not change aftermaking turns, there may be a strongmagnetic field interfering with thecompass. Such interference may becaused by a magnetic CB or cellphone antenna mount, a magneticemergency light, magnetic note padholder, or any other magnetic item.Turn off the vehicle, move themagnetic item, then turn on thevehicle and calibrate the compass.


To calibrate the compass, use thefollowing procedure:

Compass Calibration Procedure

1. Before calibrating the compass,make sure the compass zoneis set to the variance zone inwhich the vehicle is located.See “Compass Variance (Zone)Procedure” earlier in this section.Do not operate any switchessuch as window, sunroof, climatecontrols, seats, etc. during thecalibration procedure.

2. Press the vehicle informationbutton until PRESS V TOCALIBRATE COMPASS displays.

3. Press the set/reset button to startthe compass calibration.

4. The DIC will displayCALIBRATING: DRIVE INCIRCLES. Drive the vehiclein tight circles at less than5 mph (8 km/h) to complete thecalibration. The DIC will displayCALIBRATION COMPLETE for afew seconds when the calibrationis complete. The DIC display willthen return to the previous menu.

DIC Warnings andMessagesMessages are displayed on the DICto notify the driver that the statusof the vehicle has changed and thatsome action may be needed bythe driver to correct the condition.Multiple messages may appear oneafter another.

Some messages may not requireimmediate action, but you canpress any of the DIC buttons onthe instrument panel to acknowledgethat you received the messagesand to clear them from the display.

Some messages cannot be clearedfrom the DIC display because theyare more urgent. These messagesrequire action before they can becleared. You should take anymessages that appear on the displayseriously and remember that clearingthe messages will only make themessages disappear, not correctthe problem.

The following are the possiblemessages that can be displayedand some information about them.


ALL WHEEL DRIVE OFFIf your vehicle has the All-WheelDrive (AWD) system, this messagedisplays when there is a compactspare tire on the vehicle, whenthe Antilock Brake System (ABS)warning light comes on, or when therear differential fluid is overheating.This message turns off whenthe differential fluid cools.

The AWD system is disabled untilthe compact spare tire is replacedby a full-size tire. If the warningmessage is still on after putting onthe full-size tire, you need to resetthe warning message. To reset thewarning message, turn the ignitionoff and then back on again after30 seconds. If the message stays on,see your dealer/retailer right away.See All-Wheel Drive (AWD) Systemon page 4-7 for more information.

AUTOMATIC LIGHTCONTROL OFFThis message displays when theautomatic headlamps are turned off.This message clears itself after10 seconds.

AUTOMATIC LIGHTCONTROL ONThis message displays when theautomatic headlamps are turned on.This message clears itself after10 seconds.

BATTERY SAVER ACTIVEThis message displays when thesystem detects that the batteryvoltage is dropping below expectedlevels. The battery saver systemstarts reducing certain features ofthe vehicle that you may be able tonotice. At the point that the featuresare disabled, this message isdisplayed. It means that the vehicleis trying to save the charge in thebattery.

Turn off all unnecessary accessoriesto allow the battery to recharge.

The normal battery voltage range is11.5 to 15.5 volts.

CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOONThis message displays when theengine oil needs to be changed.When you change the engine oil,be sure to reset the CHANGEENGINE OIL SOON message.See Engine Oil Life System onpage 5-14 for information on howto reset the message. See EngineOil on page 5-12 and ScheduledMaintenance on page 6-3 for moreinformation.


CHECK TIRE PRESSUREOn vehicles with the Tire PressureMonitor System (TPMS), thismessage displays when the pressurein one or more of the vehicle’s tiresneeds to be checked. This messagealso displays LEFT FRONT, RIGHTFRONT, LEFT REAR, or RIGHTREAR to indicate which tire needs tobe checked. You can receive morethan one tire pressure message at atime. To read the other messagesthat may have been sent at the sametime, press the set/reset button. If atire pressure message appears onthe DIC, stop as soon as you can.Have the tire pressures checkedand set to those shown on the TireLoading Information label. See Tireson page 5-37, Loading the Vehicleon page 4-16, and Inflation - TirePressure on page 5-43.

The DIC also shows the tire pressurevalues. See DIC Operation andDisplays on page 3-43. If the tirepressure is low, the low tire pressurewarning light comes on. See TirePressure Light on page 3-37.

CRUISE SET TO XXXThis message displays wheneverthe cruise control is set. See CruiseControl on page 3-10 for moreinformation.

DRIVER DOOR OPENThis message displays and achime sounds if the driver dooris not fully closed and the vehicleis shifted out of P (Park). Stop andturn off the vehicle, check the doorfor obstructions, and close the dooragain. Check to see if the messagestill appears on the DIC.

ENGINE HOT A/C(Air Conditioning) OFFThis message displays when theengine coolant becomes hotter thanthe normal operating temperature.See Engine Coolant TemperatureGage on page 3-36. To avoidadded strain on a hot engine,the air conditioning compressorautomatically turns off. When thecoolant temperature returns tonormal, the air conditioningcompressor turns back on. Youcan continue to drive your vehicle.

If this message continues to appear,have the system repaired by yourdealer/retailer as soon as possibleto avoid damage to the engine.


ENGINE OVERHEATED IDLEENGINE

Notice: If you drive your vehiclewhile the engine is overheating,severe engine damage may occur.If an overheat warning appearson the instrument panel clusterand/or DIC, stop the vehicle assoon as possible. Do not increasethe engine speed above normalidling speed. See EngineOverheating on page 5-22 formore information.

This message displays when theengine coolant temperature is toohot. Stop and allow the vehicle toidle until it cools down. See EngineCoolant Temperature Gage onpage 3-36.

See Overheated Engine ProtectionOperating Mode on page 5-24for information on driving to asafe place in an emergency.

ENGINE OVERHEATED STOPENGINE

Notice: If you drive your vehiclewhile the engine is overheating,severe engine damage may occur.If an overheat warning appearson the instrument panel clusterand/or DIC, stop the vehicleas soon as possible. See EngineOverheating on page 5-22 formore information.

This message displays and acontinuous chime sounds if theengine cooling system reachesunsafe temperatures for operation.Stop and turn off the vehicle assoon as it is safe to do so to avoidsevere damage. This messageclears when the engine has cooledto a safe operating temperature.

ENGINE POWER IS REDUCEDThis message displays and achime sounds when the coolingsystem temperature gets too hotand the engine further entersthe engine coolant protectionmode. See Engine Overheating onpage 5-22 for further information.

This message also displays whenthe vehicle’s engine power isreduced. Reduced engine powercan affect the vehicle’s ability toaccelerate. If this message is on, butthere is no reduction in performance,proceed to your destination.The performance may be reducedthe next time the vehicle is driven.The vehicle may be driven at areduced speed while this message ison, but acceleration and speed maybe reduced. Anytime this messagestays on, the vehicle should be takento your dealer/retailer for service assoon as possible.


FUEL LEVEL LOWThis message displays and a chimesounds if the fuel level is low. Refuelas soon as possible. See Fuel Gageon page 3-42 and Fuel on page 5-5for more information.

HEATED WASH (Washer)FLUID SYSTEM OFFIf your vehicle has this feature,this message displays whenyou manually turn off the heatedwindshield washer fluid systemor when the system automaticallyturns off. See “Heated WindshieldWasher” under Windshield Washeron page 3-8 for more information.This message clears itself after10 seconds.

HEATING WASH (Washer)FLUID WASH (Washer) WIPESPENDINGIf your vehicle has this feature, thismessage displays when you turn onthe heated windshield washer fluidsystem. See “Heated WindshieldWasher” under Windshield Washeron page 3-8 for more information.

HOOD OPENThis message displays and a chimesounds if the hood is not fully closed.Stop and turn off the vehicle, checkthe hood for obstructions, and closethe hood again. Check to see if themessage still appears on the DIC.

ICE POSSIBLE DRIVEWITH CAREThis message displays when theoutside air temperature is coldenough to create icy road conditions.Adjust your driving accordingly.

LEFT REAR DOOR OPENThis message displays and a chimesounds if the driver side rear door isnot fully closed and the vehicle isshifted out of P (Park). Stop and turnoff the vehicle, check the door forobstructions, and close the dooragain. Check to see if the messagestill appears on the DIC.

LIFTGATE OPENThis message displays and a chimesounds if the liftgate is open whilethe ignition is in ON/RUN. Turn offthe vehicle and check the liftgate.Restart the vehicle and check for themessage on the DIC display.


OIL PRESSURE LOW STOPENGINE

Notice: If you drive your vehiclewhile the engine oil pressureis low, severe engine damagemay occur. If a low oil pressurewarning appears on the DriverInformation Center (DIC), stopthe vehicle as soon as possible.Do not drive the vehicle untilthe cause of the low oil pressureis corrected. See Engine Oilon page 5-12 for moreinformation.

This message displays if low oilpressure levels occur. Stop thevehicle as soon as safely possibleand do not operate it until the causeof the low oil pressure has beencorrected. Check the oil as soonas possible and have your vehicleserviced by your dealer/retailer.See Engine Oil on page 5-12.

PARK ASSIST OFFIf your vehicle has the UltrasonicRear Parking Assist (URPA) system,after the vehicle has been startedand shifted out of P (Park), thismessage displays to remind thedriver that the URPA system hasbeen turned off. Press the set/resetbutton to acknowledge this messageand clear it from the DIC display.To turn the URPA system back on,see Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist(URPA) on page 2-34.

PASSENGER DOOR OPENThis message displays and achime sounds if the passenger dooris not fully closed and the vehicle isshifted out of P (Park). Stop and turnoff the vehicle, check the door forobstructions, and close the dooragain. Check to see if the messagestill appears on the DIC.

REMOTE KEY LEARNINGACTIVEThis message displays while you arematching a Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) transmitter to your vehicle.See “Matching Transmitter(s) toYour Vehicle” under Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) System Operation onpage 2-4 and DIC Operation andDisplays on page 3-43 for moreinformation.

REPLACE BATTERY INREMOTE KEYThis message displays if a RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) transmitterbattery is low. The battery needsto be replaced in the transmitter.See “Battery Replacement” underRemote Keyless Entry (RKE)System Operation on page 2-4.


RIGHT REAR DOOR OPENThis message displays and a chimesounds if the passenger side reardoor is not fully closed and thevehicle is shifted out of P (Park).Stop and turn off the vehicle, checkthe door for obstructions, and closethe door again. Check to see if themessage still appears on the DIC.

SERVICE A/C(Air Conditioning) SYSTEMThis message displays whenthe electronic sensors that controlthe air conditioning and heatingsystems are no longer working.Have the climate control systemserviced by your dealer/retailerif you notice a drop in heatingand air conditioning efficiency.

SERVICE AIR BAGThis message displays if there isa problem with the airbag system.Have your dealer/retailer inspect thesystem for problems. See AirbagReadiness Light on page 3-31 andAirbag System on page 1-45 formore information.

SERVICE ALL WHEEL DRIVEIf your vehicle has the All-WheelDrive (AWD) system, this messagedisplays if there is a problemwith this system. If this messageappears, stop as soon as possibleand turn off the vehicle. Restartthe vehicle after 30 secondsand check for the message onthe DIC display. If the messageis still displayed or appears againwhen you begin driving, theAWD system needs service.See your dealer/retailer.

SERVICE BATTERYCHARGING SYSTEMOn some vehicles, this messagedisplays if there is a problem withthe battery charging system. Undercertain conditions, the chargingsystem light may also turn on inthe instrument panel cluster.See Charging System Light onpage 3-33. Driving with this problemcould drain the battery. Turn off allunnecessary accessories. Have theelectrical system checked as soon aspossible. See your dealer/retailer.

SERVICE BRAKE SYSTEMThis message displays along withthe brake system warning light ifthere is a problem with the brakesystem. See Brake System WarningLight on page 3-34. If this messageappears, stop as soon as possibleand turn off the vehicle. Restart thevehicle and check for the messageon the DIC display. If the message isstill displayed or appears again whenyou begin driving, the brake systemneeds service as soon as possible.See your dealer/retailer.


SERVICE PARK ASSISTIf your vehicle has the UltrasonicRear Parking Assist (URPA) system,this message displays if there is aproblem with the URPA system.Do not use this system to help youpark. See Ultrasonic Rear ParkingAssist (URPA) on page 2-34for more information. See yourdealer/retailer for service.

SERVICE POWER STEERINGThis message displays when aproblem is detected with the powersteering system. When this messageis displayed, you may notice that theeffort required to steer the vehicleincreases or feels heavier, but youwill still be able to steer the vehicle.Have your vehicle serviced by yourdealer/retailer immediately.

SERVICE STABILITRAKThis message displays if thereis a problem with the StabiliTrak®

system. If this message appears,try to reset the system. Stop; turn offthe engine for at least 15 seconds;then start the engine again. If thismessage still comes on, it meansthere is a problem. See your dealer/retailer for service. The vehicle issafe to drive, however, you do nothave the benefit of StabiliTrak,so reduce your speed and driveaccordingly.

SERVICE THEFT DETERRENTSYSTEMThis message displays when thereis a problem with the theft-deterrentsystem. The vehicle may or maynot restart so you may want to takethe vehicle to your dealer/retailerbefore turning off the engine.See PASS-Key® III+ ElectronicImmobilizer Operation on page 2-18for more information.

SERVICE TIRE MONITORSYSTEMOn vehicles with the Tire PressureMonitor System (TPMS), thismessage displays if a part on theTPMS is not working properly.The tire pressure light also flashesand then remains on during thesame ignition cycle. See TirePressure Light on page 3-37.Several conditions may causethis message to appear. See TirePressure Monitor Operation onpage 5-46 for more information.If the warning comes on and stayson, there may be a problem with theTPMS. See your dealer/retailer.

SERVICE TRACTIONCONTROLThis message displays when thereis a problem with the Traction ControlSystem (TCS). When this messageis displayed, the system will not limitwheel spin. Adjust your drivingaccordingly. See your dealer/retailerfor service. See StabiliTrak® Systemon page 4-5 for more information.


SERVICE TRANSMISSIONThis message displays when thereis a problem with the transmission.See your dealer/retailer for service.

SERVICE VEHICLE SOONThis message displays whena non-emissions related malfunctionoccurs. Have the vehicle servicedby your dealer/retailer as soonas possible.

SPEED LIMITED TOXXX MPH (KM/H)This message displays when yourvehicle speed is limited to 80 mph(128 km/h) because the vehicledetects a problem in the speedvariable assist steering system.Have your vehicle serviced byyour dealer/retailer.

STARTING DISABLEDSERVICE THROTTLEThis message displays when yourvehicle’s throttle system is notfunctioning properly. Have yourvehicle serviced by your dealer/retailer.

THEFT ATTEMPTEDThis message displays if the contenttheft-deterrent system has detecteda break-in attempt while youwere away from your vehicle.See Content Theft-Deterrent onpage 2-16 for more information.

TIGHTEN GAS CAPThis message may display alongwith the check engine light onthe instrument panel cluster if thevehicle’s fuel cap is not tightenedproperly. See Malfunction IndicatorLamp on page 3-37. Reinstallthe fuel cap fully. See Filling theTank on page 5-7. The diagnosticsystem can determine if the fuelcap has been left off or improperlyinstalled. A loose or missing fuel cap

allows fuel to evaporate into theatmosphere. A few driving trips withthe cap properly installed shouldturn this light and message off.

TIRE LEARNING ACTIVEThis message displays when theTire Pressure Monitor System(TPMS) is re-learning the tirepositions on your vehicle. The tirepositions must be re-learned afterrotating the tires or after replacing atire or sensor. See Tire Inspectionand Rotation on page 5-49, TirePressure Monitor System onpage 5-44, and Inflation - TirePressure on page 5-43 for moreinformation.

TRACTION CONTROL OFFThis message displays whenthe Traction Control System (TCS)is turned off. Adjust your drivingaccordingly. See StabiliTrak®

System on page 4-5 for moreinformation. This message clearsitself after 10 seconds.


TRANSMISSION HOT IDLEENGINE

Notice: If you drive your vehiclewhile the transmission fluid isoverheating and the transmissiontemperature warning is displayedon the instrument panel clusterand/or DIC, you can damage thetransmission. This could lead tocostly repairs that would not becovered by your warranty. Do notdrive your vehicle with overheatedtransmission fluid or while thetransmission temperature warningis displayed.

This message displays and a chimesounds if the transmission fluid in thevehicle gets hot. Driving with thetransmission fluid temperature highcan cause damage to the vehicle.Stop the vehicle and let it idle toallow the transmission to cool.This message clears when the fluidtemperature reaches a safe level.

TURN SIGNAL ONThis message displays and a chimesounds if a turn signal is left onfor 3/4 of a mile (1.2 km). Move theturn signal/multifunction lever tothe off position.

WASHER FLUID LOW ADDFLUIDThis message displays whenthe windshield washer fluid is low.Fill the windshield washer fluidreservoir as soon as possible. SeeEngine Compartment Overview onpage 5-10 for the location of thewindshield washer fluid reservoir.Also, see Windshield Washer Fluidon page 5-25 for more information.

DIC VehicleCustomizationYour vehicle may havecustomization capabilities thatallow you to program certainfeatures to one preferred setting.Customization features can only beprogrammed to one setting on thevehicle and cannot be programmedto a preferred setting for two differentdrivers.

All of the customization options maynot be available on your vehicle.Only the options available willbe displayed on the DIC.

The default settings for thecustomization features were setwhen your vehicle left the factory,but may have been changedfrom their default state since then.

The customization preferencesare automatically recalled.

To change customizationpreferences, use the followingprocedure.


Entering the FeatureSettings Menu1. Turn the ignition on and place

the vehicle in P (Park).To avoid excessive drain on thebattery, it is recommended thatthe headlamps are turned off.

2. Press the customization buttonto enter the feature settingsmenu. If the menu is notavailable, FEATURE SETTINGSAVAILABLE IN PARK will display.Before entering the menu, makesure the vehicle is in P (Park).

Feature Settings Menu ItemsThe following are customizationfeatures that allow you to programsettings to the vehicle:

DISPLAY IN ENGLISH

This feature will only display if alanguage other than English hasbeen set. This feature allows you tochange the language in which theDIC messages appear to English.

Press the customization button untilthe PRESS V TO DISPLAY INENGLISH screen appears on theDIC display. Press the set/resetbutton once to display all DICmessages in English.

DISPLAY LANGUAGE

This feature allows you to selectthe language in which the DICmessages will appear.

Press the customization button untilthe DISPLAY LANGUAGE screenappears on the DIC display. Pressthe set/reset button once to accessthe settings for this feature. Thenpress the customization button toscroll through the following settings:

ENGLISH (default): All messageswill appear in English.

FRANCAIS: All messages willappear in French.

ESPANOL: All messages willappear in Spanish.

NO CHANGE: No change will bemade to this feature. The currentsetting will remain.

To select a setting, press theset/reset button while the desiredsetting is displayed on the DIC.


AUTO DOOR LOCK

This feature allows you toselect when the vehicle’s doorswill automatically lock. SeeProgrammable Automatic DoorLocks on page 2-9 for moreinformation.

Press the customization button untilAUTO DOOR LOCK appears onthe DIC display. Press the set/resetbutton once to access the settingsfor this feature. Then press thecustomization button to scrollthrough the following settings:

SHIFT OUT OF PARK (default):The doors will automatically lockwhen the vehicle is shifted out ofP (Park).

AT VEHICLE SPEED: The doorswill automatically lock when thevehicle speed is above 8 mph(13 km/h) for three seconds.



AUTO DOOR UNLOCK

This feature allows you to selectwhether or not to turn off theautomatic door unlocking feature.It also allows you to select whichdoors and when the doors willautomatically unlock. SeeProgrammable Automatic DoorLocks on page 2-9 for moreinformation.

Press the customization button untilAUTO DOOR UNLOCK appears onthe DIC display. Press the set/resetbutton once to access the settingsfor this feature. Then press thecustomization button to scrollthrough the following settings:

OFF: None of the doors willautomatically unlock.

DRIVER AT KEY OUT: Only thedriver’s door will unlock whenthe key is taken out of the ignition.

DRIVER IN PARK: Only thedriver’s door will unlock when thevehicle is shifted into P (Park).

ALL AT KEY OUT: All of the doorswill unlock when the key is takenout of the ignition.

ALL IN PARK (default): All ofthe doors will unlock whenthe vehicle is shifted into P (Park).

NO CHANGE: No change willbe made to this feature. The currentsetting will remain.



REMOTE DOOR LOCK

This feature allows you to selectthe type of feedback you will receivewhen locking the vehicle with theRemote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter. You will not receivefeedback when locking the vehiclewith the RKE transmitter if the doorsare open. See Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) System Operation onpage 2-4 for more information.Press the customization button untilREMOTE DOOR LOCK appears onthe DIC display. Press the set/resetbutton once to access the settingsfor this feature. Then press thecustomization button to scrollthrough the following settings:

OFF: There will be no feedbackwhen you press the lock button onthe RKE transmitter.

LIGHTS ONLY: The exterior lampswill flash when you press the lockbutton on the RKE transmitter.

HORN ONLY: The horn will soundon the second press of the lockbutton on the RKE transmitter.

HORN & LIGHTS (default):The exterior lamps will flash whenyou press the lock button onthe RKE transmitter, and the hornwill sound when the lock buttonis pressed again within five secondsof the previous command.



REMOTE DOOR UNLOCK

This feature allows you to selectthe type of feedback you will receivewhen unlocking the vehicle withthe Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter. You will not receivefeedback when unlocking the vehiclewith the RKE transmitter if the doorsare open. See Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) System Operation onpage 2-4 for more information.

Press the customization button untilREMOTE DOOR UNLOCK appearson the DIC display. Press theset/reset button once to access thesettings for this feature. Then pressthe customization button to scrollthrough the following settings:

LIGHTS OFF: The exterior lampswill not flash when you pressthe unlock button on the RKEtransmitter.

LIGHTS ON (default): The exteriorlamps will flash when you pressthe unlock button on the RKEtransmitter.




DELAY DOOR LOCK

This feature allows you to selectwhether or not the locking of thevehicle’s doors and liftgate will bedelayed. When locking the doorsand liftgate with the power doorlock switch and a door or the liftgateis open, this feature will delaylocking the doors and liftgate untilfive seconds after the last door isclosed. You will hear three chimesto signal that the delayed lockingfeature is in use. The key must beout of the ignition for this feature towork. You can temporarily overridedelayed locking by pressing thepower door lock switch twice or thelock button on the RKE transmittertwice. See Delayed Locking onpage 2-8 for more information.

Press the customization buttonuntil DELAY DOOR LOCK appearson the DIC display. Press theset/reset button once to accessthe settings for this feature.

Then press the customization buttonto scroll through the followingsettings:

OFF: There will be no delayedlocking of the vehicle’s doors.

ON (default): The doors will notlock until five seconds after the lastdoor or the liftgate is closed.



EXIT LIGHTING

This feature allows you to select theamount of time you want the exteriorlamps to remain on when it is darkenough outside. This happens afterthe key is turned from ON/RUN toLOCK/OFF.

Press the customization button untilEXIT LIGHTING appears on theDIC display. Press the set/resetbutton once to access the settingsfor this feature. Then press thecustomization button to scrollthrough the following settings:

OFF: The exterior lamps will notturn on.

30 SECONDS (default): Theexterior lamps will stay on for30 seconds.

1 MINUTE: The exterior lamps willstay on for one minute.

2 MINUTES: The exterior lamps willstay on for two minutes.




APPROACH LIGHTING

This feature allows you to selectwhether or not to have the exteriorlights turn on briefly during low lightperiods after unlocking the vehicleusing the Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) transmitter.

Press the customization button untilAPPROACH LIGHTING appears onthe DIC display. Press the set/resetbutton once to access the settingsfor this feature. Then press thecustomization button to scrollthrough the following settings:

OFF: The exterior lights will notturn on when you unlock the vehiclewith the RKE transmitter.

ON (default): If it is dark enoughoutside, the exterior lights willturn on briefly when you unlock thevehicle with the RKE transmitter.

The lights will remain on for20 seconds or until the lock buttonon the RKE transmitter is pressed,or the vehicle is no longer off.See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System Operation on page 2-4for more information.



CHIME VOLUME

This feature allows you to select thevolume level of the chime.

Press the customization button untilCHIME VOLUME appears on theDIC display. Press the set/resetbutton once to access the settingsfor this feature. Then press thecustomization button to scrollthrough the following settings:

NORMAL: The chime volume willbe set to a normal level.

LOUD: The chime volume will beset to a loud level.


There is no default for chimevolume. The volume will stay atthe last known setting.



PARK TILT MIRRORS

If your vehicle has this feature,it allows you to select whetheror not the outside mirror(s)will automatically tilt down when thevehicle is shifted into R (Reverse).See Outside Power FoldawayMirrors on page 2-32 for moreinformation.

Press the customization button untilPARK TILT MIRRORS appears onthe DIC display. Press the set/resetbutton once to access the settingsfor this feature. Then press thecustomization button to scrollthrough the following settings:

OFF (default): Neither outsidemirror will be tilted down when thevehicle is shifted into R (Reverse).

DRIVER MIRROR: The driver’soutside mirror will be tilteddown when the vehicle is shiftedinto R (Reverse).

PASSENGER MIRROR: Thepassenger’s outside mirror will betilted down when the vehicle isshifted into R (Reverse).

BOTH MIRRORS: The driver’s andpassenger’s outside mirrors willbe tilted down when the vehicle isshifted into R (Reverse).



EASY EXIT SEAT

If your vehicle has this feature, itallows you to select your preferencefor the automatic easy exit seatfeature. See Memory Seat andMirrors on page 1-5 for moreinformation.

Press the customization button untilEASY EXIT SEAT appears onthe DIC display. Press the set/resetbutton once to access the settingsfor this feature. Then press thecustomization button to scrollthrough the following settings:

OFF (default): No automatic seatexit recall will occur.

ON: The driver’s seat will moveback when the key is removed fromthe ignition. The steering columnwill also move up and forwardon vehicles with the power tilt andtelescopic steering feature. SeePower Tilt Wheel and TelescopicSteering Column on page 3-6for more information.


The automatic easy exit seatmovement will only occur one timeafter the key is removed from theignition. If the automatic movementhas already occurred, and you putthe key back in the ignition andremove it again, the seat andsteering column will stay in theoriginal exit position, unless amemory recall took place priorto removing the key again.



MEMORY SEAT RECALL

If your vehicle has this feature, itallows you to select your preferencefor the remote memory seat recallfeature. See Memory Seat andMirrors on page 1-5 for moreinformation.

Press the customization button untilMEMORY SEAT RECALL appearson the DIC display. Press theset/reset button once to access thesettings for this feature. Then pressthe customization button to scrollthrough the following settings:

OFF (default): No remote memoryseat recall will occur.

ON: The driver’s seat and outsidemirrors will automatically moveto the stored driving position whenthe unlock button on the RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) transmitter ispressed. The steering columnwill also move on vehicles with thepower tilt and telescopic steeringfeature. See Power Tilt Wheel andTelescopic Steering Column onpage 3-6 for more information.See “Relearn Remote Key” underDIC Operation and Displays onpage 3-43 for more informationon matching transmitters to driverID numbers.




REMOTE START

If your vehicle has this feature,it allows you to turn the remote startoff or on. The remote start featureallows you to start the engine fromoutside of the vehicle using theRemote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter. See Remote VehicleStart on page 2-5 for moreinformation.

Press the customization button untilREMOTE START appears on theDIC display. Press the set/resetbutton once to access the settingsfor this feature. Then press thecustomization button to scrollthrough the following settings:

OFF: The remote start feature willbe disabled.

ON (default): The remote startfeature will be enabled.



FACTORY SETTINGS

This feature allows you to set all ofthe customization features backto their factory default settings.

Press the customization buttonuntil FACTORY SETTINGS appearson the DIC display. Press theset/reset button once to access thesettings for this feature. Then pressthe customization button to scrollthrough the following settings:

RESTORE ALL (default): Thecustomization features will be set totheir factory default settings.

DO NOT RESTORE: Thecustomization features will not beset to their factory default settings.


EXIT FEATURE SETTINGS

This feature allows you to exit thefeature settings menu.

Press the customization button untilFEATURE SETTINGS PRESS V TOEXIT appears in the DIC display.Press the set/reset button once toexit the menu.

If you do not exit, pressing thecustomization button again will returnyou to the beginning of the featuresettings menu.


Exiting the FeatureSettings MenuThe feature settings menu will beexited when any of the followingoccurs:

• The vehicle is shifted out ofP (Park).

• The vehicle is no longer inON/RUN.

• The trip/fuel or vehicleinformation DIC buttonsare pressed.

• The end of the feature settingsmenu is reached and exited.

• A 40 second time period haselapsed with no selection made.

Audio System(s)Determine which radio the vehiclehas and read the following pages tobecome familiar with its features.

{ CAUTION

Taking your eyes off the roadfor extended periods could causea crash resulting in injury ordeath to you or others. Do notgive extended attention toentertainment tasks while driving.

This system provides access tomany audio and non audio listings.

To minimize taking your eyesoff the road while driving, do thefollowing while the vehicle is parked:

• Become familiar with theoperation and controls ofthe audio system.

• Set up the tone, speakeradjustments, and preset radiostations.

For more information, see DefensiveDriving on page 4-2.

Notice: Contact your dealer/retailer before adding anyequipment.

Adding audio or communicationequipment could interferewith the operation of the vehicle’sengine, radio, or other systems,and could damage them.Follow federal rules coveringmobile radio and telephoneequipment.

The vehicle has Retained AccessoryPower (RAP). With RAP, the audiosystem can be played even after theignition is turned off. See RetainedAccessory Power (RAP) onpage 2-22 for more information.


Setting the ClockThe vehicle has an analog clockand a digital radio clock. The digitalradio clock can be enabled ordisabled.

Enabling/Disabling the DigitalRadio ClockTo enable or disable the radio clockdisplay:

1. Press H until the clock and datesetting menus appear.

2. Press the pushbutton locatedunder the forward arrow labeluntil the menu for defaultclock and date settings appear.

3. Press the pushbutton locatedunder the currently displayedstatus of either ON or OFF totoggle the radio clock display onor off. The ON display indicates

the radio clock display is disabledand the OFF display indicates theradio clock display is enabled.

• If the radio clock displayis turned on, the screendisplays Radio Clock ONfor 10 seconds, then returnsto the original clockdisplay menu.

• If the radio clock displayis turned off, the screendisplays Radio Clock OFF for10 seconds. The menus forclock and date settings areremoved, and ON displaysas a current status indicatingthat the clock display can beturned on.

If the radio clock and analog clockare not synchronized. Use theprocedure below to synchronizeboth clocks.

Adjusting the Time and Date1. Turn the ignition key to

ACC/ACCESSORY or ON/RUN,then press O, to turn theradio on.

2. Press G to display HR, MIN,MM, DD, YYYY (hour, minute,month, day, and year).

3. Press the pushbutton locatedunder any one of the labels tobe changed.

4. To increase the time or date, doone of the following:• Press the pushbutton below

the selected label.• Press ¨SEEK.

• Press \ FWD.

• Turn f clockwise.

5. To decrease the time or date, doone of the following:• Press ©SEEK.

• Press s REV.

• Turn f counter-clockwise.


Changing the Time and DateDefault SettingTo change the time default settingfrom 12 hour to 24 hour or tochange the date default setting frommonth/day/year to day/month/year:

1. Press G and then the pushbuttonlocated under the forward arrowthat displays on the radio screenuntil the time 12H (hour) and24H (hour), and the date MM/DD(month and day) and DD/MM(day and month) displays.

2. Press the pushbutton locatedunder the desired option.

3. Press G again to apply theselected default, or let the screentime out.

Radio(s)

Radio with CD


The vehicle may have one of theseradios as its audio system.

Radios with CD and DVDRadios with CD and DVD have aBose® Surround Sound System.Some of its features are explainedlater in this section under, “Adjustingthe Speakers (Balance/Fade)”.

If the vehicle has a Rear SeatEntertainment (RSE) system,it has a CD/DVD radio. See RearSeat Entertainment (RSE) Systemon page 3-108 for more informationon the vehicle’s RSE system.

The DVD player is the top slot onthe radio faceplate. The playeris capable of reading the DTSprogrammed DVD Audio or DVDVideo media. DTS and DTS DigitalSurround are registered trademarksof Digital Theater Systems, Inc.

Manufactured under licensefrom Dolby Laboratories. Dolby andthe double-D symbol are trademarksof Dolby Laboratories.

Radio Data System (RDS)The Radio Data System (RDS)feature is available for use only onFM stations that broadcast RDSinformation. This system relies uponreceiving specific information fromthese stations and only works whenthe information is available. While theradio is tuned to an FM-RDS station,the station name or call lettersdisplay. In rare cases, a radio stationcould broadcast incorrect informationthat causes the radio features towork improperly. If this happens,contact the radio station.

Radio with CD and DVD


Playing the Radio

O (Power/Volume): Press to turnthe system on and off. Turn toincrease or decrease the volume.

For vehicles with a RearEntertainment System (RSE), pressand hold for more than two secondsto turn off the entire radio and RSEsystem and to start the parentalcontrol feature. Parental controlprevents the rear seat occupant fromoperating the Rear Seat Audio (RSA)system or remote control.

A lock symbol displays next tothe clock display while the parentalcontrol feature is being used.The feature remains on until O ispressed and held for more thantwo seconds, or the driver turns theignition off and exits the vehicle.

4 (Information): Press to switch thedisplay between the radio stationfrequency and the time. When theignition is in the OFF position,press 4 to display the time. Forvehicles with XM, MP3, WMA orRDS features, press 4 to displayadditional text information related tothe current FM-RDS or XM station;or CD, MP3 or WMA song. Ifinformation is available during XM,CD, MP3 or WMA playback, thesong title information displays onthe top line of the display and artistinformation displays on the bottomline. When information is notavailable, “NO INFO” is displayed.

Speed Compensated Volume(SCV): The Speed CompensatedVolume (SCV) feature automaticallyadjusts the radio volume tocompensate for road and wind noiseas the vehicle speeds up or slowsdown, so that the volume level isconsistent.

To activate SCV:

1. Set the radio volume to thedesired level.

2. Press the MENU button todisplay the radio setup menu.

3. Press the pushbutton underthe AUTO VOLUM (automaticvolume) label on the radiodisplay.

4. Press the pushbutton under thedesired Speed CompensatedVolume setting (OFF, Low, Med,or High) to select the level of radiovolume compensation. Press thepushbutton located below theBACK label on the MENU SETUPdisplay or let the display time outafter approximately 10 seconds.Each higher setting allows formore radio volume compensationat faster vehicle speeds.


Finding a Station

BAND: Press to switch betweenAM, FM, or XM. The selectiondisplays.

f (Tune): Turn to select radiostations.

©SEEK ¨: Press to go to theprevious or to the next stationand stay there.

To scan stations, press andhold © or ¨ until a beep sounds.The radio goes to a station, plays fora few seconds, then goes to the nextstation. Press either arrow again tostop scanning.

The radio only seeks and scansstations with a strong signal that arein the selected band.

Storing a Radio Station as aFavoriteDrivers are encouraged to set uptheir radio station favorites while thevehicle is in P (Park). Tune to favoritestations using the presets, favoritesbutton, and steering wheel controls.See Defensive Driving on page 4-2.

FAV (Favorites): A maximum of36 stations can be programmed asfavorites using the six pushbuttonspositioned below the radio stationfrequency labels and by using theradio favorites page button (FAVbutton). Press to go through up tosix pages of favorites, each havingsix favorite stations available perpage. Each page of favorites cancontain any combination of AM, FM,or XM stations.

The balance/fade and tone settingsthat were previously adjusted,are stored with the favorite stations.

To store a station as a favorite:

1. Tune to the desired radio station.

2. Press FAV to display the pagewhere to store the station.

3. Press and hold one of thesix pushbuttons until a beepsounds. When that pushbuttonis pressed and released, thestation that was set, returns.

4. Repeat the steps for each radiostation to be stored as a favorite.


To setup the number of favoritespages:

1. Press MENU to display the radiosetup menu.

2. Press the pushbutton locatedbelow the FAV 1-6 label.

3. Select the desired number offavorites pages by pressingthe pushbutton located belowthe displayed page numbers.

4. Press FAV, or let the menutime out, to return to the originalmain radio screen showing theradio station frequency labelsand to begin the process ofprogramming favorites for thechosen amount of numberedpages.

Auto Text (Satellite Radio Service,CD, MP3, and WMA features): Ifadditional information is available forthe current song being played, AutoText will automatically page/scroll theinformation every five seconds abovethe FAV presets on the radio display.

To activate Auto Text:


2. Press the pushbutton underAUTO TXT label on the radiodisplay.

3. Press the pushbutton under theON label on the radio display.

If 4 is pressed and the song titleor artist information is longerthan what can be displayed,the extra information will pageevery five seconds when AutoText is activated.

Setting the Tone(Bass/Midrange/Treble)

BASS/MID/TREB (Bass, Midrange,or Treble): To adjust bass,midrange, or treble:

1. Press f until the tone controllabels display.

2. Continue pressing f to highlightthe desired label, or press thepushbutton under the desiredlabel.

3. To adjust the highlighted setting,do one of the following until thedesired levels are obtained.

• Turn f clockwise orcounterclockwise.

• Press \ FWD, or s REV.

If a station’s frequency is weak or ifthere is static, decrease the treble.


To quickly adjust bass, midrange,or treble to the middle position,press the pushbutton positionedunder the BASS, MID, or TREBlabel for more than two seconds.A beep sounds and the level adjuststo the middle position.

To quickly adjust all tone andspeaker controls to the middleposition, press f for more thantwo seconds until a beep sounds.

EQ (Equalization): Press tochoose bass and treble equalizationsettings designed for different typesof music. The choices are pop, rock,country, talk, jazz, and classical.Selecting MANUAL or changingbass or treble, returns the EQ to themanual bass and treble settings.

Unique EQ settings can be saved foreach source.

If the radio has a Bose® audiosystem, the EQ settings are eitherMANUAL or TALK.

Adjusting the Speakers(Balance/Fade)

BAL/FADE (Balance/Fade):To adjust the balance or fade:

1. Press f until the speaker controllabels display.

2. Continue pressing f to highlightthe desired label, or press thepushbutton under the desiredlabel.

3. To adjust the highlighted setting,do one of the following until thedesired levels are obtained.

• Turn f clockwise orcounterclockwise.

• Press \ FWD, or s REV.

To quickly adjust balance or fadeto the middle position, press thepushbutton positioned under theBAL or FADE label for more thantwo seconds. A beep sounds and thelevel adjusts to the middle position.

To quickly adjust all speaker andtone controls to the middle position,press f for more than two secondsuntil a beep sounds.

Radios with CD and DVD fadedifferently depending on the DVDMedia type:

• With DVD-A 5.1 Surroundmedia, the left front and rightfront speakers fade rearward,leaving the center front speakersunaffected until the last fade step,then all front speakers mute.

• With DVD-V 5.1 Surround media,surround sound is maintaineduntil Step 4 of the Fade control isreached while fading rearward.At that point the audio systemoutput changes to Stereo toprevent the loss of Centerchannel output when the fullrearward fade position is reached.

If the Rear Seat Audio (RSA) isturned on, the radio disables FADEand mutes the rear speakers.


Finding a Category (CAT)Station

CAT (Category): The CAT button isused to find XM™ stations when theradio is in the XM mode. To find XMchannels within a desired category:

1. Press BAND until the XMfrequency displays.

2. Press CAT to display thecategory labels.

3. Continue pressing CAT until thedesired category name displays.

• Radios with CD and DVD canalso navigate the categorylist by pressing s REVor \ FWD.

4. Press either of the two buttonsbelow the desired category labelto immediately tune to the firstXM station associated with thatcategory.

5. To go to the next or previousXM station within the selectedcategory, do one of the following:

• Turn f.

• Press the buttons below theright or left arrows on thedisplay.

• Press either SEEK arrow.

6. To exit the category searchmode, press the FAV buttonor BAND button to displaythe favorites again.

Undesired XM categories canbe removed through the setupmenu. To remove an undesiredcategory, perform the following:


2. Press the pushbutton locatedbelow the XM CAT label.

3. Turn f to display the category tobe removed.

4. Press the pushbutton locatedunder the Remove label untilthe category name along withthe word Removed displays.

5. Repeat the steps to removemore categories.

Removed categories can berestored by pressing the pushbuttonunder the Add label when a removedcategory is displayed or by pressingthe pushbutton under the Restore Alllabel.

Categories cannot be removed oradded while the vehicle is movingfaster than 5 mph (8 km/h).


Radio Messages

Calibration Error: The audiosystem has been calibrated for thevehicle from the factory. If CalibrationError displays, it means that the radiohas not been configured properly forthe vehicle and it must be returned toyour dealer/retailer for service.

Locked: This message displayswhen the THEFTLOCK® systemhas locked up the radio. Take thevehicle to your dealer/retailer forservice.

If any error occurs repeatedly or if anerror cannot be corrected, contactyour dealer/retailer.

XM™ Satellite Radio ServiceXM is a satellite radio servicethat is based in the 48 contiguousUnited States and 10 Canadianprovinces. XM Satellite Radiohas a wide variety of programmingand commercial-free music,coast-to-coast, and in digital-qualitysound. During your trial or when yousubscribe, you will get unlimitedaccess to XM Radio Online for whenyou are not in the vehicle. A servicefee is required to receive the XMservice. For more information,contact XM at xmradio.com or call1-800-929-2100 in the U.S. andxmradio.ca or call 1-877-438-9677in Canada.

Radio Messages for XM Only

See XM Radio Messages onpage 3-96 later in this section forfurther detail.

Playing a CD(Single CD Player)Insert a CD partway into the slot,label side up. The player pullsit in and the CD should beginplaying.

Playing a CD (In Either theDVD or CD Slot)Insert a CD partway into the slot,label side up. The player pulls it inand the CD should begin playing(loading a disc into the system,depending on media type and formatranges from 5 to 20 seconds for aCD, and up to 30 seconds for a DVDto begin playing).

If the ignition or radio is turnedoff, while a CD is in the player,it stays in the player. When theignition or radio is turned on, the CDstarts playing where it stopped, if itwas the last selected audio source.


The CD is controlled by the buttonson the radio faceplate or by the RSAunit. See Rear Seat Audio (RSA) onpage 3-117 for more information.The DVD/CD decks, (upper slot isthe DVD deck and the lower slotis the CD deck) of the radio arecompatible with most audio CDs,CD-R, CD-RW, and MP3/WMAs.

When a CD is inserted, the text labelDVD or CD symbol displays onthe left side of the radio display.As each new track starts to play,the track number displays.

Care of CDs and DVDs

If playing a CD-R, the sound qualitycan be reduced due to CD-R orCD-RW quality, the method ofrecording, the quality of the musicthat has been recorded, and the waythe CD-R or CD-RW has beenhandled. Handle them carefully.

Store CD-R(s) or CD-RW(s) in theiroriginal cases or other protectivecases and away from direct sunlightand dust. The CD or DVD playerscans the bottom surface of the disc.If the surface of a CD is damaged,such as cracked, broken, orscratched, the CD does not playproperly or not at all. Do not touchthe bottom side of a CD whilehandling it; this could damage thesurface. Pick up CDs by grasping theouter edges or the edge of the holeand the outer edge.

If the surface of a CD is soiled, takea soft, lint free cloth or dampen aclean, soft cloth in a mild, neutraldetergent solution mixed with water,and clean it. Make sure the wipingprocess starts from the center tothe edge.

Care of the CD and DVD Player

Do not add any label to a CD, itcould get caught in the CD or DVDplayer. If a CD is recorded on apersonal computer and a descriptionlabel is needed, try labeling the top ofthe recorded CD with a marking pen.

The use of CD lens cleaners forCDs is not advised, due to the riskof contaminating the lens of theCD optics with lubricants internal tothe CD and DVD player mechanism.

Notice: If a label is added toa CD, or more than one CD isinserted into the slot at a time,or an attempt is made to playscratched or damaged CDs, theCD player could be damaged.While using the CD player, useonly CDs in good conditionwithout any label, load one CD at atime, and keep the CD player andthe loading slot free of foreignmaterials, liquids, and debris.


If an error displays, see “CDMessages” later in this section.

Z EJECT or CD (Eject): Pressand release to eject the disc that iscurrently playing. A CD ejecting froma radio with CD and DVD, ejects fromthe bottom slot. A beep sounds andEjecting Disc displays. Once the discis ejected, Remove Disc displays.The disc can be removed. If thedisc is not removed, after severalseconds, the disc automaticallypulls back into the player.

Z DVD (Eject): Press and releaseto eject the disc that is currentlyplaying in the top slot. A beepsounds and Ejecting Disc displays.

If loading and reading of a disccannot be completed, and thedisc fails to eject, press andhold Z DVD for more thanfive seconds to force the discto eject.

f (Tune): Turn to select tracks onthe CD that is currently playing.

©SEEK ¨: Press © to go to thestart of the current track, if more thanten seconds on the CD have played.Press ¨ to go to the next track.

For Radios with CD and DVD,press © to go to the start ofthe current track, if more thanfive seconds on the CD have played.If less than five seconds on the CDhave played, the previous trackplays. Press ¨ to go to the nexttrack.

If either arrow is held, or pressedmultiple times, the player continuesmoving backward or forward throughthe tracks on the CD.

s REV (Fast Reverse): Pressand hold to reverse playback quicklywithin a track. Sound will be heardat a reduced volume. Release toresume playing the track. Theelapsed time of the track displays.

\ FWD (Fast Forward): Pressand hold to advance playbackquickly within a track. Sound will beheard at a reduced volume. Releaseto resume playing the track. Theelapsed time of the track displays.

RDM (Random): CD tracks can belistened to in random, rather thansequential order with the randomsetting. To use random, press thepushbutton positioned under theRDM label until Random CurrentDisc displays. Press the pushbuttonagain to turn off random play.

BAND: Press to listen to theradio when a CD is playing. The CDremains inside the radio for futurelistening.

For the radio with CD and DVD,press to listen to the radio when aCD or DVD is playing. The CD orDVD remains inside the radio forfuture listening or for viewingentertainment.


CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press toselect between CD, or Auxiliary.

• When a CD is in the playerthe CD icon and a messageshowing the disc and/or tracknumber displays.

• If an auxiliary input device is notconnected, “No Input DeviceFound” displays.

DVD/CD AUX (Auxiliary): Pressto select between DVD, CD, orAuxiliary.

• If an auxiliary input device is notconnected, “No Aux Input Device”displays.

• When a disc is in either slot,the DVD/CD text label and amessage showing the track orchapter number displays.

• If an auxiliary input device is notconnected, and a disc is in boththe DVD slot and the CD slot theDVD/CD AUX button only cyclesbetween the two sources anddoes not indicate “No Aux InputDevice”.

• If a front auxiliary input device isconnected, the DVD/CD AUXbutton cycles through all availableoptions.

If a disc is inserted into top DVDslot, the rear seat operator can turnon the video screen and use theremote control to only navigate theCD tracks through the remotecontrol.

See “Using the Auxiliary InputJack(s)” later in this section, or“Audio/Video (A/V) Jacks” under,Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE)System on page 3-108 for moreinformation.

Radios with CD and DVDAudio OutputOnly one audio source can be heardthrough the speakers at one time. Anaudio source is defined as DVD slot,CD slot, XM, FM/AM, Front AuxiliaryJack, or Rear Auxiliary Jack.

Press O to turn the radio on.The radio can be heard through allof the vehicle speakers.

Front seat passengers can listento the radio (AM, FM, or XM) bypressing BAND or DVD/CD AUX toselect the CD slot, DVD slot, front orrear auxiliary input (if available).

If a playback device is plugged intothe radio’s front auxiliary input jack orthe rear auxiliary jack, the front seatpassengers are able to listen toplayback from this source throughthe vehicle speakers. See “Using theAuxiliary Input Jack(s)” later in thissection, or “Audio/Video (A/V) Jacks”under, Rear Seat Entertainment(RSE) System on page 3-108 formore information.


In some vehicles, depending onaudio options, the rear speakers canbe muted when the RSA power isturned on. See Rear Seat Audio(RSA) on page 3-117 for moreinformation.

Playing an MP3/WMA CD-R orCD-RW DiscThe radio has the capability ofplaying an MP3/WMA CD-Ror CD-RW disc. For moreinformation on how to play anMP3/WMA CD-R or CD-RW disc,see “Using an MP3” in the index.

CD Messages

CHECK DISC: Radios with a SingleCD player display CHECK DISCand/or ejects the CD if an erroroccurs.

Radios with a CD and DVD playermay display other messageswhen an error occurs:

Optical Error: The disc wasinserted upside down.

Disk Read Error: A disc wasinserted with an invalid or unknownformat.

Player Error: There are disc LOADor disc EJECT problems.

• It is very hot. When thetemperature returns to normal,the CD should play.

• The road is very rough. Whenthe road becomes smoother,the CD should play.

• The CD is dirty, scratched, wet,or upside down.

• The air is very humid. If so, waitabout an hour and try again.

• There could have been a problemwhile burning the CD.

• The label could be caught in theCD player.

If the CD is not playing correctlyfor any other reason, try a knowngood CD.

If any error occurs repeatedly or ifan error cannot be corrected, contactyour dealer/retailer. If the radiodisplays an error message, write itdown and provide it to your dealer/retailer when reporting the problem.

Using the DVD PlayerThe DVD player can be controlledby the buttons on the remote control,the RSA system, or by the buttons onthe radio faceplate. See “RemoteControl”, under Rear SeatEntertainment (RSE) System onpage 3-108 and Rear Seat Audio(RSA) on page 3-117 for moreinformation.

The DVD player is only compatiblewith DVDs of the appropriateregion code that is printed onthe jacket of most DVDs.

The DVD slot of the radio iscompatible with most audio CDs,CD-R, CD-RW, DVD-Video,DVD-Audio, DVD-R/RW, DVD+R/RW media along with MP3 and WMAformats.


If an error message displays on thevideo screen or the radio, see“DVD Display Error Messages”under, Rear Seat Entertainment(RSE) System on page 3-108 and“DVD Radio Error Messages” in thissection for more information.

Playing a DVD

f (Tune): Turn to change trackson a CD or DVD, to manually tunea radio station, or to change clockor date settings, while in the clockor date setting mode. See theinformation given earlier in thissection specific to the radio, CD,and the DVD. Also, see “Setting theClock” in the index, for setting theclock and date.

©SEEK (Previous Track/Chapter): Press to return to thestart of the current track or chapter.Press © again to go to the previoustrack or chapter. This button may notwork when the DVD is playing thecopyright information or thepreviews.

SEEK ¨ (Next Track/Chapter):Press to go to the next trackor chapter. This button may notwork when the DVD is playingthe copyright information orthe previews.

s REV (Fast Reverse): Press toquickly reverse the DVD at five timesthe normal speed. The radio displaysthe elapsed time while in fastreverse. To stop fast reversing,press again. This button may notwork when the DVD is playing thecopyright information or thepreviews.

\ FWD (Fast Forward): Pressto fast forward the DVD. The radiodisplays the elapsed time and fastforwards five times the normalspeed. To stop fast forwarding,press again. This button may notwork when the DVD is playing thecopyright information or thepreviews.

Z (Eject): Press to eject a DVD.If the DVD is ejected, but notremoved, the player automaticallypulls it back in after 15 seconds.

If loading and reading of a DVDcannot be completed, because of anunknown format, etc., and the discfails to eject, press and hold for morethan five seconds to force the discto eject.

DVD-V (Video) Display Buttons

Once a DVD-V is inserted, the radiodisplay menu shows several icons.Press the pushbuttons locatedunder any desired icon during DVDplayback. See the icon list belowfor more information.

The rear seat passenger cannavigate the DVD-V menus andcontrols through the remote control.See “Remote Control”, under RearSeat Entertainment (RSE) Systemon page 3-108 for more information.The Video Screen automaticallyturns on when the DVD-V is insertedinto the DVD slot.


r / j (Play/Pause): Press eitherthe play or pause icon displayedon the radio system, to togglebetween pausing or restartingplayback of a DVD.

• If the forward arrow is showingon display, the system is inpause mode.

• If the pause icon is showingon display, the system is inplayback mode.

• If the DVD screen is off, pressthe play button to turn thescreen on.

Some DVDs begin playing afterthe previews have finished, althoughthere could be a delay of up to30 seconds. If the DVD doesnot begin playing the movieautomatically, press the pushbuttonlocated under the play/pause icondisplayed on the radio. If the DVDstill does not play, refer to theon-screen instructions, if available.

c (Stop): Press to stop playing,rewinding, or fast forwarding a DVD.

r (Enter): Press to select thechoices that are highlighted inany menu.

y (Menu): Press to access theDVD menu. The DVD menu isdifferent on every DVD. Use thepushbuttons located under thenavigation arrows to navigate thecursor through the DVD menu.After making a selection press thisbutton. This button only operateswhen using a DVD.

Nav (Navigate): Press to displaydirectional arrows for navigatingthrough the menus.

q (Return): Press to exit thecurrent active menu and return tothe previous menu. This buttonoperates only when a DVD isplaying and a menu is active.

DVD-A (Audio) Display Buttons

Once a DVD-A is inserted, theradio display menu shows severalicons. Press the pushbuttons locatedunder any desired icon during DVDplayback. See the icon list below formore information.

The rear seat operator cannavigate the DVD-A menus andcontrols through the remote control.See “Remote Control”, under RearSeat Entertainment (RSE) Systemon page 3-108 for more information.The Video Screen does notautomatically power on when theDVD-A is inserted into the DVD slot.It must be manually turned on bythe rear seat occupant through theremote control power button.


r / j (Play/Pause): Press eitherthe play or pause icon displayedon the radio system, to togglebetween pausing or restartingplayback of a DVD.

• If the forward arrow is showingon display, the system is inpause mode.

• If the pause icon is showingon display, the system is inplayback mode.

q Group r: Press to cyclethrough musical groupings on theDVD-A disc.

Nav (Navigate): Press to displaydirectional arrows for navigatingthrough the menus.

e (Audio Stream): Press tocycle through audio stream formatslocated on the DVD-A disc.The video screen shows theaudio stream changing.

Inserting a Disc

To play a disc, gently insert thedisc, with the label side up, into theloading slot. The DVD player mightnot accept some paper labeledmedia. The player starts loading thedisc into the system and shows“Loading Disc” on the radio display.At the same time, the radio displaysa softkey menu of option(s). Somediscs automatically play the moviewhile others default to the softkeymenu display, which requires thePlay, Enter, or Navigation softkeysto be pressed; either by the softkeyon the radio or by the rear seatpassenger using the remote control.

It may take up to 30 seconds for aDVD to begin playing.

Stopping and Resuming Playback

To stop playing a DVD withoutturning off the system, do one of thefollowing:

• Press c on the remote control.

• Press the pushbutton locatedunder the stop or the play/pauseicons displayed on the radio.

• If the radio head is sourced tosomething other than DVD-V,press the DVD/CD AUX button tomake DVD-V the active source.

To resume DVD playback, do oneof the following:

• Press r / j on the remotecontrol.

• Press the pushbutton locatedunder the play/pause icondisplayed on the radio.

The DVD should resume playfrom where it last stopped if thedisc has not been ejected and thestop button has not been pressedtwice on the remote control.


If the disc has been ejected or thestop button has been pressed twiceon the remote control, the discresumes playing at the beginningof the disc.

Ejecting a Disc

Press Z DVD on the radio to ejectthe disc. If a disc is ejected from theradio, but not removed, the radioreloads the disc after a short periodof time. The disc is stored in theradio. The radio does not resumeplay of the disc automatically. If themovie is reloaded and the RSAsystem is sourced to the DVD, theplayer begins to play again. If loadingand reading a DVD or CD cannot becompleted, and the disc fails to eject,press and hold Z DVD for morethan five seconds to force the discto eject.

DVD Radio Error Messages

Player Error: This messagedisplays when there are disc loador eject problems.

Disc Format Error: This messagedisplays, if the disc is insertedwith the disc label wrong side up,or if the disc is damaged.

Disc Region Error: This messagedisplays, if the disc is not from acorrect region.

No Disc Inserted: This messagedisplays, if no disc is presentwhen Z DVD or DVD/CD AUX ispressed on the radio.

Using the Auxiliary Input JackThe radio system has an auxiliaryinput jack located on the lower rightside of the faceplate. This is notan audio output; do not plug aheadphone set into the front auxiliaryinput jack. Connect an auxiliary inputdevice such as an iPod, laptopcomputer, MP3 player, CD player,or cassette tape player, etc. to theauxiliary input jack for use as anothersource for audio listening.

Drivers are encouraged to set upany auxiliary device while thevehicle is in P (Park). See DefensiveDriving on page 4-2 for moreinformation on driver distraction.

To use an auxiliary input device,connect a 3.5 mm (1/8 inch) cable tothe radio’s front auxiliary input jack.


O (Power/Volume): Turn clockwiseor counterclockwise to increaseor decrease the volume of theportable player. Additional volumeadjustments might have to be madefrom the portable device if thevolume is not loud or soft enough.

BAND: Press to listen to the radiowhen a portable audio device isplaying. The portable audio devicecontinues playing, so you mightwant to stop it or turn it off.

CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press toselect between CD, or Auxiliary.

• When a CD is in the playerthe CD icon and a messageshowing the disc and/or tracknumber displays.

• If an auxiliary input device is notconnected, “No Input DeviceFound” displays.

DVD/CD AUX (Auxiliary): Pressto select between DVD, CD, orAuxiliary.

• If an auxiliary input device is notconnected, “No Aux Input Device”displays.

• When a disc is in either slot,the DVD/CD text label and amessage showing the track orchapter number displays.

• If an auxiliary input device is notconnected, and a disc is in boththe DVD slot and the CD slot theDVD/CD AUX button only cyclesbetween the two sources anddoes not indicate “No Aux InputDevice”.

• If a front auxiliary input device isconnected, the DVD/CD AUXbutton cycles through all availableoptions.

If a disc is inserted into top DVDslot, the rear seat operator can turnon the video screen and use theremote control to only navigatethe CD tracks through the remotecontrol.

See “Using the Auxiliary InputJack(s)” later in this section, or“Audio/Video (A/V) Jacks” under,Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE)System on page 3-108 for moreinformation.


Using an MP3(Radio with CD)MP3/WMA CD-R orCD-RW DiscThe radio plays MP3/WMA files thatwere recorded on a CD-R or CD-RWdisc. The files can be recorded withthe following fixed bit rates: 32 kbps,40 kbps, 56 kbps, 64 kbps, 80 kbps,96 kbps, 112 kbps, 128 kbps,160 kbps, 192 kbps, 224 kbps,256 kbps, and 320 kbps or a variablebit rate. Song title, artist name, andalbum are available for display by theradio when recorded using ID3 tagsversion 1 and 2.

Compressed Audio

The radio also plays discs thatcontain both uncompressed CDaudio (.CDA files) and MP3/WMAfiles. The radio plays both file formatsin the order in which they wererecorded to the disc.

MP3/WMA Format

Creating an MP3/WMA disc on apersonal computer:

• Make sure the MP3/WMA filesare recorded on a CD-R orCD-RW disc.

• Do not mix standard audio andMP3/WMA files on one disc.

• The CD player is able toread and play a maximum of50 folders, 15 playlists, and acombined total of 512 foldersand files.

• Create a folder structure thatmakes it easy to find songswhile driving. Organize songs byalbums using one folder for eachalbum. Each folder or albumshould contain 18 songs or less.

• Avoid subfolders. The systemcan support up to eight subfoldersdeep, however, keep the totalnumber of folders to a minimum inorder to reduce the complexityand confusion in trying to locate aparticular folder during playback.

• Make sure playlists have a .mp3or .wpl extension (other fileextensions might not work).

• Minimize the length of the file,folder, or playlist names. Long file,folder, or playlist names, or acombination of a large number offiles and folders, or playlists couldcause the player to be unable toplay up to the maximum numberof files, folders, playlists, orsessions. To play a large numberof files, folders, playlists orsessions, minimize the length ofthe file, folder, or playlist name.Long names also take up morespace on the display, potentiallygetting cut off.

• Finalize the audio disc beforeburning it. Trying to add music toan existing disc could cause thedisc not to function in the player.


Change playlists by using Sc andcT folder buttons, the f knob,or the SEEK arrows. An MP3/WMACD-R or CD-RW that was recordedusing no file folders can be played.If a CD-R or CD-RW contains morethan the maximum of 50 folders,15 playlists, and a combined totalof 512 folders and files, the playeraccesses and navigates up to themaximum, but all items over themaximum are not accessible.

Root Directory

The root directory of the CD-Ror CD-RW is treated as a folder.If the root directory has compressedaudio files, the directory displays asthe CD label. All files containeddirectly under the root directory areaccessed prior to any root directoryfolders. However, playlists (Px) arealways accessed before root foldersor files.

If a disc contains bothuncompressed CD audio (.CDA)and MP3/WMA files, a folderunder the root directory calledCD accesses all of the CD audiotracks on the disc.

Empty Directory or Folder

If a root directory or a folder existssomewhere in the file structure thatcontains only folders/subfolders andno compressed files directly beneaththem, the player advances to thenext folder in the file structure thatcontains compressed audio files.The empty folder does not display.

No Folder

When the CD-R or CD-RW disccontains only compressed files, thefiles are located under the rootfolder. The next and previous folderfunction does not display on aCD-R or CD-RW disc that wasrecorded without folders or playlists.

When the CD-R or CD-RW disccontains only playlists andcompressed audio files, but nofolders, all files are located underthe root folder. The folder down andup buttons search playlists (Px)first and then goes to the root folder.


Order of Play

Tracks recorded to the CD-R orCD-RW disc are played in thefollowing order:

• Play begins from the first trackin the first playlist and continuessequentially through all tracks ineach playlist. When the last trackof the last playlist has played, playcontinues from the first track ofthe first playlist.

• Play begins from the first trackin the first folder and continuessequentially through all tracks ineach folder. When the last track ofthe last folder has played, playcontinues from the first track ofthe first folder.

When play enters a new folder,the display does not automaticallyshow the new folder name unless thefolder mode is chosen as the defaultdisplay. The new track namedisplays.

File System and Naming

The song name that displays is thesong name that is contained in theID3 tag. If the song name is notpresent in the ID3 tag, then the radiodisplays the file name without theextension (such as .mp3) as thetrack name.

Track names longer than32 characters or four pages areshortened. Parts of words on thelast page of text and the extensionof the filename does not display.

Preprogrammed Playlists

Preprogrammed playlists thatwere created using WinAmp™,MusicMatch™, or Real Jukebox™software can be accessed, however,they cannot be edited using theradio. These playlists are treatedas special folders containingcompressed audio song files.

Playing an MP3/WMA

Insert a CD-R or CD-RW discpartway into the slot label side up.The player pulls it in, and theCD-R or CD-RW should beginplaying.

Z EJECT: Press to eject the disc.

f (Tune): Turn to select MP3/WMAfiles on the CD-R or CD-RWcurrently playing.

©SEEK ¨: Press the left SEEKarrow to go to the start of the currentMP3/WMA file, if more than tenseconds have played. Press theright SEEK arrow to go to the nextMP3/WMA file. If either SEEK arrowis held or pressed multiple times, theplayer continues moving backward orforward through MP3/WMA files onthe CD.

Sc (Previous Folder): Pressthe pushbutton positioned underthe Folder label to go to thefirst track in the previous folder.


cT (Next Folder): Press thepushbutton positioned underthe Folder label to go to thefirst track in the next folder.

s REV (Reverse): Press andhold this button to reverse playbackquickly within an MP3/WMA file.Sound is heard at a reduced volume.Release this button to resumeplaying the file. The elapsed timeof the file displays.

\ FWD (Fast Forward):Press and hold this button toadvance playback quickly withinan MP3/WMA file. Sound is heardat a reduced volume. Release thisbutton to resume playing the file.The elapsed time of the file displays.

RDM (Random): With the randomsetting, MP3/WMA files on the CD-Ror CD-RW can be listened to inrandom, rather than sequential order.

To play MP3/WMA files from theCD-R or CD-RW in random order,press the pushbutton positionedunder the RDM label until RandomCurrent Disc displays. Press thesame pushbutton again to turn offrandom play.

h (Music Navigator): Usethe music navigator feature to playMP3/WMA files on the CD-R orCD-RW in order by artist or album.Press the pushbutton located belowthe music navigator label. The playerscans the disc to sort the files byartist and album ID3 tag information.It could take several minutes to scanthe disc depending on the numberof MP3/WMA files recorded to the

CD-R or CD-RW disc. The radio canbegin playing while it is scanning thedisc in the background. When thescan is finished, the CD-R or CD-RWbegins playing again.

Once the disc has scanned, theplayer defaults to playing MP3/WMAfiles in order by artist. The currentartist playing is shown on the secondline of the display between thearrows. Once all songs by that artistare played, the player moves to thenext artist in alphabetical order onthe CD-R or CD-RW and beginsplaying MP3/WMA files by that artist.To listen to MP3/WMA files byanother artist, press the pushbuttonlocated below either arrow button.The player goes to the next orprevious artist in alphabetical order.Continue pressing either button untilthe desired artist is displayed.


To change from playback by artistto playback by album, press thepushbutton located below the SortBy label. From the sort screen, pushone of the buttons below the albumbutton. Press the pushbutton belowthe back label to return to the mainmusic navigator screen. Now thealbum name is displayed on thesecond line between the arrows andsongs from the current album beginsto play. Once all songs from thatalbum are played, the player movesto the next album in alphabeticalorder on the CD-R or CD-RW andbegins playing MP3/WMA files fromthat album.

To exit music navigator mode, pressthe pushbutton below the Back labelto return to normal MP3/WMAplayback.

Using an MP3 (Radiowith CD and DVD Player)MP3/WMA CD-R orCD-RW DiscCompressed Audio or MixedMode Discs

The radio also plays discs thatcontain both uncompressed CDaudio (.CDA files) and MP3/WMAfiles depending on which slot the discis loaded into. By default the radioreads only the uncompressed audio(.CDA) and ignores the MP3/WMAfiles on the DVD deck. On the CDdeck, pressing the CAT (category)button toggles between compressedand uncompressed audio format,the default being the uncompressedformat (.CDA).

MP3/WMA Format

To create an MP3/WMA disc on apersonal computer:

• Make sure the MP3/WMA filesare recorded on a CD-R orCD-RW disc.

• Do not mix standard audio andMP3/WMA files on one disc.

• The CD player (lower slot) isable to read and play a maximumcombination of 512 files andfolders. The DVD player (upperslot) is able to read 255 folders,15 playlists and 40 sessions.

• Create a folder structure thatmakes it easy to find songs whiledriving. Organize songs byalbums using one folder for eachalbum. Each folder or albumshould contain 18 songs or less.


• Avoid subfolders. The system cansupport up to eight subfoldersdeep, however, keep the totalnumber of folders to a minimumin order to reduce the complexityand confusion in trying to locate aparticular folder during playback.

• Make sure playlists havea .m3u, .wpl or .pls extensionas other file extensions mightnot work.

• Minimize the length of the file,folder or playlist names. Long file,folder, or playlist names, or acombination of a large number offiles and folders, or playlists couldcause the player to be unable toplay up to the maximum numberof files, folders, playlists, orsessions. To play a large numberof files, folders, playlists, orsessions, minimize the length ofthe file, folder, or playlist name.Long names also take up morespace on the display, potentiallygetting cut off.

• Finalize the audio disc beforeburning it. Trying to add music toan existing disc could cause thedisc not to function in the player.

Root Directory

The root directory of the CD-R orCD-RW disc is treated as a folder.If the root directory has compressedaudio files, the directory is displayedas F1 ROOT. All files containeddirectly under the root directory areaccessed prior to any root directoryfolders. However, playlists (Px) arealways accessed before root foldersor files.

Empty Directory or Folder

If a root directory or a folder existssomewhere in the file structure thatcontains only folders/subfolders andno compressed files directly beneaththem, the player advances to thenext folder in the file structure thatcontains compressed audio files.The empty folder does not display.

No Folder

When the CD-R or CD-RW disccontains only compressed files, thefiles are located under the root folder.The next and previous folder functiondoes not function on a CD-R orCD-RW that was recorded withoutfolders or playlists. When displayingthe name of the folder the radiodisplays ROOT.

When the CD-R or CD-RWdisc contains only playlists andcompressed audio files, but nofolders, all files are located underthe root folder. The folder downand the folder up buttons searchplaylists (Px) first and then goesto the root folder. When the radiodisplays the name of the folder theradio displays ROOT.


Order of Play

Tracks recorded to the CD-R orCD-RW disc are played in thefollowing order:

• Play begins from the first trackin the first playlist and continuessequentially through all tracks ineach playlist. When the last trackof the last playlist has played, playcontinues from the first track ofthe first playlist.

• Play begins from the first trackin the first folder and continuessequentially through all tracks ineach folder. When the last track ofthe last folder has played, playcontinues from the first track ofthe first folder.

When play enters a new folder,the display does not automaticallyshow the new folder nameunless the folder mode has beenchosen as the default display.The new track name displays.

File System and Naming

The song name that is displayed isthe song name that is contained inthe ID3 tag. If the song name is notpresent in the ID3 tag, then the radiodisplays the file name without theextension (such as .mp3) as thetrack name.

Track names longer than32 characters or four pages areshortened. Parts of words on thelast page of text and the extensionof the filename displays.

Preprogrammed Playlists

Preprogrammed playlists thatwere created using WinAmp™,MusicMatch™, or Real Jukebox™software can be accessed, however,they cannot be edited using theradio. These playlists are treatedas special folders containingcompressed audio song files.

Playing an MP3/WMA(In Either the DVD or CD Slot)

Insert a CD-R or CD-RW discpartway into either the top or bottomslot, label side up. The player pulls itin, and the CD-R or CD-RW shouldbegin playing.

Depending on the format ofthe disc, a softkey menu appearsand allows navigation of the disc.The menu reads left to right asRDM (Randomize song play order),a Folder icon with left and rightarrows (to move up or down throughavailable folders), a PL tag if the dischas a Playlist available, and a MusicNavigator tag. If a Playlist tag isshown, toggling this key brings up aFolder softkey only or the menu aspreviously described.

If the ignition or radio is turned offwith a CD-R or CD-RW disc in theplayer it stays in the player. Whenthe ignition or radio is turned backon, the CD-R or CD-RW starts toplay where it stopped, if it was thelast selected audio source.


As each new track starts to play,the track number and song titledisplays.

Z CD (Eject): Press and releasethis button to eject the CD-R orCD-RW that is currently playing inthe bottom slot. A beep sounds andEjecting Disc displays. Once the discis ejected, Remove Disc displays.The CD-R or CD-RW disc can beremoved. If the CD-R or CD-RWdisc is not removed, afterseveral seconds, the CD-R orCD-RW disc automatically pullsback into the player.

If loading and reading of a CD cannotbe completed, such as unknownformat, etc., and the disc fails toeject, press and hold this button formore than five seconds to force thedisc to eject.

Z DVD (Eject): Press and releasethis button to eject the CD-R orCD-RW that is currently playing inthe top slot. A beep sounds andEjecting Disc displays. Once the discis ejected, Remove Disc displays.The CD-R or CD-RW disc can beremoved. If the CD-R or CD-RWdisc is not removed, afterseveral seconds, the CD-R orCD-RW disc automatically pullsback into the player. If loadingand reading of a CD cannot becompleted, such as unknown format,etc., and the disc fails to eject,press and hold this button for morethan five seconds to force the discto eject.

f (Tune): Turn this knob to selectMP3/WMA files on the CD-R orCD-RW that is currently playing.

©SEEK ¨: Press the leftSEEK arrow to go to the start of thecurrent MP3/WMA file, if more thanfive seconds have played. If lessthan five seconds have played, theprevious MP3/WMA file plays. Pressthe right SEEK arrow to go to thenext MP3/WMA file. If either SEEKarrow is held, or pressed multipletimes, the player continues movingbackward or forward through theMP3/WMA files on the CD.

Sc (Previous Folder): Pressthe pushbutton positioned underthe Folder label to go to thefirst track in the previous folder.

cT (Next Folder): Pressthe pushbutton positioned underthe Folder label to go to thefirst track in the next folder.


s REV (Reverse): Press andhold this button to reverse playbackquickly within an MP3/WMA file.Sound is heard at a reduced volume.Release this button to resumeplaying the file. The elapsed timeof the file displays.

\ FWD (Fast Forward):Press and hold this button toadvance playback quickly withinan MP3/WMA file. Sound is heardat a reduced volume. Release thisbutton to resume playing the file.The elapsed time of the file displays.

RDM (Random): With the randomsetting, MP3/WMA files on the CD-Ror CD-RW can be listened to inrandom, rather than sequential order.To play MP3/WMA files from theCD-R or CD-RW in random order,press the pushbutton positionedunder the RDM label until RandomCurrent Disc displays. Press thesame pushbutton again to turn offrandom play.

h (Music Navigator): Usethe music navigator feature to playMP3/WMA files on the CD-R orCD-RW in order by artist or album.Press the pushbutton located belowthe music navigator label. The playerscans the disc to sort the files byartist and album ID3 tag information.It could take several minutes to scanthe disc depending on the numberof MP3/WMA files recorded to theCD-R or CD-RW disc.

To cancel music navigator whilethe player is scanning, press thepushbutton located below the musicnavigator label or eject the disc.

The radio can begin playing while it isscanning the disc in the background.When the scan is finished, the CD-Ror CD-RW begins playing again.

Once the disc has been scanned, theplayer defaults to playing MP3/WMAfiles in order by artist. The currentartist playing is shown on the second

line of the display between thearrows. To listen to MP3/WMAfiles by another artist, press thepushbutton located below eitherarrow button. The disc goes to thenext or previous artist in alphabeticalorder. Continue pressing eitherbutton until the desired artist isdisplayed.

To change from playback by artist toplayback by album, press thepushbutton located below the SortBy label. From the sort screen, pushone of the buttons below the albumbutton. Press the pushbutton belowthe back label to return to the mainmusic navigator screen. Now thealbum name displays on the secondline between the arrows and songsfrom the current album begin to play.Once all songs from that album areplayed, the player moves to the nextalbum in alphabetical order on theCD-R or CD-RW and begins playingMP3/WMA files from that album.


To exit music navigator mode, pressthe pushbutton below the Back labelto return to normal MP3/WMAplayback.

BAND: Press this button to listen tothe radio when a CD or a DVD isplaying. The CD or DVD remainsinside the radio for future listeningor viewing entertainment.

DVD/CD AUX (Auxiliary): Pressthis button to cycle through DVD,CD, or Auxiliary when listening to theradio. The DVD/CD text label and amessage showing track or chapternumber displays when a disc is ineither slot. Press this button againand the system automaticallysearches for an auxiliary inputdevice, such as a portable audioplayer. If a portable audio playeris not connected, “No Aux Input

Device” displays. If a disc is in boththe DVD slot and the CD slot theDVD/CD AUX button cycles betweenthe two sources and does notindicate “No Aux Input Device”.If a front auxiliary device isconnected, the DVD/CD AUXbutton cycles through all availableoptions, such as: DVD slot, CD slot,Front Auxiliary, and Rear Auxiliary(if available). See “Using theAuxiliary Input Jack(s)” later in thissection, or “Audio/Video (A/V) Jacks”under, Rear Seat Entertainment(RSE) System on page 3-108 formore information.

If a MP3/WMA is inserted into topDVD slot, the rear seat operator canturn on the video screen and use theremote control to navigate the CD(tracks only).

XM Radio MessagesXL (Explicit Language Channels):These channels, or any others, canbe blocked at a customer’s request,by calling 1-800-852-XMXM (9696).

XM Updating: The encryptioncode in the receiver is beingupdated, and no action is required.This process should take no longerthan 30 seconds.

No XM Signal: The system isfunctioning correctly, but the vehicleis in a location that is blockingthe XM™ signal. When the vehicleis moved into an open area, thesignal should return.

Loading XM: The audio systemis acquiring and processingaudio and text data. No action isneeded. This message shoulddisappear shortly.


Channel Off Air: This channel isnot currently in service. Tune in toanother channel.

Channel Unauth: This channel isblocked or cannot be received withyour XM Subscription package.

Channel Unavail: This previouslyassigned channel is no longerassigned. Tune to another station.If this station was one of the presets,choose another station for thatpreset button.

No Artist Info: No artist informationis available at this time on thischannel. The system is workingproperly.

No Title Info: No song titleinformation is available at this timeon this channel. The system isworking properly.

No CAT Info: No categoryinformation is available at this timeon this channel. The system isworking properly.

No Information: No text orinformational messages areavailable at this time on thischannel. The system is workingproperly.

CAT Not Found: There are nochannels available for the selectedcategory. The system is workingproperly.

XM Theftlocked: The XM receiverin the vehicle could have previouslybeen in another vehicle. For securitypurposes, XM receivers cannot beswapped between vehicles. If thismessage is received after having thevehicle serviced, check with yourdealer/retailer.

XM Radio ID: If tuned to channel 0,this message alternates with theXM™ Radio 8 digit radio ID label.This label is needed to activate theservice.

Unknown: If this message isreceived when tuned to channel 0,there could be a receiver fault.Consult with your dealer/retailer.

Check XM Receivr: If thismessage does not clear within ashort period of time, the receivercould have a fault. Consult withyour dealer/retailer.

XM Not Available: If this messagedoes not clear within a short period oftime, the receiver could have a fault.Consult with your dealer/retailer.


Navigation/Radio SystemFor vehicles with a navigationradio system, see the separateNavigation System manual.

Bluetooth®

Vehicles with a Bluetooth systemcan use a Bluetooth capable cellphone with a Hands Free Profile tomake and receive phone calls. Thesystem can be used while the key isin ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORYposition. The range of the Bluetoothsystem can be up to 30 ft. (9.1 m).Not all phones support all functions,and not all phones are guaranteed towork with the in-vehicle Bluetoothsystem. See gm.com/bluetooth formore information on compatiblephones.

Voice RecognitionThe Bluetooth system usesvoice recognition to interpret voicecommands to dial phone numbersand name tags.

Noise: Keep interior noise levels toa minimum. The system may notrecognize voice commands if thereis too much background noise.

When to Speak: A short tonesounds after the system respondsindicating when it is waiting fora voice command. Wait untilthe tone and then speak.

How to Speak: Speak clearly in acalm and natural voice.

Audio SystemWhen using the in-vehicle Bluetoothsystem, sound comes throughthe vehicle’s front audio systemspeakers and overrides the audio

system. Use the audio systemvolume knob, during a call, to changethe volume level. The adjustedvolume level remains in memory forlater calls. To prevent missed calls,a minimum volume level is used ifthe volume is turned down too low.

Bluetooth ControlsUse the buttons located on thesteering wheel to operate thein-vehicle Bluetooth system. SeeAudio Steering Wheel Controls onpage 3-119 for more information.

bg (Push To Talk): Press toanswer incoming calls, to confirmsystem information, and to startspeech recognition.

cx (Phone On Hook): Press toend a call, reject a call, or to cancelan operation.


PairingA Bluetooth enabled cell phone mustbe paired to the in-vehicle Bluetoothsystem first and then connected tothe vehicle before it can be used.See the cell phone manufacturersuser guide for Bluetooth functionsbefore pairing the cell phone. If aBluetooth phone is not connected,calls will be made using OnStar®

Hands-Free Calling, if available.Refer to the OnStar owner’s guidefor more information.

Pairing Information:

• Up to five cell phones canbe paired to the in-vehicleBluetooth system.

• The pairing process is disabledwhen the vehicle is moving.

• The in-vehicle Bluetooth systemautomatically links with the firstavailable paired cell phone in theorder the phone was paired.

• Only one paired cell phone canbe connected to the in-vehicleBluetooth system at a time.

• Pairing should only need to becompleted once, unless changesto the pairing information havebeen made or the phone isdeleted.

To link to a different paired phone,see Linking to a Different Phonelater in this section.

Pairing a Phone

1. Press and hold b g fortwo seconds. The systemresponds with “Ready” followedby a tone.

2. Say “Bluetooth”. The systemresponds with “Bluetoothready” followed by a tone.

3. Say “Pair”. The system respondswith instructions and a four digitPIN number. The PIN numberwill be used in Step 4.

4. Start the Pairing process on thecell phone that will be paired tothe vehicle. Reference the cellphone manufacturers user guidefor information on this process.Locate the device named“General Motors” in the list onthe cellular phone and follow theinstructions on the cell phoneto enter the four digit PIN numberthat was provided in Step 3.

5. The system prompts for aname for the phone. Use a namethat best describes the phone.This name will be used to indicatewhich phone is connected.The system then confirms thename provided.

6. The system responds with“<Phone name> has beensuccessfully paired” after thepairing process is complete.

7. Repeat Steps 1 through 7 foradditional phones to be paired.


Listing All Paired and ConnectedPhones



3. Say “List”. The system lists allthe paired Bluetooth devices.If a phone is connected tothe vehicle, the system willsay “Is connected” after theconnected phone.

Deleting a Paired Phone



3. Say “Delete”. The system askswhich phone to delete followedby a tone.

4. Say the name of the phoneto be deleted. If the phone nameis unknown, use the “List”command for a list of all pairedphones. The system respondswith “Would you like to delete<phone name>? Yes or No”followed by a tone.

5. Say “Yes” to delete the phone.The system responds with“OK, deleting <phone name>”.

Linking to a Different Phone

1. Press and hold b g fortwo seconds. The systemresponds with “Ready”followed by a tone.


3. Say “Change phone”. Thesystem responds with “Pleasewait while I search for otherphones”.

• If another phone is found,the response will be “<Phonename> is now connected”.

• If another phone is not found,the original phone remainsconnected.

Storing Name TagsThe system can store up to thirtyphone numbers as name tagsthat are shared between theBluetooth and OnStar systems.

The system uses the followingcommands to store and retrievephone numbers:

• Store

• Digit Store

• Directory


Using the Store Command

The store command allows aphone number to be stored withoutentering the digits individually.


2. Say “Store”. The systemresponds with “Store, numberplease” followed by a tone.

3. Say the complete phone numberto be stored at once with nopauses.

• If the system recognizes thenumber it responds with “OK,Storing” and repeats thephone number.

• If the system is unsure itrecognizes the phone number,it responds with “Store” andrepeats the number followedby “Please say yes or no”.

If the number is correct, say“Yes”. If the number is notcorrect, say “No”. The systemwill ask for the number to bere-entered.

4. After the system stores thephone number, it respondswith “Please say the name tag”followed by a tone.

5. Say a name tag for the phonenumber. The name tag isrecorded and the systemresponds with “About tostore <name tag>. Doesthat sound OK?”.

• If the name tag does not soundcorrect, say “No” and repeatStep 5.

• If the name tag soundscorrect, say “Yes” and thename tag is stored. After thenumber is stored the systemreturns to the main menu.

Using the Digit Store Command

The digit store command allowsa phone number to be storedby entering the digits individually.


2. Say “Digit Store”. The systemresponds with “Please say thefirst digit to store” followedby a tone.

3. Say the first digit to be stored.The system will repeat backthe digit it heard followed by atone. Continue entering digitsuntil the number to be storedis complete.

• If an unwanted number isrecognized by the system,say “Clear” at any timeto clear the last number.

• To hear all of the numbersrecognized by the system, say“Verify” at any time and thesystem will repeat them.


4. After the complete numberhas been entered, say “Store”.The system responds with“Please say the name tag”followed by a tone.

5. Say a name tag for the phonenumber. The name tag isrecorded and the systemresponds with “About tostore <name tag>. Doesthat sound OK?”.

• If the name tag does not soundcorrect, say “No” and repeatStep 5.

• If the name tag soundscorrect, say “Yes” and thename tag is stored. After thenumber is stored the systemreturns to the main menu.

Using the Directory Command

The directory command listsall of the name tags stored bythe system. To use the directorycommand:


2. Say “Directory”. The systemresponds with “Directory”and then plays back all of thestored name tags. When thelist is complete, the systemreturns to the main menu.

Deleting Name TagsThe system uses the followingcommands to delete name tags:

• Delete

• Delete all name tags

Using the Delete Command

The delete command allows specificname tags to be deleted.

To use the delete command:


2. Say “Delete”. The systemresponds with “Delete, pleasesay the name tag” followedby a tone.

3. Say the name tag to be deleted.The system responds with “Wouldyou like to delete, <name tag>?Please say yes or no”.

• If the name tag is correct, say“Yes” to delete the name tag.The system responds with“OK, deleting <name tag>,returning to the main menu.”

• If the name tag is incorrect, say“No”. The system respondswith “No. OK, let’s try again,please say the name tag.”


Using the Delete All Name TagsCommand

The delete all name tags commanddeletes all stored phone book nametags and route name tags for OnStar(if present).

To use the delete all name tagscommand:


2. Say “Delete all name tags”.The system responds with “Youare about to delete all name tagsstored in your phone directoryand your route destinationdirectory. Are you sure you wantto do this? Please say yes or no.”

• Say “Yes” to delete allname tags.

• Say “No” to cancel the functionand return to the main menu.

Making a CallCalls can be made using thefollowing commands:

• Dial

• Digit Dial

• Call

• Re-dial

Using the Dial Command


2. Say “Dial”. The system respondswith “Dial using <phone name>.“Number please” followed bya tone.

3. Say the entire number withoutpausing.

• If the system recognizes thenumber, it responds with“OK, Dialing” and dialsthe number.

• If the system does notrecognize the number, itconfirms the numbers followedby a tone. If the number iscorrect, say “Yes”. The systemresponds with “OK, Dialing”and dials the number. If thenumber is not correct, say“No”. The system will ask forthe number to be re-entered.

Using the Digit Dial Command


2. Say “Digit Dial”. The systemresponds with “Digit dial using<phone name>, please say thefirst digit to dial” followed bya tone.

3. Say the digit to be dialed one ata time. Following each digit, thesystem will repeat back the digit itheard followed by a tone.


4. Continue entering digits until thenumber to be dialed is complete.After the whole number hasbeen entered, say “Dial”.The system responds with “OK,Dialing” and dials the number.

• If an unwanted numberis recognized by the system,say “Clear” at any time toclear the last number.

• To hear all of the numbersrecognized by the system, say“Verify” at any time and thesystem will repeat them.

Using the Call Command


2. Say “Call”. The system respondswith “Call using <phone name>.Please say the name tag”followed by a tone.

3. Say the name tag of the personto call.

• If the system clearlyrecognizes the name tag itresponds with “OK, calling,<name tag>” and dialsthe number.

• If the system is unsure itrecognizes the right name tag,it confirms the name tagfollowed by a tone. If thename tag is correct, say “Yes”.The system responds with“OK, calling, <name tag>” anddials the number. If the nametag is not correct, say “No”.The system will ask for thename tag to be re-entered.

Once connected, the person calledwill be heard through the audiospeakers.

Using the Re-dial Command


2. After the tone, say “Re-dial”.The system responds with“Re-dial using <phone name>”and dials the last number calledfrom the connected Bluetoothphone.

Once connected, the person calledwill be heard through the audiospeakers.

Receiving a CallWhen an incoming call is received,the audio system mutes and aring tone is heard in the vehicle.

• Press b g and begin speakingto answer the call.

• Press c x to ignore a call.


Call WaitingCall waiting must be supported onthe Bluetooth phone and enabledby the wireless service carrierto work.

• Press b g to answer anincoming call when anothercall is active. The original callis placed on hold.

• Press b g again to return to theoriginal call.

• To ignore the incoming call,continue with the original callwith no action.

• Press c x to disconnect thecurrent call and switch to thecall on hold.

Three-Way CallingThree-Way Calling must besupported on the Bluetooth phoneand enabled by the wireless servicecarrier to work.

1. While on a call press b g.The system responds with“Ready” followed by a tone.

2. Say “Three-way call”. The systemresponds with “Three-way call,please say dial or call”.

3. Use the dial or call command todial the number of the third partyto be called.

4. Once the call is connected,press b g to link all the callerstogether.

Ending a Call

Press c x to end a call.

Muting a CallDuring a call, all sounds from insidethe vehicle can be muted so thatthe person on the other end ofthe call cannot hear them.

To Mute a call

1. Press b g. The systemresponds with “Ready” followedby a tone.

2. Say “Mute Call”. The systemresponds with “Call muted”.

To Cancel Mute


2. After the tone, say “Mute Call”.The system responds with“Resuming call”.


Transferring a CallAudio can be transferred betweenthe in-vehicle Bluetooth systemand the cell phone.

To Transfer Audio to theCell Phone

During a call with the audio in thevehicle:


2. Say “Transfer Call.” The systemresponds with “Transferring call”and the audio will switch fromthe vehicle to the cell phone.

To Transfer Audio to theIn-Vehicle Bluetooth System

The cellular phone must be pairedand connected with the Bluetoothsystem before a call can betransferred. The connection processcan take up to two minutes after thekey is turned to the ON/RUN orACC/ACCESSORY position.

During a call with the audio on thecell phone, press bg for more thantwo seconds. The audio switchesfrom the cell phone to the vehicle.

Voice Pass-ThruVoice Pass-Thru allows access tothe voice recognition commands onthe cell phone. See the cell phonemanufacturers user guide to see ifthe cell phone supports this feature.This feature can be used to verballyaccess contacts stored in the cellphone.



3. Say “Voice”. The systemresponds with “OK, accessing<phone name>”.

• The cell phone’s normalprompt messages will gothrough its cycle accordingto the phone’s operatinginstructions.

Dual Tone Multi-Frequency(DTMF) TonesThe in-vehicle Bluetooth system cansend numbers and numbers storedas name tags during a call. This isused when calling a menu drivenphone system. Account numbers canbe programmed into the phonebookfor retrieval during menu driven calls.


Sending a Number During a Call


2. Say “Dial”. The system respondswith “Say a number to sendtones” followed by a tone.

3. Say the number to send.

• If the system clearlyrecognizes the numberit responds with “OK,Sending Number” and thedial tones are sent and thecall continues.

• If the system is not sure itrecognized the numberproperly, it responds “DialNumber, Please say yes orno?” followed by a tone. If thenumber is correct, say “Yes”.The system responds with“OK, Sending Number” andthe dial tones are sent and thecall continues.

Sending a Stored Name TagDuring a Call

1. Press b g. The systemresponds with “Ready”followed by a tone.

2. Say “Send name tag.”The system responds with“Say a name tag to send tones”followed by a tone.

3. Say the name tag to send.

• If the system clearlyrecognizes the name tag itresponds with “OK, Sending<name tag>” and the dialtones are sent and the callcontinues.

• If the system is not sure itrecognized the name tagproperly, it responds “Dial<name tag>, Please say yesor no?” followed by a tone. Ifthe name tag is correct, say“Yes”. The system respondswith “OK, Sending <nametag>” and the dial tones aresent and the call continues.

Clearing the SystemUnless information is deleted outof the in-vehicle Bluetooth system,it will be retained indefinitely.This includes all saved name tags inthe phonebook and phone pairinginformation. For information on howto delete this information, see theabove sections on Deleting a PairedPhone and Deleting Name Tags.

Other InformationThe Bluetooth® word mark andlogos are owned by the Bluetooth®

SIG, Inc. and any use of such marksby General Motors is under license.Other trademarks and trade namesare those of their respective owners.


This device complies with Part 15 ofthe FCC Rules. Operation is subjectto the following two conditions:



This device complies with RSS-210of Industry Canada. Operationis subject to the following twoconditions:



Changes or modifications to thissystem by other than an authorizedservice facility could voidauthorization to use this equipment.

Rear Seat Entertainment(RSE) SystemThe vehicle may have a DVD RearSeat Entertainment (RSE) system.The RSE system works with thevehicle’s audio system. The DVDplayer is part of the front radio. TheRSE system includes a radio with aDVD player, a video display screen,audio/video jacks, two wirelessheadphones, and a remote control.See Radio(s) on page 3-70 for moreinformation on the vehicle’s audio/DVD system.

Before DrivingThe RSE is designed for rear seatpassengers only. The driver cannotsafely view the video screen whiledriving and should not try to do so.

In severe or extreme weatherconditions the RSE system might ormight not work until the temperatureis within the operating range.

The operating range for the RSEsystem is above −4°F (−20°C)or below 140°F (60°C). If thetemperature of the vehicle is outsideof this range, heat or cool the vehicleuntil the temperature is within theoperating range of the RSE system.

Parental ControlThe RSE system may have aParental Control feature, dependingon the radio. To enable ParentalControl, press and hold theradio power button for more thantwo seconds to stop all systemfeatures such as: radio, videoscreen, RSA, DVD and/or CD.While Parental Control ison, Q displays.

When the radio is turned back on,Parental Control is unlocked.


Headphones

The RSE includes two 2-channelwireless headphones that arededicated to this system. Channel 1is dedicated to the video screen,while Channel 2 is dedicated to RSAselections. These headphones areused to listen to media such as CDs,DVDs, MP3/WMAs, DVD-As, radio,any auxiliary source connected toA/V jacks, or the auxiliary input jack,if the vehicle has this feature.The wireless headphones have anOn/Off button, channel 1/2 switch,and a volume control. Switch theheadphones to Off when not in use.

Push the power button to turn onthe headphones. An indicatorlight located on the headphonescomes on. If the light does not comeon, the batteries might need to bereplaced. Intermittent sound or staticon the headphones can also bean indication of weak batteries.See “Battery Replacement” laterin this section for more information.

The headphones automaticallyturn off after four hours ofcontinuous use.

To adjust the volume on theheadphones, use the volumecontrol located on the right side.

Infrared transmitters are locatedat the rear of the RSE overheadconsole. The headphones shut offautomatically to save the batterypower if the RSE system and RSAare shut off or if the headphones areout of range of the transmitters formore than three minutes. Moving toofar forward or stepping out of thevehicle, can cause the headphonesto lose the audio signal.

For optimal audio performance,the headphones must be worncorrectly. Headphones should beworn with the headband over the topof the head for best audio reception.The symbol L (Left) appears onthe upper left side, above theear pad and should be positionedon the left ear. The symbol R (Right)appears on the upper right side,above the ear pad and shouldbe positioned on the right ear.

Notice: Do not store theheadphones in heat or directsunlight. This could damagethe headphones and repairs willnot be covered by the warranty.Storage in extreme cold canweaken the batteries. Keep theheadphones stored in a cool,dry place.

If the foam ear pads attached tothe headphones become worn ordamaged, the pads can be replacedseparately from the headphone set.See your dealer/retailer for moreinformation.


Headphones should be stored inthe front floor console and not in thefront seat back pocket. Headphonedamage can occur when the secondrow seats are folded forward.

Battery Replacement

To change the batteries on theheadphones:

1. Turn the screw to loosen thebattery door located on theleft side of the headphones.Slide the battery door open.

2. Replace the two batteries in thecompartment. Make sure thatthey are installed correctly, usingthe diagram on the inside ofthe battery compartment.

3. Replace the battery door andtighten the door screw.

If the headphones are to be storedfor a long period of time, removethe batteries and keep themin a cool, dry place.

Audio/Video (A/V) Jacks

The A/V jacks, located on the rearof the floor console, allow audioor video signals to be connectedfrom an auxiliary device such as acamcorder or a video game unit tothe RSE system. Adapter connectorsor cables (not supplied) might berequired to connect the auxiliarydevice to the A/V jacks. Refer tothe manufacturer’s instructions forproper usage.

The A/V jacks are color coded tomatch typical home entertainmentsystem equipment. The yellowjack (A) is for the video input.The white jack (B) is for the leftaudio input. The red jack (C) isfor the right audio input.

Power for auxiliary devices is notsupplied by the radio system.

To use the auxiliary inputs of theRSE system, connect an externalauxiliary device to the color-codedA/V jacks and turn both the auxiliarydevice and the video screen poweron. If the video screen is in the DVDplayer mode, pressing the AUX(auxiliary) button on the remotecontrol, switches the video screenfrom the DVD player mode to theauxiliary device. The radio canlisten to the audio of the connectedauxiliary device by sourcing toauxiliary. See Radio(s) on page 3-70for more information.


How to Change the RSE VideoScreen Settings

The screen display mode (normal,full, and zoom), screen brightness,and setup menu language canbe changed from the on screensetup menu by using the remotecontrol. To change a setting:

1. Press z.

2. Use n, q, p, o and r tonavigate and use thesetup menu.

3. Press z again to remove thesetup menu from the screen.

Audio OutputAudio from the DVD player orauxiliary inputs can be heardthrough the following sources:

• Wireless Headphones

• Vehicle Speakers

• Vehicle wired headphone jackson the rear seat audio system,if the vehicle has this feature.

The RSE system always transmitsthe audio signal to the wirelessheadphones, if there is audioavailable. See “Headphones” earlierin this section for more information.

The DVD player is capable ofoutputting audio to the wiredheadphone jacks on the RSAsystem, if the vehicle has thisfeature. The DVD player can beselected as an audio source onthe RSA system. See Rear SeatAudio (RSA) on page 3-117 formore information.

When a device is connected to theA/V jacks, or the radio’s auxiliaryinput jack, if the vehicle has thisfeature, the rear seat passengers areable to hear audio from the auxiliarydevice through the wireless or wiredheadphones. The front seatpassengers are able to listen toplayback from this device throughthe vehicle speakers by selectingAUX as the source on the radio.

Video ScreenThe video screen is located inthe overhead console. When thevideo screen is not in use, push itup into its locked position.

To use the video screen:1. Push the release button located

on the overhead console.2. Move the screen to the desired

position.

If a DVD is playing and the screenis raised to its locked position, thescreen remains on; this is normal,and the DVD continues to playthrough the previous audio source.Press P on the remote control oreject the disc to turn off the screen.

The infrared receivers for thewireless headphones and theremote control are located at therear of the overhead console.

Notice: Avoid directly touchingthe video screen, as damagemay occur. See “Cleaningthe Video Screen” later in thissection for more information.


Remote ControlTo use the remote control, aim itat the transmitter window at the rearof the overhead console and pressthe desired button. Direct sunlightor very bright light could affect theability of the RSE transmitter toreceive signals from the remotecontrol. If the remote control doesnot seem to be working, the batteriesmight need to be replaced. See“Battery Replacement” later in thissection. Objects blocking the line ofsight could also affect the function ofthe remote control.

If a CD or DVD is in the Radio DVDslot, the remote control O button canbe used to turn on the video screendisplay and start the disc. The radiocan also turn on the video screendisplay. See Radio(s) on page 3-70for more information.

Notice: Storing the remotecontrol in a hot area or in directsunlight can damage it, andthe repairs will not be covered bythe warranty. Storage in extremecold can weaken the batteries.Keep the remote control storedin a cool, dry place.

Remote Control Buttons


O (Power): Press to turn the videoscreen on and off.

P (Illumination): Press to turnthe remote control backlight on.The backlight automatically times outafter seven to ten seconds if no otherbutton is pressed while the backlightis on.

v (Title): Press to return the DVDto the main menu of the DVD. Thisfunction could vary for each disc.

y (Main Menu): Press to accessthe DVD menu. The DVD menu isdifferent on every DVD. Use thenavigation arrows to move the cursoraround the DVD menu. After makinga selection press the enter button.This button only operates whenusing a DVD.

n, q, p, o (Menu NavigationArrows): Use the arrow buttons tonavigate through a menu.

r (Enter): Press to selectthe choice that is highlighted inany menu.

z (Display Menu): Press to adjustthe brightness, screen display mode(normal, full, or zoom), and displaythe language menu.

q (Return): Press to exit thecurrent active menu and return tothe previous menu. This buttonoperates only when the displaymenu or a DVD menu is active.

c (Stop): Press to stop playing,rewinding, or fast forwarding aDVD. Press twice to return to thebeginning of the DVD.

s (Play/Pause): Press to startplaying a DVD. Press while a DVD isplaying to pause it. Press again tocontinue playing the DVD.

When the DVD is playing, dependingon the radio, play may be sloweddown by pressing s then [.The DVD continues playing in aslow play mode. Depending on theradio, perform reverse slow play bypressing s then r. To cancelslow play mode, press s again.

t (Previous Track/Chapter): Pressto return to the start of the currenttrack or chapter. Press again togo to the previous track or chapter.This button might not work whenthe DVD is playing the copyrightinformation or the previews.

u (Next Track/Chapter): Pressto go to the beginning of the nextchapter or track. This button mightnot work when the DVD is playingthe copyright information or thepreviews.


r (Fast Reverse): Press to quicklyreverse the DVD or CD. To stop fastreversing a DVD video, press s.To stop fast reversing a DVD audioor CD, release r. This button mightnot work when the DVD is playingthe copyright information or thepreviews.

[ (Fast Forward): Press to fastforward the DVD or CD. To stop fastforwarding a DVD video, press s.To stop fast forwarding a DVD audioor CD, release [. This button mightnot work when the DVD is playingthe copyright information or thepreviews.

e (Audio): Press to change audiotracks on DVDs that have thisfeature when the DVD is playing.The format and content of thisfunction vary for each disc.

{ (Subtitles): Press to turnON/OFF subtitles and to movethrough subtitle options when a DVDis playing. The format and contentof this function vary for each disc.

AUX (Auxiliary): Press to switchthe system between the DVD playerand an auxiliary source.

d (Camera): Press to changecamera angles on DVDs that havethis feature when a DVD is playing.The format and content of thisfunction vary for each disc.

1 through 0 (Numeric Keypad):The numeric keypad providesthe capability of direct chapteror track number selection.

\ (Clear): Press within threeseconds after entering a numericselection, to clear all numericalinputs.

} 10 (Double Digit Entries): Pressto select chapter or track numbersgreater than nine. Press thisbutton before entering the number.

If the remote control becomeslost or damaged, a new universalremote control can be purchased.

If this happens, make sure theuniversal remote control uses aToshiba® code set.

Battery Replacement

To change the remote controlbatteries:

1. Slide the rear cover back, on theremote control.

2. Replace the two batteries in thecompartment. Make sure thatthey are installed correctly, usingthe diagram on the inside ofthe battery compartment.

3. Replace the battery cover.

If the remote control is to be storedfor a long period of time, removethe batteries and keep them ina cool, dry place.


Problem Recommended ActionNo power. The ignition might not be turned

ON/RUN or in ACC/ACCESSORY.The picture does not fill the screen.There are black borders on the topand bottom or on both sides or itlooks stretched out.

Check the display mode settings inthe setup menu by pressing thedisplay menu button on the remotecontrol.

In auxiliary mode, the picture movesor scrolls.

Check the auxiliary inputconnections at both devices.

The remote control does not work. Check to make sure there is noobstruction between the remotecontrol and the transmitter window.Check the batteries to make surethey are not dead or installedincorrectly.

After stopping the player, I pushPlay but sometimes the DVD startswhere I left off and sometimes at thebeginning.

If the stop button was pressedone time, the DVD player resumesplaying where the DVD wasstopped. If the stop button waspressed two times the DVD playerbegins to play from the beginning ofthe DVD.

The auxiliary source is running butthere is no picture or sound.

Check that the RSE video screenis in the auxiliary source mode.Check the auxiliary inputconnections at both devices.


Problem Recommended ActionSometimes the wireless headphoneaudio cuts out or buzzes.

Check for obstructions, lowbatteries, reception range,and interference from cellulartelephone towers or by using acellular telephone in the vehicle.Check that the headphones areon correctly using the L (left) andR (right) on the headphones.

I lost the remote and/or theheadphones.

See your dealer/retailer forassistance.

The DVD is playing, but there is nopicture or sound.

Check that the RSE video screen issourced to the DVD player.

DVD Display Error MessagesThe DVD display error messagedepends on which radio the vehiclehas. The video screen might displayone of the following:

Disc Load/Eject Error: Thismessage displays when there aredisc load or eject problems.

Disc Format Error: This messagedisplays if the disc is inserted withthe disc label wrong side up, or if thedisc is damaged.

Disc Region Error: This messagedisplays if the disc is not from acorrect region.

No Disc Inserted: This messagedisplays if no disc is presentwhen the Z EJECT button ispressed on the radio.

DVD DistortionVideo distortion can occur whenoperating cellular phones, scanners,CB radios, Global Position Systems(GPS)*, two-way radios, mobile fax,or walkie talkies.

It might be necessary to turn off theDVD player when operating one ofthese devices in or near the vehicle.

*Excludes the OnStar® System.

Cleaning the RSE OverheadConsoleWhen cleaning the RSE overheadconsole surface, use only a cleancloth dampened with clean water.

Cleaning the Video ScreenUse only a clean cloth dampenedwith clean water. Use care whendirectly touching or cleaningthe screen, as damage could result.


Rear Seat Audio (RSA)For vehicles with Rear SeatAudio (RSA), rear seat passengerscan listen to and control any of themusic sources: radio, CDs, DVDs,or other auxiliary sources. The rearseat passengers can only controlthe music sources the front seatpassengers are not listening to(except on some radios where dualcontrol is allowed). For example,rear seat passengers can controla CD and listen to it through theheadphones, while the driver listensto the radio through the frontspeakers. The rear seat passengershave control of the volume for eachset of headphones.

The RSA functions operate evenwhen the main radio is off. The frontaudio system displays X when theRSA is on, and disappears from thedisplay when it is off.

Audio can be heard through wiredheadphones (not included) pluggedinto the jacks on the RSA. If thevehicle has this feature, audio canalso be heard on Channel 2 of thewireless headphones.

The audio system mutes the rearspeakers when the RSA audiois active through the headphones.

To listen to an iPod or portableaudio device through the RSA,attach the iPod or portable audiodevice to the front auxiliary input(if available), located on thefront audio system. Turn the iPodon, then choose the front auxiliaryinput with the RSA SRCE button.


P (Power): Press to turn the RSAon or off.

Volume: Turn to increase or todecrease the volume of the wiredheadphones. The left knob controlsthe left headphones and the rightknob controls the right headphones.

SRCE (Source): Press to selectbetween the radio (AM/FM/XM™),CD, and if the vehicle has thesefeatures, DVD, front auxiliary, andrear auxiliary.

©¨ (Seek): Press to go to theprevious or to the next station andstay there. This function is inactive,with some radios, if the front seatpassengers are listening to the radio.

Press and hold © or ¨ untilthe display flashes to tune to anindividual station. The displaystops flashing after the buttonshave not been pushed for morethan two seconds. This function isinactive, with some radios, if thefront seat passengers are listeningto the radio.

While listening to a disc, press ¨ togo to the next track or chapter on thedisc. Press © to go back to the startof the current track or chapter (ifmore than ten seconds have played).This function is inactive, with someradios, if the front seat passengersare listening to the disc.

When a DVD video menu is beingdisplayed, press © or ¨ to performa cursor up or down on the menu.Hold © or ¨ to perform a cursorleft or right on the menu.

PROG (Program): Press to goto the next preset radio station orchannel set on the main radio.This function is inactive, with someradios, if the front seat passengersare listening to the radio.

When a CD or DVD audio disc isplaying, press PROG to go to thebeginning of the CD or DVD audio.This function is inactive, with someradios, if the front seat passengersare listening to the disc.


When a disc is playing in the CD orDVD changer, press PROG to selectthe next disc, if multiple discs areloaded. This function is inactive,with some radios, if the front seatpassengers are listening to the disc.

When a DVD video menu is beingdisplayed, press PROG to performthe ENTER menu function.

Theft-Deterrent FeatureTHEFTLOCK® is designed todiscourage theft of the vehicle’sradio by learning a portion of theVehicle Identification Number (VIN).The radio does not operate if it isstolen or moved to a differentvehicle.

Audio Steering WheelControls

Vehicles with audio steering wheelcontrols could differ depending onthe vehicle’s options. Some audiocontrols can be adjusted at thesteering wheel.

w (Next): Press to go to the nextradio station stored as a favorite,or the next track if a CD/DVDis playing.

cx (Previous/End): Press togo to the previous radio stationstored as a favorite, the next track ifa CD/DVD is playing, to reject anincoming call, or end a current call.

bg (Mute/Push to Talk): Pressto silence the vehicle speakers only.Press again to turn the sound on.

For vehicles with OnStar® orBluetooth systems, press andhold for longer than two secondsto interact with those systems.See OnStar® System on page 2-41and Bluetooth® on page 3-98 in thismanual for more information.

SRCE (Source): Press to switchbetween the radio (AM, FM, XM),CD, and for vehicles with, DVD, frontauxiliary, and rear auxiliary.

For vehicles with the navigationsystem, press and hold this buttonfor longer than one second to initiatevoice recognition. See “VoiceRecognition” in the NavigationSystem manual for more information.


+ e − e (Volume): Press toincrease or to decrease the radiovolume.

¨ (Seek): Press to go to thenext radio station while in AM, FM,or XM™. Press ¨ to go to the nexttrack or chapter while sourced tothe CD or DVD slot. Press the ¨ ifmultiple discs are loaded to go to thenext disc while sourced to a CDplayer.

Radio ReceptionFrequency interference and staticcan occur during normal radioreception if items such as cell phonechargers, vehicle convenienceaccessories, and external electronicdevices are plugged into theaccessory power outlet. If there isinterference or static, unplug the itemfrom the accessory power outlet.

AMThe range for most AM stations isgreater than for FM, especially atnight. The longer range can causestation frequencies to interferewith each other. For better radioreception, most AM radio stationsboost the power levels during theday, and then reduce these levelsduring the night. Static can alsooccur when things like storms andpower lines interfere with radioreception. When this happens, tryreducing the treble on the radio.

FM StereoFM signals only reach about10 to 40 miles (16 to 65 km).Although the radio has a built-inelectronic circuit that automaticallyworks to reduce interference,some static can occur, especiallyaround tall buildings or hills, causingthe sound to fade in and out.

XM™ Satellite Radio ServiceXM Satellite Radio Servicegives digital radio reception fromcoast-to-coast in the 48 contiguousUnited States, and in Canada.Just as with FM, tall buildings orhills can interfere with satellite radiosignals, causing the sound to fadein and out. In addition, travelingor standing under heavy foliage,bridges, garages, or tunnels maycause loss of the XM signal for aperiod of time.

Cellular Phone UsageCellular phone usage may causeinterference with the vehicle’s radio.This interference may occur whenmaking or receiving phone calls,charging the phone’s battery,or simply having the phone on.This interference causes anincreased level of static whilelistening to the radio. If static isreceived while listening to the radio,unplug the cellular phone and turnit off.


Multi-Band AntennaThe multi-band antenna is locatedon the roof of the vehicle. This typeof antenna is used with the AM/FMradio, as well as OnStar® and theXM™ Satellite Radio ServiceSystem, if the vehicle has thesefeatures. Keep this antenna clearof snow and ice build up for clearradio reception. If the vehicle hasa sunroof, the performance of theradio system may be affected if thesunroof is open. Loading items ontothe roof of the vehicle can interferewith the performance of the radiosystem and, if the vehicle has thisfeature, OnStar®. Make sure themulti-band antenna is not obstructed.


✍ NOTES


Driving YourVehicle

Your Driving, the Road,and the VehicleDriving for Better FuelEconomy ............................4-1

Defensive Driving ..................4-2Drunk Driving .......................4-2Control of a Vehicle ...............4-3Braking ................................4-3Antilock Brake System(ABS) ................................4-4

Braking in Emergencies ..........4-5StabiliTrak® System ...............4-5All-Wheel Drive (AWD)System ..............................4-7

Steering ...............................4-8

Off-Road Recovery ................4-9Passing ...............................4-9Loss of Control .....................4-9Driving at Night ...................4-10Driving in Rain andon Wet Roads ...................4-11

Before Leaving ona Long Trip .......................4-12

Highway Hypnosis ...............4-12Hill and Mountain Roads ......4-12Winter Driving .....................4-13If Your Vehicle is Stuck inSand, Mud, Ice, or Snow ......4-15

Rocking Your Vehicleto Get It Out .....................4-15

Loading the Vehicle .............4-16

TowingTowing Your Vehicle ............4-20Recreational VehicleTowing .............................4-21

Towing a Trailer ..................4-24

Your Driving, theRoad, and the Vehicle

Driving for Better FuelEconomyDriving habits can affect fuelmileage. Here are some drivingtips to get the best fuel economypossible.

• Avoid fast starts and acceleratesmoothly.

• Brake gradually and avoidabrupt stops.

• Avoid idling the engine for longperiods of time.

• When road and weatherconditions are appropriate, usecruise control, if equipped.

• Always follow posted speed limitsor drive more slowly whenconditions require.

Driving Your Vehicle 4-1

• Keep vehicle tires properlyinflated.

• Combine several trips into asingle trip.

• Replace the vehicle’s tires withthe same TPC Spec numbermolded into the tire’s sidewallnear the size.

• Follow recommended scheduledmaintenance.

Defensive DrivingDefensive driving means “alwaysexpect the unexpected.” Thefirst step in driving defensively is towear your safety belt — SeeSafety Belts: They Are for Everyoneon page 1-12.

{ CAUTION

Assume that other road users(pedestrians, bicyclists, and otherdrivers) are going to be carelessand make mistakes. Anticipatewhat they might do and be ready.In addition:

• Allow enough followingdistance between you andthe driver in front of you.

• Focus on the task of driving.

Driver distraction can causecollisions resulting in injury orpossible death. These simpledefensive driving techniques couldsave your life.

Drunk Driving

{ CAUTION

Drinking and then driving is verydangerous. Your reflexes,perceptions, attentiveness, andjudgment can be affected by evena small amount of alcohol. Youcan have a serious — or evenfatal — collision if you drive afterdrinking. Do not drink and drive orride with a driver who has beendrinking. Ride home in a cab; or ifyou are with a group, designate adriver who will not drink.

Death and injury associated withdrinking and driving is a globaltragedy.

Alcohol affects four things thatanyone needs to drive a vehicle:judgment, muscular coordination,vision, and attentiveness.

4-2 Driving Your Vehicle

Police records show that almost40 percent of all motorvehicle-related deaths involvealcohol. In most cases, these deathsare the result of someone who wasdrinking and driving. In recent years,more than 17,000 annual motorvehicle-related deaths have beenassociated with the use of alcohol,with about 250,000 people injured.

For persons under 21, it is againstthe law in every U.S. state to drinkalcohol. There are good medical,psychological, and developmentalreasons for these laws.

The obvious way to eliminate theleading highway safety problemis for people never to drink alcoholand then drive.

Medical research shows that alcoholin a person’s system can make crashinjuries worse, especially injuries tothe brain, spinal cord, or heart.

This means that when anyone whohas been drinking — driver orpassenger — is in a crash, thatperson’s chance of being killed orpermanently disabled is higher thanif the person had not been drinking.

Control of a VehicleThe following three systemshelp to control the vehicle whiledriving — brakes, steering,and accelerator. At times, as whendriving on snow or ice, it is easyto ask more of those control systemsthan the tires and road canprovide. Meaning, you can losecontrol of the vehicle. SeeStabiliTrak® System on page 4-5.

Adding non-dealer/non-retaileraccessories can affect vehicleperformance. See Accessories andModifications on page 5-3.

BrakingSee Brake System Warning Light onpage 3-34.

Braking action involves perceptiontime and reaction time. Decidingto push the brake pedal isperception time. Actually doing it isreaction time.

Average reaction time is aboutthree-fourths of a second. But thatis only an average. It might beless with one driver and as long astwo or three seconds or morewith another. Age, physicalcondition, alertness, coordination,and eyesight all play a part. Sodo alcohol, drugs, and frustration.But even in three-fourths of asecond, a vehicle moving at 60 mph(100 km/h) travels 66 feet (20 m).That could be a lot of distance in anemergency, so keeping enoughspace between the vehicleand others is important.


And, of course, actual stoppingdistances vary greatly with thesurface of the road, whether it ispavement or gravel; the condition ofthe road, whether it is wet, dry, or icy;tire tread; the condition of the brakes;the weight of the vehicle; and theamount of brake force applied.

Avoid needless heavy braking. Somepeople drive in spurts — heavyacceleration followed by heavybraking — rather than keeping pacewith traffic. This is a mistake. Thebrakes might not have time to coolbetween hard stops. The brakes willwear out much faster with a lot ofheavy braking. Keeping pace withthe traffic and allowing realisticfollowing distances eliminates a lot ofunnecessary braking. That meansbetter braking and longer brake life.

If the engine ever stops while thevehicle is being driven, brakenormally but do not pump the brakes.If the brakes are pumped, the pedalcould get harder to push down.

If the engine stops, there will still besome power brake assist but it will beused when the brake is applied.Once the power assist is used up, itcan take longer to stop and the brakepedal will be harder to push.

Adding non-dealer/non-retaileraccessories can affect vehicleperformance. See Accessories andModifications on page 5-3.

Antilock Brake System(ABS)This vehicle has the Antilock BrakeSystem (ABS), an advancedelectronic braking system that helpsprevent a braking skid.

When the engine is started and thevehicle begins to drive away, ABSchecks itself. A momentary motor orclicking noise might be heard whilethis test is going on, and it mighteven be noticed that the brake pedalmoves a little. This is normal.

If there is a problem with ABS,this warning light stays on.See Antilock Brake System (ABS)Warning Light on page 3-35.

Let us say the road is wet and youare driving safely. Suddenly, ananimal jumps out in front of you.You slam on the brakes andcontinue braking. Here is whathappens with ABS:

A computer senses that the wheelsare slowing down. If one of thewheels is about to stop rolling, thecomputer will separately workthe brakes at each wheel.

ABS can change the brake pressureto each wheel, as required, fasterthan any driver could. This canhelp the driver steer aroundthe obstacle while braking hard.


As the brakes are applied, thecomputer keeps receiving updateson wheel speed and controls brakingpressure accordingly.

Remember: ABS does not changethe time needed to get a footup to the brake pedal or alwaysdecrease stopping distance. If youget too close to the vehicle infront of you, there will not be enoughtime to apply the brakes if thatvehicle suddenly slows or stops.Always leave enough room upahead to stop, even with ABS.

Using ABSDo not pump the brakes. Just holdthe brake pedal down firmly and letantilock work. The antilock pump ormotor operating might be heard andthe brake pedal might be felt topulsate, but this is normal.

Braking in EmergenciesABS allows the driver to steer andbrake at the same time. In manyemergencies, steering can help morethan even the very best braking.

Brake Assist

This vehicle has a Brake Assistfeature designed to assist the driverin stopping or decreasing vehiclespeed in emergency drivingconditions. This feature uses thestability system hydraulic brakecontrol module to supplement thepower brake system underconditions where the driver hasquickly and forcefully applied thebrake pedal in an attempt to quicklystop or slow down the vehicle. Thestability system hydraulic brakecontrol module increases brakepressure at each corner of thevehicle until the ABS activates. Minorbrake pedal pulsations or pedalmovement during this time is normaland the driver should continue toapply the brake pedal as the drivingsituation dictates The Brake Assist

feature will automatically disengagewhen the brake pedal is released orbrake pedal pressure is quicklydecreased.

StabiliTrak® SystemThe vehicle has the StabiliTraksystem which combines antilockbrake, traction and stability controlsystems and helps the drivermaintain directional control of thevehicle in most driving conditions.

When you first start the vehicle andbegin to drive away, the systemperforms several diagnostic checksto ensure there are no problems. Thesystem may be heard or felt while itis working. This is normal and doesnot mean there is a problem with thevehicle. The system should initializebefore the vehicle reaches 20 mph(32 km/h). In some cases, it maytake approximately two miles(3.2 km) of driving before thesystem initializes.


If the system fails to turn on oractivate, the StabiliTrak light alongwith one of the following messageswill be displayed on the DriverInformation Center (DIC):TRACTION CONTROL OFF,SERVICE TRACTION CONTROL,SERVICE STABILITRAK. If theseconditions are observed, turn thevehicle off, wait 15 seconds, andthen turn it back on again to reset thesystem. If any of these messages stillappear on the Driver InformationCenter (DIC), the vehicle should betaken in for service. For moreinformation on the DIC messages,see Driver Information Center (DIC)on page 3-42.

The StabiliTrak light will flash on theinstrument panel cluster when thesystem is both on and activated.

The system may be heard orfelt while it is working; this is normal.

The traction control disable buttonis located on the instrumentpanel below the climate controls.The traction control part ofStabiliTrak can be turned off bypressing and releasing the tractioncontrol disable button.Traction control can be turned onby pressing and releasing thetraction control disable button ifnot automatically shut off for anyother reason.When the traction control system isturned off, the StabiliTrak lightand the appropriate traction controloff message will be displayed onthe DIC to warn the driver. Thevehicle will still have brake-tractioncontrol when traction control isoff, but will not be able to use theengine speed management system.See “Traction Control Operation”next for more information.

When the traction control systemhas been turned off, system noisesmay be heard and felt as a resultof the brake-traction control working.

It is recommended to leave thesystem on for normal drivingconditions, but it may be necessaryto turn the system off if thevehicle is stuck in sand, mud, ice orsnow, and you want to “rock” thevehicle to attempt to free it. Itmay also be necessary to turn offthe system when driving in extremeoff-road conditions where highwheel spin is required. See If YourVehicle is Stuck in Sand, Mud,Ice, or Snow on page 4-15.

Traction Control OperationThe traction control system is part ofthe StabiliTrak system. Tractioncontrol limits wheel spin by reducingengine power to the wheels(engine speed management) and byapplying brakes to each individualwheel (brake-traction control)as necessary.


The traction control system isenabled automatically when thevehicle is started. It will activate andthe StabiliTrak light will flash if itsenses that any of the wheels arespinning or beginning to lose tractionwhile driving. If traction control isturned off, only the brake-tractioncontrol portion of traction controlwill work. The engine speedmanagement will be disabled. In thismode, engine power is not reducedautomatically and the driven wheelscan spin more freely. This can causethe brake-traction control to activateconstantly.

Notice: If the wheel(s) of one axleis allowed to spin excessivelywhile the StabiliTrak, ABS andbrake warning lights and anyrelevant DIC messages aredisplayed, the transfer case couldbe damaged. The repairs wouldnot be covered by the vehiclewarranty. Reduce engine powerand do not spin the wheel(s)excessively while these lights andmessages are displayed.

The traction control system mayactivate on dry or rough roadsor under conditions such as heavyacceleration while turning orabrupt upshifts/downshifts of thetransmission. When this happens, areduction in acceleration may benoticed, or a noise or vibration maybe heard. This is normal.

If cruise control is being used whenthe system activates, the StabiliTraklight will flash and cruise controlwill automatically disengage. Cruisecontrol may be reengaged whenroad conditions allow. See CruiseControl on page 3-10.

StabiliTrak may also turn offautomatically if it determines that aproblem exists with the system.If the problem does not clear itselfafter restarting the vehicle, see yourdealer/retailer for service.

All-Wheel Drive (AWD)SystemIf the vehicle has this feature,engine power is sent to all fourwheels when extra traction isneeded. This is like four-wheel drive,but there is no separate lever orswitch to engage or disengage theaxle. It is fully automatic, andadjusts itself as needed for roadconditions.

When using a compact spare tire onthe AWD equipped vehicle, theAWD system automatically detectsthe presence of the compactspare and the AWD is disabled. Torestore the AWD operation andprevent excessive wear on the AWDsystem, replace the compactspare with a full-size tire as soon aspossible. See Compact SpareTire on page 5-79 for moreinformation.


SteeringPower SteeringIf power steering assist is lostbecause the engine stops or thesystem is not functioning, the vehiclecan be steered but it will takemore effort.

Variable Effort SteeringThe vehicle has a steering systemthat continuously adjusts theeffort felt when steering at all vehiclespeeds. It provides ease whenparking, yet a firm, solid feelat highway speeds.

Steering TipsIt is important to take curves at areasonable speed.

Traction in a curve depends onthe condition of the tires andthe road surface, the angle at whichthe curve is banked, and vehiclespeed. While in a curve, speedis the one factor that can becontrolled.

If there is a need to reduce speed,do it before entering the curve,while the front wheels are straight.Try to adjust the speed so youcan drive through the curve.Maintain a reasonable, steadyspeed. Wait to accelerate until outof the curve, and then accelerategently into the straightaway.

Steering in EmergenciesThere are times when steering canbe more effective than braking. Forexample, you come over a hill andfind a truck stopped in your lane, or acar suddenly pulls out from nowhere,or a child darts out from betweenparked cars and stops right in front ofyou. These problems can be avoidedby braking — if you can stop in time.But sometimes you cannot stop intime because there is no room.That is the time for evasiveaction — steering around theproblem.The vehicle can perform very wellin emergencies like these. First,apply the brakes. See Braking on

page 4-3. It is better to remove asmuch speed as possible from acollision. Then steer around theproblem, to the left or rightdepending on the space available.

An emergency like this requiresclose attention and a quick decision.If holding the steering wheel atthe recommended 9 and 3 o’clockpositions, it can be turned a full180 degrees very quickly withoutremoving either hand. But you haveto act fast, steer quickly, and justas quickly straighten the wheel onceyou have avoided the object.


The fact that such emergencysituations are always possible is agood reason to practice defensivedriving at all times and wearsafety belts properly.

Off-Road RecoveryThe vehicle’s right wheels can dropoff the edge of a road onto theshoulder while driving.

If the level of the shoulder is onlyslightly below the pavement,recovery should be fairly easy.

Ease off the accelerator and then, ifthere is nothing in the way, steer sothat the vehicle straddles the edge ofthe pavement. Turn the steeringwheel 3 to 5 inches, 8 to 13 cm,(about one-eighth turn) until the rightfront tire contacts the pavementedge. Then turn the steering wheel togo straight down the roadway.

PassingPassing another vehicle on atwo-lane road can be dangerous.To reduce the risk of dangerwhile passing:

• Look down the road, to the sides,and to crossroads for situationsthat might affect a successfulpass. If in doubt, wait.

• Watch for traffic signs, pavementmarkings, and lines that couldindicate a turn or an intersection.Never cross a solid ordouble-solid line on your sideof the lane.

• Do not get too close to the vehicleyou want to pass. Doing so canreduce your visibility.

• Wait your turn to pass a slowvehicle.

• When you are being passed, easeto the right.

Loss of ControlLet us review what driving expertssay about what happens whenthe three control systems — brakes,steering, and acceleration — donot have enough friction where thetires meet the road to do whatthe driver has asked.

In any emergency, do not give up.Keep trying to steer and constantlyseek an escape route or area ofless danger.


SkiddingIn a skid, a driver can lose control ofthe vehicle. Defensive drivers avoidmost skids by taking reasonable caresuited to existing conditions, and bynot overdriving those conditions. Butskids are always possible.

The three types of skids correspondto the vehicle’s three controlsystems. In the braking skid, thewheels are not rolling. In the steeringor cornering skid, too much speed orsteering in a curve causes tires toslip and lose cornering force. And inthe acceleration skid, too muchthrottle causes the driving wheelsto spin.

If the vehicle starts to slide, easeyour foot off the acceleratorpedal and quickly steer the wayyou want the vehicle to go. Ifyou start steering quickly enough,the vehicle may straighten out.Always be ready for a second skidif it occurs.

Of course, traction is reduced whenwater, snow, ice, gravel, or othermaterial is on the road. For safety,slow down and adjust yourdriving to these conditions. It isimportant to slow down on slipperysurfaces because stoppingdistance is longer and vehiclecontrol more limited.

While driving on a surface withreduced traction, try your best toavoid sudden steering, acceleration,or braking, including reducing vehiclespeed by shifting to a lower gear.Any sudden changes could causethe tires to slide. You might notrealize the surface is slippery untilthe vehicle is skidding. Learn torecognize warning clues — such asenough water, ice, or packed snowon the road to make a mirroredsurface — and slow down when youhave any doubt.

Remember: Any Antilock BrakeSystem (ABS) helps avoid only thebraking skid.

Driving at NightNight driving is more dangerous thanday driving because some driversare likely to be impaired — by alcoholor drugs, with night vision problems,or by fatigue.

Night driving tips include:

• Drive defensively.

• Do not drink and drive.

• Reduce headlamp glare byadjusting the inside rearviewmirror.

• Slow down and keep more spacebetween you and other vehiclesbecause headlamps can onlylight up so much road ahead.

• Watch for animals.

• When tired, pull off the road.

• Do not wear sunglasses.

• Avoid staring directly intoapproaching headlamps.


• Keep the windshield and all glasson your vehicle clean — insideand out.

• Keep your eyes moving,especially during turns or curves.

No one can see as well at night asin the daytime. But, as we getolder, these differences increase. A50-year-old driver might need atleast twice as much light to see thesame thing at night as a 20-year-old.

Driving in Rain and onWet RoadsRain and wet roads can reducevehicle traction and affect yourability to stop and accelerate.Always drive slower in these typesof driving conditions and avoiddriving through large puddles anddeep-standing or flowing water.

{ CAUTION

Wet brakes can cause crashes.They might not work as well in aquick stop and could causepulling to one side. You couldlose control of the vehicle.

After driving through a largepuddle of water or a car/vehiclewash, lightly apply the brakepedal until the brakes worknormally.

Flowing or rushing water createsstrong forces. Driving throughflowing water could cause yourvehicle to be carried away. If thishappens, you and other vehicleoccupants could drown. Do notignore police warnings and bevery cautious about trying to drivethrough flowing water.

HydroplaningHydroplaning is dangerous. Watercan build up under your vehicle’stires so they actually ride onthe water. This can happen if theroad is wet enough and youare going fast enough. When yourvehicle is hydroplaning, it has little orno contact with the road.

There is no hard and fast rule abouthydroplaning. The best advice isto slow down when the road is wet.

Other Rainy Weather TipsBesides slowing down, other wetweather driving tips include:

• Allow extra following distance.

• Pass with caution.

• Keep windshield wipingequipment in good shape.

• Keep the windshield washer fluidreservoir filled.

• Have good tires with proper treaddepth. See Tires on page 5-37.

• Turn off cruise control.


Before Leaving on aLong TripTo prepare your vehicle for a longtrip, consider having it servicedby your dealer/retailer beforedeparting.

Things to check on your owninclude:

• Windshield Washer Fluid:Reservoir full? Windowsclean — inside and outside?

• Wiper Blades: In good shape?

• Fuel, Engine Oil, Other Fluids: Alllevels checked?

• Lamps: Do they all work and arelenses clean?

• Tires: Are treads good? Are tiresinflated to recommendedpressure?

• Weather and Maps: Safe totravel? Have up-to-date maps?

Highway HypnosisAlways be alert and pay attentionto your surroundings while driving.If you become tired or sleepy, finda safe place to park your vehicleand rest.

Other driving tips include:

• Keep the vehicle well ventilated.

• Keep interior temperature cool.

• Keep your eyes moving — scanthe road ahead and to the sides.

• Check the rearview mirror andvehicle instruments often.

Hill and Mountain RoadsDriving on steep hills or throughmountains is different than drivingon flat or rolling terrain. Tips fordriving in these conditions include:

• Keep the vehicle servicedand in good shape.

• Check all fluid levels and brakes,tires, cooling system, andtransmission.

• Going down steep or long hills,shift to a lower gear.

{ CAUTION

If you do not shift down, thebrakes could get so hot that theywould not work well. You wouldthen have poor braking or evennone going down a hill. You couldcrash. Shift down to let the engineassist the brakes on a steepdownhill slope.


{ CAUTION

Coasting downhill in N (Neutral) orwith the ignition off is dangerous.The brakes will have to do all thework of slowing down and theycould get so hot that they wouldnot work well. You would thenhave poor braking or even nonegoing down a hill. You could crash.Always have the engine runningand the vehicle in gear when goingdownhill.

• Stay in your own lane. Do notswing wide or cut across thecenter of the road. Drive atspeeds that let you stay in yourown lane.

• Top of hills: Be alert — somethingcould be in your lane (stalled car,accident).

• Pay attention to special roadsigns (falling rocks area, windingroads, long grades, passing orno-passing zones) and takeappropriate action.

Winter DrivingDriving on Snow or IceDrive carefully when there is snowor ice between the tires and theroad, creating less traction or grip.Wet ice can occur at about 32°F(0°C) when freezing rain begins tofall, resulting in even less traction.Avoid driving on wet ice or infreezing rain until roads can betreated with salt or sand.

Drive with caution, whatever thecondition. Accelerate gentlyso traction is not lost. Acceleratingtoo quickly causes the wheelsto spin and makes the surface underthe tires slick, so there is evenless traction.

Try not to break the fragile traction.If you accelerate too fast, the drivewheels will spin and polish thesurface under the tires even more.

The StabiliTrak® System on page 4-5improves the ability to accelerate onslippery roads, but slow down andadjust your driving to the roadconditions. When driving throughdeep snow, turn off the tractioncontrol part of the StabiliTrak®

System to help maintain vehiclemotion at lower speeds.

The Antilock Brake System (ABS)on page 4-4 improves vehiclestability during hard stops on aslippery roads, but apply the brakessooner than when on dry pavement.

Allow greater following distanceon any slippery road and watch forslippery spots. Icy patches canoccur on otherwise clear roads inshaded areas. The surface ofa curve or an overpass can remainicy when the surrounding roadsare clear. Avoid sudden steeringmaneuvers and braking while on ice.

Turn off cruise control, if equipped,on slippery surfaces.


Blizzard ConditionsBeing stuck in snow can be in aserious situation. Stay with thevehicle unless there is help nearby.If possible, use the RoadsideAssistance Program on page 7-6.To get help and keep everyonein the vehicle safe:

• Turn on the Hazard WarningFlashers on page 3-5.

• Tie a red cloth to an outsidemirror.

{ CAUTION

Snow can trap engine exhaustunder the vehicle. This may causeexhaust gases to get inside.Engine exhaust contains carbonmonoxide (CO) which cannot beseen or smelled. It can causeunconsciousness and even death.

(Continued)

CAUTION (Continued)

If the vehicle is stuck in the snow:• Clear away snow from

around the base of yourvehicle, especially any that isblocking the exhaust pipe.

• Check again from time totime to be sure snow doesnot collect there.

• Open a window about twoinches (5 cm) on the side ofthe vehicle that is away fromthe wind to bring in fresh air.

• Fully open the air outlets on orunder the instrument panel.

• Adjust the Climate Controlsystem to a setting thatcirculates the air inside thevehicle and set the fan speedto the highest setting. SeeClimate Control System in theIndex.

(Continued)

CAUTION (Continued)


Snow can trap exhaust gasesunder your vehicle. This can causedeadly CO (carbon monoxide) gasto get inside. CO could overcomeyou and kill you. You cannot see itor smell it, so you might not know itis in your vehicle. Clear away snowfrom around the base of yourvehicle, especially any that isblocking the exhaust.

Run the engine for short periodsonly as needed to keep warm,but be careful.To save fuel, run the engine foronly short periods as needed towarm the vehicle and then shut theengine off and close the windowmost of the way to save heat.


Repeat this until help arrives but onlywhen you feel really uncomfortablefrom the cold. Moving about to keepwarm also helps.

If it takes some time for help toarrive, now and then when you runthe engine, push the acceleratorpedal slightly so the engine runsfaster than the idle speed. Thiskeeps the battery charged to restartthe vehicle and to signal for help withthe headlamps. Do this as little aspossible to save fuel.

If Your Vehicle is Stuckin Sand, Mud, Ice,or SnowSlowly and cautiously spin thewheels to free the vehicle whenstuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow.See Rocking Your Vehicle to GetIt Out on page 4-15.

If the vehicle has a traction system,it can often help to free a stuckvehicle. Refer to the vehicle’straction system in the Index.

If stuck too severely for the tractionsystem to free the vehicle, turnthe traction system off and use therocking method.

{ CAUTION

If you let your vehicle’s tires spinat high speed, they can explode,and you or others could beinjured. The vehicle can overheat,causing an engine compartmentfire or other damage. Spin thewheels as little as possible andavoid going above 35 mph(55 km/h) as shown on thespeedometer.

For information about using tirechains on the vehicle, see TireChains on page 5-57.

Rocking Your Vehicle toGet It OutTurn the steering wheel left andright to clear the area aroundthe front wheels. Turn off anytraction or stability system. Shiftback and forth between R (Reverse)and a forward gear, spinning thewheels as little as possible. Toprevent transmission wear, wait untilthe wheels stop spinning beforeshifting gears. Release theaccelerator pedal while shifting, andpress lightly on the acceleratorpedal when the transmission is ingear. Slowly spinning the wheels inthe forward and reverse directionscauses a rocking motion thatcould free the vehicle. If that doesnot get the vehicle out after afew tries, it might need to be towedout. If the vehicle does need tobe towed out, see Towing YourVehicle on page 4-20.


Loading the VehicleIt is very important to know howmuch weight your vehicle cancarry. This weight is calledthe vehicle capacity weightand includes the weight of alloccupants, cargo, and allnonfactory-installed options.Two labels on your vehicleshow how much weight it mayproperly carry, the Tire andLoading Information label andthe Certification/Tire label.

{ CAUTION

Do not load the vehicle anyheavier than the Gross VehicleWeight Rating (GVWR), oreither the maximum front orrear Gross Axle Weight Rating(GAWR). If you do, parts onthe vehicle can break, and itcan change the way yourvehicle handles. These couldcause you to lose control andcrash. Also, overloading canshorten the life of the vehicle.

Tire and Loading InformationLabel

A vehicle specific Tire andLoading Information label isattached to the center pillar(B-pillar) of your vehicle. With thedriver’s door open, you will findthe label attached below the doorlock post (striker). The tire andloading information label showsthe number of occupant seatingpositions (A), and the maximumvehicle capacity weight (B) inkilograms and pounds.

Example Label


The Tire and Loading Informationlabel also shows the size of theoriginal equipment tires (C) andthe recommended cold tireinflation pressures (D). For moreinformation on tires and inflationsee Tires on page 5-37 andInflation - Tire Pressure onpage 5-43.

There is also important loadinginformation on the vehicleCertification/Tire label. It tellsyou the Gross Vehicle WeightRating (GVWR) and theGross Axle Weight Rating(GAWR) for the front and rearaxle. See “Certification/TireLabel” later in this section.

Steps for Determining CorrectLoad Limit

1. Locate the statement “Thecombined weight ofoccupants and cargo shouldnever exceed XXX kg orXXX lbs” on your vehicle’splacard.

2. Determine the combinedweight of the driver andpassengers that will be ridingin your vehicle.

3. Subtract the combined weightof the driver and passengersfrom XXX kg or XXX lbs.

4. The resulting figure equals theavailable amount of cargo andluggage load capacity. Forexample, if the “XXX” amountequals 1400 lbs and there willbe five 150 lb passengers inyour vehicle, the amount ofavailable cargo and luggageload capacity is 650 lbs(1400 − 750 (5 x 150) =650 lbs).

5. Determine the combinedweight of luggage andcargo being loaded on thevehicle. That weight may notsafely exceed the availablecargo and luggage loadcapacity calculated in Step 4.

6. If your vehicle will be towing atrailer, the load from yourtrailer will be transferred toyour vehicle. Consultthis manual to determine howthis reduces the availablecargo and luggage loadcapacity for your vehicle.

See Towing a Trailer onpage 4-24 for importantinformation on towing a trailer,towing safety rules, andtrailering tips.


A. Vehicle Capacity Weight forExample 1 = 1,000 lbs(453 kg).

B. Subtract Occupant Weight150 lbs (68 kg) × 2 = 300 lbs(136 kg).

C. Available Occupant andCargo Weight = 700 lbs(317 kg).


B. Subtract Occupant Weight150 lbs (68 kg) × 5 = 750 lbs(340 kg).

C. Available Cargo Weight =250 lbs (113 kg).


B. Subtract Occupant Weight200 lbs (91 kg) × 5 =1,000 lbs (453 kg).

C. Available Cargo Weight =0 lbs (0 kg).

Refer to your vehicle’s tire andloading information label forspecific information about yourvehicle’s capacity weight andseating positions. The combinedweight of the driver, passengers,and cargo should never exceedyour vehicle’s capacity weight.

Example 1 Example 2 Example 3


Certification/Tire Label

A vehicle specificCertification/Tire label isattached to the rear edge of thedriver’s door.

The label shows the grossweight capacity of your vehicle.This is called the GrossVehicle Weight Rating (GVWR).

The GVWR includes the weightof the vehicle, all occupants,fuel, and cargo.

The Certification/Tire label alsotells you the maximumweights for the front and rearaxles, called the Gross AxleWeight Rating (GAWR). To findout the actual loads on yourfront and rear axles, you need togo to a weigh station andweigh your vehicle. Yourdealer/retailer can help you withthis. Be sure to spread outyour load equally on both sidesof the centerline.

Never exceed the GVWR foryour vehicle or the GAWRfor either the front or rear axle.

{ CAUTION

Do not load the vehicle anyheavier than the Gross VehicleWeight Rating (GVWR), oreither the maximum front orrear Gross Axle Weight Rating(GAWR). If you do, parts onthe vehicle can break, and itcan change the way yourvehicle handles. These couldcause you to lose control andcrash. Also, overloading canshorten the life of the vehicle.

Notice: Overloading yourvehicle may cause damage.Repairs would not be coveredby your warranty. Do notoverload your vehicle.

Label Example


If you put things inside yourvehicle — like suitcases, tools,packages, or anything else, theywill go as fast as the vehiclegoes. If you have to stop or turnquickly, or if there is a crash,they will keep going.

{ CAUTION

Things you put inside yourvehicle can strike and injurepeople in a sudden stop orturn, or in a crash.

• Put things in the cargoarea of your vehicle. Try tospread the weight evenly.

• Never stack heavierthings, like suitcases,inside the vehicle so thatsome of them are abovethe tops of the seats.

• Do not leave an unsecuredchild restraint in yourvehicle.

• When you carry somethinginside the vehicle, secure itwhenever you can.

• Do not leave a seat foldeddown unless you need to.

Towing

Towing Your VehicleTo avoid damage, the disabledvehicle should be towed with allfour wheels off the ground. Consultyour dealer/retailer or a professionaltowing service if the disabledvehicle must be towed. SeeRoadside Assistance Program onpage 7-6.

To tow the vehicle behind anothervehicle for recreational purposes,such as behind a motorhome,see “Recreational Vehicle Towing”following.


Recreational VehicleTowingRecreational vehicle towing meanstowing the vehicle behind anothervehicle – such as behind amotorhome. The two most commontypes of recreational vehicle towingare known as dinghy towing anddolly towing. Dinghy towing is towingthe vehicle with all four wheels on theground. Dolly towing is towing thevehicle with two wheels on theground and two wheels up on adevice known as a dolly.

Here are some important things toconsider before recreationalvehicle towing:

• What is the towing capacity of thetowing vehicle? Be sure to readthe tow vehicle manufacturer’srecommendations.

• What is the distance that will betravelled? Some vehicles haverestrictions on how far and howlong they can tow.

• Is the proper towing equipmentgoing to be used? See yourdealer/retailer or traileringprofessional for additional adviceand equipment recommendations.

• Is the vehicle ready to be towed?Just as preparing the vehicle for along trip, make sure the vehicle isprepared to be towed. See BeforeLeaving on a Long Trip onpage 4-12.

Dinghy Towing

If the vehicle is front-wheel-drive, itcan be dinghy towed from the front.

These vehicles may also be towedby putting the front wheels on a dolly.See “Dolly Towing” later in thissection.

If the vehicle is all-wheel-drive, it canbe dinghy towed from the front.These vehicles can also be towed byplacing them on a platform trailerwith all four wheels off of the ground.These vehicles cannot be towedusing a dolly.

For vehicles being dinghy towed, thevehicle should be run at thebeginning of each day and at eachRV fuel stop for about five minutes.This will ensure proper lubrication oftransmission components. Re-installthe fuse to start the vehicle.

To tow the vehicle from the frontwith all four wheels on the ground:

1. Position the vehicle to tow andthen secure it to the towingvehicle.

2. Shift the transmission to P (Park)and turn the ignition toLOCK/OFF.


3. Set the parking brake.

4. Turn the ignition toACC/ACCESSORY.

5. Shift the transmission toN (Neutral).

6. To prevent the battery fromdraining while the vehicle is beingtowed, remove the 50 ampBATT1 fuse from the underhoodfuse block and store in a safelocation. See UnderhoodFuse Block on page 5-91.

7. Release the parking brake.

Notice: If the vehicle is towedwithout performing each ofthe steps listed under “DinghyTowing,” the automatictransmission could be damaged.Be sure to follow all steps ofthe dinghy towing procedure priorto and after towing the vehicle.

Notice: If 65 mph (105 km/h)is exceeded while towingthe vehicle, it could be damaged.Never exceed 65 mph (105 km/h)while towing the vehicle.

Once the destination is reached:


2. Reinstall the 50 amp BATT1 fuseto the underhood fuse block.

3. Shift the transmission to P (Park),turn the ignition to LOCK/OFFand remove the key fromthe ignition.

4. Disconnect the vehicle from thetowing vehicle.

Notice: Do not tow a vehiclewith the front drive wheels on theground if one of the front tiresis a compact spare tire. Towingwith two different tire sizes on thefront of the vehicle can causesevere damage to thetransmission.

Dolly Towing (All-Wheel-DriveVehicles)

All-wheel-drive vehicles must not betowed with two wheels on theground. To properly tow thesevehicles, they should be placed ona platform trailer with all fourwheels off of the ground or dinghytowed from the front.


Dolly Towing(Front-Wheel-DriveVehicles Only)

To tow a front-wheel-drive vehiclefrom the front with two wheelson the ground:

1. Put the front wheels on a dolly.

2. Move the shift lever to P (Park).


4. Clamp the steering wheel in astraight-ahead position with aclamping device designedfor towing.

5. Remove the key from theignition.

6. Secure the vehicle to the dolly.

7. Release the parking brake.

Towing the Vehicle Fromthe Rear

Notice: Towing the vehicle fromthe rear could damage it. Also,repairs would not be covered bythe vehicle warranty. Never havethe vehicle towed from the rear.

Do not tow the vehicle from the rear.


Towing a Trailer

{ CAUTION

The driver can lose control whenpulling a trailer if the correctequipment is not used or thevehicle is not driven properly.For example, if the trailer is tooheavy, the brakes may not workwell — or even at all. The driverand passengers could beseriously injured. The vehicle mayalso be damaged; the resultingrepairs would not be covered bythe vehicle warranty. Pull a traileronly if all the steps in this sectionhave been followed. Ask yourdealer/retailer for advice andinformation about towing a trailerwith the vehicle.

To identify the trailering capacity ofthe vehicle, read the informationin “Weight of the Trailer” thatappears later in this section.

Trailering is different than justdriving the vehicle by itself.Trailering means changes inhandling, acceleration, braking,durability and fuel economy.Successful, safe trailering takescorrect equipment, and it has to beused properly.

The following information has manytime-tested, important traileringtips and safety rules. Many of theseare important for the safety of thedriver and the passengers. Soplease read this section carefullybefore pulling a trailer.

Load-pulling components such asthe engine, transmission, rearaxle, wheel assemblies and tires areforced to work harder against thedrag of the added weight. Theengine is required to operateat relatively higher speeds andunder greater loads, generatingextra heat. What’s more, the traileradds considerably to windresistance, increasing the pullingrequirements.

Pulling A TrailerHere are some important points:

• There are many differentlaws, including speed limitrestrictions, having to do withtrailering. Make sure the rig willbe legal, not only where youlive but also where you will bedriving. A good source forthis information can be state orprovincial police.

• Consider using a sway control.See “Hitches” later in this section.

• Do not tow a trailer at all duringthe first 500 miles (800 km) thenew vehicle is driven. The engine,axle or other parts could bedamaged.

• Then, during the first 500 miles(800 km) that a trailer is towed, donot drive over 50 mph (80 km/h)and do not make starts at fullthrottle. This helps the engine andother parts of the vehicle wear inat the heavier loads.


• Obey speed limit restrictionswhen towing a trailer.

• The vehicles can tow in D (Drive).Shift the transmission to a lowergear if the transmission shifts toooften under heavy loads and/orhilly conditions. See “Tow/HaulMode” later in this section.

• The vehicle is designed primarilyas a passenger and load carryingvehicle. If a trailer is towed, thevehicle will require more frequentmaintenance due tothe additional load.

Three important considerations haveto do with weight:

• The weight of the trailer.

• The weight of the trailer tongue.

• And the weight on the vehicle’stires

Weight of the TrailerHow heavy can a trailer safely be?

It depends on how the rig is used.For example, speed, altitude, roadgrades, outside temperature andhow much the vehicle is used to pulla trailer are all important. It candepend on any special equipment onthe vehicle, and the amount of

tongue weight the vehicle can carry.See “Weight of the Trailer Tongue”later in this section for moreinformation.

Maximum trailer weight is calculatedassuming only the driver is in the towvehicle and it has all the requiredtrailering equipment. The weight ofadditional optional equipment,passengers and cargo in the towvehicle must be subtracted from themaximum trailer weight.

Use the following chart to determinehow much the vehicle can weigh,based upon the vehicle modeland options.

Vehicle Maximum Trailer Weight *GCWRFront-Wheel Drive 2,000 lbs (907 kg) 7,500 lbs (3 402 kg)Front-Wheel Drive, V92 Trailer Towing Package 4,500 lbs (2 041 kg) 9,500 lbs (4 309 kg)All-Wheel Drive 2,000 lbs (907 kg) 7,700 lbs (3 493 kg)All-Wheel Drive, V92 Trailer Towing Package 4,500 lbs (2 041 kg) 9,700 lbs (4 400 kg)*The Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR) is the total allowable weight of the completely loaded vehicle andtrailer including any passengers, cargo, equipment and conversions. The GCWR for the vehicle should not beexceeded.


Ask your dealer/retailer for ourtrailering information or advice, orwrite us at our Customer AssistanceOffices. See Customer AssistanceOffices on page 7-4 for moreinformation.

Weight of the Trailer TongueThe tongue load (A) of any trailer isan important weight to measurebecause it affects the total grossweight of the vehicle. The GrossVehicle Weight (GVW) includes thecurb weight of the vehicle, any cargocarried in it, and the people whowill be riding in the vehicle. If thereare a lot of options, equipment,passengers or cargo in the vehicle,it will reduce the tongue weight thevehicle can carry, which will alsoreduce the trailer weight the vehiclecan tow. If towing a trailer, thetongue load must be added to theGVW because the vehicle will becarrying that weight, too. SeeLoading the Vehicle on page 4-16 formore information about the vehicle’smaximum load capacity.

If a weight-carrying hitch or aweight-distributing hitch is beingused, the trailer tongue (A) shouldweigh 10-15 percent of the totalloaded trailer weight (B).After loading the trailer, weigh thetrailer and then the tongue,separately, to see if the weights areproper. If they aren’t, adjustmentsmight be made by moving someitems around in the trailer.Trailering may also be limited by thevehicle’s ability to carry tongueweight. Tongue weight cannot causethe vehicle to exceed the GVWR(Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) or theRGAWR (Rear Gross Axle WeightRating). The effect of additional

weight may reduce the traileringcapacity more than the total of theadditional weight.Consider the following example:A vehicle model base weight is5,500 lbs (2 495 kg); 2,800 lbs(1 270 kg) at the front axle and2,700 lbs (1 225 kg) at the rear axle.It has a GVWR of 7,200 lbs(3 266 kg), a RGAWR of 4,000 lbs(1 814 kg) and a GCWR (GrossCombination Weight Rating) of14,000 lbs (6 350 kg). The trailerrating should be:

Expect tongue weight to be atleast 10 percent of trailer weight(850 lbs (386 kg)) and becausethe weight is applied well behindthe rear axle, the effect on therear axle is greater than justthe weight itself, as much as1.5 times as much. The weight at


the rear axle could be 850 lbs(386 kg) X 1.5 = 1,275 lbs (578 kg).Since the rear axle alreadyweighs 2,700 lbs (1 225 kg), adding1,275 lbs (578 kg) brings thetotal to 3,975 lbs (1 803 kg). Thisis very close to, but within thelimit for RGAWR as well. Thevehicle is set to trailer up to8,500 lbs (3 856 kg).If the vehicle has many options andthere is a front seat passengerand two rear seat passengers withsome luggage and gear in thevehicle as well. 300 lbs (136 kg)could be added to the frontaxle weight and 400 lbs (181 kg) tothe rear axle weight. The vehiclenow weighs:

Weight is still below 7,200 lbs(3 266 kg) and you might think 700additional pounds (318 kg) shouldbe subtracted from the traileringcapacity to stay within GCWR limits.

The maximum trailer would only be7,800 lbs (3 538 kg). You may gofurther and think the tongue weightshould be limited to less than1,000 lbs (454 kg) to avoidexceeding GVWR. But the effect onthe rear axle must still be considered.Because the rear axle now weighs3,100 lbs (1 406 kg), 900 lbs(408 kg) can be put on the rear axlewithout exceeding RGAWR. Theeffect of tongue weight is about1.5 times the actual weight. Dividingthe 900 lbs (408 kg) by 1.5 leavesonly 600 lbs (272 kg) of tongueweight that can be handled. Sincetongue weight is usually at least10 percent of total loaded trailerweight, expect that the largest trailerthe vehicle can properly handle is6,000 lbs (2 721 kg).It is important that the vehicledoes not exceed any of itsratings — GCWR, GVWR, RGAWR,Maximum Trailer Rating or TongueWeight. The only way to be sure it isnot exceeding any of these ratings isto weigh the vehicle and trailer.

Total Weight on the Vehicle’sTiresBe sure the vehicle’s tires areinflated to the upper limit for coldtires. These numbers can be foundon the Certification/Tire label. SeeLoading the Vehicle on page 4-16.Make sure not to go over the GVWlimit for the vehicle, including theweight of the trailer tongue.

HitchesIt is important to have the correcthitch equipment. Crosswinds,large trucks going by and roughroads are a few reasons whythe right hitch is needed. Here aresome rules to follow:

• The rear bumper on the vehicle isnot intended for hitches. Do notattach rental hitches or otherbumper-type hitches to it. Useonly a frame-mounted hitch thatdoes not attach to the bumper.


• Will any holes be made in thebody of the vehicle when thetrailer hitch is installed? If thereare, then be sure to seal the holeslater when the hitch is removed.If the holes are not sealed, dirt,water, and deadly carbonmonoxide (CO) from the exhaustcan get into the vehicle. SeeEngine Exhaust on page 2-30.

Safety ChainsAlways attach chains between thevehicle and the trailer. Cross thesafety chains under the tongue ofthe trailer to help prevent the tonguefrom contacting the road if itbecomes separated from the hitch.Instructions about safety chainsmay be provided by the hitchmanufacturer or by the trailermanufacturer. Follow themanufacturer’s recommendation forattaching safety chains and do notattach them to the bumper. Alwaysleave just enough slack so the rigcan turn. Never allow safety chainsto drag on the ground.

Trailer BrakesA loaded trailer that weighs morethan 1,000 lbs (450 kg) needsto have its own brake system that isadequate for the weight of thetrailer. Be sure to read and followthe instructions for the trailer brakesso they are installed, adjustedand maintained properly.

Because the vehicle has antilockbrakes, do not try to tap intothe vehicle’s hydraulic brake system.If you do, both brake systems willnot work well, or at all.

Driving with a TrailerTowing a trailer requires a certainamount of experience. Get toknow the rig before setting out forthe open road. Get acquaintedwith the feel of handling and brakingwith the added weight of thetrailer. And always keep in mind thatthe vehicle you are driving is nowlonger and not as responsive as thevehicle is by itself.

Before starting, check all trailer hitchparts and attachments, safetychains, electrical connectors, lamps,tires and mirror adjustments. Ifthe trailer has electric brakes, startthe vehicle and trailer movingand then apply the trailer brakecontroller by hand to be surethe brakes are working. This checksthe electrical connection at thesame time.

During the trip, check occasionallyto be sure that the load is secure,and that the lamps and anytrailer brakes are still working.

Following DistanceStay at least twice as far behind thevehicle ahead as you wouldwhen driving the vehicle without atrailer. This can help to avoidsituations that require heavy brakingand sudden turns.


PassingMore passing distance is neededwhen towing a trailer. Becausethe rig is longer, it is necessary togo much farther beyond thepassed vehicle before returning tothe lane.

Backing UpHold the bottom of the steering wheelwith one hand. Then, to move thetrailer to the left, move that hand tothe left. To move the trailer to theright, move your hand to the right.Always back up slowly and, ifpossible, have someone guide you.

Making Turns

Notice: Making very sharp turnswhile trailering could causethe trailer to come in contact withthe vehicle. The vehicle couldbe damaged. Avoid making verysharp turns while trailering.

When turning with a trailer, makewider turns than normal. Do this sothe trailer won’t strike soft shoulders,

curbs, road signs, trees or otherobjects. Avoid jerky or suddenmaneuvers. Signal well in advance.

Turn Signals When Towing aTrailerThe arrows on the instrument panelflash whenever signaling a turnor lane change. Properly hooked up,the trailer lamps also flash, tellingother drivers the vehicle is turning,changing lanes or stopping.

When towing a trailer, the arrowson the instrument panel flashfor turns even if the bulbs on thetrailer are burned out. For thisreason you may think other driversare seeing the signal when theyare not. It is important to checkoccasionally to be sure the trailerbulbs are still working.

Driving on GradesBecause of the added load of thetrailer, the vehicle’s engine mayoverheat on hot days, when goingup a long or steep grade with atrailer. If the engine coolant

temperature gage indicatesoverheating, turn off the airconditioning to reduce engine load,pull off the road and stop in asafe spot. Let the engine run whileparked, preferably on levelground, with the transmission inP (Park) for a few minutes beforeturning the engine off.

Reduce speed and shift to a lowergear before starting down a longor steep downgrade. If thetransmission is not shifted down, thebrakes might have to be used somuch that they would get hot and nolonger work well.

On a long uphill grade, shift downand reduce the vehicle speedto around 55 mph (88 km/h) toreduce the possibility of the engineand the transmission overheating.


Tow/Haul ModeTow/Haul is a feature that assistswhen pulling a heavy trailer ora large or heavy load. The purposeof the Tow/Haul mode is to:

• Reduce the frequency andimprove the predictability oftransmission shifts when pullinga heavy trailer or a large orheavy load.

• Provide the same solid shift feelwhen pulling a heavy trailer or alarge or heavy load as whenthe vehicle is unloaded.

• Improve control of vehicle speedwhile requiring less throttle pedalactivity when pulling a heavytrailer or a large or heavy load.

• Increase the charging systemvoltage to assist in recharginga battery installed in a trailer.

Press this button located on theconsole to turn on and turn off theTow/Haul mode.

The Tow/Haul light on theinstrument panel will come on toindicate that Tow/Haul modehas been selected.

Tow/Haul may be turned off bypressing the button again, at whichtime the indicator light on theinstrument panel will turn off. Thevehicle will automatically turnoff Tow/Haul every time it is started.

Tow/Haul is designed to be mosteffective when the vehicle andtrailer combined weight is at least75 percent of the vehicle’sGross Combined Weight Rating(GCWR). See Weight of theTrailer earlier in this section.

Tow/Haul is most useful under thefollowing driving conditions:

• When pulling a heavy trailer or alarge or heavy load throughrolling terrain.

• When pulling a heavy trailer or alarge or heavy load in stop andgo traffic.

• When pulling a heavy trailer or alarge or heavy load in busyparking lots where improved lowspeed control of the vehicle isdesired.

Operating the vehicle in Tow/Haulwhen lightly loaded or with no trailerat all will not cause damage.However, there is no benefit to theselection of Tow/Haul when thevehicle is unloaded. Such aselection when unloaded may resultin unpleasant engine andtransmission driving characteristicsand reduced fuel economy.Tow/Haul is recommended onlywhen pulling a heavy traileror a large or heavy load.


Parking on Hills

{ CAUTION

Parking the vehicle on a hill withthe trailer attached can bedangerous. If something goeswrong, the rig could start to move.People can be injured, and boththe vehicle and the trailer can bedamaged. When possible, alwayspark the rig on a flat surface.

If parking the rig on a hill:

1. Press the brake pedal, but donot shift into P (Park) yet.Turn the wheels into the curb iffacing downhill or into trafficif facing uphill.

2. Have someone place chocksunder the trailer wheels.

3. When the wheel chocks are inplace, release the brake pedaluntil the chocks absorb the load.

4. Reapply the brake pedal. Thenapply the parking brakeand shift the transmission intoP (Park).

5. Release the brake pedal.

Leaving After Parking ona Hill1. Apply and hold the brake pedal

while you:

• start the engine,

• shift into a gear, and

• release the parking brake.

2. Let up on the brake pedal.

3. Drive slowly until the trailer isclear of the chocks.

4. Stop and have someone pick upand store the chocks.

Maintenance When TrailerTowingThe vehicle needs service moreoften when pulling a trailer.See Scheduled Maintenance onpage 6-3 for more information.

Things that are especially importantin trailer operation are automatictransmission fluid, engine oil,axle lubricant, belts, cooling systemand brake system. It is a goodidea to inspect these before andduring the trip.

Check periodically to see that allhitch nuts and bolts are tight.

Trailer Wiring HarnessThe vehicle is equipped with thefollowing wiring harness for towinga trailer.

Basic Trailer Wiring

The trailer wiring harness, with aseven-pin connector, is located atthe rear of the vehicle and is tied tothe vehicle’s frame. The harnessconnector can be plugged into aseven-pin universal heavy-dutytrailer connector available throughyour dealer/retailer.


The seven-wire harness containsthe following trailer circuits:

• Yellow: Left Stop/Turn Signal

• Dark Green: Right Stop/TurnSignal

• Brown: Taillamps

• Black: Ground

• Light Green: Back-up Lamps

• Red/Black: Battery Feed

• Dark Blue: Trailer Brake*

*The fuse for this circuit is installedin the underhood electrical center,but the wires are not connected.They should be connected by yourdealer/retailer or a qualified servicecenter.

If the back-up lamp circuit is notfunctional, contact your dealer/retailer.

If a remote (non-vehicle) battery isbeing charged, press the Tow/Haulmode switch located on the centerconsole near the climate controls.This will boost the vehicle systemvoltage and properly charge thebattery. If the trailer is too light forTow/Haul mode, turn on theheadlamps (Non-HID only) as asecond way to boost the vehiclesystem and charge the battery.

Electric Trailer Brake ControlWiring Provisions

These wiring provisions for anelectric trailer brake controllerare included with the vehicle aspart of the trailer wiring package.The instrument panel containsblunt cut wires behind thesteering column for the electrictrailer brake controller.

The harness contains the followingwires:

• Red/Black: Power Supply

• White: Brake Switch Signal

• Gray: Illumination

• Dark Blue: Trailer Brake Signal

• Black: Ground

The electric trailer brake controllershould be installed by your dealer/retailer or a qualified service center.

Engine Cooling When TrailerTowingThe cooling system may temporarilyoverheat during severe operatingconditions. See Engine Overheatingon page 5-22.


Service andAppearance Care

ServiceService ................................5-3Accessories andModifications .......................5-3

California Proposition65 Warning .........................5-3

California PerchlorateMaterials Requirements ........5-4

Doing Your OwnService Work ......................5-4

Adding Equipment to theOutside of the Vehicle ..........5-4

FuelFuel ....................................5-5Gasoline Octane ...................5-5Gasoline Specifications ..........5-5California Fuel ......................5-5Additives ..............................5-5Fuels in Foreign Countries ......5-6Filling the Tank .....................5-7Filling a Portable FuelContainer ...........................5-8

Checking Things Underthe HoodChecking Things Underthe Hood ............................5-9

Hood Release .......................5-9Engine CompartmentOverview ..........................5-10

Engine Oil ..........................5-12Engine Oil Life System .........5-14Engine Air Cleaner/Filter .......5-15Automatic TransmissionFluid ................................5-16

Cooling System ...................5-17Engine Coolant ...................5-18Engine Overheating .............5-22OverheatedEngine ProtectionOperating Mode .................5-24

Power Steering Fluid ............5-24Windshield Washer Fluid ......5-25Brakes ...............................5-26Battery ...............................5-28Jump Starting .....................5-29

All-Wheel DriveAll-Wheel Drive ...................5-33

Headlamp AimingHeadlamp Aiming ................5-33

Bulb ReplacementBulb Replacement ...............5-33High Intensity Discharge(HID) Lighting ....................5-34

Halogen Bulbs ....................5-34Taillamps, Turn Signal,Stoplamps and SidemarkerLamps ..............................5-34

License Plate Lamp .............5-35Replacement Bulbs ..............5-35

Windshield ReplacementWindshield Replacement .......5-36

Windshield Wiper BladeReplacementWindshield Wiper BladeReplacement .....................5-36

TiresTires ..................................5-37Tire Sidewall Labeling ..........5-38Tire Terminology andDefinitions .........................5-40

Inflation - Tire Pressure ........5-43Tire Pressure MonitorSystem .............................5-44

Tire Pressure MonitorOperation ..........................5-46

Service and Appearance Care 5-1

Tire Inspection andRotation ............................5-49

When It Is Time forNew Tires .........................5-51

Buying New Tires ................5-51Different Size Tiresand Wheels ......................5-53

Uniform Tire QualityGrading ............................5-54

Wheel Alignment andTire Balance .....................5-55

Wheel Replacement .............5-55Tire Chains .........................5-57If a Tire Goes Flat ...............5-57Tire Sealant andCompressor Kit ..................5-59

Tire Sealant andCompressor Kit Storage ......5-66

Changing a Flat Tire ............5-67Removing the SpareTire and Tools ...................5-68

Removing the Flat Tire andInstalling the Spare Tire .......5-70

Secondary Latch System ......5-74Storing a Flat or SpareTire and Tools ...................5-76

Compact Spare Tire .............5-79

Appearance CareInterior Cleaning ..................5-80Fabric/Carpet ......................5-81Leather ..............................5-82Instrument Panel, Vinyl, andOther Plastic Surfaces .........5-82

Care of Safety Belts ............5-82Weatherstrips ......................5-83Washing Your Vehicle ..........5-83Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses .............................5-83

Finish Care .........................5-84Windshield, Backglass,and Wiper Blades ..............5-84

Aluminum or Chrome-PlatedWheels and Trim ................5-85

Tires ..................................5-85Sheet Metal Damage ...........5-86Finish Damage ....................5-86Underbody Maintenance .......5-86Chemical Paint Spotting ........5-86

Vehicle IdentificationVehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN) ....................5-87

Service Parts IdentificationLabel ...............................5-87

Electrical SystemHigh Voltage Devicesand Wiring ........................5-87

Add-On ElectricalEquipment ........................5-88

Windshield Wiper Fuses .......5-88Power Windows and OtherPower Options ...................5-88

Fuses and Circuit Breakers ....5-88Instrument PanelFuse Block .......................5-89

Underhood Fuse Block .........5-91

Capacities and SpecificationsCapacities andSpecifications ....................5-94

5-2 Service and Appearance Care

ServiceFor service and parts needs, visityour dealer/retailer. You will receivegenuine GM parts and GM-trainedand supported service people.

Genuine GM parts have oneof these marks:

Accessories andModificationsWhen non-dealer/non-retaileraccessories are added to the vehicle,they can affect vehicle performanceand safety, including such things asairbags, braking, stability, ride andhandling, emissions systems,aerodynamics, durability, andelectronic systems like antilockbrakes, traction control, and stabilitycontrol. Some of these accessoriescould even cause malfunction ordamage not covered by the vehiclewarranty.

Damage to vehicle componentsresulting from the installation or useof non-GM certified parts, includingcontrol module modifications, are notcovered under the terms of thevehicle warranty and may affectremaining warranty coverage foraffected parts.

GM Accessories are designed tocomplement and function with othersystems on the vehicle. Your GMdealer/retailer can accessorize the

vehicle using genuine GMAccessories. When you go to yourGM dealer/retailer and ask for GMAccessories, you will know thatGM-trained and supported servicetechnicians will perform the workusing genuine GM Accessories.

Also, see Adding Equipment to YourAirbag-Equipped Vehicle onpage 1-58.

California Proposition 65WarningMost motor vehicles, including thisone, contain and/or emit chemicalsknown to the State of Californiato cause cancer and birth defects orother reproductive harm. Engineexhaust, many parts and systems(including some inside the vehicle),many fluids, and some componentwear by-products contain and/oremit these chemicals.


California PerchlorateMaterials RequirementsCertain types of automotiveapplications, such as airbaginitiators, seat belt pretensioners,and lithium batteries containedin remote keyless transmitters, maycontain perchlorate materials.Special handling may be necessary.For additional information, seewww.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.

Doing Your OwnService Work

{ CAUTION

You can be injured and thevehicle could be damaged if youtry to do service work on a vehiclewithout knowing enough about it.

• Be sure you have sufficientknowledge, experience, theproper replacement parts, andtools before attempting anyvehicle maintenance task.

• Be sure to use the propernuts, bolts, and otherfasteners. English and metricfasteners can be easilyconfused. If the wrongfasteners are used, parts canlater break or fall off. Youcould be hurt.

If doing some of your own servicework, use the proper servicemanual. It tells you much moreabout how to service the vehicle

than this manual can. To order theproper service manual, seeService Publications OrderingInformation on page 7-13.

This vehicle has an airbag system.Before attempting to do yourown service work, see ServicingYour Airbag-Equipped Vehicleon page 1-57.

Keep a record with all parts receiptsand list the mileage and the dateof any service work performed. SeeMaintenance Record on page 6-13.

Adding Equipment tothe Outside of theVehicleThings added to the outside of thevehicle can affect the airflowaround it. This can cause windnoise and can affect fuel economyand windshield washer performance.Check with your dealer/retailerbefore adding equipment tothe outside of the vehicle.


FuelUse of the recommended fuelis an important part of the propermaintenance of this vehicle. To helpkeep the engine clean and maintainoptimum vehicle performance, werecommend the use of gasolineadvertised as TOP TIER DetergentGasoline.

Gasoline OctaneUse regular unleaded gasoline witha posted octane rating of 87 orhigher. If the octane rating is lessthan 87, you might notice an audibleknocking noise when you drive,commonly referred to as sparkknock. If this occurs, use a gasolinerated at 87 octane or higher assoon as possible. If you are usinggasoline rated at 87 octane or higherand you hear heavy knocking, theengine needs service.

Gasoline SpecificationsAt a minimum, gasolineshould meet ASTM specificationD 4814 in the United States orCAN/CGSB-3.5 or 3.511 in Canada.Some gasolines contain anoctane-enhancing additive calledmethylcyclopentadienyl manganesetricarbonyl (MMT). We recommendagainst the use of gasolinescontaining MMT. See Additives onpage 5-5 for additional information.

California FuelIf the vehicle is certified to meetCalifornia Emissions Standards, it isdesigned to operate on fuels thatmeet California specifications. Seethe underhood emission controllabel. If this fuel is not available instates adopting California emissionsstandards, the vehicle will operatesatisfactorily on fuels meeting federalspecifications, but emission controlsystem performance might beaffected. The malfunction indicatorlamp could turn on and the vehicle

might fail a smog-check test. SeeMalfunction Indicator Lamp onpage 3-37. If this occurs, return toyour authorized dealer/retailer fordiagnosis. If it is determined that thecondition is caused by the type offuel used, repairs might not becovered by the vehicle warranty.

AdditivesTo provide cleaner air, all gasolinesin the United States are now requiredto contain additives that help preventengine and fuel system depositsfrom forming, allowing the emissioncontrol system to work properly. Inmost cases, you should not have toadd anything to the fuel. However,some gasolines contain only theminimum amount of additive requiredto meet U.S. EnvironmentalProtection Agency regulations. Tohelp keep fuel injectors and intakevalves clean, or if the vehicleexperiences problems due to dirtyinjectors or valves, look for gasolinethat is advertised as TOP TIERDetergent Gasoline.


For customers who do not use TOPTIER Detergent Gasoline regularly,one bottle of GM Fuel SystemTreatment PLUS, added to the fueltank at every engine oil change,can help clean deposits fromfuel injectors and intake valves. GMFuel System Treatment PLUS isthe only gasoline additiverecommended by General Motors.

Also, your dealer/retailer hasadditives that will help correct andprevent most deposit-relatedproblems.

Gasolines containing oxygenates,such as ethers and ethanol,and reformulated gasolines might beavailable in your area. Werecommend that you use thesegasolines, if they comply with thespecifications described earlier.However, E85 (85% ethanol) andother fuels containing morethan 10% ethanol must not be usedin vehicles that were not designedfor those fuels.

Notice: This vehicle was notdesigned for fuel that containsmethanol. Do not use fuelcontaining methanol. It cancorrode metal parts in the fuelsystem and also damage plasticand rubber parts. That damagewould not be covered underthe vehicle warranty.

Some gasolines that arenot reformulated for lowemissions can contain anoctane-enhancing additive calledmethylcyclopentadienyl manganesetricarbonyl (MMT); ask the attendantwhere you buy gasoline whether thefuel contains MMT. We recommendagainst the use of such gasolines.Fuels containing MMT can reducethe life of spark plugs and theperformance of the emission controlsystem could be affected. Themalfunction indicator lamp might turnon. If this occurs, return to yourdealer/retailer for service.

Fuels in ForeignCountriesIf you plan on driving in anothercountry outside the United States orCanada, the proper fuel might behard to find. Never use leadedgasoline or any other fuel notrecommended in the previous texton fuel. Costly repairs causedby use of improper fuel would notbe covered by the vehicle warranty.

To check the fuel availability, askan auto club, or contact a major oilcompany that does business inthe country where you will bedriving.


Filling the Tank

{ CAUTION

Fuel vapor burns violently and afuel fire can cause bad injuries.To help avoid injuries to you andothers, read and follow all theinstructions on the pump island.Turn off the engine when you arerefueling. Do not smoke if you arenear fuel or refueling the vehicle.Do not use cellular phones. Keepsparks, flames, and smokingmaterials away from fuel. Do notleave the fuel pump unattendedwhen refueling the vehicle. This isagainst the law in some places.Do not re-enter the vehicle whilepumping fuel. Keep children awayfrom the fuel pump; never letchildren pump fuel.

The tethered fuel cap is locatedbehind a hinged fuel door onthe driver side of the vehicle.

To open the fuel door, push therearward center edge in and releaseand it will open.

To remove the fuel cap, turn itslowly counterclockwise. The fuelcap has a spring in it; if the capis released too soon, it will springback to the right.

While refueling, hang the tetheredfuel cap from the hook on thefuel door.

{ CAUTION

Fuel can spray out on you if youopen the fuel cap too quickly. Ifyou spill fuel and then somethingignites it, you could be badlyburned. This spray can happen ifthe tank is nearly full, and is morelikely in hot weather. Open thefuel cap slowly and wait for anyhiss noise to stop. Then unscrewthe cap all the way.

Be careful not to spill fuel. Do nottop off or overfill the tank and wait afew seconds after you have finishedpumping before removing the nozzle.Clean fuel from painted surfaces assoon as possible. See Washing YourVehicle on page 5-83.


When replacing the fuel cap, turn itclockwise until it clicks. Makesure the cap is fully installed. Thediagnostic system can determine ifthe fuel cap has been left off orimproperly installed. This wouldallow fuel to evaporate intothe atmosphere. See MalfunctionIndicator Lamp on page 3-37.

If the vehicle has a DriverInformation Center (DIC), theTIGHTEN GAS CAP messagedisplays if the fuel cap is notproperly installed.

{ CAUTION

If a fire starts while you arerefueling, do not remove thenozzle. Shut off the flow of fuel byshutting off the pump or bynotifying the station attendant.Leave the area immediately.

Notice: If you need a new fuelcap, be sure to get the right type.Your dealer/ retailer can get onefor you. If you get the wrong type,it might not fit properly. This cancause the malfunction indicatorlamp to light and can damage thefuel tank and emissions system.See Malfunction Indicator Lampon page 3-37.

Filling a Portable FuelContainer

{ CAUTION

Never fill a portable fuel containerwhile it is in the vehicle. Staticelectricity discharge from thecontainer can ignite the fuelvapor. You can be badly burned

(Continued)

CAUTION (Continued)

and the vehicle damaged if thisoccurs. To help avoid injury toyou and others:

• Dispense fuel only intoapproved containers.

• Do not fill a container while itis inside a vehicle, in avehicle’s trunk, pickup bed, oron any surface other than theground.

• Bring the fill nozzle in contactwith the inside of the fillopening before operating thenozzle. Contact should bemaintained until the filling iscomplete.

• Do not smoke whilepumping fuel.

• Do not use a cellular phonewhile pumping fuel.


Checking ThingsUnder the Hood

{ CAUTION

An electric fan under the hoodcan start up and injure you evenwhen the engine is not running.Keep hands, clothing, and toolsaway from any underhoodelectric fan.

{ CAUTION

Things that burn can get on hotengine parts and start a fire.These include liquids like fuel, oil,coolant, brake fluid, windshieldwasher and other fluids, andplastic or rubber. You or otherscould be burned. Be careful not todrop or spill things that will burnonto a hot engine.

Hood ReleaseTo open the hood:

1. Pull the hood release handle withthis symbol on it. It is locatedunder the instrument panelon the driver side of the vehicle.

2. At the front of the vehicle, pull upon the bottom center of the grille,and push the secondary hoodrelease to the left.

3. After the lid has been partiallylifted, a gas strut automaticallylifts and holds the hood inthe fully open position.

Before closing the hood, be sure allfiller caps are on properly.

Pull the hood down to close. Lowerthe hood until the lifting pressureof the strut is reduced. Thenallow the hood to fall and latch intoplace under its own weight.Check to make sure the hood isclosed. If the hood does notfully latch, gently push the hooddown at the front and center until itis completely latched.


Engine Compartment OverviewWhen you lift the hood, here is what you will see:


A. Radiator Pressure Cap. SeeCooling System on page 5-17.

B. Engine Coolant Recovery Cap.See Cooling System onpage 5-17.

C. Remote Negative (−) Terminal.See Jump Starting on page 5-29.

D. Underhood Fuse Block onpage 5-91.

E. Remote Positive (+) Terminal.See Jump Starting on page 5-29.

F. Power Steering Fluid onpage 5-24.

G. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “Whento Add Engine Oil” under EngineOil on page 5-12.

H. Engine Oil Dipstick. See“Checking Engine Oil” underEngine Oil on page 5-12.

I. Automatic Transmission FluidDipstick. See “Checking theFluid Level” under AutomaticTransmission Fluid on page 5-16.

J. Brake Master Cylinder Reservoir.See “Brake Fluid” under Brakeson page 5-26.

K. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter onpage 5-15.

L. Windshield Washer FluidReservoir. See “Adding WasherFluid” under WindshieldWasher Fluid on page 5-25.


Engine OilChecking Engine OilIt is a good idea to check theengine oil level at each fuel fill. Inorder to get an accurate reading, theoil must be warm and the vehiclemust be on level ground.

The engine oil dipstick handle is ayellow loop. See EngineCompartment Overview onpage 5-10 for the location of theengine oil dipstick.

1. Turn off the engine and give theoil several minutes to drain backinto the oil pan. If this is notdone, the oil dipstick might notshow the actual level.

2. Pull out the dipstick and clean itwith a paper towel or cloth, thenpush it back in all the way.Remove it again, keeping the tipdown, and check the level.

When to Add Engine Oil

If the oil is below the cross-hatchedarea at the tip of the dipstick,add at least one quart/liter of therecommended oil. This sectionexplains what kind of oil to use. Forengine oil crankcase capacity,see Capacities and Specificationson page 5-94.

Notice: Do not add too much oil.If the engine has so much oilthat the oil level gets above thecross-hatched area that showsthe proper operating range,the engine could be damaged.

See Engine Compartment Overviewon page 5-10 for the location ofthe engine oil fill cap.

Add enough oil to put the levelsomewhere in the proper operatingrange in the cross-hatched area.Push the dipstick all the way back inwhen through.


What Kind of Engine Oil to UseLook for three things:

• GM6094M

Use only an oil that meets GMStandard GM6094M.

• SAE 5W-30

SAE 5W-30 is best for thevehicle. These numbers on an oilcontainer show its viscosity, orthickness. Do not use otherviscosity oils such asSAE 20W-50.

• American Petroleum Institute(API) starburst symbol

Oils meeting these requirementsshould have the starburstsymbol on the container. Thissymbol indicates that the oil hasbeen certified by the AmericanPetroleum Institute (API).

Notice: Use only engine oilidentified as meeting GMStandard GM6094M and showingthe American PetroleumInstitute Certified For Gasoline

Engines starburst symbol. Failureto use the recommended oilcan result in engine damage notcovered by the vehicle warranty.

Cold Temperature OperationIf in an area of extreme cold, wherethe temperature falls below −20°F(−29°C), use either an SAE 5W-30synthetic oil or an SAE 0W-30engine oil. Both provide easier coldstarting for the engine at extremelylow temperatures. Always usean oil that meets the requiredspecification, GM6094M. See “WhatKind of Engine Oil to Use” formore information.

Engine Oil Additives / EngineOil FlushesDo not add anything to the oil. Therecommended oils with thestarburst symbol that meet GMStandard GM6094M are all that isneeded for good performanceand engine protection.


Engine oil system flushes are notrecommended and could causeengine damage not covered by thevehicle warranty.

Engine Oil Life SystemWhen to Change Engine OilThis vehicle has a computer systemthat indicates when to change theengine oil and filter. This is based onengine revolutions and enginetemperature, and not on mileage.Based on driving conditions,the mileage at which an oil changeis indicated can vary considerably.For the oil life system to workproperly, the system must be resetevery time the oil is changed.

When the system has calculatedthat oil life has been diminished, itindicates that an oil change isnecessary. A CHANGE ENGINEOIL SOON message comeson. Change the oil as soon aspossible within the next 600 miles(1 000 km). It is possible that, ifdriving under the best conditions,

the oil life system might not indicatethat an oil change is necessaryfor over a year. However, the engineoil and filter must be changed atleast once a year and at thistime the system must be reset. Yourdealer/retailer has trained servicepeople who will perform thiswork using genuine parts and resetthe system. It is also importantto check the oil regularly and keep itat the proper level.

If the system is ever resetaccidentally, the oil must bechanged at 3,000 miles (5 000 km)since the last oil change.Remember to reset the oil lifesystem whenever the oil is changed.

How to Reset the Engine OilLife SystemThe Engine Oil Life Systemcalculates when to change theengine oil and filter based on vehicleuse. Whenever the oil is changed,reset the system so it can calculatewhen the next oil change is required.If a situation occurs where the oil is

changed prior to a CHANGEENGINE OIL SOON message beingturned on, reset the system.

To reset the Engine Oil Life System:

1. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN,with the engine off.

2. Press the vehicle informationbutton until OIL LIFEREMAINING displays.

3. Press and hold the set/resetbutton until 100% is displayed.Three chimes sound andthe CHANGE ENGINE OILSOON message goes off.

4. Turn the key to LOCK/OFF.

If the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOONmessage comes back on whenthe vehicle is started, the engine oillife system has not reset. Repeatthe procedure.


What to Do with Used OilUsed engine oil contains certainelements that can be unhealthy foryour skin and could even causecancer. Do not let used oil stay onyour skin for very long. Cleanyour skin and nails with soap andwater, or a good hand cleaner.Wash or properly dispose of clothingor rags containing used engineoil. See the manufacturer’s warningsabout the use and disposal of oilproducts.

Used oil can be a threat to theenvironment. If you change your ownoil, be sure to drain all the oil from thefilter before disposal. Never disposeof oil by putting it in the trash, pouringit on the ground, into sewers, or intostreams or bodies of water. Recycleit by taking it to a place that collectsused oil.

Engine Air Cleaner/FilterWhen to Inspect the EngineAir Cleaner/FilterInspect the air cleaner/filter at theMaintenance II intervals and replaceit at the first oil change after each50,000 mile (80 000 km) interval.See Scheduled Maintenanceon page 6-3 for more information. Ifyou are driving in dusty/dirtyconditions, inspect the filter at eachengine oil change.

See Engine Compartment Overviewon page 5-10 for the location ofthe engine air cleaner/filter.

How to Inspect the Engine AirCleaner/FilterTo inspect the air cleaner/filter,remove the filter from the vehicleand lightly shake the filter (awayfrom vehicle) to release loose dustand dirt. If the filter remainscaked with dirt, a new filter isrequired.

To inspect or replace the engine aircleaner/filter:

1. Loosen the screws that hold thecover on.

2. Disconnect the electricalconnector.

3. Lift off the cover.

4. Remove the engine aircleaner/filter element and anyloose debris that may be found inthe air cleaner base.

5. Inspect or replace the air filterelement.


6. Reverse Steps 1 through 3 toreinstall the cover and reconnectthe electrical connector.

{ CAUTION

Operating the engine with the aircleaner/filter off can cause you orothers to be burned. The aircleaner not only cleans the air; ithelps to stop flames if the enginebackfires. If it is not there and theengine backfires, you could beburned. Do not drive with it off, andbe careful working on the enginewith the air cleaner/filter off.

Notice: If the air cleaner/filter isoff, a backfire can cause adamaging engine fire. And, dirtcan easily get into the engine,which will damage it. Always havethe air cleaner/filter in placewhen you are driving.

Automatic TransmissionFluidIt is not necessary to check thetransmission fluid level. Atransmission fluid leak is the onlyreason for fluid loss. If a leak occurs,take the vehicle to the dealer/retailerand have it repaired as soon aspossible.

Change the fluid at the intervalslisted in Additional RequiredServices on page 6-5, and be sureto use the transmission fluidlisted in Recommended Fluids andLubricants on page 6-11.

Notice: Use of the incorrectautomatic transmission fluid maydamage the vehicle, and thedamages may not be covered bythe vehicle’s warranty. Alwaysuse the automatic transmissionfluid listed in RecommendedFluids and Lubricants onpage 6-11.

The transmission fluid will not reachthe end of the dipstick unless thetransmission is at operatingtemperature. If you need to check thetransmission fluid level, please takethe vehicle to your dealer/retailer.


Cooling SystemThe cooling system allows theengine to maintain the correctworking temperature.

A. Engine Coolant Recovery TankB. Radiator Pressure CapC. Engine Cooling Fans

{ CAUTION

An electric engine cooling fanunder the hood can start up evenwhen the engine is not runningand can cause injury. Keephands, clothing, and tools awayfrom any underhood electric fan.

{ CAUTION

Heater and radiator hoses, andother engine parts, can be veryhot. Do not touch them. If you do,you can be burned.

Do not run the engine if there is aleak. If you run the engine, itcould lose all coolant. That couldcause an engine fire, and youcould be burned. Get any leakfixed before you drive the vehicle.

Notice: Using coolant other thanDEX-COOL® can cause prematureengine, heater core, or radiatorcorrosion. In addition, the enginecoolant could require changingsooner, at 30,000 miles(50 000 km) or 24 months,whichever occurs first. Anyrepairs would not be covered bythe vehicle warranty. Alwaysuse DEX-COOL® (silicate-free)coolant in the vehicle.


Engine CoolantThe cooling system in the vehicle isfilled with DEX-COOL® enginecoolant. The coolant is designed toremain in the vehicle for five yearsor 150,000 miles (240 000 km),whichever occurs first.

The following explains the coolingsystem and how to check and addcoolant when it is low. If there is aproblem with engine overheating,see Engine Overheating onpage 5-22.

What to Use

{ CAUTION

Adding only plain water to thecooling system can be dangerous.Plain water, or some other liquidsuch as alcohol, can boil beforethe proper coolant mixture will.The vehicle’s coolant warningsystem is set for the propercoolant mixture. With plain wateror the wrong mixture, the enginecould get too hot but you wouldnot get the overheat warning. Theengine could catch fire and you orothers could be burned. Use a50/50 mixture of clean, drinkablewater and DEX-COOL® coolant.

Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,drinkable water and DEX-COOLcoolant. If using this mixture, nothingelse needs to be added. Thismixture:

• Gives freezing protection down to−34°F (−37°C), outsidetemperature.

• Gives boiling protection up to265°F (129°C), enginetemperature.

• Protects against rust andcorrosion.

• Will not damage aluminum parts.

• Helps keep the proper enginetemperature.

Notice: If an improper coolantmixture is used, the engine couldoverheat and be badly damaged.The repair cost would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.Too much water in the mixturecan freeze and crack the engine,radiator, heater core, and otherparts.


Notice: If extra inhibitors and/oradditives are used in thevehicle’s cooling system, thevehicle could be damaged. Useonly the proper mixture ofthe engine coolant listed in thismanual for the cooling system.See Recommended Fluidsand Lubricants on page 6-11 formore information.

Checking CoolantThe vehicle must be on a levelsurface when checking the coolantlevel.

Check to see if coolant is visible inthe coolant recovery tank. If thecoolant inside the coolant recoverytank is boiling, do not do anythingelse until it cools down. If coolant isvisible but the coolant level is notat or above the FULL COLDmark, add a 50/50 mixture of clean,drinkable water and DEX-COOLcoolant at the coolant recovery tank,but be sure the cooling system is

cool before this is done. See EngineCoolant on page 5-18 for moreinformation.

The coolant recovery tank cap hasthis symbol on it.

When the engine is cold, thecoolant level should be at or abovethe FULL COLD line marked onthe recovery tank.

When the engine is hot, the levelcould be higher than the FULLCOLD line. If the coolant is belowthe FULL COLD line when theengine is hot, there could be a leakin the cooling system.

If the coolant is low, add thecoolant or take the vehicle to adealer/retailer for service.

How to Add Coolant to theRecovery Tank

{ CAUTION

You can be burned if you spillcoolant on hot engine parts.Coolant contains ethylene glycoland it will burn if the engine partsare hot enough. Do not spillcoolant on a hot engine.

Notice: This vehicle has aspecific coolant fill procedure.Failure to follow this procedurecould cause the engine tooverheat and be severelydamaged.

If coolant is needed, add the properDEX-COOL® coolant mixture atthe coolant recovery tank.


How to Add Coolant to theRadiator

{ CAUTION

An electric engine cooling fanunder the hood can start up evenwhen the engine is not runningand can cause injury. Keephands, clothing, and tools awayfrom any underhood electric fan.

{ CAUTION

Steam and scalding liquids from ahot cooling system can blow outand burn you badly. They areunder pressure, and if you turn thesurge tank pressure cap — even alittle — they can come out at highspeed. Never turn the cap whenthe cooling system, including thesurge tank pressure cap, is hot.Wait for the cooling system andsurge tank pressure cap to coolif you ever have to turn thepressure cap.

If coolant is needed, add the propermixture directly to the radiator,but be sure the cooling system iscool before this is done.

1. Detach fasteners and lift offthe panel that covers theradiator cap.

2. Remove the radiator pressurecap when the cooling system,including the upper radiator hose,is no longer hot.Turn the pressure cap slowlycounterclockwise about one fullturn. If you hear a hiss, waitfor that to stop. A hiss meansthere is still some pressure left inthe system.


3. Keep turning the pressure capslowly and remove it.

4. Fill the radiator to the base of thefiller neck with the properDEX-COOL coolant mixture.

5. When coolant begins to flow outof the filler neck, reinstall thepressure cap. Be sure to secureit tightly.

6. Fill the coolant recovery tank tothe FULL COLD mark.

7. Reinstall the cap on the coolantrecovery tank but leave theradiator pressure cap off.

8. Start the engine and let it rununtil the upper radiator hosefeels warm. Any time during thisprocedure, watch out for theengine cooling fan(s).


9. If the coolant level inside theradiator filler neck is low, addmore of the proper DEX-COOLcoolant mixture through thefiller neck until the level is backup to the base of the fillerneck. Replace the pressure cap.Be sure to secure it tightly.

Notice: If the pressure cap is nottightly installed, coolant lossand possible engine damage mayoccur. Be sure the cap isproperly and tightly secured.

Engine OverheatingThe vehicle has several indicatorsto warn of engine overheating.

There is an engine coolanttemperature gage on the instrumentpanel cluster. See Engine CoolantTemperature Gage on page 3-36.

The vehicle may also displayan ENGINE OVERHEATED IDLEENGINE and ENGINEOVERHEATED STOP ENGINEmessage in the Driver InformationCenter (DIC). See DIC Warningsand Messages on page 3-50.

You may decide not to lift the hoodwhen this warning appears, butinstead get service help right away.See Roadside Assistance Programon page 7-6.

If you do decide to lift the hood,make sure the vehicle is parked ona level surface.

Then check to see if the enginecooling fans are running. If theengine is overheating, both fansshould be running. If they arenot, do not continue to run theengine and have the vehicleserviced.

Notice: Engine damage fromrunning the engine withoutcoolant is not covered by thewarranty.

Notice: If the engine catches firewhile driving with no coolant,the vehicle can be badlydamaged. The costly repairswould not be covered bythe vehicle warranty. SeeOverheated Engine ProtectionOperating Mode on page 5-24 forinformation on driving to asafe place in an emergency.


If Steam Is Coming From TheEngine Compartment

{ CAUTION

Steam from an overheated enginecan burn you badly, even if youjust open the hood. Stay awayfrom the engine if you see or hearsteam coming from it. Turn it offand get everyone away from thevehicle until it cools down. Waituntil there is no sign of steam orcoolant before you open the hood.

If you keep driving when thevehicles engine is overheated, theliquids in it can catch fire. You orothers could be badly burned.Stop the engine if it overheats,and get out of the vehicle until theengine is cool.

See Overheated EngineProtection Operating Mode onpage 5-24 for information ondriving to a safe place in anemergency.

If No Steam Is Coming FromThe Engine CompartmentIf an engine overheat warning isdisplayed but no steam can be seenor heard, the problem may not betoo serious. Sometimes theengine can get a little too hot whenthe vehicle:

• Climbs a long hill on a hot day.

• Stops after high-speed driving.

• Idles for long periods in traffic.

• Tows a trailer.

If the overheat warning is displayedwith no sign of steam:

1. Turn the air conditioning off.

2. Turn the heater on to the highesttemperature and to the highestfan speed. Open the windows asnecessary.

3. If in a traffic jam, shift toN (Neutral), otherwise, shiftto the highest gear whiledriving — D (Drive) or L (Low).

If the temperature overheat gage isno longer in the overheat zoneor an overheat warning no longerdisplays, the vehicle can be driven.Continue to drive the vehicleslow for about 10 minutes. Keep asafe vehicle distance from the car infront of you. If the warning doesnot come back on, continue to drivenormally.

If the warning continues, pullover, stop, and park the vehicleright away.

If there is no sign of steam, idle theengine for three minutes whileparked. If the warning is stilldisplayed, turn off the engine until itcools down. Also, see “OverheatedEngine Protection OperatingMode” next in this section.


OverheatedEngine ProtectionOperating ModeThis emergency operating mode letsthe vehicle be driven to a safeplace in an emergency situation. Ifan overheated engine conditionexists, an overheat protection modewhich alternates firing groups ofcylinders helps prevent enginedamage. In this mode, there is asignificant loss in power and engineperformance. The temperaturegage indicates an overheat conditionexists. Driving extended distancesand/or towing a trailer in theoverheat protection mode should beavoided.

Notice: After driving in theoverheated engine protectionoperating mode, to avoid enginedamage, allow the engine tocool before attempting any repair.The engine oil will be severelydegraded. Repair the causeof coolant loss, change the oiland reset the oil life system. SeeEngine Oil on page 5-12.

Power Steering Fluid

The power steering fluid reservoir islocated toward the front of theengine compartment on thepassenger side of the vehicle. SeeEngine Compartment Overviewon page 5-10 for reservoir location.

When to Check PowerSteering FluidIt is not necessary to regularly checkpower steering fluid unless yoususpect there is a leak in the systemor you hear an unusual noise. A fluidloss in this system could indicate aproblem. Have the system inspectedand repaired.

How to Check Power SteeringFluidTo check the power steering fluid:

1. Turn the key off and let the enginecompartment cool down.

2. Remove engine oil fill cap.

3. Slide engine cover rearward andlift to remove.

4. Wipe the cap and the top of thereservoir clean.

5. Unscrew the cap and wipe thedipstick with a clean rag.

6. Replace the cap and completelytighten it.

7. Remove the cap again and look atthe fluid level on the dipstick.


The fluid level should be somewherebetween MAX and MIN line on thedipstick in room temperature. If thefluid is on or below MIN line, youshould add fluid close to MAX Line.

What to UseTo determine what kind of fluid touse, see Recommended Fluids andLubricants on page 6-11. Alwaysuse the proper fluid.

Notice: Use of the incorrect fluidmay damage the vehicle andthe damages may not be coveredby the vehicle’s warranty.Always use the correct fluidlisted in Recommended Fluidsand Lubricants on page 6-11.

Windshield Washer FluidWhat to UseWhen adding windshield washerfluid, be sure to read themanufacturer’s instructions beforeuse. If the vehicle will be operatingin an area where the temperature

may fall below freezing, use a fluidthat has sufficient protectionagainst freezing.

Adding Washer FluidWhen the windshield washer fluidreservoir is low, a WASHER FLUIDLOW ADD FLUID message willbe displayed on the DriverInformation Center (DIC). See DICWarnings and Messages onpage 3-50 for more information.

Open the cap with the washersymbol on it. Add washer fluid untilthe tank is full. See EngineCompartment Overview onpage 5-10 for reservoir location.

Notice:

• When using concentratedwasher fluid, follow themanufacturer’s instructions foradding water.

• Do not mix water withready-to-use washer fluid.Water can cause the solutionto freeze and damage yourwasher fluid tank and otherparts of the washer system.Also, water does not clean aswell as washer fluid.

• Fill the washer fluid tank onlythree-quarters full when it isvery cold. This allows for fluidexpansion if freezing occurs,which could damage the tank ifit is completely full.

• Do not use engine coolant(antifreeze) in your windshieldwasher. It can damage thevehicle’s windshield washersystem and paint.


BrakesBrake Fluid

The brake master cylinder reservoiris filled with DOT 3 brake fluid.See Engine Compartment Overviewon page 5-10 for the location ofthe reservoir.

There are only two reasons why thebrake fluid level in the reservoirmight go down:

• The brake fluid level goes downbecause of normal brake liningwear. When new linings areinstalled, the fluid level goesback up.

• A fluid leak in the brake hydraulicsystem can also cause a low fluidlevel. Have the brake hydraulicsystem fixed, since a leak meansthat sooner or later the brakes willnot work well.

Do not top off the brake fluid. Addingfluid does not correct a leak. If fluid isadded when the linings are worn,there will be too much fluid when newbrake linings are installed. Add orremove brake fluid, as necessary,only when work is done on the brakehydraulic system.

{ CAUTION

If too much brake fluid is added, itcan spill on the engine and burn,if the engine is hot enough. Youor others could be burned, andthe vehicle could be damaged.Add brake fluid only when work isdone on the brake hydraulicsystem.

When the brake fluid falls to a lowlevel, the brake warning light comeson. See Brake System WarningLight on page 3-34.

What to Add

Use only new DOT 3 brake fluidfrom a sealed container. SeeRecommended Fluids andLubricants on page 6-11.

Always clean the brake fluidreservoir cap and the area aroundthe cap before removing it. Thishelps keep dirt from enteringthe reservoir.


{ CAUTION

With the wrong kind of fluid in thebrake hydraulic system, thebrakes might not work well. Thiscould cause a crash. Always usethe proper brake fluid.

Notice:

• Using the wrong fluid canbadly damage brake hydraulicsystem parts. For example,just a few drops ofmineral-based oil, such asengine oil, in the brakehydraulic system can damagebrake hydraulic systemparts so badly that they willhave to be replaced. Do not letsomeone put in the wrongkind of fluid.

• If brake fluid is spilled on thevehicle’s painted surfaces, thepaint finish can be damaged. Becareful not to spill brake fluidon the vehicle. If you do, wash itoff immediately. See WashingYour Vehicle on page 5-83.

Brake WearThis vehicle has disc brakes. Discbrake pads have built-in wearindicators that make a high-pitchedwarning sound when the brakepads are worn and new pads areneeded. The sound can comeand go or be heard all the time thevehicle is moving, except whenapplying the brake pedal firmly.

{ CAUTION

The brake wear warning soundmeans that soon the brakes willnot work well. That could lead toan accident. When the brake wearwarning sound is heard, have thevehicle serviced.

Notice: Continuing to drive withworn-out brake pads couldresult in costly brake repair.

Some driving conditions or climatescan cause a brake squeal whenthe brakes are first applied or lightlyapplied. This does not meansomething is wrong with the brakes.

Properly torqued wheel nuts arenecessary to help preventbrake pulsation. When tires arerotated, inspect brake pads for wearand evenly tighten wheel nuts inthe proper sequence to torquespecifications in Capacities andSpecifications on page 5-94.

Brake linings should always bereplaced as complete axle sets.

Brake Pedal TravelSee your dealer/retailer if the brakepedal does not return to normalheight, or if there is a rapid increasein pedal travel. This could be asign that brake service mightbe required.


Brake AdjustmentEvery time the brakes are applied,with or without the vehiclemoving, the brakes adjust for wear.

Replacing Brake SystemPartsThe braking system on a vehicle iscomplex. Its many parts have tobe of top quality and work welltogether if the vehicle is to havereally good braking. The vehicle wasdesigned and tested with top-qualitybrake parts. When parts of thebraking system are replaced — forexample, when the brake liningswear down and new ones areinstalled — be sure to get newapproved replacement parts. If thisis not done, the brakes mightnot work properly. For example, ifsomeone puts in brake liningsthat are wrong for the vehicle, thebalance between the front andrear brakes can change — for theworse. The braking performance

expected can change in many otherways if the wrong replacementbrake parts are installed.

BatteryThis vehicle has a maintenance freebattery. When it is time for a newbattery, see your dealer/retailerfor one that has the replacementnumber shown on the originalbattery’s label.

For battery replacement, see yourdealer/retailer or the service manual.To purchase a service manual,see Service Publications OrderingInformation on page 7-13.Warning: Battery posts, terminals,and related accessories containlead and lead compounds,chemicals known to the State ofCalifornia to cause cancer andreproductive harm. Wash handsafter handling.

Vehicle Storage

{ CAUTION

Batteries have acid that canburn you and gas that canexplode. You can be badly hurt ifyou are not careful. See JumpStarting on page 5-29 for tips onworking around a battery withoutgetting hurt.

Infrequent Usage: If the vehicle isdriven infrequently, remove theblack, negative (−) cable from thebattery. This helps keep the batteryfrom running down.

Extended Storage: For extendedstorage of the vehicle, removethe black, negative (−) cable fromthe battery or use a batterytrickle charger. This helps maintainthe charge of the battery overan extended period of time.


Jump StartingIf the vehicle’s battery has rundown, you may want to use anothervehicle and some jumper cablesto start your vehicle. Be sure to usethe following steps to do it safely.

{ CAUTION

Batteries can hurt you. They canbe dangerous because:

• They contain acid that canburn you.

• They contain gas that canexplode or ignite.

• They contain enoughelectricity to burn you.

If you do not follow these stepsexactly, some or all of thesethings can hurt you.

Notice: Ignoring these stepscould result in costly damage tothe vehicle that would not becovered by the warranty.

Trying to start the vehicle bypushing or pulling it will not work,and it could damage the vehicle.

1. Check the other vehicle. Itmust have a 12-volt battery witha negative ground system.

Notice: If the other vehicle’ssystem is not a 12-volt systemwith a negative ground, bothvehicles can be damaged. Onlyuse vehicles with 12-volt systemswith negative grounds to jumpstart your vehicle.

2. Get the vehicles close enough sothe jumper cables can reach, butbe sure the vehicles are nottouching each other. If they are, itcould cause a ground connectionyou do not want. You would notbe able to start your vehicle, andthe bad grounding could damagethe electrical systems.To avoid the possibility of thevehicles rolling, set the parkingbrake firmly on both vehiclesinvolved in the jump startprocedure. Put an automatic

transmission in P (Park) or amanual transmission in Neutralbefore setting the parking brake.If one of the vehicles is afour-wheel-drive vehicle, be surethe transfer case is not in Neutral.

Notice: If you leave the radio orother accessories on duringthe jump starting procedure, theycould be damaged. The repairswould not be covered by thewarranty. Always turn offthe radio and other accessorieswhen jump starting the vehicle.

3. Turn off the ignition on bothvehicles. Unplug unnecessaryaccessories plugged into thecigarette lighter or the accessorypower outlets. Turn off the radioand all lamps that are not needed.This will avoid sparks and helpsave both batteries. And it couldsave the radio!


4. Open the hoods and locate thepositive (+) and negative (−)terminal locations on the othervehicle. Your vehicle has aremote positive (+) and a remotenegative (−) jump startingterminal. See EngineCompartment Overview onpage 5-10 for more informationon the terminal locations.

{ CAUTION

Using a match near a battery cancause battery gas to explode.People have been hurt doing this,and some have been blinded. Usea flashlight if you need more light.

Be sure the batteries haveenough water. You do not need toadd water to the ACDelco®

battery (or batteries) installed inyour new vehicle. But if a battery

(Continued)

CAUTION (Continued)

has filler caps, be sure the rightamount of fluid is there. If it islow, add water to take care of thatfirst. If you do not, explosive gascould be present.

Battery fluid contains acid thatcan burn you. Do not get it onyou. If you accidentally get it inyour eyes or on your skin, flushthe place with water and getmedical help immediately.

{ CAUTION

Fans or other moving engineparts can injure you badly. Keepyour hands away from movingparts once the engine is running.

5. Check that the jumper cables donot have loose or missinginsulation. If they do, you couldget a shock. The vehiclescould be damaged too.Before you connect the cables,here are some basic thingsyou should know. Positive (+) willgo to positive (+) or to aremote positive (+) terminal if thevehicle has one. Negative (−)will go to a heavy, unpaintedmetal engine part or to a remotenegative (−) terminal if thevehicle has one.Do not connect positive (+) tonegative (−) or you will geta short that would damage thebattery and maybe otherparts too. And do not connectthe negative (−) cable tothe negative (−) terminal on thedead battery because thiscan cause sparks.


6. Connect the red positive (+)cable to the positive (+) terminalof the dead battery.Use a remote positive (+)terminal if the vehicle has one.

7. Do not let the other end touchmetal. Connect it to thepositive (+) terminal of the goodbattery. Use a remote positive (+)terminal if the vehicle has one.

8. Now connect the blacknegative (−) cable to thenegative (−) terminal of the goodbattery. Use a remotenegative (−) terminal if thevehicle has one.Do not let the other end touchanything until the next step. Theother end of the negative (−)cable does not go to thedead battery. It goes to a heavy,unpainted metal engine part,or to a remote negative (−)terminal on the vehicle with thedead battery.

9. Connect the other end of thenegative (−) cable at least18 inches (45 cm) away from thedead battery, but not nearengine parts that move.The electrical connection is justas good there, and the chanceof sparks getting back to thebattery is much less.Your vehicle has a remotenegative (−) terminal for thispurpose.


10. Now start the vehicle with thegood battery and run theengine for a while.

11. Try to start the vehicle that hadthe dead battery. If it will notstart after a few tries, it probablyneeds service.

Notice: If the jumper cables areconnected or removed in thewrong order, electrical shortingmay occur and damage thevehicle. The repairs would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.Always connect and removethe jumper cables in the correctorder, making sure that the cablesdo not touch each other orother metal.

A. Heavy, Unpainted Metal EnginePart or Remote Negative (−)Terminal

B. Good Battery or RemotePositive (+) and RemoteNegative (−) Terminals

C. Dead Battery or RemotePositive (+) Terminal

To disconnect the jumper cablesfrom both vehicles, do the following:

1. Disconnect the black negative (−)cable from the vehicle that hadthe dead battery.

2. Disconnect the black negative (−)cable from the vehicle with thegood battery.

3. Disconnect the red positive (+)cable from the vehicle with thegood battery.

4. Disconnect the red positive (+)cable from the other vehicle.

Jumper Cable Removal


All-Wheel DriveIt is recommended that the all-wheeldrive lubricants be checked andfilled by the dealer/retailer.

When to Check Lubricant

Refer to the Maintenance Scheduleto determine how often to checkthe lubricant. See ScheduledMaintenance on page 6-3.

Headlamp AimingHeadlamp aim has been preset atthe factory and should need nofurther adjustment.

However, if your vehicle is damagedin a crash, the headlamp aim maybe affected. Aim adjustment tothe low-beam headlamps may benecessary if oncoming drivers flashtheir high-beam headlamps atyou (for vertical aim).

If the headlamps need to bere-aimed, it is recommended thatyou take the vehicle to yourdealer/retailer for service.

Bulb ReplacementFor the proper type of replacementbulbs, see Replacement Bulbson page 5-35.

For any bulb changing procedurenot listed in this section, contactyour dealer/retailer.


High Intensity Discharge(HID) Lighting

{ CAUTION

The low beam high intensitydischarge lighting systemoperates at a very high voltage. Ifyou try to service any of thesystem components, you could beseriously injured. Have yourdealer/retailer or a qualifiedtechnician service them.

Your vehicle has HID headlamps.After your vehicle’s HID headlampbulb has been replaced, you maynotice that the beam is a slightlydifferent shade than it was originally.This is normal.

Halogen Bulbs

{ CAUTION

Halogen bulbs have pressurizedgas inside and can burst if youdrop or scratch the bulb. You orothers could be injured. Be sureto read and follow the instructionson the bulb package.

Taillamps, Turn Signal,Stoplamps andSidemarker Lamps

A. TaillampB. Sidemarker Lamp

To replace one of these bulbs:

1. Open the liftgate. See Liftgate onpage 2-10 or Power Liftgate onpage 2-11.

2. Remove the convenience net.


3. Remove the three hex nutsholding the taillamp assembly inplace.

4. Pull out the taillamp assembly.

5. Turn the bulb socketcounterclockwise and pull itstraight out to remove it.

6. Replace the old bulb with anew one.

7. Reverse steps 3 through 5 toreinstall the taillamp assembly.When reinstalling the taillampassembly, the plastic pin on thetaillamp assembly must lineup and be inserted correctly intothe opening.

License Plate LampTo replace one of these bulbs:

1. Remove the two screws holdingeach of the license plate lampsto the liftgate trim.

2. Turn and pull the license platelamp forward through the liftgate trim opening.

3. Turn the bulb socketcounterclockwise and pull thebulb straight out of the socket.

4. Install the new bulb.

5. Reverse steps 1 – 3 to reinstallthe license plate lamp.

Replacement Bulbs

Exterior Lamp BulbNumber

License Plate Lamp 194Rear SidemarkerLamp 194

Rear Turn Signaland Taillamps

7443(W21/5W)

For replacement bulbs not listedhere, contact your dealer/retailer.


WindshieldReplacementYour vehicle is equipped with anacoustic windshield. If you ever haveto have your windshield replacedbe sure to get an acousticwindshield so you will continue tohave the benefits an acousticwindshield can provide.

Windshield WiperBlade ReplacementWindshield wiper blades should beinspected for wear or cracking.See Scheduled Maintenanceon page 6-3 for more information.

Replacement blades come indifferent types and are removed indifferent ways. To replace thewiper blade assembly:

1. Pull the windshield wiper armaway from the windshield.

2. Press the button in the middle ofthe wiper arm connector and pullthe wiper blade away from thearm connector.

3. Install the new wiper blade andmake sure the wiper bladelocks into place.

For the proper size and type seeMaintenance Replacement Parts onpage 6-12.

Backglass Wiper BladeTo replace the backglass wiperblade:

1. Pull the wiper blade assemblyaway from the backglass.The backglass wiper blade willnot lock in a vertical positionso care should be used whenpulling it away from the vehicle.

2. Rotate the wiper blade assembly,hold the wiper arm in position,and push the blade awayfrom the wiper arm.

3. Replace the wiper blade.

4. Return the wiper arm and bladeassembly to the rest position onthe glass.


TiresYour new vehicle comes withhigh-quality tires made by aleading tire manufacturer. If youever have questions about yourtire warranty and where to obtainservice, see your vehicleWarranty booklet for details. Foradditional information refer to thetire manufacturer.

{ CAUTION

Poorly maintained andimproperly used tires aredangerous.

• Overloading yourvehicle’s tires can causeoverheating as a result oftoo much flexing. Youcould have an air-out and aserious accident. SeeLoading the Vehicle onpage 4-16.

(Continued)

CAUTION (Continued)

• Underinflated tires posethe same danger asoverloaded tires. Theresulting accident couldcause serious injury.Check all tires frequentlyto maintain therecommended pressure.Tire pressure should bechecked when yourvehicle’s tires are cold.See Inflation - TirePressure on page 5-43.

(Continued)

CAUTION (Continued)

• Overinflated tires are morelikely to be cut, punctured,or broken by a suddenimpact — such as whenyou hit a pothole. Keeptires at the recommendedpressure.

• Worn, old tires can causeaccidents. If the tire’s treadis badly worn, or if yourvehicle’s tires have beendamaged, replace them.


Tire Sidewall LabelingUseful information about a tire ismolded into its sidewall. Theexamples below show a typicalpassenger vehicle tire and acompact spare tire sidewall.

(A) Tire Size: The tire size is acombination of letters andnumbers used to define aparticular tire’s width, height,aspect ratio, constructiontype, and service description.

See the “Tire Size” illustrationlater in this section for moredetail.

(B) TPC Spec (TirePerformance CriteriaSpecification): Originalequipment tires designed toGM’s specific tire performancecriteria have a TPC specificationcode molded onto the sidewall.GM’s TPC specificationsmeet or exceed all federal safetyguidelines.

(C) DOT (Department ofTransportation): TheDepartment of Transportation(DOT) code indicates that the tireis in compliance with the U.S.Department of TransportationMotor Vehicle Safety Standards.

(D) Tire Identification Number(TIN): The letters and numbersfollowing DOT (Departmentof Transportation) code is theTire Identification Number (TIN).

The TIN shows the manufacturerand plant code, tire size, anddate the tire was manufactured.The TIN is molded onto bothsides of the tire, althoughonly one side may have the dateof manufacture.

(E) Tire Ply Material: The typeof cord and number of pliesin the sidewall and underthe tread.

(F) Uniform Tire QualityGrading (UTQG): Tiremanufacturers are required tograde tires based on threeperformance factors: treadwear,traction, and temperatureresistance. For more informationsee Uniform Tire QualityGrading on page 5-54.

(G) Maximum Cold InflationLoad Limit: Maximum loadthat can be carried and themaximum pressure needed tosupport that load.

Passenger (P-Metric) TireExample


(A) Temporary Use Only: Thecompact spare tire or temporaryuse tire has a tread life ofapproximately 3,000 miles(5 000 km) and should not bedriven at speeds over 65 mph(105 km/h). The compactspare tire is for emergency usewhen a regular road tire haslost air and gone flat. Ifyour vehicle has a compactspare tire, see Compact SpareTire on page 5-79 and If aTire Goes Flat on page 5-57.

(B) Tire Ply Material: The typeof cord and number of pliesin the sidewall and underthe tread.

(C) Tire Identification Number(TIN): The letters and numbersfollowing the DOT (Departmentof Transportation) code isthe Tire Identification Number(TIN). The TIN shows themanufacturer and plant code,tire size, and date the tirewas manufactured. The TIN ismolded onto both sides ofthe tire, although only one sidemay have the date ofmanufacture.

(D) Maximum Cold InflationLoad Limit: Maximum load thatcan be carried and themaximum pressure needed tosupport that load.

(E) Tire Inflation: Thetemporary use tire or compactspare tire should be inflatedto 60 psi (420 kPa). Formore information on tirepressure and inflation seeInflation - Tire Pressure onpage 5-43.

(F) Tire Size : A combination ofletters and numbers define atire’s width, height, aspect ratio,construction type, and servicedescription. The letter T asthe first character in the tire sizemeans the tire is for temporaryuse only.

(G) TPC Spec (TirePerformance CriteriaSpecification): Originalequipment tires designed toGM’s specific tire performancecriteria have a TPC specificationcode molded onto the sidewall.GM’s TPC specificationsmeet or exceed all federal safetyguidelines.

Compact Spare Tire Example


Tire Size

The following illustration showsan example of a typicalpassenger vehicle tire size.

(A) Passenger (P-Metric) Tire:The United States version of ametric tire sizing system. Theletter P as the first character inthe tire size means a passengervehicle tire engineered tostandards set by the U.S. Tireand Rim Association.

(B) Tire Width: The three-digitnumber indicates the tiresection width in millimeters fromsidewall to sidewall.

(C) Aspect Ratio: A two-digitnumber that indicates the tireheight-to-width measurements.

For example, if the tire sizeaspect ratio is 60, as shown initem C of the illustration, it wouldmean that the tire’s sidewall is60 percent as high as it is wide.

(D) Construction Code: A lettercode is used to indicate the typeof ply construction in the tire. Theletter R means radial plyconstruction; the letter D meansdiagonal or bias ply construction;and the letter B meansbelted-bias ply construction.

(E) Rim Diameter: Diameter ofthe wheel in inches.

(F) Service Description: Thesecharacters represent the loadindex and speed rating of the tire.The load index represents theload carry capacity a tire iscertified to carry. The speedrating is the maximum speed atire is certified to carry a load.

Tire Terminology andDefinitionsAir Pressure: The amount of airinside the tire pressing outwardon each square inch of the tire.Air pressure is expressed inpounds per square inch (psi) orkilopascal (kPa).

Accessory Weight: This meansthe combined weight of optionalaccessories. Some examples ofoptional accessories are,automatic transmission, powersteering, power brakes, powerwindows, power seats, and airconditioning.

Aspect Ratio: The relationshipof a tire’s height to its width.

Belt: A rubber coated layer ofcords that is located between theplies and the tread. Cords maybe made from steel or otherreinforcing materials.


Bead: The tire bead containssteel wires wrapped by steelcords that hold the tire ontothe rim.

Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tirein which the plies are laid atalternate angles less than90 degrees to the centerline ofthe tread.

Cold Tire Pressure: Theamount of air pressure in a tire,measured in pounds per squareinch (psi) or kilopascals (kPa)before a tire has built up heatfrom driving. See Inflation - TirePressure on page 5-43.

Curb Weight: The weight of amotor vehicle with standardand optional equipment includingthe maximum capacity of fuel,oil, and coolant, but withoutpassengers and cargo.

DOT Markings: A code moldedinto the sidewall of a tiresignifying that the tire is incompliance with the U.S.Department of Transportation(DOT) motor vehicle safetystandards. The DOT codeincludes the Tire IdentificationNumber (TIN), an alphanumericdesignator which can alsoidentify the tire manufacturer,production plant, brand, and dateof production.

GVWR: Gross Vehicle WeightRating. See Loading the Vehicleon page 4-16.

GAWR FRT: Gross Axle WeightRating for the front axle. SeeLoading the Vehicle onpage 4-16.

GAWR RR: Gross Axle WeightRating for the rear axle. SeeLoading the Vehicle onpage 4-16.

Intended Outboard Sidewall:The side of an asymmetricaltire, that must always faceoutward when mounted on avehicle.

Kilopascal (kPa): The metricunit for air pressure.

Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire: Atire used on light duty trucksand some multipurposepassenger vehicles.

Load Index: An assignednumber ranging from 1 to 279that corresponds to the loadcarrying capacity of a tire.

Maximum Inflation Pressure:The maximum air pressureto which a cold tire canbe inflated. The maximum airpressure is molded onto thesidewall.

Maximum Load Rating: Theload rating for a tire at themaximum permissible inflationpressure for that tire.


Maximum Loaded VehicleWeight: The sum of curbweight, accessory weight,vehicle capacity weight, andproduction options weight.

Normal Occupant Weight: Thenumber of occupants a vehicleis designed to seat multiplied by150 lbs (68 kg). See Loadingthe Vehicle on page 4-16.

Occupant Distribution:Designated seating positions.

Outward Facing Sidewall: Theside of an asymmetrical tire thathas a particular side that facesoutward when mounted on avehicle. The side of the tire thatcontains a whitewall, bears whitelettering, or bears manufacturer,brand, and/or model namemolding that is higher or deeperthan the same moldings on theother sidewall of the tire.

Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: Atire used on passenger cars andsome light duty trucks andmultipurpose vehicles.

Recommended InflationPressure: Vehiclemanufacturer’s recommendedtire inflation pressure asshown on the tire placard. SeeInflation - Tire Pressure onpage 5-43 and Loadingthe Vehicle on page 4-16.

Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatictire in which the ply cordsthat extend to the beads are laidat 90 degrees to the centerlineof the tread.

Rim: A metal support for a tireand upon which the tirebeads are seated.

Sidewall: The portion of a tirebetween the tread and the bead.

Speed Rating: An alphanumericcode assigned to a tireindicating the maximum speedat which a tire can operate.

Traction: The friction betweenthe tire and the road surface.The amount of grip provided.

Tread: The portion of a tire thatcomes into contact with the road.

Treadwear Indicators:Narrow bands, sometimes calledwear bars, that show acrossthe tread of a tire when only1/16 inch (1.6 mm) of treadremains. See When It Is Timefor New Tires on page 5-51.

UTQGS (Uniform Tire QualityGrading Standards): A tireinformation system that providesconsumers with ratings for atire’s traction, temperature,and treadwear. Ratings aredetermined by tire manufacturersusing government testingprocedures. The ratings aremolded into the sidewall of thetire. See Uniform Tire QualityGrading on page 5-54.


Vehicle Capacity Weight:The number of designatedseating positions multiplied by150 lbs (68 kg) plus therated cargo load. See Loadingthe Vehicle on page 4-16.

Vehicle Maximum Load on theTire: Load on an individualtire due to curb weight,accessory weight, occupantweight, and cargo weight.

Vehicle Placard: A labelpermanently attached to avehicle showing the vehicle’scapacity weight and the originalequipment tire size andrecommended inflation pressure.See “Tire and LoadingInformation Label” underLoading the Vehicle onpage 4-16.

Inflation - Tire PressureTires need the correct amount ofair pressure to operateeffectively.

Notice: Do not let anyone tellyou that under-inflation orover-inflation is all right. It isnot. If your tires do nothave enough air(under-inflation), you can getthe following:• Too much flexing• Too much heat• Tire overloading• Premature or irregular wear• Poor handling• Reduced fuel economyIf your tires have too much air(over-inflation), you can getthe following:• Unusual wear• Poor handling• Rough ride• Needless damage from road

hazards

A vehicle specific Tire andLoading Information label isattached to your vehicle.This label shows your vehicle’soriginal equipment tires andthe correct inflation pressures foryour tires when they are cold.The recommended cold tireinflation pressure, shown on thelabel, is the minimum amountof air pressure needed tosupport your vehicle’s maximumload carrying capacity.

For additional informationregarding how much weight yourvehicle can carry, and anexample of the Tire and LoadingInformation label, see Loadingthe Vehicle on page 4-16. Howyou load your vehicle affectsvehicle handling and ridecomfort. Never load your vehiclewith more weight than it wasdesigned to carry.


When to Check

Check your tires once a monthor more. Do not forget tocheck the compact spare tire, ifthe vehicle has one. It shouldbe at 60 psi (420 kPa). Foradditional information regardingthe compact spare tire, seeCompact Spare Tire onpage 5-79.

How to Check

Use a good quality pocket-typegage to check tire pressure. Youcannot tell if your tires areproperly inflated simply bylooking at them. Radial tires maylook properly inflated even whenthey are under-inflated. Checkthe tire’s inflation pressure whenthe tires are cold. Cold meansyour vehicle has been sitting forat least three hours or driven nomore than 1 mile (1.6 km).

Remove the valve cap from thetire valve stem. Press thetire gage firmly onto the valve toget a pressure measurement.If the cold tire inflation pressurematches the recommendedpressure on the Tire andLoading Information label, nofurther adjustment is necessary.If the inflation pressure islow, add air until you reach therecommended amount.

If you overfill the tire, release airby pushing on the metal stem inthe center of the tire valve.Re-check the tire pressure withthe tire gage.

Be sure to put the valve capsback on the valve stems.They help prevent leaks bykeeping out dirt and moisture.

Tire Pressure MonitorSystemThe Tire Pressure Monitor System(TPMS) uses radio and sensortechnology to check tire pressurelevels. The TPMS sensors monitorthe air pressure in your vehicle’stires and transmit tire pressurereadings to a receiver located in thevehicle.

Each tire, including the spare(if provided), should be checkedmonthly when cold and inflated tothe inflation pressure recommendedby the vehicle manufacturer onthe vehicle placard or tire inflationpressure label. (If your vehiclehas tires of a different size than thesize indicated on the vehicleplacard or tire inflation pressurelabel, you should determinethe proper tire inflation pressure forthose tires.)


As an added safety feature, yourvehicle has been equipped witha tire pressure monitoring system(TPMS) that illuminates a lowtire pressure telltale when one ormore of your tires is significantlyunder-inflated.

Accordingly, when the low tirepressure telltale illuminates, youshould stop and check your tires assoon as possible, and inflate them tothe proper pressure. Driving on asignificantly under-inflated tirecauses the tire to overheat and canlead to tire failure. Under-inflationalso reduces fuel efficiency and tiretread life, and may affect thevehicle’s handling and stoppingability.

Please note that the TPMS isnot a substitute for proper tiremaintenance, and it is the driver’sresponsibility to maintain correct tirepressure, even if under-inflation hasnot reached the level to triggerillumination of the TPMS low tirepressure telltale.

Your vehicle has also been equippedwith a TPMS malfunction indicator toindicate when the system is notoperating properly. The TPMSmalfunction indicator is combinedwith the low tire pressure telltale.When the system detects amalfunction, the telltale will flash forapproximately one minute and thenremain continuously illuminated. Thissequence will continue uponsubsequent vehicle start-ups as longas the malfunction exists.

When the malfunction indicator isilluminated, the system may not beable to detect or signal low tirepressure as intended. TPMSmalfunctions may occur for a varietyof reasons, including the installationof replacement or alternate tires orwheels on the vehicle that preventthe TPMS from functioning properly.Always check the TPMS malfunctiontelltale after replacing one or moretires or wheels on your vehicle toensure that the replacement or

alternate tires and wheels allow theTPMS to continue to functionproperly.

See Tire Pressure MonitorOperation on page 5-46 foradditional information.

Federal CommunicationsCommission (FCC) andIndustry and Science CanadaThe Tire Pressure Monitor System(TPMS) operates on a radiofrequency and complies with Part 15of the FCC Rules. Operation issubject to the following twoconditions:




Vehicles with TPMS operate on aradio frequency and complywith RSS-210 of Industry andScience Canada. Operation issubject to the following twoconditions:



Changes or modifications tothis system by other than anauthorized service facility couldvoid authorization to use thisequipment.

Tire Pressure MonitorOperationThis vehicle may have a TirePressure Monitor System (TPMS).The TPMS is designed to warnthe driver when a low tire pressurecondition exists. TPMS sensorsare mounted onto each tireand wheel assembly, excluding thespare tire and wheel assembly,if the vehicle has one. The TPMSsensors monitor the air pressure inthe vehicle’s tires and transmitsthe tire pressure readings toa receiver located in the vehicle.

When a low tire pressure condition isdetected, the TPMS illuminates thelow tire pressure warning lightlocated on the instrument panelcluster.

At the same time a message tocheck the pressure in a specific tireappears on the Driver InformationCenter (DIC) display. The lowtire pressure warning light and theDIC warning message come onat each ignition cycle until the tiresare inflated to the correct inflationpressure. Using the DIC, tirepressure levels can be viewed bythe driver. For additional informationand details about the DIC operationand displays see DIC Operationand Displays on page 3-43 and DICWarnings and Messages onpage 3-50.

The low tire pressure warning lightmay come on in cool weatherwhen the vehicle is first started, andthen turn off as you start to drive.This could be an early indicator thatthe air pressure in the tire(s) aregetting low and need to be inflatedto the proper pressure.


A Tire and Loading Informationlabel, attached to your vehicle,shows the size of your vehicle’soriginal equipment tires andthe correct inflation pressure foryour vehicle’s tires when theyare cold. See Loading the Vehicleon page 4-16, for an example of theTire and Loading Informationlabel and its location on yourvehicle. Also see Inflation - TirePressure on page 5-43.

Your vehicle’s TPMS can warn youabout a low tire pressure conditionbut it does not replace normaltire maintenance. See TireInspection and Rotation onpage 5-49 and Tires on page 5-37.

Notice: Using non-approvedtire sealants could damagethe Tire Pressure Monitor System(TPMS) sensors. TPMS sensordamage caused by using anincorrect tire sealant is notcovered by the vehicle warranty.

Always use the GM approved tiresealant available through yourdealer/retailer.

Factory-installed Tire Inflator Kitsuse a GM approved liquid tiresealant. Using non-approved tiresealants could damage the TPMSsensors. See Tire Sealant andCompressor Kit on page 5-59 forinformation regarding the inflator kitmaterials and instructions.

TPMS Malfunction Light andMessageThe TPMS will not function properly ifone or more of the TPMS sensorsare missing or inoperable. When thesystem detects a malfunction, thelow tire warning light flashes forabout one minute and then stays onfor the remainder of the ignitioncycle. A DIC warning message isalso displayed. The low tire warninglight and DIC warning messagecome on at each ignition cycle untilthe problem is corrected. Some of

the conditions that can cause themalfunction light and DIC messageto come on are:

• One of the road tires has beenreplaced with the spare tire, ifyour vehicle has one. The sparetire does not have a TPMSsensor. The TPMS malfunctionlight and DIC message should gooff once you re-install the road tirecontaining the TPMS sensor.

• The TPMS sensor matchingprocess was started but notcompleted or not completedsuccessfully after rotating thevehicle’s tires. The DIC messageand TPMS malfunction lightshould go off once the TPMSsensor matching process isperformed successfully. See“TPMS Sensor Matching Process”later in this section.


• One or more TPMS sensorsare missing or damaged.The DIC message and the TPMSmalfunction light should go offwhen the TPMS sensors areinstalled and the sensormatching process is performedsuccessfully. See your dealer/retailer for service.

• Replacement tires or wheels donot match your vehicle’s originalequipment tires or wheels. Tiresand wheels other than thoserecommended for your vehiclecould prevent the TPMS fromfunctioning properly. See BuyingNew Tires on page 5-51.

• Operating electronic devices orbeing near facilities using radiowave frequencies similar to theTPMS could cause the TPMSsensors to malfunction.

If the TPMS is not functioning itcannot detect or signal a low tirecondition. See your dealer/retailer forservice if the TPMS malfunction lightand DIC message comes on andstays on.

TPMS Sensor MatchingProcessEach TPMS sensor has a uniqueidentification code. Any timeyou rotate your vehicle’s tires orreplace one or more of the TPMSsensors, the identification codes willneed to be matched to the newtire/wheel position. The sensors arematched to the tire/wheel positionsin the following order: driver sidefront tire, passenger side front tire,passenger side rear tire, anddriver side rear tire using a TPMSdiagnostic tool. See yourdealer/retailer for service.

The TPMS sensors can also bematched to each tire/wheel positionby increasing or decreasing thetire’s air pressure. If increasing thetire’s air pressure, do not exceedthe maximum inflation pressureindicated on the tire’s sidewall.

To decrease air-pressure out of atire you can use the pointedend of the valve cap, a pencil-styleair pressure gage, or a key.

You have two minutes to matchthe first tire/wheel position, andfive minutes overall to match allfour tire/wheel positions. If it takeslonger than two minutes, tomatch the first tire and wheel, ormore than five minutes to match allfour tire and wheel positions thematching process stops andyou need to start over.


The TPMS sensor matching processis outlined below:


2. Turn the ignition switch toON/RUN with the engine off.

3. Press the Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) transmitter’s LOCKand UNLOCK buttons at thesame time for approximatelyfive seconds. The horn soundstwice to signal the receiver is inrelearn mode and TIRELEARNING ACTIVE messagedisplays on the DIC screen.

4. Start with the driver sidefront tire.

5. Remove the valve cap from thevalve cap stem. Activate theTPMS sensor by increasing ordecreasing the tire’s air pressurefor five seconds, or until a hornchirp sounds. The horn chirp,which may take up to 30 secondsto sound, confirms that the sensoridentification code has beenmatched to this tire and wheelposition.

6. Proceed to the passenger sidefront tire, and repeat theprocedure in Step 5.

7. Proceed to the passenger siderear tire, and repeat theprocedure in Step 5.

8. Proceed to the driver side reartire, and repeat the procedurein Step 5. The horn soundstwo times to indicate the sensoridentification code has beenmatched to the driver side reartire, and the TPMS sensormatching process is no longeractive. The TIRE LEARNINGACTIVE message on theDIC display screen goes off.

9. Turn the ignition switch toLOCK/OFF.

10. Set all four tires to therecommended air pressure levelas indicated on the Tire andLoading Information label.

11. Put the valve caps back on thevalve stems.

Tire Inspection andRotationWe recommend that youregularly inspect the vehicle’stires, including the sparetire, if the vehicle has one, forsigns of wear or damage.See When It Is Time for NewTires on page 5-51 for moreinformation.

Tires should be rotatedevery 5,000 to 8,000 miles(8 000 to 13 000 km). SeeScheduled Maintenance onpage 6-3.

The purpose of a regular tirerotation is to achieve a uniformwear for all tires on thevehicle. This will ensure that thevehicle continues to performmost like it did when thetires were new.


Any time you notice unusualwear, rotate the tires as soon aspossible and check wheelalignment. Also check fordamaged tires or wheels. SeeWhen It Is Time for New Tires onpage 5-51 and WheelReplacement on page 5-55.

When rotating the vehicle’s tires,always use the correct rotationpattern shown here.

If the vehicle has a compactspare tire, do not include it in thetire rotation.

After the tires have been rotated,adjust the front and rear inflationpressures as shown on the Tireand Loading Information label.See Inflation - Tire Pressure onpage 5-43 and Loading theVehicle on page 4-16.

Reset the Tire Pressure MonitorSystem. See Tire PressureMonitor Operation on page 5-46.

Make certain that all wheelnuts are properly tightened. See“Wheel Nut Torque” underCapacities and Specificationson page 5-94.

{ CAUTION

Rust or dirt on a wheel, or onthe parts to which it isfastened, can make wheelnuts become loose after time.

(Continued)

CAUTION (Continued)

The wheel could come off andcause an accident. When youchange a wheel, remove anyrust or dirt from places wherethe wheel attaches to thevehicle. In an emergency, youcan use a cloth or a papertowel to do this; but be sure touse a scraper or wire brushlater, if needed, to get all therust or dirt off. See Changinga Flat Tire on page 5-67.

Make sure the spare tire, if thevehicle has one, is storedsecurely. Push, pull, and thentry to rotate or turn the tire.If it moves, tighten the cable.See Storing a Flat or Spare Tireand Tools on page 5-76.


When It Is Time for NewTiresVarious factors, such asmaintenance, temperatures, drivingspeeds, vehicle loading, and roadconditions influence when you neednew tires.

One way to tell when it is time fornew tires is to check the treadwearindicators, which will appearwhen the tires have only 1/16 inch(1.6 mm) or less of tread remaining.

You need new tires if any of thefollowing statements are true:

• You can see the indicators atthree or more places aroundthe tire.

• You can see cord or fabricshowing through the tire’s rubber.

• The tread or sidewall is cracked,cut, or snagged deep enough toshow cord or fabric.

• The tire has a bump, bulge, orsplit.

• The tire has a puncture, cut, orother damage that cannot berepaired well because of the sizeor location of the damage.

The rubber in tires degrades overtime, even if they are not beingused. This is also true for the sparetire, if the vehicle has one. Multipleconditions affect how fast thisaging takes place, includingtemperatures, loading conditions,and inflation pressure maintenance.With proper care and maintenancetires typically wear out before

they degrade due to age. If you areunsure about the need to replacethe tires as they get older, consultthe tire manufacturer for moreinformation.

Buying New TiresGM has developed and matchedspecific tires for your vehicle.The original equipment tiresinstalled on your vehicle, when itwas new, were designed tomeet General Motors TirePerformance CriteriaSpecification (TPC Spec)system rating. If you needreplacement tires, GM stronglyrecommends that you gettires with the same TPC Specrating. This way, your vehicle willcontinue to have tires that aredesigned to give the sameperformance and vehicle safety,during normal use, as theoriginal tires.


GM’s exclusive TPC Specsystem considers over a dozencritical specifications thatimpact the overall performanceof your vehicle, includingbrake system performance, rideand handling, traction control,and tire pressure monitoringperformance. GM’s TPC Specnumber is molded onto the tire’ssidewall near the tire size. Ifthe tires have an all-seasontread design, the TPC Specnumber will be followed by anMS for mud and snow. See TireSidewall Labeling on page 5-38for additional information.

GM recommends replacing tiresin sets of four. This is becauseuniform tread depth on all tireswill help keep your vehicleperforming most like it did whenthe tires were new. Replacingless than a full set of tires canaffect the braking and handlingperformance of your vehicle.

See Tire Inspection and Rotationon page 5-49 for information onproper tire rotation.

{ CAUTION

Mixing tires could cause youto lose control while driving. Ifyou mix tires of different sizes,brands, or types (radial andbias-belted tires), the vehiclemay not handle properly, andyou could have a crash. Usingtires of different sizes, brands,or types may also causedamage to your vehicle. Besure to use the correct size,brand, and type of tires on allwheels. It is all right to drivewith your compact sparetemporarily, as it wasdeveloped for use on yourvehicle. See Compact SpareTire on page 5-79.

{ CAUTION

If you use bias-ply tires on thevehicle, the wheel rim flangescould develop cracks aftermany miles of driving. A tireand/or wheel could failsuddenly, causing a crash.Use only radial-ply tires withthe wheels on the vehicle.

If you must replace your vehicle’stires with those that do not have aTPC Spec number, make surethey are the same size, loadrange, speed rating, andconstruction type (radial andbias-belted tires) as yourvehicle’s original tires.


Vehicles that have a tire pressuremonitoring system could give aninaccurate low-pressure warningif non-TPC Spec rated tires areinstalled on your vehicle.Non-TPC Spec rated tires maygive a low-pressure warning thatis higher or lower than the properwarning level you would get withTPC Spec rated tires. See TirePressure Monitor System onpage 5-44.

Your vehicle’s original equipmenttires are listed on the Tire andLoading Information Label.See Loading the Vehicleon page 4-16, for moreinformation about the Tire andLoading Information Labeland its location on your vehicle.

Different Size Tires andWheelsIf you add wheels or tires that are adifferent size than your originalequipment wheels and tires, thiscould affect the way your vehicleperforms, including its braking, rideand handling characteristics,stability, and resistance to rollover.Additionally, if your vehicle haselectronic systems such as anti-lockbrakes, rollover airbags, tractioncontrol, and electronic stabilitycontrol, the performance of thesesystems can be affected.

{ CAUTION

If you add different sizedwheels, your vehicle may notprovide an acceptable level ofperformance and safety if tires notrecommended for those wheelsare selected. You may increasethe chance that you will crash andsuffer serious injury. Only use GMspecific wheel and tire systemsdeveloped for your vehicle, andhave them properly installed by aGM certified technician.

See Buying New Tires on page 5-51and Accessories and Modificationson page 5-3 for additionalinformation.


Uniform Tire QualityGradingQuality grades can be foundwhere applicable on thetire sidewall between treadshoulder and maximum sectionwidth. For example:

Treadwear 200 Traction AATemperature A

The following information relatesto the system developed by theUnited States National HighwayTraffic Safety Administration(NHTSA), which grades tires bytreadwear, traction, andtemperature performance. Thisapplies only to vehicles sold inthe United States. The gradesare molded on the sidewalls ofmost passenger car tires. TheUniform Tire Quality Grading(UTQG) system does not apply todeep tread, winter-type snowtires, space-saver, or temporaryuse spare tires, tires with nominal

rim diameters of 10 to 12 inches(25 to 30 cm), or to somelimited-production tires.

While the tires available onGeneral Motors passenger carsand light trucks may varywith respect to these grades,they must also conform tofederal safety requirements andadditional General MotorsTire Performance Criteria (TPC)standards.

Treadwear

The treadwear grade is acomparative rating based on thewear rate of the tire when testedunder controlled conditions on aspecified government testcourse. For example, a tiregraded 150 would wear one anda half (1.5) times as well on thegovernment course as a tiregraded 100. The relativeperformance of tires dependsupon the actual conditions oftheir use, however, and maydepart significantly from the norm

due to variations in driving habits,service practices, and differencesin road characteristics andclimate.

Traction – AA, A, B, C

The traction grades, from highestto lowest, are AA, A, B, and C.Those grades represent the tire’sability to stop on wet pavementas measured under controlledconditions on specifiedgovernment test surfaces ofasphalt and concrete. A tiremarked C may have poor tractionperformance.

Temperature – A, B, C

The temperature grades are A(the highest), B, and C,representing the tire’s resistanceto the generation of heat andits ability to dissipate heat whentested under controlledconditions on a specified indoorlaboratory test wheel. Sustainedhigh temperature can causethe material of the tire to


degenerate and reduce tire life,and excessive temperaturecan lead to sudden tire failure.The grade C corresponds toa level of performance which allpassenger car tires mustmeet under the Federal MotorVehicle Safety StandardNo. 109. Grades B and Arepresent higher levels ofperformance on the laboratorytest wheel than the minimumrequired by law. It shouldbe noted that the temperaturegrade for this tire is establishedfor a tire that is properlyinflated and not overloaded.Excessive speed, underinflation,or excessive loading, eitherseparately or in combination, cancause heat buildup andpossible tire failure.

Wheel Alignment andTire BalanceThe tires and wheels on yourvehicle were aligned and balancedcarefully at the factory to giveyou the longest tire life and bestoverall performance. Adjustments towheel alignment and tire balancingwill not be necessary on a regularbasis. However, if you noticeunusual tire wear or your vehiclepulling to one side or the other, thealignment might need to bechecked. If you notice your vehiclevibrating when driving on asmooth road, the tires and wheelsmight need to be rebalanced.See your dealer/retailer for properdiagnosis.

Wheel ReplacementReplace any wheel that is bent,cracked, or badly rusted orcorroded. If wheel nuts keep comingloose, the wheel, wheel bolts, andwheel nuts should be replaced. If thewheel leaks air, replace it (exceptsome aluminum wheels, whichcan sometimes be repaired). Seeyour dealer/retailer if any ofthese conditions exist.

Your dealer/retailer will know thekind of wheel you need.

Each new wheel should have thesame load-carrying capacity,diameter, width, offset, and bemounted the same way as the oneit replaces.


If you need to replace any of yourwheels, wheel bolts, wheel nuts,or Tire Pressure Monitor System(TPMS) sensors, replace them onlywith new GM original equipmentparts. This way, you will be sure tohave the right wheel, wheelbolts, wheel nuts, and TPMSsensors for your vehicle.

{ CAUTION

Using the wrong replacementwheels, wheel bolts, or wheel nutson your vehicle can bedangerous. It could affect thebraking and handling of yourvehicle, make your tires lose airand make you lose control. Youcould have a collision in whichyou or others could be injured.Always use the correct wheel,wheel bolts, and wheel nuts forreplacement.

Notice: The wrong wheel canalso cause problems with bearinglife, brake cooling, speedometeror odometer calibration,headlamp aim, bumper height,vehicle ground clearance, and tireor tire chain clearance to thebody and chassis.

See Changing a Flat Tire onpage 5-67 for more information.

Used Replacement Wheels

{ CAUTION

Putting a used wheel on thevehicle is dangerous. You cannotknow how it has been used orhow far it has been driven. Itcould fail suddenly and cause acrash. If you have to replace awheel, use a new GM originalequipment wheel.


Tire Chains

{ CAUTION

Do not use tire chains. There isnot enough clearance. Tire chainsused on a vehicle without theproper amount of clearance cancause damage to the brakes,suspension or other vehicle parts.The area damaged by the tirechains could cause you to losecontrol of the vehicle and you orothers may be injured in a crash.

(Continued)

CAUTION (Continued)

Use another type of tractiondevice only if its manufacturerrecommends it for use on thevehicle and tire size combinationand road conditions. Follow thatmanufacturer’s instructions. Tohelp avoid damage to the vehicle,drive slowly, readjust or removethe device if it is contacting thevehicle, and do not spin thevehicle’s wheels. If you do findtraction devices that will fit, installthem on the front tires.

If a Tire Goes FlatIt is unusual for a tire to blowoutwhile you are driving, especially ifyou maintain the tires properly. SeeTires on page 5-37. If air goesout of a tire, It is much more likelyto leak out slowly. But if youshould ever have a blowout, hereare a few tips about what to expectand what to do:

If a front tire fails, the flat tire willcreate a drag that pulls the vehicletoward that side. Take your footoff the accelerator pedal and grip thesteering wheel firmly. Steer tomaintain lane position, and thengently brake to a stop well out of thetraffic lane.


A rear blowout, particularly on acurve, acts much like a skidand may require the same correctionyou would use in a skid. In anyrear blowout, remove your foot fromthe accelerator pedal. Get thevehicle under control by steering theway you want the vehicle to go. Itmay be very bumpy and noisy,but you can still steer. Gently braketo a stop, well off the road ifpossible.

If a tire goes flat, avoid further tireand wheel damage by driving slowlyto a level place and stopping.

1. Turn on the hazard warningflashers. See Hazard WarningFlashers on page 3-5.

2. Park the vehicle. Set the parkingbrake firmly and put the shiftlever in P (Park).

3. Turn off the engine.

4. Inspect the flat tire.

{ CAUTION

Lifting a vehicle and getting underit to do maintenance or repairs isdangerous without the appropriatesafety equipment and training. If ajack is provided with the vehicle, itis designed only for changing aflat tire. If it is used for anythingelse, you or others could be badlyinjured or killed if the vehicle slipsoff the jack. If a jack is providedwith the vehicle, only use it forchanging a flat tire.

This vehicle may come with a jackand spare tire or a tire sealantand compressor kit. To use the jackand spare tire, see Changing aFlat Tire on page 5-67. To use thetire sealant and compressor kit,see Tire Sealant and CompressorKit on page 5-59.


Tire Sealant andCompressor Kit

{ CAUTION

Idling a vehicle in an enclosedarea with poor ventilation isdangerous. Engine exhaust mayenter the vehicle. Engine exhaustcontains Carbon Monoxide (CO)which cannot be seen or smelled.It can cause unconsciousnessand even death. Never run theengine in an enclosed area thathas no fresh air ventilation. Formore information, see EngineExhaust on page 2-30.

{ CAUTION

Over-inflating a tire could causethe tire to rupture and you orothers could be injured. Be sureto read and follow the tire sealantand compressor kit instructionsand inflate the tire to itsrecommended pressure. Do notexceed the recommendedpressure.

{ CAUTION

Storing the tire sealant andcompressor kit or other equipmentin the passenger compartment ofthe vehicle could cause injury. Ina sudden stop or collision, looseequipment could strike someone.Store the tire sealant andcompressor kit in its originallocation.

If this vehicle has a tire sealant andcompressor kit, there may not be aspare tire, tire changing equipment,and on some vehicles there may notbe a place to store a tire.

The tire sealant and compressorcan be used to temporarilyseal punctures up to 1⁄4 inch (6 mm)in the tread area of the tire. It canalso be used to inflate an underinflated tire.

If the tire has been separated fromthe wheel, has damaged sidewalls,or has a large puncture, the tireis too severely damaged for the tiresealant and compressor kit to beeffective. See Roadside AssistanceProgram on page 7-6.

Read and follow all of the tiresealant and compressor kitinstructions.


This vehicle may have one of thefollowing tire sealant andcompressor kits. The kit includes:

A. Selector Switch (Sealant/Air orAir Only)

B. On/Off ButtonC. Pressure GageD. Pressure Deflation Button

(If equipped)E. Tire Sealant CanisterF. Sealant/Air Hose (Clear)G. Air Only Hose (Black)H. Power Plug

Tire SealantRead and follow the safe handlinginstructions on the label adheredto the sealant canister.

Check the tire sealant expirationdate on the sealant canister.The sealant canister should bereplaced before its expiration date.Replacement sealant canistersare available at your localdealer/retailer. See “Removal andInstallation of the Sealant Canister”following.

There is only enough sealant to sealone tire. After usage, the sealantcanister and sealant/air hoseassembly must be replaced. See“Removal and Installation ofthe Sealant Canister” following.


Using the Tire Sealant andCompressor Kit toTemporarily Seal and Inflate aPunctured TireFollow the directions closely forcorrect sealant usage.

When using the tire sealant andcompressor kit during coldtemperatures, warm the kit in aheated environment for 5 minutes.This will help to inflate the tire faster.

Always do a safety check first.See If a Tire Goes Flat onpage 5-57. Do not remove anyobjects that have penetrated the tire.

1. Remove the tire sealant andcompressor kit from its storagelocation. See Tire Sealantand Compressor Kit Storage onpage 5-66.


2. Unwrap the sealant/air hose (F)and the power plug (H).

3. Place the kit on the ground.Make sure the tire valvestem is positioned close to theground so the hose will reach it.

4. Remove the valve stem cap fromthe flat tire by turning itcounterclockwise.

5. Attach the sealant/air hose (F)onto the tire valve stem. Turnit clockwise until it is tight.

6. Plug the power plug (H) into theaccessory power outlet in thevehicle. Unplug all itemsfrom other accessory poweroutlets. See Accessory PowerOutlet(s) on page 3-18.If the vehicle has an accessorypower outlet, do not use thecigarette lighter.If the vehicle only has a cigarettelighter, use the cigarette lighter.Do not pinch the power plugcord in the door or window.

7. Start the vehicle. The vehiclemust be running while usingthe air compressor.

8. Turn the selector switch (A)counterclockwise to the Sealant +Air position.

9. Press the on/off (B) button toturn the tire sealant andcompressor kit on.The compressor will injectsealant and air into the tire.The pressure gage (C) will initiallyshow a high pressure while thecompressor pushes the sealantinto the tire. Once the sealant iscompletely dispersed into the tire,the pressure will quickly drop andstart to rise again as the tireinflates with air only.

10. Inflate the tire to therecommended inflation pressureusing the pressure gage (C).The recommended inflationpressure can be found on theTire and Loading Informationlabel. See Inflation - TirePressure on page 5-43.The pressure gage (C) mayread higher than the actual tirepressure while the compressoris on. Turn the compressoroff to get an accurate pressurereading. The compressormay be turned on/off until thecorrect pressure is reached.

Notice: If the recommendedpressure cannot be reached afterapproximately 25 minutes, thevehicle should not be drivenfarther. The tire is too severelydamaged and the tire sealant andcompressor kit cannot inflate thetire. Remove the power plug fromthe accessory power outlet andunscrew the inflating hose fromthe tire valve. See RoadsideAssistance Program on page 7-6.


11. Press the on/off button (B) toturn the tire sealant andcompressor kit off.The tire is not sealed and willcontinue to leak air untilthe vehicle is driven and thesealant is distributed in the tire,therefore, Steps 12 through18 must be done immediatelyafter Step 11.Be careful while handling thetire sealant and compressor kitas it could be warm afterusage.

12. Unplug the power plug (H) fromthe accessory power outlet inthe vehicle.

13. Turn the sealant/air hose (F)counterclockwise to remove itfrom the tire valve stem.

14. Replace the tire valvestem cap.

15. Replace the sealant/air hose (F),and the power plug (H) back intheir original location.

16. If the flat tire was able to inflateto the recommended inflationpressure, remove the maximumspeed label from the sealantcanister (E) and place itin a highly visible location. Thelabel is a reminder not toexceed 55 mph (90 km/h) untilthe damaged tire is repairedor replaced.

17. Return the equipment to itsoriginal storage location inthe vehicle.

18. Immediately drive the vehicle5 miles (8 km) to distribute thesealant in the tire.

19. Stop at a safe location andcheck the tire pressure.Refer to Steps 1 through 11under “Using the Tire Sealantand Compressor Kit withoutSealant to Inflate a Tire(Not Punctured).”If the tire pressure has fallenmore than 10 psi (68 kPa) belowthe recommended inflationpressure, stop driving thevehicle. The tire is too severelydamaged and the tire sealantcannot seal the tire. SeeRoadside Assistance Programon page 7-6.If the tire pressure has notdropped more than 10 psi(68 kPa) from the recommendedinflation pressure, inflate thetire to the recommendedinflation pressure.

20. Wipe off any sealant from thewheel, tire, and vehicle.


21. Dispose of the used sealantcanister (E) and sealant/airhose (F) assembly at alocal dealer/retailer or inaccordance with local statecodes and practices.

22. Replace it with a new canisteravailable from yourdealer/retailer.

23. After temporarily sealing a tireusing the tire sealant andcompressor kit, take the vehicleto an authorized dealer/retailerwithin a 100 miles (161 km)of driving to have the tirerepaired or replaced.

Using the Tire Sealant andCompressor Kit withoutSealant to Inflate a Tire (NotPunctured)To use the air compressor to inflatea tire with air only and not sealant:

Always do a safety check first. SeeIf a Tire Goes Flat on page 5-57.

1. Remove the tire sealant andcompressor kit from its storagelocation. See Tire Sealantand Compressor Kit Storage onpage 5-66.

2. Unwrap the air only hose (G)and the power plug (H).

3. Place the kit on the ground.Make sure the tire valvestem is positioned close to theground so the hose will reach it.


4. Remove the tire valve stem capfrom the flat tire by turning itcounterclockwise.

5. Attach the air only hose (G) ontothe tire valve stem by turning itclockwise until it is tight.

6. Plug the power plug (H) into theaccessory power outlet in thevehicle. Unplug all itemsfrom other accessory poweroutlets. See Accessory PowerOutlet(s) on page 3-18.If the vehicle has an accessorypower outlet, do not use thecigarette lighter.If the vehicle only has a cigarettelighter, use the cigarette lighter.Do not pinch the power plugcord in the door or window.

7. Start the vehicle. The vehiclemust be running while usingthe air compressor.

8. Turn the selector switch (A)clockwise to the Air Only position.

9. Press the on/off (B) button toturn the compressor on.The compressor will inflate thetire with air only.

10. Inflate the tire to therecommended inflation pressureusing the pressure gage (C).The recommended inflationpressure can be found on theTire and Loading Informationlabel. See Inflation - TirePressure on page 5-43.The pressure gage (C) mayread higher than the actual tirepressure while the compressoris on. Turn the compressoroff to get an accurate reading.The compressor may beturned on/off until the correctpressure is reached.If you inflate the tire higher thanthe recommended pressureyou can adjust the excesspressure by pressing thepressure deflation button (D), ifequipped, until the properpressure reading is reached.

This option is only functionalwhen using the air onlyhose (G).

11. Press the on/off button (B) toturn the tire sealant andcompressor kit off.Be careful while handling thetire sealant and compressor kitas it could be warm afterusage.

12. Unplug the power plug (H) fromthe accessory power outlet inthe vehicle.

13. Disconnect the air only hose (G)from the tire valve stem, byturning it counterclockwise, andreplace the tire valve stem cap.

14. Replace the air only hose (G)and the power plug (H) andcord back in its original location.

15. Place the equipment inthe original storage location inthe vehicle.


The tire sealant and compressor kithas an accessory adapter locatedin a compartment on the bottomof its housing that may be used toinflate air mattresses, balls, etc.

Removal and Installation ofthe Sealant CanisterTo remove the sealant canister:

1. Unwrap the sealant hose.

2. Press the canister release button.

3. Pull up and remove the canister.

4. Replace with a new canisterwhich is available from yourdealer/retailer.

5. Push the new canister into place.

Tire Sealant andCompressor Kit StorageThe tire sealant and compressorkit is located in the storagecompartment on the driver side, atthe rear of the vehicle.

1. Press down on the latch tab andpull the cover off to access thestorage compartment.

2. Press the two tabs on the quickrelease buckle to release thetire sealant and compressor kitstrap.

3. Remove the sealant andcompressor kit from its tray.

To store the tire sealant andcompressor kit, reverse the steps.


Changing a Flat TireIf a tire goes flat, avoid further tireand wheel damage by driving slowlyto a level place. Turn on thehazard warning flashers. SeeHazard Warning Flashers onpage 3-5.

{ CAUTION

Changing a tire can be dangerous.The vehicle can slip off the jackand roll over or fall on you or otherpeople. You and they could bebadly injured or even killed. Find alevel place to change your tire. Tohelp prevent the vehicle frommoving:

1. Set the parking brake firmly.

2. Put the shift lever inP (Park).

(Continued)

CAUTION (Continued)

3. Turn off the engine and donot restart while the vehicleis raised.

4. Do not allow passengers toremain in the vehicle.

To be even more certain thevehicle will not move, you shouldput blocks at the front and rear ofthe tire farthest away from theone being changed. That wouldbe the tire, on the other side, atthe opposite end of the vehicle.

When the vehicle has a flat tire (B),use the following example as aguide to assist you in the placementof wheel blocks (A).

A. Wheel BlockB. Flat Tire

The following information explainshow to use the jack and changea tire.


Removing the Spare Tireand ToolsThe tools needed to remove thespare tire are located in the storagecompartment on the driver side, atthe rear of the vehicle.1. Open the jack storage

compartment by pulling on thelatch tab, located toward the rearof the vehicle, and pulling thecover off.

A. Tool BagB. Wing BoltC. Jack

2. Remove the wing bolt (B) byturning it counterclockwise

3. Push the jack (C) up out of theholding bracket.

4. Turn the jack on its side, with thebottom facing toward you.

5. Pull the jack straight out, bottomfirst.

The tools you will be using includethe jack (A) and lug wrench (B).


Removing the Spare TireThe compact spare tire is locatedunder the vehicle, in front of the rearbumper. See Compact Spare Tire onpage 5-79 for more information aboutthe compact spare.

A. Rear Convenience CenterB. Lug WrenchC. Storage Compartment Cap HoleD. Hoist ShaftE. Compact Spare TireF. RetainerG. Hoist Shaft Assembly

1. Open the storage compartmentdoor of the convenience centerthat is nearest the liftgateand remove the cap on thebottom of the storagecompartment.

2. Open the carpet cutout that islocated through the hole of thestorage compartment.

3. Attach the lug wrench into thehoist shaft.

4. Turn the lug wrenchcounterclockwise to lower thespare tire to the ground. Continueturning the wrench until thespare tire can be pulled out fromunder the vehicle.

5. Tilt the retainer and slip itthrough the wheel openingto remove the spare tire from thecable.

6. Turn the wrench clockwise toraise the cable back up afterremoving the spare tire.Do not store a full-size or a flatroad tire under the vehicle.See Storing a Flat or Spare Tireand Tools on page 5-76.

To continue changing the flat tire,see Removing the Flat Tire andInstalling the Spare Tire onpage 5-70.


If the spare tire will not lower, thesecondary latch could be engaged.

Do the following to check thecable:

1. Check under the vehicle to see ifthe cable is visible.

2. If it is not visible, see SecondaryLatch System on page 5-74.If it is visible, first try to tightenthe cable by turning the lugwrench clockwise until you heartwo clicks or feel it skip twice.You cannot over-tighten thecable.

3. Loosen the cable by turning thewrench counterclockwise threeor four turns.

4. If the spare tire has not lowered,tighten the cable all the way andthen loosen it at least twotimes.If the spare tire did lower to theground, continue with Step 5under “Removing the Spare Tire(Vehicles with the RearConvenience Center)” listedpreviously.

5. If you still cannot lower the sparetire to the ground, see SecondaryLatch System on page 5-74.

Removing the Flat Tireand Installing theSpare Tire1. Do a safety check before

proceeding. See Changing a FlatTire on page 5-67 for moreinformation.

2. If the vehicle has a wheel cover,loosen the plastic nut caps withthe wheel wrench. They willnot come off. Then, using the flatend of the wheel wrench, pryalong the edge of the cover untilit comes off. Be careful; theedges may be sharp. Do not tryto remove the cover with yourbare hands.Store the wheel cover securelyin the rear of the vehicle until youhave the flat tire repaired orreplaced.If the vehicle has aluminumwheels, remove the wheel nutcaps using the wheel wrench.


3. Loosen the wheel nuts — but donot remove them — using thelug wrench. For wheels witha wheel lock key, use the wheellock key between the lock nutand lug wrench. The key issupplied in the front passengerdoor pocket.

Notice: If this vehicle has wheellocks and an impact wrench isused to remove the wheel nuts,the lock nut or wheel lock keycould be damaged. Do not use animpact wrench to remove thewheel nuts if this vehicle haswheel locks.

4. To identify the appropriatejacking location, find thetriangle (A) about 12 inches (30.5cm) from the front tire or (B)about 10.5 inches (27 cm) fromthe rear tire.The triangle is located near eachwheel on the vehicle’s exterior.

Notice: If a jack is used to raisethe vehicle without positioning itcorrectly, the vehicle could bedamaged. When raising thevehicle on a jack, avoid contactwith the rear axle control arms.

5. Do not raise the vehicle yet. Putthe compact spare tire near you.

{ CAUTION

Getting under a vehicle when it isjacked up is dangerous. If thevehicle slips off the jack, youcould be badly injured or killed.Never get under a vehicle when itis supported only by a jack.

{ CAUTION

Raising your vehicle with the jackimproperly positioned can damagethe vehicle and even make thevehicle fall. To help avoidpersonal injury and vehicledamage, be sure to fit the jack lifthead into the proper locationbefore raising the vehicle.

6. Attach the lug wrench to thejack, and turn the wrenchclockwise to raise the jack head3 inches (7.6 cm).


7. Place the jack under the vehicleas identified in Step 3. Raise thevehicle by turning the lugwrench clockwise in the jack.Raise the vehicle far enough offthe ground so that there isenough room for the spare tire tofit under the wheel well.

8. Remove all the wheel nuts andthe flat tire.

9. Remove the plastic spare tireheat shield by pulling therubber latch. Store the plasticspare tire heat shield. SeeStoring a Flat or Spare Tire andTools on page 5-76 for moreinformation.

{ CAUTION

Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on theparts to which it is fastened, canmake wheel nuts become looseafter time. The wheel could comeoff and cause an accident. Whenchanging a wheel, remove anyrust or dirt from places where thewheel attaches to the vehicle. Inan emergency, use a cloth or apaper towel to do this; but be sureto use a scraper or wire brushlater, if needed, to get all the rustor dirt off. See Changing a FlatTire on page 5-67.

{ CAUTION

Never use oil or grease on boltsor nuts because the nuts mightcome loose. The vehicle’s wheelcould fall off, causing a crash.


10. Remove any rust or dirt fromthe wheel bolts, mountingsurfaces, and spare wheel.

11. Place the spare tire on thewheel mounting surface.

12. Put the nuts on by hand byturning the clockwise untilthe wheel is held against themounting surface. Makesure the rounded end is towardthe wheel.

13. Lower the vehicle by attachingthe lug wrench to the jack andturning the wrenchcounterclockwise. Lower thejack completely.

{ CAUTION

Wheel nuts that are improperly orincorrectly tightened can causethe wheels to become loose orcome off. The wheel nuts shouldbe tightened with a torque wrenchto the proper torque specificationafter replacing. Follow the torquespecification supplied by theaftermarket manufacturer whenusing accessory locking wheelnuts. See Capacities andSpecifications on page 5-94 fororiginal equipment wheel nuttorque specifications.

Notice: Improperly tightenedwheel nuts can lead to brakepulsation and rotor damage. Toavoid expensive brake repairs,evenly tighten the wheel nuts inthe proper sequence and tothe proper torque specification.See Capacities and Specificationson page 5-94 for the wheel nuttorque specification.

14. Tighten the wheel nuts firmly ina crisscross sequence, asshown.

Notice: Wheel covers will not fiton your vehicle’s compactspare. If you try to put a wheelcover on the compact spare, thecover or the spare could bedamaged.


Secondary Latch SystemThis vehicle has an underbodymounted tire hoist assembly that hasa secondary latch system. It isdesigned to stop the compact sparetire from suddenly falling off thevehicle if the cable holding the sparetire is damaged. For the secondarylatch to work, the tire must bestowed with the valve stem pointingdown. See Storing a Flat orSpare Tire and Tools on page 5-76for instructions on storing thespare tire correctly.

{ CAUTION

Before beginning this procedureread all the instructions. Failure toread and follow the instructionscould damage the hoist assemblyand you and others could gethurt. Read and follow theinstructions listed next.

To release the spare tire from thesecondary latch:

{ CAUTION

Someone standing too closeduring the procedure could beinjured by the jack. If the sparetire does not slide off the jackcompletely, make sure no one isbehind you or on either side ofyou as you pull the jack out fromunder the spare.

1. If the cable is not visible, startthis procedure at Step 3.

2. Turn the lug wrenchcounterclockwise untilapproximately 6 inches (15 cm)of cable is exposed.

3. Attach the lug wrench to the jackand raise the jack at least10 turns.

4. Place the jack under the vehicle,ahead of the rear bumper.Position the center lift point ofthe jack under the center ofthe spare tire.

All-Wheel-Drive Vehicle shown


5. Turn the lug wrench clockwise toraise the jack until it lifts thesecondary latch spring.

6. Keep raising the jack until thespare tire stops moving upwardand is held firmly in place.This lets you know that thesecondary latch has releasedand the spare tire is balancing onthe jack.

7. Lower the jack by turning the lugwrench counterclockwise. Keeplowering the jack until thespare tire slides off the jack.

8. Disconnect the lug wrench fromthe jack and carefully removethe jack. Use one hand to pushagainst the spare tire whilefirmly pulling the jack out fromunder the spare tire with theother hand.

9. Tilt the retainer and slip it throughthe wheel opening when thespare tire has been completelylowered.

10. Turn the lug wrench clockwiseto raise the cable back up if thecable is hanging.

Have the hoist shaft assemblyinspected as soon as you can. Youwill not be able to store a sparetire using the hoist assembly until ithas been repaired or replaced.


Storing a Flat or SpareTire and ToolsStoring the Spare Tire

{ CAUTION

The underbody-mounted sparetire needs to be stored with thevalve stem pointing down. If thespare tire is stored with the valvestem pointing upwards, thesecondary latch will not workproperly and the spare tire couldloosen and suddenly fall from thevehicle. If this happened when thevehicle was being driven, the tiremight contact a person or anothervehicle, causing injury anddamage to itself. Be sure theunderbody-mounted spare tire isstored with the valve stempointing down.

{ CAUTION

Storing a jack, a tire, or otherequipment in the passengercompartment of the vehicle couldcause injury. In a sudden stop orcollision, loose equipment couldstrike someone. Store all these inthe proper place.

To store the spare tire:

1. Lay the compact spare tire nearthe rear of the vehicle with thevalve stem down.

2. Reinstall the plastic spare tireheat shield on the compactspare tire.

3. Slide the cable retainer throughthe center of the wheel and startto raise the compact spare tire.Make sure the retainer is fullyseated across the underside ofthe wheel.

4. When the compact spare tire isalmost in the stored position,turn the tire so the valve istoward the rear of the vehicle.This position helps whenchecking the air pressure in thecompact spare tire.

5. Raise the tire fully against theunderside of the vehicle. Continueturning the lug wrench until youfeel more than two clicks. Thisindicates that the compact sparetire is secure and the cable istight. The spare tire hoist cannotbe overtightened.


6. Make sure the tire is storedsecurely. Push, pull (A), and thentry to turn (B) the tire. If thetire moves, use the lug wrench totighten the cable.

Storing the Flat Tire1. Remove the cable package from

the jack storage area.

2. Remove the small center cap bytapping the back of the cap withthe extension of the shaft, if thevehicle has aluminum wheels.

3. Put the flat tire in the rear storagearea with the valve stem pointingtoward the rear of the vehicle.

4. Pull the cable (A) through thedoor striker (E), the center ofthe wheel (D), and the plasticspare tire heat shield (C),as shown.

5. Hook the cable onto the outsideportion of the liftgate hinges (B).

6. Hook the other end of the cableonto the outside portion of theliftgate hinge (A).

7. Pull on the cable to make sure itis secure.


8. Make sure the metal tube iscentered at the striker. Pushthe tube toward the front of thevehicle.

9. Close the liftgate and make sureit is latched properly.

Storing the Tools

A. Tool BagB. Wing BoltC. Jack

Put back all tools as they werestored in the jack storagecompartment and put thecompartment cover back on.

1. Ensure that the bottom of thejack is facing toward you.

2. Turn the jack (C) on its side andplace down on the holdingbracket.

3. Reinstall the wing bolt (B) byturning clockwise.

4. To replace the cover, line up thetab at the front of the cover withthe notch in the cover opening.Push the cover in place andmake sure that the rear clips arein the slots and push thecover closed.

Store the center cap or the plasticbolt-on wheel covers until a fullsize tire is put back on the vehicle.When you replace the compactspare with a full-size tire, reinstallthe bolt-on wheel covers or thecenter cap. Hand-tighten them overthe wheel nuts, using the lugwrench.


Compact Spare Tire

{ CAUTION

Driving with more than onecompact spare tire at a time couldresult in loss of braking andhandling. This could lead to acrash and you or others could beinjured. Use only one compactspare tire at a time.

The compact spare tire, if thevehicle has one, was fully inflatedwhen the vehicle was new, however,it can lose air after a time. Checkthe inflation pressure regularly.It should be 60 psi (420 kPa).

After installing the compact spare onthe vehicle, stop as soon as possibleand make sure the spare tire iscorrectly inflated. The compact spareis made to perform well at speeds upto 65 mph (105 km/h) for distancesup to 3,000 miles (5 000 km), so youcan finish your trip and have thefull-size tire repaired or replaced atyour convenience. Of course, it isbest to replace the spare with afull-size tire as soon as possible. Thespare tire will last longer and be ingood shape in case it is neededagain.

Notice: When the compact spareis installed, do not take the vehiclethrough an automatic car washwith guide rails. The compactspare can get caught on the railswhich can damage the tire, wheeland other parts of the vehicle.

Do not use the compact spare onother vehicles.

And do not mix the compact sparetire or wheel with other wheelsor tires. They will not fit. Keep thespare tire and its wheel together.

The All-Wheel Drive (AWD) systemwill be automatically disabledwhen you use the compact spare.To restore the AWD and preventexcessive wear on the clutch in yourAWD, replace the compact sparetire with a full-size tire as soonas possible.

Notice: Tire chains will not fitthe compact spare. Usingthem can damage the vehicle andcan damage the chains too. Donot use tire chains on thecompact spare.


Appearance Care

Interior CleaningThe vehicle’s interior will continue tolook its best if it is cleaned often.Although not always visible,dust and dirt can accumulate on theupholstery. Dirt can damagecarpet, fabric, leather, and plasticsurfaces. Regular vacuumingis recommended to remove particlesfrom the upholstery. It is importantto keep the upholstery frombecoming and remaining heavilysoiled. Soils should be removed asquickly as possible. The vehicle’sinterior may experience extremes ofheat that could cause stains toset rapidly.

Lighter colored interiors mayrequire more frequent cleaning.Use care because newspapers andgarments that transfer color to homefurnishings may also transfer color tothe vehicle’s interior.

When cleaning the vehicle’s interior,only use cleaners specificallydesigned for the surfaces beingcleaned. Permanent damage mayresult from using cleaners onsurfaces for which they were notintended. Use glass cleaner only onglass. Remove any accidentalover-spray from other surfacesimmediately. To prevent over-spray,apply cleaner directly to thecleaning cloth.

Notice: Using abrasive cleanerswhen cleaning glass surfaces onthe vehicle, could scratch theglass and/or cause damage to therear window defogger. Whencleaning the glass on the vehicle,use only a soft cloth and glasscleaner.

Many cleaners contain solvents thatmay become concentrated in thevehicle’s breathing space. Beforeusing cleaners, read and adhere toall safety instructions on the label.While cleaning the vehicle’s interior,maintain adequate ventilation byopening the vehicle’s doors andwindows.

Dust may be removed from smallbuttons and knobs using a smallbrush with soft bristles.

Products that remove odors fromthe vehicle’s upholstery andclean the vehicle’s glass can beobtained from your dealer/retailer.

Do not clean the vehicle using:

• A knife or any other sharp objectto remove a soil from any interiorsurface.

• A stiff brush. It can causedamage to the vehicle’s interiorsurfaces.


• Heavy pressure or aggressiverubbing with a cleaning cloth.Use of heavy pressure candamage the interior and does notimprove the effectiveness ofsoil removal.

• Laundry detergents ordishwashing soaps withdegreasers can leave residuethat streaks and attracts dirt. Forliquid cleaners, about 20 dropsper gallon (3.78 L) of wateris a good guide. Use only mild,neutral-pH soaps.

• Too much cleaner that saturatesthe upholstery.

• Organic solvents such as naptha,alcohol, etc. that can damage thevehicle’s interior.

Fabric/CarpetUse a vacuum cleaner with a softbrush attachment frequently toremove dust and loose dirt.A canister vacuum with a beater barin the nozzle may only be usedon floor carpet and carpeted floormats. For any soil, always tryto remove it first with plain water orclub soda. Before cleaning,gently remove as much of the soilas possible using one of thefollowing techniques:

• For liquids: gently blot theremaining soil with a paper towel.Allow the soil to absorb into thepaper towel until no more can beremoved.

• For solid dry soils: remove asmuch as possible and thenvacuum.

To clean:

1. Saturate a lint-free, clean whitecloth with water or club soda.

2. Wring the cloth to remove excessmoisture.

3. Start on the outside edge of thesoil and gently rub toward thecenter. Continue cleaning, usinga clean area of the cloth eachtime it becomes soiled.

4. Continue to gently rub the soiledarea until the cleaning clothremains clean.

5. If the soil is not completelyremoved, use a mild soapsolution and repeat the cleaningprocess that was used withplain water.

If any of the soil remains, acommercial fabric cleaner or spotlifter may be necessary. Whena commercial upholstery cleaner orspot lifter is to be used, test asmall hidden area for colorfastnessfirst. If the locally cleaned areagives any impression that aring formation may result, clean theentire surface.

After the cleaning process has beencompleted, a paper towel can beused to blot excess moisturefrom the fabric or carpet.


LeatherA soft cloth dampened with watercan be used to remove dust. If amore thorough cleaning isnecessary, a soft cloth dampenedwith a mild soap solution can beused. Allow the leather to drynaturally. Do not use heat to dry.Never use steam to clean leather.Never use spot lifters or spotremovers on leather. Manycommercial leather cleaners andcoatings that are sold to preserveand protect leather may permanentlychange the appearance and feel ofthe leather and are notrecommended. Do not use siliconeor wax-based products, or thosecontaining organic solvents to cleanthe vehicle’s interior because theycan alter the appearance byincreasing the gloss in a non-uniformmanner. Never use shoe polish onleather.

Instrument Panel, Vinyl,and Other PlasticSurfacesA soft cloth dampened with watermay be used to remove dust.If a more thorough cleaning isnecessary, a clean soft clothdampened with a mild soap solutioncan be used to gently removedust and dirt. Never use spot liftersor removers on plastic surfaces.Many commercial cleanersand coatings that are sold topreserve and protect soft plasticsurfaces may permanently changethe appearance and feel of theinterior and are not recommended.Do not use silicone or wax-basedproducts, or those containingorganic solvents to clean thevehicle’s interior because they canalter the appearance by increasingthe gloss in a non-uniform manner.

Some commercial products mayincrease gloss on the instrumentpanel. The increase in glossmay cause annoying reflections inthe windshield and even makeit difficult to see through thewindshield under certain conditions.

Care of Safety BeltsKeep belts clean and dry.

{ CAUTION

Do not bleach or dye safety belts.It may severely weaken them. Ina crash, they might not be able toprovide adequate protection.Clean safety belts only with mildsoap and lukewarm water.


WeatherstripsSilicone grease on weatherstrips willmake them last longer, seal better,and not stick or squeak. Applysilicone grease with a clean cloth.During very cold, damp weatherfrequent application may be required.See Recommended Fluids andLubricants on page 6-11.

Washing Your VehicleThe best way to preserve thevehicle’s finish is to keep it clean bywashing it often.

Notice: Certain cleaners containchemicals that can damagethe emblems or nameplates onthe vehicle. Check the cleaningproduct label. If it states thatit should not be used on plasticparts, do not use it on the vehicleor damage may occur and itwould not be covered bythe warranty.

Do not wash the vehicle in directsunlight. Use a car washingsoap. Do not use cleaning agentsthat are petroleum based orthat contain acid or abrasives, asthey can damage the paint, metal orplastic on the vehicle. Approvedcleaning products can be obtainedfrom your dealer/retailer. Followall manufacturers’ directionsregarding correct product usage,necessary safety precautionsand appropriate disposal of anyvehicle care product.

Rinse the vehicle well, beforewashing and after to remove allcleaning agents completely. If theyare allowed to dry on the surface,they could stain.

Dry the finish with a soft, cleanchamois or an all-cotton towel toavoid surface scratches andwater spotting.

High pressure car washes maycause water to enter the vehicle.Avoid using high pressure washescloser than 12 inches (30 cm) to thesurface of the vehicle. Use of powerwashers exceeding 1,200 psi(8 274 kPa) can result in damage orremoval of paint and decals.

Cleaning ExteriorLamps/LensesUse only lukewarm or cold water, asoft cloth and a car washingsoap to clean exterior lamps andlenses. Follow instructionsunder Washing Your Vehicle onpage 5-83.


Finish CareOccasional waxing or mild polishingof the vehicle by hand may benecessary to remove residue fromthe paint finish. Approved cleaningproducts can be obtained fromyour dealer/retailer.

If the vehicle has abasecoat/clearcoat paint finish, theclearcoat gives more depth andgloss to the colored basecoat.Always use waxes and polishes thatare non-abrasive and made for abasecoat/clearcoat paint finish.

Notice: Machine compounding oraggressive polishing on abasecoat/clearcoat paint finishmay damage it. Use onlynon-abrasive waxes and polishesthat are made for a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish on thevehicle.

Foreign materials such as calciumchloride and other salts, ice meltingagents, road oil and tar, tree sap,bird droppings, chemicals from

industrial chimneys, etc., candamage the vehicle’s finish if theyremain on painted surfaces. Washthe vehicle as soon as possible. Ifnecessary, use non-abrasivecleaners that are marked safe forpainted surfaces to remove foreignmatter.

Exterior painted surfaces aresubject to aging, weather andchemical fallout that can take theirtoll over a period of years. Tohelp keep the paint finish lookingnew, keep the vehicle garagedor covered whenever possible.

Protecting Exterior Bright MetalParts

Bright metal parts should becleaned regularly to keep theirluster. Washing with water is all thatis usually needed. However,chrome polish may be used onchrome or stainless steel trim, ifnecessary.

Use special care with aluminum trim.To avoid damaging protective trim,never use auto or chrome polish,

steam or caustic soap to cleanaluminum. A coating of wax, rubbedto high polish, is recommended for allbright metal parts.

Windshield, Backglass,and Wiper BladesClean the outside of the windshieldand backglass with glass cleaner.

Clean the rubber blades using a lintfree cloth or paper towel soaked withwindshield washer fluid or a milddetergent. Wash the windshieldthoroughly when you clean theblades. Bugs, road grime, sap and abuildup of vehicle wash/waxtreatments may cause wiperstreaking. Replace the wiper bladesif they are worn or damaged.

Wipers can be damaged by:

• Extreme dusty conditions

• Sand and salt

• Heat and sun

• Snow and ice, without properremoval


Aluminum orChrome-Plated Wheelsand TrimThe vehicle may have eitheraluminum or chrome-plated wheels.

Keep the wheels clean using asoft clean cloth with mild soap andwater. Rinse with clean water.After rinsing thoroughly, dry with asoft clean towel. A wax may then beapplied.

Notice: Chrome wheels andother chrome trim may bedamaged if the vehicle is notwashed after driving on roadsthat have been sprayed withmagnesium, calcium or sodiumchloride. These chlorides areused on roads for conditionssuch as ice and dust. Alwayswash the vehicle’s chrome withsoap and water after exposure.

Notice: Using strong soaps,chemicals, abrasive polishes,cleaners, brushes, or cleanersthat contain acid on aluminum or

chrome-plated wheels, coulddamage the surface of thewheel(s). The repairs would notbe covered by the vehiclewarranty. Use only approvedcleaners on aluminum orchrome-plated wheels.

The surface of these wheels issimilar to the painted surface of thevehicle. Do not use strong soaps,chemicals, abrasive polishes,abrasive cleaners, cleaners withacid, or abrasive cleaning brusheson them because they coulddamage the surface. Do not usechrome polish on aluminum wheels.

Notice: Using chrome polishon aluminum wheels coulddamage the wheels. The repairswould not be covered by thevehicle warranty. Use chromepolish on chrome wheels only.

Use chrome polish only onchrome-plated wheels, but avoidany painted surface of the wheel,and buff off immediately afterapplication.

Notice: Driving the vehiclethrough an automatic car washthat has silicone carbide tirecleaning brushes, could damagethe aluminum or chrome-platedwheels. The repairs would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.Never drive a vehicle that hasaluminum or chrome-platedwheels through an automatic carwash that uses silicone carbidetire cleaning brushes.

TiresTo clean the tires, use a stiff brushwith tire cleaner.

Notice: Using petroleum-basedtire dressing products on thevehicle may damage the paintfinish and/or tires. When applyinga tire dressing, always wipe offany overspray from all paintedsurfaces on the vehicle.


Sheet Metal DamageIf the vehicle is damaged andrequires sheet metal repair orreplacement, make sure the bodyrepair shop applies anti-corrosionmaterial to parts repaired orreplaced to restore corrosionprotection.

Original manufacturer replacementparts will provide the corrosionprotection while maintainingthe vehicle warranty.

Finish DamageAny stone chips, fractures or deepscratches in the finish shouldbe repaired right away. Bare metalwill corrode quickly and maydevelop into major repair expense.

Minor chips and scratches can berepaired with touch-up materialsavailable from your dealer/retailer.Larger areas of finish damage can becorrected in your dealer’s/retailer’sbody and paint shop.

Underbody MaintenanceChemicals used for ice andsnow removal and dust control cancollect on the underbody. If theseare not removed, corrosion and rustcan develop on the underbodyparts such as fuel lines, frame, floorpan, and exhaust system eventhough they have corrosionprotection.

At least every spring, flush thesematerials from the underbodywith plain water. Clean any areaswhere mud and debris can collect.Dirt packed in close areas ofthe frame should be loosened beforebeing flushed. Your dealer/retaileror an underbody car washingsystem can do this.

Chemical Paint SpottingSome weather and atmosphericconditions can create a chemicalfallout. Airborne pollutants canfall upon and attack painted surfaceson the vehicle. This damage cantake two forms: blotchy, ring-shapeddiscolorations, and small, irregulardark spots etched into the paintsurface.

Although no defect in the paint jobcauses this, we will repair, at nocharge to the owner, the surfaces ofnew vehicles damaged by thisfallout condition within 12 months or12,000 miles (20 000 km) ofpurchase, whichever occurs first.


Vehicle Identification

Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN)

This is the legal identifier for thevehicle. It appears on a plate in thefront corner of the instrument panel,on the driver side. It can be seenthrough the windshield from outsidethe vehicle. The VIN also appears onthe Vehicle Certification and ServiceParts labels and the certificates oftitle and registration.

Engine IdentificationThe eighth character in the VIN isthe engine code. This codehelps identify the vehicle’s engine,specifications, and replacementparts. See “Engine Specifications”under Capacities and Specificationson page 5-94 for the vehicle’sengine code.

Service PartsIdentification LabelThis label is on the inside of theglove box. It is very helpful if partsneed to be ordered. The labelhas the following information:

• Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN)

• Model designation

• Paint information

• Production options and specialequipment

Do not remove this label from thevehicle.

Electrical System

High Voltage Devices andWiring

{ CAUTION

Exposure to high voltage cancause shock, burns, and evendeath. The high voltage systemsin your vehicle can only beserviced by technicians withspecial training.

High voltage devices are identifiedby labels. Do not remove, open,take apart, or modify thesedevices. High voltage cable orwiring has orange covering. Do notprobe, tamper with, cut, or modifyhigh voltage cable or wiring.


Add-On ElectricalEquipmentNotice: Do not add anythingelectrical to the vehicle unless youcheck with your dealer/retailerfirst. Some electrical equipmentcan damage the vehicle and thedamage would not be covered bythe vehicle’s warranty. Someadd-on electrical equipment cankeep other components fromworking as they should.

Add-on equipment can drain thevehicle’s battery, even if the vehicleis not operating.

The vehicle has an airbag system.Before attempting to add anythingelectrical to the vehicle, seeServicing Your Airbag-EquippedVehicle on page 1-57.

Windshield Wiper FusesThe windshield wiper motor isprotected by a circuit breaker and afuse. If the motor overheats dueto heavy snow or ice, the wiper willstop until the motor cools. If theoverload is caused by someelectrical problem, have it fixed.

Power Windows andOther Power OptionsCircuit breakers in the fuse blockprotect the power windows andother power accessories. When thecurrent load is too heavy, thecircuit breaker opens and closes,protecting the circuit until theproblem is fixed or goes away.

Fuses and CircuitBreakersThe wiring circuits in your vehicleare protected from short circuits by acombination of fuses, circuitbreakers and fusible thermal links.This greatly reduces the chanceof fires caused by electricalproblems.

Look at the silver-colored bandinside the fuse. If the band is brokenor melted, replace the fuse. Besure you replace a bad fuse with anew one of the identical sizeand rating.

Fuses of the same amperage canbe temporarily borrowed fromanother fuse location, if a fuse goesout. Replace the fuse as soon asyou can.


Instrument Panel FuseBlockThe instrument panel fuse block islocated under the instrumentpanel on the passenger side of thevehicle. Pull down on the coverto access the fuse block.

Fuses UsageAIRBAG Airbag

AMP AmplifierBCK/UP/

STOPBack-upLamp/Stoplamp

BCM Body ControlModule

CNSTR/VENT Canister Vent

CTSY CourtesyDR/LCK Door Locks

DRL Daytime RunningLamps

DRL 2GMC HID Only/RearFog Lamps-ChinaOnly

DSPLY Display

FRT/WSW Front WindshieldWasher

HTD/COOLSEAT

Heated/CoolingSeats

HVAC Heating, Ventilationand Air Conditioning

IADV/PWR/LED

InadvertentPower LED

INFOTMNT Infotainment

Fuse Side


Fuses Usage

LT/TRN/SIG Driver Side TurnSignal

MSM Memory SeatModule

PDM Power Mirrors,Liftgate Release

PWRMODE Power Mode

PWR/MIR Power MirrorsRDO Radio

REAR WPR Rear Wiper

RT/TRN/SIG Passenger SideTurn Signal

SPARE SpareSPARE Spare

STR/WHL/ILLUM

Steering WheelIllumination

Relays UsageLT/PWR/

SEATDriver Side PowerSeat Relay

RT/PWR/SEAT

Passenger SidePower Seat Relay

PWR/WNDW

Power WindowsRelay

PWR/COLUMN

Power SteeringColumn Relay

L/GATE Liftgate RelayLCK Power Lock Relay

REAR/WSW Rear WindowWasher Relay

UNLCK Power Unlock Relay

DRL2 Daytime RunningLamps 2 Relay

LT/UNLCK Driver Side UnlockRelay

DRL Daytime RunningLamps Relay

SPARE Spare

FRT/WSW Front WindshieldWasher Relay

Relay Side


Underhood Fuse BlockThe underhood fuse block is locatedin the engine compartment, onthe passenger side of the vehicle.

Lift the cover for access to thefuse/relay block.

Notice: Spilling liquid on anyelectrical components onthe vehicle may damage it.Always keep the covers on anyelectrical component.

To remove fuses, hold the end of the fuse between your thumb and indexfinger and pull straight out.

Fuses UsageA/C

CLUTCHAir ConditioningClutch

ABS MTR Antilock BrakingSystem (ABS) Motor

Fuses Usage

AFS Adaptive ForwardLighting System

AIRBAG Airbag SystemAUX

POWER Auxiliary Power


Fuses UsageAUX VAC

PUMPAuxiliary VacuumPump

AWD All-Wheel-DriveSystem

BATT 1 Battery 1BATT 2 Battery 2BATT 3 Battery 3

ECM Engine ControlModule

ECM 1 Engine ControlModule 1

EMISSION 1 Emission 1EMISSION 2 Emission 2

EVENCOILS Even Injector Coils

FAN 1 Cooling Fan 1FAN 2 Cooling Fan 2

FOG LAMP Fog Lamps

Fuses Usage

FSCM Fuel System ControlModule

HORN Horn

HTD WASH Heated WindshieldWasher Fluid

HTD MIR Heated OutsideRearview Mirror

HVACBLWR

Heating, Ventilationand Air ConditioningBlower

LT HIBEAM

Left High-BeamHeadlamp

LT LOBEAM

Left Low-BeamHeadlamp

LT PRK Left Parking Lamp

LT TRLRSTOP/TRN

Trailer LeftStoplamp and TurnSignal

ODDCOILS Odd Injector Coils

Fuses Usage

PCM IGN Powertrain ControlModule Ignition

PWRL/GATE Power Liftgate

PWROUTLET Power Outlet

REARCAMERA Rear Camera

RR APO Rear AccessoryPower Outlet

RR DEFOG Rear Defogger

RR HVAC Rear ClimateControl System

RT HIBEAM

Right High-BeamHeadlamp

RT LOBEAM

Right Low-BeamHeadlamp

RT PRK Right Parking Lamp

RT TRLRSTOP/TRN

Trailer RightStoplamp and TurnSignal


Fuses Usage

RVC SNSR Regulated VoltageControl Sensor

S/ROOF/SUNSHADE Sunroof

SPARE SpareStop Lamps

(ChinaOnly)

Stop Lamps(China Only)

STRTR Starter

TCM TransmissionControl Module

TRANS TransmissionTRLR

BCK/UPTrailer Back-upLamps

TRLR BRK Trailer BrakeTRLR PRK

LAMPTrailer ParkingLamps

TRLR PWR Trailer Power

WPR/WSW WindshieldWiper/Washer

Relays UsageA/C

CMPRSRCLTCH

Air ConditioningCompressor Clutch

AUX VACPUMP

Auxiliary VacuumPump

CRNK Switched PowerFAN 1 Cooling Fan 1FAN 2 Cooling Fan 2FAN 3 Cooling Fan 3

FOG LAMP Fog Lamps

HI BEAM High-BeamHeadlamps

HID/LOBEAM

High IntensityDischarge (HID)Low-BeamHeadlamps

HORN HornIGN Ignition Main

LT TRLRSTOP/TRN

Trailer LeftStoplamp and TurnSignal Lamp

Relays UsagePRK LAMP Park LampPWR/TRN Powertrain

RR DEFOG Rear WindowDefogger

RT TRLRSTOP/TRN

Trailer RightStoplamp and TurnSignal Lamp

Stop Lamps(ChinaOnly)

Stop Lamps(China Only)

TRLRBCK/UP

Trailer Back-upLamps

WPR Windshield Wiper

WPR HI Windshield WiperHigh Speed


Capacities and SpecificationsThe following approximate capacities are given in English and metric conversions. See Recommended Fluids andLubricants on page 6-11 for more information.

ApplicationCapacities

English Metric

Air Conditioning Refrigerant R134a

For the air conditioning system refrigerant chargeamount, see the refrigerant caution label locatedunder the hood. See your dealer/retailer for more

information.Cooling System 11.4 qt 10.8 LEngine Oil with Filter 5.5 qt 5.2 LFuel Tank 22.0 gal 83.3 LTransmission Fluid* 5.3 qt 5.0 LWheel Nut Torque 140 lb ft 190 Y

*See Automatic Transmission Fluid on page 5-16 for information on checking fluid level.All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the approximate level, as recommended in thismanual. Recheck fluid level after filling.

Engine SpecificationsEngine VIN Code Transmission Spark Plug Gap

3.6L V6 Engine D Automatic 0.043 in (1.10 mm)


MaintenanceSchedule

Maintenance ScheduleIntroduction ..........................6-1Maintenance Requirements .....6-1Your Vehicle and theEnvironment ........................6-1

Using the MaintenanceSchedule ............................6-2

Scheduled Maintenance .........6-3Additional Required Services ....6-5Maintenance Footnotes ..........6-7Owner Checks and Services ....6-8At Each Fuel Fill ...................6-8At Least Once a Month ..........6-9At Least Once a Year ............6-9Recommended Fluidsand Lubricants ...................6-11

Maintenance ReplacementParts ................................6-12

Engine Drive Belt Routing .....6-13Maintenance Record ............6-13

MaintenanceSchedule

IntroductionImportant: Keep engine oil at theproper level and change asrecommended.

Have you purchased the GMProtection Plan? The Plansupplements the vehicle warranties.See the Warranty and OwnerAssistance booklet or yourdealer/retailer for details.

MaintenanceRequirementsNotice: Maintenance intervals,checks, inspections, replacementparts, and recommended fluidsand lubricants as prescribed inthis manual are necessary to keepthis vehicle in good workingcondition. Any damage causedby failure to follow scheduledmaintenance might not be coveredby the vehicle warranty.

Your Vehicle and theEnvironmentProper vehicle maintenance not onlyhelps to keep the vehicle in goodworking condition, but also helps theenvironment. All recommendedmaintenance is important. Impropervehicle maintenance can even affectthe quality of the air we breathe.Improper fluid levels or the wrongtire inflation can increase the levelof emissions from the vehicle.

Maintenance Schedule 6-1

To help protect the environment, andto keep the vehicle in good condition,be sure to maintain the vehicleproperly.

Using the MaintenanceScheduleWe want to help keep this vehicle ingood working condition. But we donot know exactly how you will drive it.You might drive very short distancesonly a few times a week. Or youmight drive long distances all thetime in very hot, dusty weather.You might use the vehicle in makingdeliveries. Or you might drive it towork, to do errands, or in manyother ways.

Because of all the different wayspeople use their vehicles,maintenance needs vary. You mightneed more frequent checks andreplacements. So please read thefollowing and note how you drive. Ifyou have any questions on how tokeep the vehicle in good condition,see your dealer/retailer.

This schedule is for vehicles that:

• carry passengers and cargowithin recommended limits on theTire and Loading Informationlabel. See Loading the Vehicle onpage 4-16.

• are driven on reasonable roadsurfaces within legal drivinglimits.

• use the recommended fuel. SeeGasoline Octane on page 5-5.

The services in ScheduledMaintenance on page 6-3 should beperformed when indicated. SeeAdditional Required Serviceson page 6-5 and MaintenanceFootnotes on page 6-7 for furtherinformation.

{ CAUTION

Performing maintenance work ona vehicle can be dangerous. Intrying to do some jobs, you canbe seriously injured. Do your ownmaintenance work only if youhave the required know-how andthe proper tools and equipmentfor the job. If you have any doubt,see your dealer/retailer to have aqualified technician do the work.See Doing Your Own ServiceWork on page 5-4.

Some maintenance services canbe complex. So, unless you aretechnically qualified and have thenecessary equipment, have yourdealer/retailer do these jobs.

When you go to your dealer/retailerfor service, trained and supportedservice technicians will performthe work using genuine parts.

6-2 Maintenance Schedule

To purchase service information,see Service Publications OrderingInformation on page 7-13.

Owner Checks and Services onpage 6-8 tells what should bechecked, when to check it, and whatcan easily be done to help keepthe vehicle in good condition.

The proper replacement parts,fluids, and lubricants to useare listed in Recommended Fluidsand Lubricants on page 6-11and Maintenance ReplacementParts on page 6-12. When thevehicle is serviced, make sure theseare used. All parts should bereplaced and all necessary repairsdone before you or anyone elsedrives the vehicle. We recommendthe use of genuine parts fromyour dealer/retailer.

Scheduled MaintenanceWhen the CHANGE ENGINEOIL SOON message displays,service is required for the vehicle.Have the vehicle serviced assoon as possible within the next600 miles (1 000 km). It is possiblethat, if driving under the bestconditions, the engine oil life systemmight not indicate that vehicleservice is necessary for over a year.However, the engine oil and filtermust be changed at least oncea year and at this time the systemmust be reset. Your dealer/retailerhas trained service technicianswho will perform this work usinggenuine parts and reset the system.If the engine oil life system is everreset accidentally, service the vehiclewithin 3,000 miles (5 000 km) sincethe last service. Remember to reset

the oil life system whenever the oilis changed. See Engine Oil LifeSystem on page 5-14 for informationon the Engine Oil Life System andresetting the system.

When the CHANGE ENGINE OILSOON message appears, certainservices, checks, and inspectionsare required. Required servicesare described in the followingfor “Maintenance I” and“Maintenance II.” Generally, it isrecommended that the first servicebe Maintenance I, the secondservice be Maintenance II, and thenalternate Maintenance I andMaintenance II thereafter. However,in some cases, Maintenance II maybe required more often.


Maintenance I — Use Maintenance I if the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message displays within 10 monthssince the vehicle was purchased or Maintenance II was performed.Maintenance II — Use Maintenance II if the previous service performed was Maintenance I. Always useMaintenance II whenever the message displays 10 months or more since the last service or if the message has notcome on at all for one year.

Scheduled MaintenanceService Maintenance I Maintenance II

Change engine oil and filter. See Engine Oil on page 5-12. Reset oil lifesystem. See Engine Oil Life System on page 5-14. An Emission ControlService.

• •

Visually check for any leaks or damage. See footnote (g). • •Inspect engine air cleaner filter. If necessary, replace filter. See Engine AirCleaner/Filter on page 5-15. See footnote (l). •

Rotate tires and check inflation pressures and wear. See Tire Inspection andRotation on page 5-49 and “Tire Wear Inspection” in At Least Once a Monthon page 6-9.

• •

Inspect brake system. See footnote (a). • •Check engine coolant and windshield washer fluid levels and add fluid asneeded. • •

Perform any needed additional services. See “Additional Required Services” inthis section. • •

Inspect suspension and steering components. See footnote (b). •Inspect engine cooling system. See footnote (c). •Inspect wiper blades. See footnote (d). •


Scheduled Maintenance (cont’d)Service Maintenance I Maintenance II

Inspect restraint system components. See footnote (e). •Lubricate body components. See footnote (f). •Inspect throttle system. See footnote (j). •

Additional Required ServicesThe following services should be performed at the first maintenance service (I or II) after the indicated miles(kilometers) shown for each item.

Additional Required Services

Service and Miles (Kilometers) 25,000(40 000)

50,000(80 000)

75,000(120 000)

100,000(160 000)

125,000(200 000)

150,000(240 000)

Inspect fuel system for damage orleaks. • • • • • •

Inspect exhaust system for loose ordamaged components. • • • • • •

Replace engine air cleaner filter. SeeEngine Air Cleaner/Filter on page 5-15. • • •

Change automatic transmission fluid(severe service). See footnote (h). • • •

Change automatic transmission fluid(normal service). •


Additional Required Services (cont’d)

Service and Miles (Kilometers) 25,000(40 000)

50,000(80 000)

75,000(120 000)

100,000(160 000)

125,000(200 000)

150,000(240 000)

All-wheel-drive vehicles: Changetransfer case fluid (severe service).See footnote (m).

• • •

All-wheel-drive vehicles: Changetransfer case fluid (normal service). •

Replace spark plugs and inspect sparkplug wires. An Emission ControlService.

•

Engine cooling system service(or every five years, whichever occursfirst). An Emission Control Service.See footnote (i).

•

Inspect engine accessory drive belt.An Emission Control Service. Seefootnote (k).

•


Maintenance Footnotes(a) Visually inspect brake linesand hoses for proper hook-up,binding, leaks, cracks, chafing, etc.Inspect disc brake pads for wearand rotors for surface condition.Inspect other brake parts, includingcalipers, parking brake, etc.Check parking brake adjustment.

(b) Visually inspect front andrear suspension and steeringsystem for damaged, loose, ormissing parts or signs of wear.Inspect power steering lines andhoses for proper hook-up, binding,leaks, cracks, chafing, etc.

(c) Visually inspect hoses and havethem replaced if they are cracked,swollen, or deteriorated. Inspect allpipes, fittings and clamps; replacewith genuine parts as needed. Tohelp ensure proper operation, apressure test of the cooling systemand pressure cap and cleaningthe outside of the radiator andair conditioning condenser isrecommended at least once a year.

(d) Inspect wiper blades for wear,cracking, or contamination.Clean the windshield and wiperblades, if contaminated. Replacewiper blades that are worn ordamaged. See Windshield WiperBlade Replacement on page 5-36and Windshield, Backglass,and Wiper Blades on page 5-84 formore information.

(e) Make sure the safety beltreminder light and safety beltassemblies are working properly.Look for any other loose ordamaged safety belt system parts.If you see anything that mightkeep a safety belt system from doingits job, have it repaired. Have anytorn or frayed safety belts replaced.Also see Checking the RestraintSystems on page 1-59.

(f) Lubricate all key lock cylinders,hood latch assemblies, secondarylatches, pivots, spring anchorand release pawl, hood and doorhinges, rear folding seats, and

liftgate hinges. More frequentlubrication may be required whenexposed to a corrosive environment.Applying silicone grease onweatherstrips with a clean cloth willmake them last longer, sealbetter, and not stick or squeak.

(g) A fluid loss in any vehicle systemcould indicate a problem. Havethe system inspected and repairedand the fluid level checked. Addfluid if needed.

(h) Change automatic transmissionfluid if the vehicle is mainlydriven under one or more of theseconditions:− In heavy city traffic where the

outside temperature regularlyreaches 90°F (32°C) or higher.

− In hilly or mountainous terrain.− When doing frequent trailer

towing.− Uses such as found in taxi,

police, or delivery service.


(i) Drain, flush, and refill coolingsystem. This service can becomplex; you should have yourdealer/retailer perform this service.See Engine Coolant on page 5-18 forwhat to use. Inspect hoses. Cleanradiator, condenser, pressure cap,and filler neck. Pressure test thecooling system and pressure cap.

(j) Check system for interference orbinding and for damaged or missingparts. Replace parts as needed.Replace any components that havehigh effort or excessive wear. Do notlubricate accelerator or cruise controlcables.

(k) Visually inspect belt for fraying,excessive cracks, or obviousdamage. Replace belt if necessary.

(l) If driving regularly under dustyconditions, inspect the filter at eachengine oil change.

(m) Change transfer case fluid if thevehicle is mainly driven underone or more of these conditions:− In heavy city traffic where

the outside temperature regularlyreaches 90°F (32°C) or higher.

− In hilly or mountainous terrain.− When doing frequent trailer

towing.− Uses such as found in taxi, police,

or delivery service.

Owner Checks andServicesThese owner checks and servicesshould be performed at the intervalsspecified to help ensure vehiclesafety, dependability, and emissioncontrol performance. Your dealer/retailer can assist with these checksand services.Be sure any necessary repairs arecompleted at once. Whenever anyfluids or lubricants are added to thevehicle, make sure they are theproper ones, as shown inRecommended Fluids andLubricants on page 6-11.

At Each Fuel FillIt is important to perform theseunderhood checks at each fuel fill.

Engine Oil Level CheckNotice: It is important to checkthe engine oil regularly and keep itat the proper level. Failure to keepthe engine oil at the proper levelcan cause damage to the enginenot covered by the vehiclewarranty.Check the engine oil level and addthe proper oil if necessary. SeeEngine Oil on page 5-12.

Engine Coolant Level CheckCheck the engine coolant leveland add DEX-COOL® coolantmixture if necessary. See EngineCoolant on page 5-18.

Windshield Washer FluidLevel CheckCheck the windshield washer fluidlevel in the windshield washerfluid reservoir and add the properfluid if necessary.


At Least Once a MonthTire Inflation CheckInspect the vehicle’s tires and makesure they are inflated to thecorrect pressures. Do not forget tocheck the spare tire, if the vehiclehas one. See Inflation - TirePressure on page 5-43. If thevehicle has a spare tire, check tomake sure it is stored securely. SeeChanging a Flat Tire on page 5-67.

Tire Wear InspectionTire rotation may be required forhigh mileage highway drivers prior tothe Engine Oil Life System servicenotification. Check the tires forwear and, if necessary, rotate thetires. See Tire Inspection andRotation on page 5-49.

At Least Once a YearStarter Switch Check

{ CAUTION

When you are doing thisinspection, the vehicle could movesuddenly. If the vehicle moves,you or others could be injured.

1. Before starting this check, besure there is enough roomaround the vehicle.

2. Firmly apply both the parkingbrake and the regular brake.See Parking Brake on page 2-27.Do not use the acceleratorpedal, and be ready to turn offthe engine immediately if it starts.

3. Try to start the engine ineach gear. The vehicle shouldstart only in P (Park) orN (Neutral). If the vehicle startsin any other position, contactyour dealer/retailer for service.

Automatic Transmission ShiftLock Control System Check

{ CAUTION

When you are doing thisinspection, the vehicle could movesuddenly. If the vehicle moves,you or others could be injured.

1. Before starting this check, besure there is enough roomaround the vehicle. It should beparked on a level surface.

2. Firmly apply the parking brake.See Parking Brake on page 2-27.Be ready to apply the regularbrake immediately if the vehiclebegins to move.

3. With the engine off, turn theignition to ON/RUN, but do notstart the engine. Without applyingthe regular brake, try to move theshift lever out of P (Park) withnormal effort. If the shift levermoves out of P (Park), contactyour dealer/retailer for service.


Ignition TransmissionLock CheckWhile parked, and with the parkingbrake set, try to turn the ignition toLOCK/OFF in each shift leverposition.

• The ignition should turn toLOCK/OFF only when the shiftlever is in P (Park).

• The ignition key should comeout only in LOCK/OFF.

Contact your dealer/retailer ifservice is required.

Parking Brake and AutomaticTransmission P (Park)Mechanism Check

{ CAUTION

When you are doing this check,the vehicle could begin to move.You or others could be injuredand property could be damaged.Make sure there is room in frontof the vehicle in case it begins toroll. Be ready to apply the regularbrake at once should the vehiclebegin to move.

Park on a fairly steep hill, with thevehicle facing downhill. Keepingyour foot on the regular brake, setthe parking brake.• To check the parking brake’s

holding ability: With the enginerunning and the transmissionin N (Neutral), slowly removefoot pressure from the regularbrake pedal. Do this until thevehicle is held by the parkingbrake only.

• To check the P (Park)mechanism’s holding ability:With the engine running, shiftto P (Park). Then release theparking brake followed by theregular brake.

Contact your dealer/retailer ifservice is required.

Underbody Flushing ServiceAt least every spring, use plain waterto flush any corrosive materials fromthe underbody. Take care to cleanthoroughly any areas where mudand other debris can collect.

Tire Sealant andCompressor KitIf the vehicle has a Tire Sealant andCompressor Kit, check the sealantexpiration date printed on theinstruction label of the kit at leastonce a year. See your dealer/retailerfor a replacement canister.


Recommended Fluids and LubricantsFluids and lubricants identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained fromyour dealer/retailer.

Usage Fluid/Lubricant

Engine Oil

Engine oil which meets GM Standard GM6094M and displays theAmerican Petroleum Institute Certified for Gasoline Engines starburstsymbol. To determine the proper viscosity for your vehicle’s engine,see Engine Oil on page 5-12.

Engine Coolant 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and use only DEX-COOL®

Coolant. See Engine Coolant on page 5-18.

Hydraulic Brake System DOT 3 Hydraulic Brake Fluid (GM Part No. U.S. 88862806,in Canada 88862807).

Windshield Washer Optikleen® Washer Solvent.

Power Steering System GM Power Steering Fluid (GM Part No. U.S. 89021184,in Canada 89021186).

Automatic Transmission DEXRON®-VI Automatic Transmission Fluid.

Key Lock Cylinders Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube (GM Part No. U.S. 12346241,in Canada 10953474).

Carrier Assembly — Differential(Rear Drive Module) and Transfer

Case (Power Transfer Unit)

SAE 75W-90 Synthetic Axle Lubricant (GM Part No. U.S. 89021677,in Canada 89021678) meeting GM Specification 9986115.

Hood Latch Assembly, SecondaryLatch, Pivots, Spring Anchor,

and Release Pawl

Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol (GM Part No. U.S. 12346293,in Canada 992723) or lubricant meeting requirements ofNLGI #2, Category LB or GC-LB.


Usage Fluid/LubricantHood and Door Hinges and

Rear Folding SeatMulti-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube (GM Part No. U.S. 12346241,in Canada 10953474).

Weatherstrip ConditioningWeatherstrip Lubricant (GM Part No. U.S. 3634770,in Canada 10953518) or Dielectric Silicone Grease(GM Part No. U.S. 12345579, in Canada 992887).

Maintenance Replacement PartsReplacement parts identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your dealer/retailer.

Part GM Part Number ACDelco Part NumberEngine Air Cleaner/Filter 15278634 A3083CEngine Oil Filter 89017524 PF48Spark Plugs 12611882 41-107Wiper Blades

Front Driver Side – 24.6 in (62.5 cm) 25941805 —Front Passenger Side – 20.9 in (53.0 cm) 25941804 —Rear – 11.8 in (30.0 cm) 25820122 —


Engine Drive BeltRouting3.6L V6 Engine

Maintenance RecordAfter the scheduled services areperformed, record the date,odometer reading, who performedthe service, and the type of servicesperformed in the boxes provided.See Maintenance Requirements onpage 6-1. Any additional informationfrom Owner Checks and Services onpage 6-8 can be added on thefollowing record pages. You shouldretain all maintenance receipts.


Maintenance Record

Date OdometerReading Serviced By Maintenance I or

Maintenance II Services Performed


Maintenance Record (cont’d)




CustomerAssistanceInformation

Customer Assistance andInformationCustomer SatisfactionProcedure ...........................7-1

Online Owner Center .............7-3Customer Assistance forText Telephone (TTY)Users .................................7-4

Customer Assistance Offices ....7-4GM Mobility ReimbursementProgram .............................7-5

Roadside AssistanceProgram .............................7-6

Scheduling ServiceAppointments ......................7-8

Courtesy Transportation .........7-8Collision Damage Repair ........7-9

Reporting Safety DefectsReporting Safety Defectsto the United StatesGovernment ......................7-12

Reporting Safety Defects tothe Canadian Government ....7-13

Reporting Safety Defectsto General Motors ..............7-13

Service PublicationsOrdering Information ...........7-13

Vehicle Data Recording andPrivacyVehicle Data Recordingand Privacy .......................7-14

Event Data Recorders ..........7-15OnStar® .............................7-15Navigation System ...............7-16Radio FrequencyIdentification (RFID) ............7-16

Customer Assistanceand Information

Customer SatisfactionProcedureYour satisfaction and goodwill areimportant to your dealer and toBuick. Normally, any concernswith the sales transaction orthe operation of your vehicle willbe resolved by your GM dealer’ssales or service departments.Sometimes, however, despite thebest intentions of all concerned,misunderstandings can occur.If your concern has not beenresolved to your satisfaction, thefollowing steps should be taken:

STEP ONE: Discuss your concernwith a member of dealershipmanagement. Normally, concernscan be quickly resolved at that level.If the matter has already beenreviewed with the sales, service, orparts manager, contact the ownerof the dealership or the generalmanager.

Customer Assistance Information 7-1

STEP TWO: If after contacting amember of dealership management,it appears your concern cannotbe resolved by the dealershipwithout further help, in the U.S.,contact the Buick CustomerAssistance Center by calling1-800-521-7300. In Canada,contact General Motors of CanadaCustomer Communication Centreby calling 1-800-263-3777 (English)or 1-800-263-7854 (French).

We encourage you to call thetoll-free number in order to give yourinquiry prompt attention. Pleasehave the following informationavailable to give the CustomerAssistance Representative:

• Vehicle Identification Number.This is available from thevehicle registration or title, orthe plate at the top left ofthe instrument panel.

• Dealership name and location

• Vehicle delivery date and presentmileage

When contacting Buick, pleaseremember that your concernwill likely be resolved at a dealer’sfacility. That is why we suggestyou follow Step One first if you havea concern.

STEP THREE — U.S. Owners:Both General Motors and yourdealer are committed to making sureyou are completely satisfied withyour new vehicle. However, inthe United States, if you continue toremain unsatisfied after followingthe procedure outlined in Steps Oneand Two, you can file with theBBB Auto Line Program to enforceyour rights.

The BBB Auto Line Program is anout of court program administeredby the Council of Better BusinessBureaus to settle automotivedisputes regarding vehicle repairs orthe interpretation of the NewVehicle Limited Warranty. Althoughyou may be required to resort tothis informal dispute resolutionprogram prior to filing a court action,

use of the program is free of chargeand your case will generally beheard within 40 days. If you do notagree with the decision given inyour case, you may reject itand proceed with any other venuefor relief available to you.

You may contact the BBB AutoLine Program using the toll-freetelephone number or write themat the following address:

BBB Auto Line ProgramCouncil of Better BusinessBureaus, Inc.4200 Wilson BoulevardSuite 800Arlington, VA 22203-1838

Telephone: 1-800-955-5100dr.bbb.org/goauto

This program is available in all50 states and the District ofColumbia. Eligibility is limited byvehicle age, mileage and otherfactors. General Motors reservesthe right to change eligibilitylimitations and/or discontinue itsparticipation in this program.

7-2 Customer Assistance Information

STEP THREE — CanadianOwners: In the event that you donot feel your concerns havebeen addressed after following theprocedure outlined in Steps oneand two, General Motors of CanadaLimited wants you to be aware ofits participation in a no-chargeMediation/Arbitration program.General Motors of Canada Limitedhas committed to bindingarbitration of owner disputesinvolving factory-related vehicleservice claims. The programprovides for the review of the factsinvolved by an impartial thirdparty arbiter, and may include aninformal hearing before the arbiter.The program is designed sothat the entire dispute settlementprocess, from the time you file yourcomplaint to the final decision,should be completed inapproximately 70 days. We believeour impartial program offersadvantages over courts in mostjurisdictions because it is informal,quick, and free of charge.

For further information concerningeligibility in the Canadian MotorVehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP),call toll-free 1-800-207-0685.Alternatively you may call theGeneral Motors CustomerCommunication Centre,1-800-263-3777 (English),1-800-263-7854 (French), oryou may write to the Mediation/Arbitration Program at the followingaddress. Your inquiry should beaccompanied by your VehicleIdentification Number (VIN).

Mediation/Arbitration Programc/o Customer CommunicationCentreGeneral Motors of Canada LimitedMail Code: CA1-163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

Online Owner CenterOnline Owner Center (U.S.) —www.gmownercenter.com/buickInformation and services customizedfor your specific vehicle — all inone convenient place.

• Digital owner manual, warrantyinformation, and more

• Online service and maintenancerecords

• Find Buick dealers for servicenationwide

• Exclusive privileges and offers

• Recall notices for your specificvehicle

• OnStar® and GM CardmemberServices Earnings summaries

Other Helpful Links:

Buick − www.buick.com

Buick Merchandise —www.buickmerchandise.com


Help Center —www.buick.com/helpcenter

• FAQ

• Contact Us

My GM Canada (Canada) —www.gm.caMy GM Canada is apassword-protected section ofwww.gm.ca where you can saveinformation on GM vehicles,get personalized offers, anduse handy tools and forms withgreater ease.

Here are a few of the valuabletools and services you will haveaccess to:

• My Showroom: Find and saveinformation on vehicles andcurrent offers in your area.

• My Dealers/Retailers: Savedetails such as address andphone number for each of yourpreferred GM dealers/retailers.

• My Driveway: Access quick linksto parts and service estimates,check trade-in values, orschedule a service appointmentby adding the vehicles youown to your driveway profile.

• My Preferences: Manage yourprofile and use tools and formswith greater ease.

To sign up, visit the My GM Canadasection within www.gm.ca.

Customer Assistance forText Telephone (TTY)UsersTo assist customers who are deaf,hard of hearing, or speech-impairedand who use Text Telephones(TTYs), Buick has TTY equipmentavailable at its Customer AssistanceCenter. Any TTY user cancommunicate with Buick by dialing:1-800-83-BUICK. TTY users inCanada can dial 1-800-263-3830.

Customer AssistanceOfficesBuick encourages customers to callthe toll-free number for assistance.However, if a customer wishesto write or e-mail Buick, the lettershould be addressed to:

United States — CustomerAssistanceBuick Customer Assistance CenterP.O. Box 33136Detroit, MI 48232-5136

www.Buick.com1-800-521-73001-800-832-8425 (For TextTelephone devices (TTYs))Roadside Assistance:1-800-252-1112

From Puerto Rico:1-800-496-9992 (English)1-800-496-9993 (Spanish)

From U.S. Virgin Islands1-800-496-9994


Canada — CustomerAssistanceGeneral Motors of Canada LimitedCustomer Communication Centre,CA1-163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

www.gmcanada.com1-800-263-3777 (English)1-800-263-7854 (French)1-800-263-3830 (For TextTelephone devices (TTYs))Roadside Assistance:1-800-268-6800

Overseas — CustomerAssistancePlease contact the local GeneralMotors Business Unit.

Mexico, Central America andCaribbean Islands/Countries(Except Puerto Rico andU.S. Virgin Islands) —Customer AssistanceGeneral Motors de Mexico, S. deR.L. de C.V.Customer Assistance CenterPaseo de la Reforma # 2740Col. Lomas de BezaresC.P. 11910, Mexico, D.F.01-800-508-0000Long Distance: 011-52-53 29 0 800

GM MobilityReimbursement Program

This program, available to qualifiedapplicants, can reimburse youup to $1,000 of the cost of eligibleaftermarket adaptive equipmentrequired for your vehicle, such ashand controls or a wheelchair/scooter lift.

The offer is available for a verylimited period of time from the dateof vehicle purchase/lease. Formore details, or to determineyour vehicle’s eligibility, visitgmmobility.com or call the GMMobility Assistance Center at1-800-323-9935. Text telephone(TTY) users, call 1-800-833-9935.


General Motors of Canada alsohas a Mobility Program. Call1-800-GM-DRIVE (463-7483)for details. TTY users call1-800-263-3830.

Roadside AssistanceProgramFor U.S. purchased vehicles, call1-800-252-1112; (Text Telephone(TTY): 1-888-889-2438).

For Canadian purchased vehicles,call 1-800-268-6800.

Service is available 24 hours a day,365 days a year.

Calling for AssistanceWhen calling Roadside Assistance,have the following informationready:

• Your name, home address, andhome telephone number

• Telephone number of yourlocation

• Location of the vehicle

• Model, year, color, and licenseplate number of the vehicle

• Odometer reading, VehicleIdentification Number (VIN), anddelivery date of the vehicle

• Description of the problem

CoverageServices are provided up to 5 years/100,000 miles (160 000 km),whichever comes first.

In the U.S., anyone driving thevehicle is covered. In Canada, aperson driving the vehicle withoutpermission from the owner isnot covered.

Roadside Assistance is not a part ofthe New Vehicle Limited Warranty.Buick and General Motors ofCanada Limited reserve the right tomake any changes or discontinuethe Roadside Assistance program atany time without notification.

Buick and General Motors ofCanada Limited reserve the right tolimit services or payment to an

owner or driver if they decide theclaims are made too often, orthe same type of claim is mademany times.

Services Provided• Emergency Fuel Delivery:

Delivery of enough fuel forthe vehicle to get to the nearestservice station.

• Lock-Out Service: Service isprovided to unlock the vehicleif you are locked out. A remoteunlock may be available ifyou have OnStar®. For securityreasons, the driver mustpresent identification before thisservice is given.

• Emergency Tow From a PublicRoad or Highway: Tow to thenearest Buick dealer for warrantyservice, or if the vehicle was ina crash and cannot be driven.Assistance is also given when thevehicle is stuck in sand, mud,or snow.


• Flat Tire Change: Service isprovided to change a flat tirewith the spare tire. The spare tire,if equipped, must be in goodcondition and properly inflated.It is the owner’s responsibilityfor the repair or replacement ofthe tire if it is not covered bythe warranty.

• Battery Jump Start: Service isprovided to jump start a deadbattery.

• Trip Interruption Benefits andAssistance: If your trip isinterrupted due to a warrantyfailure, incidental expenses maybe reimbursed during the 5 years/100,000 miles (160 000 km)Powertrain warranty period. Itemsconsidered are hotel, meals, andrental car.

Services Not Included inRoadside Assistance• Impound towing caused by

violation of any laws.

• Legal fines.

• Mounting, dismounting orchanging of snow tires, chains,or other traction devices.

• Towing or services for vehiclesdriven on a non-public road orhighway.

Services Specific to CanadianPurchased Vehicles• Fuel delivery: Reimbursement

is approximately $5 Canadian.Diesel fuel delivery may berestricted. Propane and otherfuels are not provided throughthis service.

• Lock-Out Service: Vehicleregistration is required.

• Trip Routing Service: Detailedmaps of North America areprovided when requested eitherwith the most direct route or themost scenic route. There is asix request limit per year.Additional travel information isalso available. Allow three weeksfor delivery.

• Trip Interruption Benefits andAssistance: Must be over250 kilometres from where yourtrip was started to qualify. GeneralMotors of Canada Limitedrequires pre-authorization,original detailed receipts, and acopy of the repair orders. Onceauthorization has been received,the Roadside Assistance advisorwill help you make arrangementsand explain how to receivepayment.

• Alternative Service: Ifassistance cannot be providedright away, the RoadsideAssistance advisor may give youpermission to get local emergencyroad service. You will receivepayment, up to $100, aftersending the original receipt toRoadside Assistance. Mechanicalfailures may be covered, howeverany cost for parts and labor forrepairs not covered by thewarranty are the ownerresponsibility.


Scheduling ServiceAppointmentsWhen your vehicle requires warrantyservice, contact your dealer/retailerand request an appointment. Byscheduling a service appointmentand advising your service consultantof your transportation needs, yourdealer/retailer can help minimizeyour inconvenience.

If your vehicle cannot be scheduledinto the service departmentimmediately, keep driving it until itcan be scheduled for service,unless, of course, the problem issafety-related. If it is, pleasecall your dealership/retailer, let themknow this, and ask for instructions.

If the dealer/retailer requestsyou to bring the vehicle for service,you are urged to do so as earlyin the work day as possible to allowfor the same day repair.

Courtesy TransportationTo enhance your ownershipexperience, we and our participatingdealers are proud to offer CourtesyTransportation, a customersupport program for vehicles withthe Bumper to Bumper (BaseWarranty Coverage period inCanada) and extended powertrain,and hybrid specific warranty inboth the U.S. and Canada.

Several courtesy transportationoptions are available to assistin reducing your inconveniencewhen warranty repairs are required.

Courtesy Transportation is not apart of the New Vehicle LimitedWarranty. A separate bookletentitled “Warranty and OwnerAssistance Information” furnishedwith each new vehicle providesdetailed warranty coverageinformation.

Transportation OptionsWarranty service can generally becompleted while you wait. However,if you are unable to wait, GM helpsto minimize your inconvenience byproviding several transportationoptions. Depending on thecircumstances, your dealer canoffer you one of the following:

Shuttle Service

Shuttle service is the preferredmeans of offering CourtesyTransportation. Dealers may provideyou with shuttle service to get youto your destination with minimalinterruption of your daily schedule.This includes one-way or roundtrip shuttle service within reasonabletime and distance parameters ofthe dealer’s area.


Public Transportation or FuelReimbursement

If your vehicle requires overnightwarranty repairs, and publictransportation is used instead of thedealer’s shuttle service, the expensemust be supported by originalreceipts and can only be up to themaximum amount allowed by GM forshuttle service. In addition, for U.S.customers, should you arrangetransportation through a friend orrelative, limited reimbursement forreasonable fuel expenses may beavailable. Claim amounts shouldreflect actual costs and be supportedby original receipts. See your dealerfor information regarding theallowance amounts forreimbursement of fuel or othertransportation costs.

Courtesy Rental Vehicle

Your dealer may arrange to provideyou with a courtesy rental vehicle orreimburse you for a rental vehiclethat you obtain if your vehicle is keptfor an overnight warranty repair.

Rental reimbursement will be limitedand must be supported by originalreceipts. This requires that you signand complete a rental agreementand meet state/provincial, local, andrental vehicle provider requirements.Requirements vary and may includeminimum age requirements,insurance coverage, credit card, etc.You are responsible for fuel usagecharges and may also beresponsible for taxes, levies, usagefees, excessive mileage, or rentalusage beyond the completion of therepair.

It may not be possible to provide alike-vehicle as a courtesy rental.

Additional ProgramInformationAll program options, such as shuttleservice, may not be available atevery dealer. Please contactyour dealer for specific informationabout availability. All CourtesyTransportation arrangements will beadministered by appropriatedealer personnel.

General Motors reserves the right tounilaterally modify, change ordiscontinue Courtesy Transportationat any time and to resolve allquestions of claim eligibility pursuantto the terms and conditionsdescribed herein at its solediscretion.

Collision Damage RepairIf your vehicle is involved in acollision and it is damaged, havethe damage repaired by a qualifiedtechnician using the properequipment and quality replacementparts. Poorly performed collisionrepairs diminish your vehicle’sresale value, and safetyperformance can be compromisedin subsequent collisions.

Collision PartsGenuine GM Collision parts are newparts made with the same materialsand construction methods as theparts with which your vehiclewas originally built. Genuine GMCollision parts are your best choice


to ensure that your vehicle’sdesigned appearance, durability,and safety are preserved. The useof Genuine GM parts can helpmaintain your GM New VehicleWarranty.

Recycled original equipment partsmay also be used for repair.These parts are typically removedfrom vehicles that were totallosses in prior crashes. In mostcases, the parts being recycled arefrom undamaged sections of thevehicle. A recycled originalequipment GM part, may be anacceptable choice to maintain yourvehicle’s originally designedappearance and safety performance,however, the history of theseparts is not known. Such parts arenot covered by your GM NewVehicle Limited Warranty, and anyrelated failures are not coveredby that warranty.

Aftermarket collision parts are alsoavailable. These are made bycompanies other than GM and maynot have been tested for your

vehicle. As a result, these partsmay fit poorly, exhibit prematuredurability/corrosion problems,and may not perform properly insubsequent collisions. Aftermarketparts are not covered by yourGM New Vehicle Limited Warranty,and any vehicle failure related tosuch parts are not covered bythat warranty.

Repair FacilityWe recommend that you choose acollision repair facility that meetsyour needs before you ever needcollision repairs. Your dealer/retailermay have a collision repair centerwith GM-trained technicians andstate of the art equipment, or be ableto recommend a collision repaircenter that has GM-trainedtechnicians and comparableequipment.

Insuring Your VehicleProtect your investment in yourGM vehicle with comprehensiveand collision insurance coverage.

There are significant differences inthe quality of coverage affordedby various insurance policy terms.Many insurance policies providereduced protection to yourGM vehicle by limiting compensationfor damage repairs by usingaftermarket collision parts. Someinsurance companies will not specifyaftermarket collision parts. Whenpurchasing insurance, werecommend that you assure yourvehicle will be repaired withGM original equipment collisionparts. If such insurance coverage isnot available from your currentinsurance carrier, consider switchingto another insurance carrier.

If your vehicle is leased, the leasingcompany may require you tohave insurance that assures repairswith Genuine GM OriginalEquipment Manufacturer (OEM)parts or Genuine Manufacturerreplacement parts. Read your leasecarefully, as you may be chargedat the end of your lease forpoor quality repairs.


If a Crash OccursHere is what to do if you areinvolved in a crash.

• Check to make sure that you areall right. If you are uninjured,make sure that no one else inyour vehicle, or the other vehicle,is injured.

• If there has been an injury, callemergency services for help.Do not leave the scene of a crashuntil all matters have beentaken care of. Move your vehicleonly if its position puts you indanger or you are instructed tomove it by a police officer.

• Give only the necessary andrequested information topolice and other parties involvedin the crash. Do not discussyour personal condition, mentalframe of mind, or anythingunrelated to the crash. This willhelp guard against post-crashlegal action.

• If you need roadside assistance,call GM Roadside Assistance.See Roadside AssistanceProgram on page 7-6 for moreinformation.

• If your vehicle cannot be driven,know where the towing servicewill be taking it. Get a cardfrom the tow truck operator orwrite down the driver’s name, theservice’s name, and the phonenumber.

• Remove any valuables from yourvehicle before it is towed away.Make sure this includes yourinsurance information andregistration if you keep theseitems in your vehicle.

• Gather the important informationyou will need from the otherdriver. Things like name,address, phone number, driver’slicense number, vehicle licenseplate, vehicle make, modeland model year, VehicleIdentification Number (VIN),insurance company and policy

number, and a generaldescription of the damage tothe other vehicle.

• If possible, call your insurancecompany from the scene ofthe crash. They will walkyou through the information theywill need. If they ask for apolice report, phone or go to thepolice department headquartersthe next day and you can geta copy of the report for a nominalfee. In some states/provinceswith “no fault” insurance laws, areport may not be necessary.This is especially true if there areno injuries and both vehiclesare driveable.

• Choose a reputable collisionrepair facility for your vehicle.Whether you select a dealer/retailer or a private collisionrepair facility to fix the damage,make sure you are comfortablewith them. Remember, youwill have to feel comfortable withtheir work for a long time.


• Once you have an estimate, readit carefully and make sure youunderstand what work willbe performed on your vehicle.If you have a question, ask foran explanation. Reputable shopswelcome this opportunity.

Managing the Vehicle DamageRepair ProcessIn the event that your vehiclerequires damage repairs, GMrecommends that you take an activerole in its repair. If you have apre-determined repair facilityof choice, take your vehicle there,or have it towed there. Specify tothe facility that any requiredreplacement collision parts beoriginal equipment parts, eithernew Genuine GM parts or recycledoriginal GM parts. Remember,recycled parts will not be coveredby your GM vehicle warranty.

Insurance pays the bill for the repair,but you must live with the repair.Depending on your policy limits, yourinsurance company may initiallyvalue the repair using aftermarketparts. Discuss this with your repairprofessional, and insist on GenuineGM parts. Remember if your vehicleis leased you may be obligated tohave the vehicle repaired withGenuine GM parts, even if yourinsurance coverage does not paythe full cost.

If another party’s insurancecompany is paying for the repairs,you are not obligated to accepta repair valuation based onthat insurance company’s collisionpolicy repair limits, as you haveno contractual limits with thatcompany. In such cases, you canhave control of the repair andparts choices as long as cost stayswithin reasonable limits.

Reporting SafetyDefects

Reporting Safety Defectsto the United StatesGovernmentIf you believe that your vehiclehas a defect which couldcause a crash or could causeinjury or death, you shouldimmediately inform the NationalHighway Traffic SafetyAdministration (NHTSA) inaddition to notifying GeneralMotors.

If NHTSA receives similarcomplaints, it may open aninvestigation, and if it finds thata safety defect exists in agroup of vehicles, it may order arecall and remedy campaign.However, NHTSA cannotbecome involved in individualproblems between you,your dealer/retailer, or GeneralMotors.


To contact NHTSA, you maycall the Vehicle Safety Hotlinetoll-free at 1-888-327-4236(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go tosafercar.gov; or write to:Administrator, NHTSA1200 New Jersey Avenue, S.E.Washington D.C., 20590

You can also obtain otherinformation about motor vehiclesafety from safercar.gov.

Reporting Safety Defectsto the CanadianGovernmentIf you live in Canada, and youbelieve that your vehicle hasa safety defect, notify TransportCanada immediately, in addition tonotifying General Motors ofCanada Limited. Call them at1-800-333-0510 or write to:

Transport CanadaRoad Safety Branch2780 Sheffield RoadOttawa, Ontario K1B 3V9

Reporting Safety Defectsto General MotorsIn addition to notifying NHTSA (orTransport Canada) in a situation likethis, please notify General Motors.

Call 1-800-521-7300, or write:

Buick Customer Assistance CenterP.O. Box 33136Detroit, MI 48232-5136

In Canada, call 1-800-263-3777(English) or 1-800-263-7854(French), or write:

General Motors of Canada LimitedCustomer Communication Centre,CA1-163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

Service PublicationsOrdering InformationService ManualsService Manuals have the diagnosisand repair information on engines,transmission, axle suspension,brakes, electrical, steering,body, etc.

Service BulletinsService Bulletins give additionaltechnical service information neededto knowledgeably service GeneralMotors cars and trucks. Eachbulletin contains instructions toassist in the diagnosis and serviceof your vehicle.

Owner InformationOwner publications are writtenspecifically for owners and intendedto provide basic operationalinformation about the vehicle.The owner manual includes theMaintenance Schedule forall models.


In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio,Owner Manual, and WarrantyBooklet.

RETAIL SELL PRICE:$35.00 (U.S.) plus processing fee

Without Portfolio: OwnerManual only.

RETAIL SELL PRICE:$25.00 (U.S.) plus processing fee

Current and Past Model OrderFormsTechnical Service Bulletins andManuals are available for currentand past model GM vehicles.To request an order form, specifyyear and model name of the vehicle.

ORDER TOLL FREE:1-800-551-4123 Monday-Friday8:00 AM - 6:00 PM Eastern Time

For Credit Card Orders Only(VISA-MasterCard-Discover), visitHelm, Inc. on the World WideWeb at: helminc.com

Or you can write to:


Prices are subject to change withoutnotice and without incurringobligation. Allow ample time fordelivery.

Note to Canadian Customers: Alllisted prices are quoted in U.S.funds. Canadian residents are tomake checks payable in U.S. funds.

Vehicle DataRecording andPrivacyYour GM vehicle has a number ofsophisticated computers thatrecord information about thevehicle’s performance and how it isdriven. For example, your vehicleuses computer modules to monitorand control engine and transmissionperformance, to monitor theconditions for airbag deploymentand deploy airbags in a crash and,if so equipped, to provide antilockbraking to help the driver controlthe vehicle. These modulesmay store data to help your dealer/retailer technician service yourvehicle. Some modules may alsostore data about how you operatethe vehicle, such as rate of fuelconsumption or average speed.These modules may also retain theowner’s personal preferences,such as radio pre-sets, seatpositions, and temperature settings.


Event Data RecordersThis vehicle has an EventData Recorder (EDR). The mainpurpose of an EDR is to record, incertain crash or near crash-likesituations, such as an airbagdeployment or hitting a roadobstacle, data that will assist inunderstanding how a vehicle’ssystems performed. The EDR isdesigned to record data related tovehicle dynamics and safetysystems for a short period of time,typically 30 seconds or less.The EDR in this vehicle is designedto record such data as:

• How various systems in yourvehicle were operating

• Whether or not the driver andpassenger safety belts werebuckled/fastened

• How far, if at all, the driver waspressing the accelerator and/orbrake pedal

• How fast the vehicle wastraveling

This data can help provide a betterunderstanding of the circumstancesin which crashes and injuriesoccur.Important: EDR data is recordedby your vehicle only if a non-trivialcrash situation occurs; no datais recorded by the EDR undernormal driving conditions and nopersonal data (e.g., name, gender,age, and crash location) isrecorded. However, other parties,such as law enforcement, couldcombine the EDR data with the typeof personally identifying dataroutinely acquired during a crashinvestigation.

To read data recorded by an EDR,special equipment is required,and access to the vehicle or theEDR is needed. In addition tothe vehicle manufacturer, otherparties, such as law enforcement,that have the special equipment, canread the information if they haveaccess to the vehicle or the EDR.

GM will not access this data orshare it with others except: with theconsent of the vehicle owner or,if the vehicle is leased, withthe consent of the lessee; inresponse to an official request ofpolice or similar government office;as part of GM’s defense oflitigation through the discoveryprocess; or, as required by law. Datathat GM collects or receives mayalso be used for GM research needsor may be made available toothers for research purposes, wherea need is shown and the data isnot tied to a specific vehicleor vehicle owner.

OnStar®

If your vehicle has OnStar and yousubscribe to the OnStar services,please refer to the OnStarTerms and Conditions forinformation on data collection anduse. See also OnStar® Systemon page 2-41 in this manualfor more information.


Navigation SystemIf your vehicle has a navigationsystem, use of the systemmay result in the storage ofdestinations, addresses, telephonenumbers, and other trip information.Refer to the navigation systemoperating manual for information onstored data and for deletioninstructions.

Radio FrequencyIdentification (RFID)RFID technology is used in somevehicles for functions such astire pressure monitoring and ignitionsystem security, as well as inconnection with conveniences suchas key fobs for remote doorlocking/unlocking and starting, andin-vehicle transmitters for garagedoor openers. RFID technology inGM vehicles does not use or recordpersonal information or link withany other GM system containingpersonal information.


AAccessories and

Modifications ...................... 5-3Accessory Power ................. 2-22Accessory Power Outlets ...... 3-18Adaptive Forward Lighting

System ........................... 3-14Adding Equipment to Your

Airbag-Equipped Vehicle .... 1-58Additional Required Services,

Scheduled Maintenance ....... 6-5Additives, Fuel ...................... 5-5Add-On Electrical

Equipment ....................... 5-88Air Cleaner/Filter, Engine ....... 5-15Airbag

Readiness Light ................ 3-31Airbag System ..................... 1-45

Adding Equipment toYour Airbag-EquippedVehicle ........................ 1-58

How Does an AirbagRestrain? ..................... 1-51

Passenger SensingSystem ........................ 1-53

Servicing YourAirbag-EquippedVehicle ........................ 1-57

What Makes an AirbagInflate? ........................ 1-50

Airbag System (cont.)What Will You See After

an Airbag Inflates? ........ 1-51When Should an Airbag

Inflate? ........................ 1-49Where Are the Airbags? ..... 1-47

AirbagsPassenger Status

Indicator ....................... 3-32All-Wheel Drive .................... 5-33All-Wheel-Drive (AWD)

System ............................. 4-7Analog Clock ....................... 3-20Antilock Brake System (ABS) .... 4-4

Warning Light ................... 3-35Appearance Care

Aluminum or Chrome-PlatedWheels ........................ 5-85

Care of Safety Belts .......... 5-82Chemical Paint Spotting ..... 5-86Cleaning Exterior Lamps/

Lenses ........................ 5-83Fabric/Carpet ................... 5-81Finish Care ...................... 5-84Finish Damage ................. 5-86Instrument Panel, Vinyl,

and Other PlasticSurfaces ...................... 5-82

Appearance Care (cont.)Interior Cleaning ............... 5-80Leather ........................... 5-82Sheet Metal Damage ........ 5-86Tires ............................... 5-85Underbody Maintenance .... 5-86Washing Your Vehicle ........ 5-83Weatherstrips ................... 5-83Windshield, Backglass,

and Wiper Blades .......... 5-84Assistance Program,

Roadside .......................... 7-6Audio System ...................... 3-68

Audio Steering WheelControls ..................... 3-119

Navigation/Radio System,see Navigation Manual .... 3-98

Setting the Clock .............. 3-69Audio System(s) .................. 3-70Audio Systems

Radio Reception ............. 3-120Rear Seat (RSA) ............. 3-117Theft-Deterrent Feature .... 3-119

Automatic TransmissionFluid ............................... 5-16Operation ........................ 2-24

INDEX i-1

BBattery ............................... 5-28

Electric PowerManagement ................. 3-16

Run-Down Protection ......... 3-17Belt Routing, Engine ............. 6-13Bluetooth® .......................... 3-98Brake

Emergencies ...................... 4-5Brake Fluid ......................... 5-26Brakes ............................... 5-26

Antilock ............................. 4-4Parking ........................... 2-27System Warning Light ....... 3-34

Braking ................................ 4-3Braking in Emergencies .......... 4-5Break-In, New Vehicle .......... 2-20Bulb Replacement ................ 5-35

Fog Lamp ........................ 3-14Halogen Bulbs .................. 5-34Headlamp Aiming .............. 5-33Headlamps ...................... 5-33High Intensity Discharge

(HID) Lighting ............... 5-34License Plate Lamps ......... 5-35Taillamps, Turn Signal,

Stoplamps andSidemarker Lamps ......... 5-34

Buying New Tires ................. 5-51

CCalibration .......................... 3-48California

Perchlorate MaterialsRequirements ................. 5-4

California Fuel ....................... 5-5California Proposition 65

Warning ............................ 5-3Camera, Rear Vision ............ 2-37Canadian Owners ..................... iiCapacities and

Specifications ................... 5-94Carbon Monoxide ................. 2-11

Engine Exhaust ................ 2-30Liftgate ............................ 2-10Winter Driving .................. 4-13

Care ofSafety Belts ..................... 5-82

CargoTie Downs ....................... 2-52

Cargo Management System .... 2-52CD, MP3 .................... 3-87, 3-91Center Console Storage ........ 2-49Chains, Tire ........................ 5-57Charging System Light .......... 3-33

CheckEngine Lamp ................... 3-37

Checking Things Underthe Hood ........................... 5-9

Chemical Paint Spotting ........ 5-86Child Restraints

Infants and YoungChildren ....................... 1-28

Lower Anchors and Tethersfor Children .................. 1-34

Older Children .................. 1-25Securing a Child Restraint in

a Rear Seat Position ....... 1-40Securing a Child Restraint

in the Right Front SeatPosition ....................... 1-42

Systems .......................... 1-31Where to Put the

Restraint ...................... 1-32Circuit Breakers ................... 5-88Cleaning

Aluminum or Chrome-PlatedWheels ........................ 5-85

Exterior Lamps/Lenses ...... 5-83Fabric/Carpet ................... 5-81Finish Care ...................... 5-84

i-2 INDEX

Cleaning (cont.)Instrument Panel, Vinyl,

and Other PlasticSurfaces ...................... 5-82

Interior ............................ 5-80Leather ........................... 5-82Tires ............................... 5-85Underbody Maintenance .... 5-86Washing Your Vehicle ........ 5-83Weatherstrips ................... 5-83Windshield, Backglass,

and Wiper Blades .......... 5-84Climate Control System

Outlet Adjustment ............. 3-25Rear Air Conditioning

and Heating System ...... 3-26Rear Air Conditioning

and Heating System,Electronic ..................... 3-27

Climate Control SystemsDual Automatic ................. 3-20

Clock ................................. 3-20Clock, Setting ...................... 3-69Collision Damage Repair ......... 7-9Compact Spare Tire ............. 5-79Compass ............................ 3-48

Compressor Kit, TireSealant ........................... 5-59

Content Theft-Deterrent ......... 2-16Control of a Vehicle ............... 4-3Coolant

Engine ............................ 5-18Engine Temperature Gage ... 3-36Engine Temperature

Warning Light ............... 3-36Cooled Seats ........................ 1-4Cooling System ................... 5-17Courtesy Transportation .......... 7-8Cruise Control ..................... 3-10Cruise Control Light .............. 3-41Cupholders ......................... 2-49Customer Assistance .............. 7-4

Offices .............................. 7-4Text Telephone (TTY)

Users ............................ 7-4Customer Information

Service PublicationsOrdering Information ...... 7-13

Customer SatisfactionProcedure ......................... 7-1

DDamage Repair, Collision ........ 7-9Data Recorders

Event .............................. 7-15Daytime Running Lamps/

Automatic HeadlampSystem ........................... 3-13

Defensive Driving ................... 4-2Delayed Entry Lighting .......... 3-15Delayed Exit Lighting ............ 3-16Delayed Headlamps ............. 3-13Delayed Locking .................... 2-8DIC Compass ...................... 3-48Disc, MP3 ................... 3-87, 3-91Doing Your Own

Service Work ..................... 5-4Dome Lamp Override ........... 3-15Dome Lamps ....................... 3-14Door

Delayed Locking ................. 2-8Locks ............................... 2-8Power Door Locks .............. 2-8Programmable Automatic

Door Locks .................... 2-9Rear Door Security Locks .... 2-9

INDEX i-3

Drive SystemsAll-Wheel Drive ................ 5-33

Driver InformationCenter (DIC) .................... 3-42DIC Operation and

Displays ....................... 3-43DIC Vehicle

Customization ............... 3-59DIC Warnings and

Messages .................... 3-50Driving

At Night .......................... 4-10Before a Long Trip ............ 4-12Defensive .......................... 4-2Drunk ............................... 4-2Highway Hypnosis ............ 4-12Hill and Mountain Roads .... 4-12In Rain and on

Wet Roads ................... 4-11Loss of Control .................. 4-9Off-Road Recovery ............. 4-9Rocking Your Vehicle

to Get it Out ................. 4-15Winter ............................. 4-13

Driving for Better FuelEconomy ........................... 4-1

Dual Automatic ClimateControl System ................. 3-20

DVDRear Seat Entertainment

System ...................... 3-108

EEDR .................................. 7-14Electrical Equipment

Add-On Equipment ............ 5-88Electrical System

Fuses and CircuitBreakers ...................... 5-88

Instrument PanelFuse Block ................... 5-89

Power Windows andOther Power Options ..... 5-88

Underhood Fuse Block ...... 5-91Windshield Wiper Fuses .... 5-88

Electronic ImmobilizerPASS-Key® III+ ................ 2-18

Electronic ImmobilizerOperationPASS-Key® III+ ................ 2-18

EngineAir Cleaner/Filter ............... 5-15Check and Service Engine

Soon Lamp .................. 3-37Compartment Overview ...... 5-10Coolant ........................... 5-18Coolant Heater ................. 2-23Coolant

Temperature Gage ......... 3-36Coolant Temperature

Warning Light ............... 3-36Cooling System ................ 5-17Drive Belt Routing ............. 6-13Exhaust ........................... 2-30Oil .................................. 5-12Oil Life System ................. 5-14Overheated Protection

Operating Mode ............ 5-24Overheating ..................... 5-22Starting ........................... 2-22

Entry Lighting ...................... 3-15Reporting Safety Defects

to the United StatesGovernment ..................... 7-12

Event Data Recorders .......... 7-15Extender, Safety Belt ............ 1-25Exterior Lamps .................... 3-12

i-4 INDEX

FFilter

Engine Air Cleaner ............ 5-15Finish Damage .................... 5-86Flashers, Hazard Warning ....... 3-5Flash-to-Pass ........................ 3-8Flat Tire .............................. 5-57Flat Tire, Changing ............... 5-67Flat Tire, Storing .................. 5-76Floor Mats .......................... 2-51Fluid

Automatic Transmission ..... 5-16Power Steering ................. 5-24Windshield Washer ........... 5-25

Fog LampFog ................................ 3-14

Fog Lamp Light ................... 3-41Fuel ..................................... 5-5

Additives ........................... 5-5California Fuel ................... 5-5Economy Driving ................ 4-1Filling a Portable Fuel

Container ....................... 5-8Filling the Tank .................. 5-7Fuels in Foreign Countries .... 5-6Gage .............................. 3-42Gasoline Octane ................ 5-5Gasoline Specifications ........ 5-5

FusesFuses and Circuit

Breakers ...................... 5-88Instrument Panel

Fuse Block ................... 5-89Underhood Fuse Block ...... 5-91Windshield Wiper .............. 5-88

GGage

Speedometer ................... 3-30Tachometer ...................... 3-30Voltmeter Gage ................ 3-33

GagesEngine Coolant

Temperature ................. 3-36Fuel ................................ 3-42

Garage Door Opener ............ 2-44Gasoline

Octane ............................. 5-5Specifications ..................... 5-5

Glove Box ........................... 2-49GM Mobility Reimbursement

Program ............................ 7-5

HHalogen Bulbs ..................... 5-34Hazard Warning Flashers ........ 3-5Head Restraints ..................... 1-2Headlamp

Aiming ............................ 5-33Headlamps

Adaptive Forward LightingSystem ........................ 3-14

Bulb Replacement ............. 5-33Daytime Running Lamps/

Automatic HeadlampSystem ........................ 3-13

Delayed .......................... 3-13Exterior Lamps ................. 3-12Flash-to-Pass ..................... 3-8High Intensity Discharge

(HID) Lighting ............... 5-34High/Low Beam Changer ..... 3-7

Heated Seats ........................ 1-4Heater

Engine Coolant ................. 2-23High Voltage Devices

and Wiring ....................... 5-87Highbeam On Light .............. 3-41Highway Hypnosis ................ 4-12Hill and Mountain Roads ....... 4-12

INDEX i-5

HoodChecking Things Under ....... 5-9Release ............................ 5-9

Horn .................................... 3-5How to Wear Safety

Belts Properly .................. 1-16

IIgnition Positions .................. 2-21Infants and Young Children,

Restraints ........................ 1-28Inflation - Tire Pressure ......... 5-43Instrument Panel

Brightness ....................... 3-14Cluster ............................ 3-29Overview ........................... 3-4Storage Area .................... 2-49

Introduction ........................... 6-1

JJump Starting ...................... 5-29

KKeyless Entry, Remote

Operation .......................... 2-4Keyless Entry System ............ 2-3Keys .................................... 2-2

LLabeling, Tire Sidewall .......... 5-38Lamp

Malfunction Indicator ......... 3-37Lamps

Dome ............................. 3-14Dome Lamp Override ........ 3-15License Plate ................... 5-35Reading .......................... 3-16

Lap-Shoulder Belt ................ 1-20LATCH System for

Child Restraints ................ 1-34Liftgate

Carbon Monoxide ............. 2-10Liftgate, Power .................... 2-11Lighting

Delayed Entry .................. 3-15Delayed Exit .................... 3-16Entry .............................. 3-15Parade Dimming ............... 3-16

LightsAirbag Readiness ............. 3-31Antilock Brake System

(ABS) Warning .............. 3-35Brake System Warning ...... 3-34Charging System .............. 3-33Cruise Control .................. 3-41Engine Coolant

Temperature Warning ..... 3-36Exterior Lamps ................. 3-12Flash-to-Pass ..................... 3-8Fog Lamp ........................ 3-41Highbeam On ................... 3-41High/Low Beam Changer ..... 3-7Oil Pressure ..................... 3-40Passenger Airbag

Status Indicator ............. 3-32Safety Belt Reminders ....... 3-30Security ........................... 3-41StabiliTrak® Indicator ......... 3-35Tire Pressure ................... 3-37Tow/Haul Mode ................ 3-41

Loading Your Vehicle ............ 4-16Locks

Delayed Locking ................. 2-8Door ................................. 2-8Lockout Protection .............. 2-9

i-6 INDEX

Locks (cont.)Power Door ....................... 2-8Programmable Automatic

Door Locks .................... 2-9Rear Door Security Locks .... 2-9

Loss of Control ..................... 4-9Lower Anchors and Tethers

for Children ...................... 1-34Luggage Carrier ................... 2-51Lumbar

Manual Controls ................. 1-3Power Controls .................. 1-4

MMaintenance

Footnotes .......................... 6-7Maintenance Schedule

Additional RequiredServices ........................ 6-5

At Each Fuel Fill ................ 6-8At Least Once a Month ....... 6-9At Least Once a Year ......... 6-9Maintenance Record ......... 6-13Maintenance Replacement

Parts ........................... 6-12Maintenance Requirements ... 6-1

Maintenance Schedule (cont.)Owner Checks and

Services ........................ 6-8Recommended Fluids

and Lubricants .............. 6-11Scheduled Maintenance ....... 6-3Using ............................... 6-2Your Vehicle and the

Environment ................... 6-1Malfunction Indicator Lamp .... 3-37Manual Lumbar Controls ......... 1-3Memory Seat and Mirrors ....... 1-5Message

DIC Warnings andMessages .................... 3-50

MirrorsAutomatic Dimming

Rearview ...................... 2-31Outside Convex Mirror ....... 2-34Outside Heated Mirrors ...... 2-34Outside Power Foldaway

Mirrors ......................... 2-32Outside Power Mirrors ....... 2-32Park Tilt .......................... 2-33

MP3 ........................... 3-87, 3-91

NNavigation System, Privacy ... 7-16Navigation/Radio System,

see Navigation Manual ...... 3-98New Vehicle Break-In ........... 2-20

OOdometer ........................... 3-30Off-Road

Recovery .......................... 4-9Oil

Engine ............................ 5-12Engine Oil Life System ...... 5-14Pressure Light .................. 3-40

Older Children, Restraints ...... 1-25Online Owner Center .............. 7-3OnStar, Privacy .................... 7-15OnStar® System, see

OnStar® Manual ............... 2-41Operation, Universal Home

Remote System ................ 2-45Outlet Adjustment ................. 3-25Outlets

Accessory Power .............. 3-18Outside

Convex Mirror .................. 2-34Heated Mirrors ................. 2-34

INDEX i-7

Outside (cont.)Power Foldaway Mirrors .... 2-32Power Mirrors .................. 2-32

Overheated Engine ProtectionOperating Mode ................ 5-24

Owner Checks and Services ..... 6-8Owners, Canadian .................... ii

PPaint, Damage ..................... 5-86Parade Dimming .................. 3-16Park

Shifting Into ..................... 2-28Shifting Out of .................. 2-29

Park Aid ............................. 2-34Park Tilt Mirrors ................... 2-33Parking

Assist ............................. 2-34Over Things That Burn ...... 2-29

Parking Brake ...................... 2-27Passenger Airbag Status

Indicator .......................... 3-32Passenger Sensing System .... 1-53Passing ................................ 4-9PASS-Key® III+ Electronic

Immobilizer ...................... 2-18PASS-Key® III+ Electronic

Immobilizer Operation ........ 2-18

Perchlorate MaterialsRequirements, California ...... 5-4

PhoneBluetooth® ....................... 3-98

PowerDoor Locks ........................ 2-8Electrical System .............. 5-88Liftgate ............................ 2-11Lumbar Controls ................. 1-4Outlet 115 Volt Alternating

Current ........................ 3-19Retained Accessory

(RAP) .......................... 2-22Seat ................................. 1-3Steering Fluid ................... 5-24Tilt Wheel and Telescopic

Steering Column ............. 3-6Windows ......................... 2-14

Pregnancy, UsingSafety Belts ..................... 1-25

Privacy ............................... 7-14Navigation System ............ 7-16OnStar ............................ 7-15Radio Frequency

Identification (RFID) ....... 7-16Programmable Automatic

Door Locks ........................ 2-9Proposition 65 Warning,

California .......................... 5-3

RRadio Frequency

Identification (RFID),Privacy ............................ 7-16

Radio(s) ............................. 3-70Radios

Navigation/Radio System,see Navigation Manual .... 3-98

Reception ...................... 3-120Setting the Clock .............. 3-69Theft-Deterrent ............... 3-119

Reading Lamps ................... 3-16Rear Air Conditioning and

Heating System ................ 3-26Rear Air Conditioning

and Heating Systemand Electronic ClimateControls .......................... 3-27

Rear Door Security Locks ....... 2-9Rear Seat Armrest ............... 2-52Rear Seat Audio (RSA)

System .......................... 3-117Rear Seat Entertainment

System .......................... 3-108Rear Seat Operation .............. 1-8Rear Vision Camera (RVC) .... 2-37Rear Window Washer/Wiper .... 3-9Rearview Mirror, Automatic

Dimming .......................... 2-31

i-8 INDEX

Reclining Seatbacks ............... 1-6Recommended Fluids

and Lubricants ................. 6-11Recreational Vehicle Towing .... 4-21Reimbursement Program,

GM Mobility ....................... 7-5Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)

System ............................. 2-3Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)

System, Operation .............. 2-4Remote Vehicle Start ............. 2-5Removing the Flat Tire and

Installing the Spare Tire ..... 5-70Removing the Spare

Tire and Tools .................. 5-68Replacement Bulbs .............. 5-35Replacement Parts,

Maintenance .................... 6-12Reporting Safety Defects

Canadian Government ....... 7-13General Motors ................ 7-13

Reporting Safety Defectsto the CanadianGovernment ..................... 7-13

Restraint System CheckChecking the Restraint

Systems ....................... 1-59Replacing Restraint System

Parts After a Crash ........ 1-60

Retained AccessoryPower (RAP) .................... 2-22

Roadside AssistanceProgram ............................ 7-6

Rocking Your Vehicle toGet it Out ........................ 4-15

RoofSunroof ........................... 2-54

Running the VehicleWhile Parked ................... 2-30

SSafety Belt Reminders .......... 3-30Safety Belts

Care of ........................... 5-82Extender ......................... 1-25How to Wear Safety

Belts Properly ............... 1-16Lap-Shoulder Belt ............. 1-20Safety Belts Are for

Everyone ..................... 1-12Use During Pregnancy ...... 1-25

Safety DefectsReporting to General

Motors ......................... 7-13Reporting to the United

States Government ........ 7-12Safety Warnings and Symbols .... iii

Scheduled Maintenance .......... 6-3Additional Required

Services ........................ 6-5Scheduling Appointments ........ 7-8Sealant Kit, Tire ................... 5-59Seats

Head Restraints ................. 1-2Heated and Cooled Seats .... 1-4Heated Seats ..................... 1-4Manual Lumbar .................. 1-3Memory, Mirrors ................. 1-5Power Lumbar ................... 1-4Power Seats ...................... 1-3Rear Seat Operation ........... 1-8Reclining Seatbacks ............ 1-6Third Row Seat ................ 1-10

Second Row CenterConsole .......................... 2-50

Secondary Latch System ....... 5-74Securing a Child Restraint

Rear Seat Position ............ 1-40Right Front Seat Position .... 1-42

Security Light ...................... 3-41Service ................................ 5-3

Accessories andModifications .................. 5-3

Adding Equipment to theOutside of the Vehicle ..... 5-4

Doing Your Own Work ........ 5-4

INDEX i-9

Service (cont.)Engine Soon Lamp ........... 3-37Publications Ordering

Information ................... 7-13Scheduling Appointments ..... 7-8

Service Parts IdentificationLabel .............................. 5-87

Servicing YourAirbag-Equipped Vehicle .... 1-57

Setting the Clock ................. 3-69Sheet Metal Damage ............ 5-86Shifting

Out of Park ..................... 2-29Shifting Into Park ................. 2-28Signals, Turn and

Lane-Change ..................... 3-7Spare Tire

Compact ......................... 5-79Installing .......................... 5-70Removing ........................ 5-68Storing ............................ 5-76

Specifications andCapacities ....................... 5-94

Speedometer ....................... 3-30StabiliTrak® Indicator Light ..... 3-35StabiliTrak® System ............... 4-5Start Vehicle, Remote ............. 2-5

Starting the Engine .............. 2-22Steering ............................... 4-8Steering Wheel Controls,

Audio ............................ 3-119Steering Wheel, Power Tilt

Wheel and TelescopicSteering Column ................ 3-6

Steering Wheel, Tilt andTelescopic ......................... 3-6

Storage AreasCargo Management

System ........................ 2-52Center Console ................ 2-49Cupholders ...................... 2-49Glove Box ....................... 2-49Instrument Panel .............. 2-49Luggage Carrier ............... 2-51Rear Seat Armrest ............ 2-52Second Row Center

Console ....................... 2-50Storing the Tire Sealant

and Compressor Kit .......... 5-66Stuck in Sand, Mud,

Ice, or Snow .................... 4-15Sun Visors .......................... 2-16Sunroof .............................. 2-54

TTachometer ......................... 3-30Taillamps

Turn Signal, Stoplamps andSidemarker Lamps ......... 5-34

Telescopic Steering Column,Power Tilt Wheel ................ 3-6

Telescopic Wheel ................... 3-6Text Telephone (TTY) Users .... 7-4Theft-Deterrent Feature ....... 3-119Theft-Deterrent Systems ........ 2-16

Content Theft-Deterrent ..... 2-16PASS-Key® III+ Electronic

Immobilizer ................... 2-18PASS-Key® III+ Electronic

Immobilizer Operation .... 2-18Third-Row Seats .................. 1-10Tilt Wheel ............................. 3-6Time, Setting ....................... 3-69Tire

Pressure Light .................. 3-37Tire Sealant and

Compressor Kit ................ 5-66Tires .................................. 5-37

Aluminum or Chrome-PlatedWheels, Cleaning ........... 5-85

Buying New Tires ............. 5-51Chains ............................ 5-57

i-10 INDEX

Tires (cont.)Changing a Flat Tire ......... 5-67Cleaning .......................... 5-85Compact Spare ................ 5-79Different Size ................... 5-53If a Tire Goes Flat ............ 5-57Inflation - Tire Pressure ..... 5-43Inspection and Rotation ..... 5-49Installing the Spare Tire ..... 5-70Pressure Monitor

Operation ..................... 5-46Pressure Monitor System .... 5-44Removing the Flat Tire ...... 5-70Removing the Spare

Tire and Tools ............... 5-68Sealant and

Compressor Kit ............. 5-59Secondary Latch System .... 5-74Sidewall Labeling .............. 5-38Storing a Flat or Spare

Tire and Tools ............... 5-76Terminology and

Definitions .................... 5-40Uniform Tire Quality

Grading ....................... 5-54

Tires (cont.)Wheel Alignment and

Tire Balance ................. 5-55Wheel Replacement .......... 5-55When It Is Time for

New Tires .................... 5-51Tow/Haul Mode .................... 2-26Tow/Haul Mode Light ............ 3-41Towing

Recreational Vehicle .......... 4-21Towing a Trailer ................ 4-24Your Vehicle ..................... 4-20

TractionStabiliTrak® System ............ 4-5

TransmissionFluid, Automatic ................ 5-16

Transmission Operation,Automatic ........................ 2-24

Transportation, Courtesy ......... 7-8Turn and Lane-Change

Signals ............................. 3-7Turn Signal/Multifunction

Lever ................................ 3-6

UUltrasonic Rear Parking

Assist (URPA) .................. 2-34Uniform Tire Quality Grading ... 5-54Universal Home Remote

System ........................... 2-44Operation ........................ 2-45

VVehicle

Control ............................. 4-3Loading ........................... 4-16Running While Parked ....... 2-30Symbols .............................. iii

Vehicle Customization, DIC .... 3-59Vehicle Data Recording

and Privacy ..................... 7-14Vehicle Data Recording,

Radio Frequency (RFID) .... 7-16Vehicle Identification

Number (VIN) ................... 5-87Service Parts Identification

Label ........................... 5-87Vehicle, Remote Start ............. 2-5Ventilation Adjustment ........... 3-25Visors ................................. 2-16Voltage Devices, and Wiring .... 5-87Voltmeter Gage .................... 3-33

INDEX i-11

WWarning Lights, Gages,

and Indicators .................. 3-28Warnings

DIC Warnings andMessages .................... 3-50

Hazard Warning Flashers .... 3-5Safety and Symbols .............. iii

WheelsAlignment and Tire

Balance ....................... 5-55Different Size ................... 5-53Replacement .................... 5-55

When It Is Time forNew Tires ........................ 5-51

Where to Put the ChildRestraint ......................... 1-32

Windows ............................. 2-14Power ............................. 2-14

WindshieldBackglass, and Wiper

Blades, Cleaning ........... 5-84Replacement .................... 5-36

Windshield (cont.)Washer ............................. 3-8Washer Fluid .................... 5-25Wiper Blade

Replacement ................ 5-36Wiper Fuses .................... 5-88Wipers .............................. 3-8

Winter Driving ...................... 4-13Wipers

Rear Washer ..................... 3-9Wiring, High Voltage

Devices ........................... 5-87

XXM Radio Messages ............ 3-96

YYour Vehicle and the

Environment ...................... 6-1

i-12 INDEX

2009 buick enclave owner manual m - owner center … and restraint system head restraints head...

Documents